Sei sulla pagina 1di 239

Main Catalogue Contactors

Motor Protection
Accessories

1SBC 0004 99 R1001

Low Voltage Products


Main Catalogue

Contactors

Motor Protection

Accessories
Low Voltage Products

1 Product Range

2 A, AE, BC, EH, EK Contactors

3 N and KC Contactor Relays

Accessories
4 for A, AE, BC, EH, EK Contactors
and N, KC Contactor Relays

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


5 E Electronic O/L Relays

B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 Mini Contactors - Reversing Contactors


6 K(C) 6 Mini Contactor Relays
T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay
★ ★ ★ IEC
★ ★
General Technical Data
7 Standards, Approvals… ★


★ ★


★ VDE

★ ★ UTE

Terminal Marking and Positioning


8 Star-Delta Starter Diagrams

9 Dimensions

Reference Index
10 List of Addresses
As part of its on-going product improvement, ABB reserves the right to modify the characteristics of the products described in this catalogue.
The information given is not contractual. For further details please contact the ABB company marketing these products in your country.

Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Conformity with Standards,
Liability, Quality and
Guarantee

Conformity with Standards


The standards and specifications cited for different types of devices, e.g. IEC, BS, VDE, NFC, EN
Publications, should be considered as statements of conformity in the sense of article 10 of the
E.E.C. Low Voltage Directive of 19 February 1973.

There is no label on ABB L.V. control apparatus identifying a national certification organization.
The ABB logo figuring on devices, labels and documents certifies the conformity of devices with
respect to the applicable standards.

CE marking is proof of conformity with the European Directives concerning the product. It must
not be confused with a mark of quality.

CE marking is part of an exclusively administrative procedure designed to guarantee the free


movement of the product inside the European Community.

However, for some countries and some ship certification and classification organizations,
certification is compulsory. In this case, the mark (or logo) of the given organization figures on the
devices if so required (see pages 7/4 and 7/5).

Files pertaining to certifications and approvals obtained are available on request.

Liability
The devices in this catalogue do not endanger safety when they are installed, mounted and used
according to their application and in compliance with the installation rules and standards which
apply to them.

Quality
ABB has set up a quality assurance organisation in compliance with the requirements of
ISO 9001 standard.
ABB factories are ISO 9001 approved.

ABB Low Voltage Products meet with a high quality standard. It is developed, manufactured and
tested under the sole responsibility of ABB.

In compliance with the regulations set out by the ISO 9000 series standard, ABB sets up and
manages the procedures and files relating to product quality and actions having an effect on
quality.

Guarantee
The information contained in this catalogue reflects the current state of our knowledge and aims
to present our products and their possible applications. Thus, the information does not guarantee
certain specific characteristics of products or their aptitude for a specific utilization. All filed legal
patents or industrial property rights must be respected.

Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Motor Nominal Powers and
Currents

The currents given below concern standard, 1 500 r.p.m. 50 Hz, three-phase cage motors.
These values are for your information and may vary according to the motor manufacturer and depending on the number of poles.

Motor power motor nominal current at:


220-230 V 240 V 380 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 600 V 660-690 V
380-400 V
kW PS = hp A A A A A A A A
0.06 1/12 0.38 0.35 0.22 0.20 0.19 0.16 0.12 –
0.09 1/8 0.55 0.50 0.33 0.30 0.28 0.24 0.21 –
0.12 1/6 0.76 0.68 0.42 0.40 0.37 0.33 0.27 –
0.18 1/4 1.1 1 0.64 0.60 0.55 0.46 0.40 –
0.25 1/3 1.4 1.38 0.88 0.85 0.76 0.59 0.56 –
0.37 1/2 2.1 1.93 1.22 1.15 1.06 0.85 0.77 0.7
0.55 3/4 2.7 2.3 1.5 1.40 1.25 1.20 1.02 0.9
0.75 1 3.3 3.1 2 2 1.67 1.48 1.22 1.1
1.1 1.5 4.9 4.1 2.6 2.5 2.26 2.1 1.66 1.5
1.5 2 6.2 5.6 3.5 3.5 3.03 2.6 2.22 2
2.2 3 8.7 7.9 5 5 4.31 3.8 3.16 2.9
2.5 3.4 9.8 8.9 5.7 5.5 4.9 4.3 3.59 3.3
3 4 11.6 10.6 6.6 6.5 5.8 5.1 4.25 3.5
3.7 5 14.2 13 8.2 7.5 7.1 6.2 5.2 4.4
4 5.5 15.3 14 8.5 8.4 7.6 6.5 5.6 4.9
5 6.8 18.9 17.2 10.5 10 9.4 8.1 6.9 6
5.5 7.5 20.6 18.9 11.5 11 10.3 8.9 7.5 6.7
6.5 8.8 23.7 21.8 13.8 12.5 12 10.4 8.7 8.1
7.5 10 27.4 24.8 15.5 14 13.5 11.9 9.9 9
8 11 28.8 26.4 16.7 15.4 14.4 12.7 10.6 9.7
9 12.5 32 29.3 18.3 17 15.8 13.9 11.6 10.6
11 15 39.2 35.3 22 21 19.3 16.7 14.1 13
12.5 17 43.8 40.2 25 23 21.9 19 16.1 15
15 20 52.6 48.2 30 28 26.3 22.5 19.3 17.5
18.5 25 64.9 58.7 37 35 32 28.5 23.5 21
20 27 69.3 63.4 40 37 34.6 30.6 25.4 23
22 30 75.2 68 44 40 37.1 33 27.2 25
25 34 84.4 77.2 50 47 42.1 38 30.9 28
30 40 101 92.7 60 55 50.1 44 37.1 33
37 50 124 114 72 66 61.9 54 45.4 42
40 54 134 123 79 72 67 60 49.1 44
45 60 150 136 85 80 73.9 64.5 54.2 49
51 70 168 154 97 90 83.8 73.7 61.4 56
55 75 181 166 105 96 90.3 79 66.2 60
59 80 194 178 112 105 96.9 85.3 71.1 66
75 100 245 226 140 135 123 106 90.3 82
80 110 260 241 147 138 131 112 96.3 86
90 125 292 268 170 165 146 128 107 98
100 136 325 297 188 182 162 143 119 107
110 150 358 327 205 200 178 156 131 118
129 175 420 384 242 230 209 184 153 135
132 180 425 393 245 242 214 186 157 140
140 190 449 416 260 250 227 200 167 145
147 200 472 432 273 260 236 207 173 152
160 220 502 471 295 280 256 220 188 170
180 245 578 530 333 320 289 254 212 190
184 250 590 541 340 325 295 259 217 200
200 270 626 589 370 340 321 278 235 215
220 300 700 647 408 385 353 310 260 235
250 340 803 736 460 425 401 353 295 268
257 350 826 756 475 450 412 363 302 280
295 400 948 868 546 500 473 416 348 320
315 430 990 927 580 535 505 445 370 337
355 480 1080 1010 636 580 549 483 405 366
400 545 1250 1130 710 650 611 538 450 410
450 610 1410 1270 800 740 688 608 508 460
475 645 1490 1340 850 780 730 645 540 485
500 680 1570 1420 890 830 770 680 565 510
560 760 1750 1580 1000 920 860 760 630 570
600 810 – – 1080 990 920 810 680 610
670 910 – – 1200 1100 1030 910 760 680

Low Voltage Products 0/0


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Coil Voltage Code for
Completing Order Codes

A.C. Coils

Types of contactors: Code Standard voltages Code


N, A 9 to A 110, GA 75
UA 26 to UA 110 and UA16-R to UA75-R Types of contactors V (50 Hz) V (60 Hz) ■ ■
V (50 HZ) V (60 HZ) R■ ■ .. – 24 A A
EH 145 - EH 300
24 24 8 1 EK 110 - EK 210 24 – A B
26 28 1 6 – 48 A C
28 32 1 7 48 – A D
42 42 8 2 – 110 A E
42 48 2 0 110 120 A F
48 48 8 3 127 – A G
60 60 7 3 – 208 A Z
100 100 - 110 7 4 190 220 A H
– 240 A K
105 110 - 127 2 6
EH 145 - EH 800 220 - 230 –* A L
110 110 - 120 8 4
EK 110 - EK 550 230 - 240 – A M
110 - 115 115 - 127 8 9 – 380 A N
120 140 2 9 380 - 400 440 A P
125 - 127 150 3 0 400 - 415 – A R
175 208 3 4 – 480 A S
190 220 3 6 440 – A T
200 200 - 220 7 5 500 – A U
210 240 4 0 – 600 A V
220 - 230 230 - 240 8 0 * Read 240V 60Hz for EH 370 ... EH 800 and EK 370 ... EK 550.

230 - 240 240 - 260 8 8


230 - 240 277 4 2 Dual frequency coils
2 auxiliary contact blocks maximum per contactor, ambient
380 - 400 400 - 415 8 5 temperature ≤ 55°C and mounting positions
400 - 415 415 - 440 8 6 2 and 6 excluded.
400 440 5 0 Code
400 - 415 480 5 1 Types of contactors V (50 Hz) V (60 Hz) ■ ■
415 - 440 440 - 460 8 7 (1) 110 110 - 120 E F
440 500 5 3 EH 145 110 - 115 115 - 127 E G
500 600 5 5 EH 370 - EH 800 220 220 - 240 E L
550 – 5 6 EK 370 - EK 550 220 - 230 230 - 255 E M
380 380 - 415 E P
660 - 690 – 5 8
380 - 400 400 - 440 E R
(1) Unsuitable for 3 or 4-pole A 45 - A 75 contactors.

Multi-frequency coils Code


Types of contactors V (40 - 400 Hz) ■ ■
Dual voltage coils for Code 110 - 120 E F
N, A 9, A 12 and A 16 contactors 115 - 127 E G
EH 175 - EH 300 220 - 230 E L
V (50 HZ) V (60 HZ) R■ ■ ..
EK 110 - EK 210 230 - 240 E M
230/400 – 6 2 380 - 400 E P
– 230/400 6 3 400 - 415 E R

D.C. Coils

Types of contactors:
KC, BC - and AE -, GAE 75
KC, BC - AE -, GAE 75
V.d.c Code Code Code
R■..■ R■ ■ .. Types of contactors V d.c. ■ ■
12 0..7 8 0 12 (2) D A
24 0..1 8 1 24 D B
42 0..2 8 2 36 D C
48 1..6 8 3 48 D D
EH 145 - EH 800
50 1..7 2 1 60 D T
60 0..3 8 4 EK 110 - EK 550 75 D G
75 2..2 8 5 110 D E
110 0..4 8 6 125 D U
125 2..7 8 7 220 D F
220 0..5 8 8 (2) Unsuitable for EH 370 - EH 800, EK 370 and EK 550 contactors.
240 3..3 8 9
250 3..4 3 8

0/1 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
General Data

Ordering Details
When placing an order give either the Order Code or Type.
In most cases these are completed with other references, e.g. a contactor's coil voltage. This is why the order codes and types figuring in the "Ordering
Details" tables have boxes ■ to be completed.

Packaging
● Individual standard packaging
Contactors, contactor relays, thermal overload relays and other basic products are supplied in individual packaging. Some small contactors (e.g.
B6 and B7 - Section 6) or accessories are in individual batches of "n" pieces as indicated in the "Packaging" column of the "Ordering Details"
table.
The weight and order code always correspond to a single part.
Other products are supplied as a "set" and are thus marked in the "Packaging" column of the "Ordering Details" table. In this case, the weight and
order code correspond to a set.
● Collective packaging
To limit the amount of wasted packaging, simplify handling and checking of deliveries, we offer the collective packaging solution.
The weight and order code correspond to a single part.

Products chosen for this type of packaging are detailed below.

Type Order code Product Packing Weight Type Order code Product Packing Weight
features features
Clearly marked to be completed with
coil voltage: ■ coil voltage: ■■
see below See below See page : pieces kg See page : pieces kg

4-pole - a.c. operated, 1 stack contactor relays Auxiliary contact blocks


N 22 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 T ■ ■ 22 3/6 10 0.34 CA 5-10 1SBN 01 0010 W1010 4/4 60 0.014
N 31 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 T ■ ■ 31 3/6 10 0.34 CA 5-01 1SBN 01 0010 W1001 4/4 60 0.014
N 40 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 T ■ ■ 40 3/6 10 0.34 CAL 5-11 1SBN 01 0020 W1011 4/4 100 0.050

8-pole - a.c. operated, 2 stack contactor relays Interface block


N 44 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 T ■ ■ 44 3/6 10 0.40 RA 5 1SBN 06 0000 T1000 4/16 10 0.050
N 53 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 T ■ ■ 53 3/6 10 0.40 TE5S-24 1SBN 02 0010 T1001 4/6 10 0.080
N 62 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 T ■ ■ 62 3/6 10 0.40
TE5S-120 1SBN 02 0010 T1002 4/6 10 0.080
N 71 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 T ■ ■ 71 3/6 10 0.40
TE5S-240 1SBN 02 0010 T1003 4/6 10 0.080
N 80 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 T ■ ■ 80 3/6 10 0.40
TE5S-440 1SBN 02 0010 T1004 4/6 10 0.080
3-pole - a.c. operated contactors
A 9-30-10 ■ 1SBL 14 1001 T ■ ■ 10 2/12 10 0.34
A 9-30-01 ■ 1SBL 14 1001 T ■ ■ 01 2/12 10 0.34
A 9-30-22 ■ 1SBL 14 1001 T ■ ■ 22 2/12 10 0.40
A 9-30-32 ■ 1SBL 14 1001 T ■ ■ 32 2/12 10 0.40
A 12-30-10 ■ 1SBL 16 1001 T ■ ■ 10 2/12 10 0.34
A 12-30-01 ■ 1SBL 16 1001 T ■ ■ 01 2/12 10 0.34
A 12-30-22 ■ 1SBL 16 1001 T ■ ■ 22 2/12 10 0.40
A 12-30-32 ■ 1SBL 16 1001 T ■ ■ 32 2/12 10 0.40
Additional code for coil voltages
A 16-30-10 ■ 1SBL 18 1001 T ■ ■ 10 2/12 10 0.34
A 16-30-01 ■ 1SBL 18 1001 T ■ ■ 01 2/12 10 0.34 A.C. Voltages
A 16-30-22 ■ 1SBL 18 1001 T ■ ■ 22 2/12 10 0.40
A 16-30-32 ■ 1SBL 18 1001 T ■ ■ 32 2/12 10 0.40 V (50 Hz) V (60 Hz) code ■ ■ . .

A 26-30-10 ■ 1SBL 24 1001 T ■ ■ 10 2/12 10 0.60 24 24 8 1


A 26-30-01 ■ 1SBL 24 1001 T ■ ■ 01 2/12 10 0.60 42 42 8 2
48 48 8 3
4-pole - a.c. operated contactors 110 110 - 120 8 4
A 9-40-00 ■ 1SBL 14 1201 T ■ ■ 00 2/16 10 0.34 110 - 115 115 - 127 8 9
A 16-40-00 ■ 1SBL 18 1201 T ■ ■ 00 2/16 10 0.34 220 - 230 230 - 240 8 0
A 26-40-00 ■ 1SBL 24 1201 T ■ ■ 00 2/16 10 0.61 230 - 240 240 - 260 8 8
380 - 400 400 - 415 8 5
Replacement coils for N, A 9, A 12 and A 16 contactors 400 - 415 415 - 440 8 6
ZA 16 1SBN 15 1410 T ■ ■ 06 4/29 10 0.08 415 - 440 440 - 460 8 7

Low Voltage Products 0/2


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary Index

Product Range

Contents

Product Range Presentation


Block Contactors and O/L Relays ................................................................................... 1/2, 1/3
Mini Contactors, Compact Reversing Contactors and O/L Relays ................................. 1/4, 1/5
Contactor Relays and Mini Contactor Relays ........................................................................ 1/6

Low Voltage Products 1/1


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary
Section Index

Product Range Presentation


Block Contactors

s
i c a tion Section 2 Block Contactors Pages
l
App
● 3-pole
A, EH Contactors, a.c. operated 2/12, 2/13

BC, AE, EH Contactors, d.c. operated 2/14, 2/15


TBC, TAE Contactors d.c. operated, large coil voltage range 2/24
AF Contactors, a.c./d.c. operated with controlled supply 2/27
EHL Magnetically Latched Contactors, a.c. or d.c. operated 2/29
t
. c i rcui
a.c tching ● 4-pole
swi A, EK Contactors, a.c. operated 2/16

BC, AE, EK Contactors, d.c. operated 2/17


TBC, TAE Contactors, d.c. operated, large coil voltage range 2/24
AF Contactors, a.c./d.c. operated, with controlled supply 2/27
EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors, a.c. or d.c. operated 2/29

● 3-pole
UA Contactors, a.c. operated 2/21

UA..-R Contactors, a.c. operated 2/22

p a citor
h a se ca ing
3- switch
p
A, EH Contactors, a.c. operated 2/12, 2/13

● 1-pole
GA Contactor, a.c. operated 2/28

GAE Contactor, d.c. operated 2/28

● 3-pole
t A, EH Contactors, a.c. operated 2/46, 2/47

. c i rcui
c
d. tchin g BC, AE, EH Contactors, d.c. operated 2/46…2/48
swi
● 4-pole
A, EK Contactors, a.c. operated 2/46, 2/47

BC, AE, EK Contactors, d.c. operated 2/46…2/48

1/2 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Product Range Presentation


Block Contactors
Overload Relays

s
i c a tion Section 2 Block Contactors Pages
l
App
● 3-pole 1
A Contactors, a.c. operated 2/44, 2/45

AE Contactors, d.c. operated 2/44, 2/45

it
g c ircu
tin g
ligh witchin ● 4-pole
s A Contactors, a.c. operated 2/44, 2/45

AE Contactors, d.c. operated 2/44, 2/45

● 3-pole
ase
3-ph ormer
A, EH Contactors, a.c. operated 2/49

sf
tranitching AE, EH Contactors, d.c. operated 2/49

sw

● 3-pole
ase A, EH Contactors, a.c. operated 2/50, 2/51
3-phg motor
-rin g
slip witchin
s

Section 5 Overload Relays Pages

● 3-pole
E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay 5/19

or
Mot tion
ec
prot
T, TA Thermal O/L Relays 5/4…5/6

Low Voltage Products 1/3


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Product Range Presentation


Mini Contactors, Compact Reversing Contactors

ions Section 6
Mini Contactors,
c a t Compact Reversing Contactors
li Pages
App
● 3-pole
B 6, B 7 Mini Contactors, a.c. operated 6/2

BC 6, BC 7 Mini Contactors, d.c. operated 6/2


TBC 7 Mini Contactors, d.c. operated, large coil voltage range 6/8

● 4-pole
B 6, B 7 Mini Contactors, a.c. operated 6/2
t
. c i rcui
a.c tching
swi

● 3-pole
VB 6, VB 7 Compact Reversing Contactors, a.c. operated 6/3
VB 6A, VB 7A Compact Reversing Contactors, a.c. operated 6/4

VBC 6, VBC 7 Compact Reversing Contactors, d.c. operated 6/3


VBC 6A, VBC 7A Compact Reversing Contactors, d.c. operated 6/4

Section 6 Mini Contactors,


Compact Reversing Contactors Pages

● 3-pole
B 6, B 7 Mini Contactors, a.c. operated 6/11

BC 6, BC 7 Mini Contactors, d.c. operated 6/11

● 4-pole
B 6, B 7 Mini Contactors, a.c. operated 6/11

c i r cuit
d.c. tching
swi

● 3-pole
VB 6, VB 7 Compact Reversing Contactors, a.c. operated 6/11

VBC 6, VBC 7 Compact Reversing Contactors, d.c. operated 6/11

1/4 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Product Range Presentation


Mini Contactors, Compact Reversing Contactors
Overload Relay

ions Section 6
Mini Contactors,
c a t Compact Reversing Contactors
li Pages
App
1
● 3-pole
B 6, B 7 Mini Contactors, a.c. operated 6/12

BC 6, BC 7 Mini Contactors, d.c. operated 6/12

● 4-pole

cuit
B 6, B 7 Mini Contactors, a.c. operated 6/12
c i r
ting g
ligh witchin
s

● 3-pole
VB 6, VB 7 Compact Reversing Contactors, a.c. operated 6/12

VBC 6, VBC 7 Compact Reversing Contactors, d.c. operated 6/12

● 3-pole
BC 6, BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors, d.c. operated 6/5

t e r face
In

● 3-pole
B 6S, B 7S Mini Contactors for PLC's Output, d.c. operated 6/5

O u tput
's
PLC

Section 6 Overload Relay Pages

● 3-pole
or T 7 DU Thermal Overload Relay 6/17
Mot tion
ec
prot

Low Voltage Products 1/5


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Product Range Presentation


Contactors Relays
Mini Contactor Relays

s
i c a tion Section 3 Contactor Relays Pages
l
App
● 4-pole
N Contactor Relays, a.c. operated 3/6

KC Contactor Relays, d.c. operated 3/6

TKC Contactor Relays, d.c. operated, large coil voltage range 3/7

t
l c i rcui
tro g
Con witchin
s ● 8-pole
N Contactor Relays, a.c. operated 3/6

KC Contactor Relays, d.c. operated 3/6

TKC Contactor Relays, d.c. operated, large coil voltage range 3/7

Section 6 Mini Contactor Relays Pages

● 4-pole
t
l c i rcui K 6 Mini Contactor Relays, a.c. operated 6/6
tro g
Con witchin
KC 6 Mini Contactor Relays, d.c. operated 6/6
KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays, d.c. operated 6/6
s K 6S Mini Contactor Relay for PLC's Output, d.c. operated 6/6

1/6 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Main Summary Index

A, AE, BC, EH and EK


Contactors
Ratings 9 to 800 A

Contents
2
Selection Tables
A and EH 3-pole Contactors ................................................................................................. 2/2
A and EK 4-pole Contactors ............................................................................................... 2/4
Star-delta Starting ............................................................................................................. 2/31

Description and Mounting of Accessories


A and AE Contactors .......................................................................................................... 2/6
EH and EK Contactors ........................................................................................................ 2/8
BC Contactors ................................................................................................................... 2/10

Ordering Details
A 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated ................................................................................ 2/12
EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated ............................................................................. 2/13
BC 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated ............................................................................. 2/14
AE and EH 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated ................................................................ 2/15
A and EK 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated ................................................................... 2/16
BC, AE and EK 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated .......................................................... 2/17
A 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles - A.C. Operated .............................. 2/18
BC and AE 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles - D.C. Operated ............... 2/19
3-pole Contactors for 3-phase Capacitor Switching - A.C. Operated ................................ 2 / 20
– UA 3-pole contactors .................................................................................................... 2 / 21
– UA..-R 3-pole contactors ............................................................................................... 2 / 22
TBC and TAE Contactors - D.C. Operated with Large Coil Voltage Range ..................... 2/24
AF Contactors with Controlled Supply A.C./D.C. Operated .............................................. 2/26
GA 75 and GAE 75 Contactors for D.C. Circuit Switching ................................................ 2/28
EHL and EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors - A.C./D.C. Operated ............................. 2/29
EH Mechanically Interlocked or Mechanically Latched Contactors .................................. 2/30

Technical Data
A, EH and EK Contactors - A.C. Operated ....................................................................... 2/32
BC, AE and EH, EK Contactors - D.C. Operated .............................................................. 2/38
Lighting Circuit Switching .................................................................................................. 2/44
D.C. Circuit Switching ......................................................................................................... 2/46
LV/LV 3-phase Transformer Switching ............................................................................. 2/49
Control of 3-phase Slip-ring Motors .................................................................................... 2/50
Influence of the Length of Conductors Used in Contactor Control Circuit ........................ 2/52
Parallel Connection of Main Poles - Temporary or Intermittent Duty ................................ 2/54
Contactor Utilization Categories and Electrical Durability ................................................. 2/55

Additional Information
Accessories and Coils ............................................................................................... Section 4
General Technical Data, Approvals and Classifications ........................................... Section 7
Terminal Marking and Positioning ............................................................................. Section 8
Dimensions ............................................................................................................... Section 9

Low Voltage Products 2/1


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary
Section Index

A and EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated


TA and T Thermal O/L Relays
Selection Table

3-pole contactors Type A9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 75

Rated operational power AC-3 (1) θ ≤ 55 °C (2)


220-230-240 V kW 2.2 3 4 6.5 9 11 15 18.5 22
380-400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37
415 V kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 25 37 40
1500 r.p.m. - 50 Hz 440 V kW 4 5.5 9 15 18.5 22 25 37 40
or 1800 r.p.m. - 60 Hz 500 V kW 5.5 7.5 9 15 18.5 22 30 37 45
3-phase Motors 690 V kW 5.5 7.5 9 15 18.5 22 30 37 40
1000 V kW - - - - - - 30 33 37

Rated operational current Ie /AC- 3 (1) θ ≤ 55 °C (2)


220-230-240 V A 9 12 17 26 33 40 53 65 75
380-400 V A 9 12 17 26 32 37 50 65 75
415 V A 9 12 17 26 32 37 50 65 72
440 V A 9 12 16 26 32 37 45 65 70
3-phase Motors 500 V A 9 12 14 22 28 33 45 55 65
690 V A 7 9 10 17 21 25 35 43 46
1000 V A - - - - - - 23 25 28

Rated operational current Ie /AC-1 - Ue max. 690V


θ ≤ 40 °C (2) A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 115 125
θ ≤ 55 °C (2) A 22 25 27 40 55 60 85 95 105
θ ≤ 70 °C (2) A 18 20 23 32 39 42 70 80 85
with conductor cross-sectional area mm2 2.5 4 4 6 10 16 35 50 50

Short-circuit protection for contactors without


add-on thermal O/L relays - Motor protection excluded (3)
Ue ≤ 500 V a.c. - gG (gI) max. fuses A 25 32 32 50 63 63 100 125 160

Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 70 120 180
- 60 Hz VA 80 140 210
- 50/60 Hz (4) VA/VA 74/70 125/120 190/180
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
- 60 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
- 50/60 Hz (4) VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5

Mechanical durability
in millions of operating cycles 10
Electrical durability for Ie / AC-3 max.
in millions of operating cycles 1.5

Thermal O/L relays Type TA 25 DU TA 75 DU


Setting range A 0.1 - 32 18 - 80

Type TA 42 DU
Setting range A 18 - 42

TA 25 DU TA 42 DU TA 75 DU

(1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A value of 1500 r.p.m., 50 Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/0. (2) Temperature close to contactor.
(3) For short-circuit protection of motor starters, see page 7/17 (4) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes ■
8 ■
0 to ■
8 ■
8 , see page 0/1.

Other technical information: page 2/32.

2/2 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A and EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated


TA and T Thermal O/L Relays
Selection Table

3-pole contactors Type A 95 A 110 EH 145 EH 175 EH 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800

Rated operational power AC-3 (1) 2


θ ≤ 55 °C (2) 220-230-240 V kW 25 30 45 55 59 80 90 110 160 220 220
380-400 V kW 45 55 75 90 110 140 160 200 280 370 400
415 V kW 55 59 75 90 110 140 160 220 315 400 425
440 V kW 55 59 75 90 110 140 160 220 315 400 450
500 V kW 55 59 90 110 132 180 200 250 400 480 520
690 V kW 55 75 110 132 160 200 250 355 500 600 650
1000 V kW 40 40 110 132 160 180 200 220 250 315 315

Rated operational current Ie /AC- 3 (1)


θ ≤ 55 °C (2) 220-230-240 V A 96 110 150 185 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
380-400 V A 96 110 145 185 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
415 V A 96 110 145 185 210 260 300 400 550 700 720
440 V A 93 100 145 185 210 240 280 370 550 700 720
500 V A 80 100 145 170 210 240 280 370 550 700 720
690 V A 65 82 120 170 210 220 280 370 550 700 720
1000 V A 30 30 80 94 113 125 140 155 175 220 220
Rated operational current Ie /AC-1
Ue max. 690 V
θ ≤ 40 °C (2) A 145 160 230 260 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
θ ≤ 55 °C (2) A 135 145 200 230 270 340 375 470 650 800 800
θ ≤ 70 °C (2) A 115 130 160 170 215 290 325 400 575 720 720
with conductor cross-sectional area mm2 50 70 120 150 185 300 300 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300 2 x 300

gG (gI) max. fuses A 160 200 250 355 355 500 500 630 800 1000 1000

Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 350 430 800 1100 2600 3500
- 60 Hz VA 450 490 900 1200 2900 4000
- 50/60 Hz (4) VA/VA 410/365 460/400 500 630 2800/2450 3800/3400
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 22/6.5 30/11 44/15 52/18 90/36 125/50
- 60 Hz VA/W 26/8 35/12 52/18 65/22 105/44 140/60
- 50/60 Hz (4) VA/W 27/7.5 38/12 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 100/47 140/60
Mechanical durability
in millions of operating cycles 10 10 5

Electrical durability Ie /AC- 3 max.


in millions of operating cycles >1 >1 > 0.6 > 0.5

Thermal O/L relays Type TA 80 DU T 200 DU T 900 DU/SU


Setting range A 29 - 80 100 - 200 265 - 850

Type TA 110 DU T 450 DU/SU


Setting range A 65 - 110 130 - 400

TA 80 DU TA 110 DU T 200 DU T 450 DU T 900 DU

(1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A value of 1500 r.p.m., 50 Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/0. (2) Temperature close to contactor.
(3) For short-circuit protection of motor starters, see page 7/17 (4) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes ■8 ■
0 to ■
8 ■
8 and E ■ , see page 0/1.
please consult co-ordination tables (ref. ITSCB 649171/002 9-1996).

Other technical information: page 2/33.

Low Voltage Products 2/3


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A and EK 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated


Selection Table

4-pole contactors Type A9 A 16 A 26 A 45 A 50 A 75


Rated operational voltage Ue max. V 690 690 690

Rated operational current Ie / AC-1


θ ≤ 40 °C (1) A 25 30 45 70 100 125
θ ≤ 55 °C (1) A 22 27 40 60 85 105
θ ≤ 70 °C (1) A 18 23 32 50 70 85
with conductor cross-sectional area mm2 2.5 4 6 25 35 50

Short-circuit protection for contactors without


thermal O/L relays - Motor protection excluded
Ue ≤ 500 V a.c. - gG (gI) max. fuses A 25 32 50 80 100 160

Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 70 120 180
- 60 Hz VA 80 140 210
- 50/60 Hz (2) VA/VA 74/70 125/120 190/180
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
- 60 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
- 50/60 Hz (2) VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5

Mechanical durability
in millions of operating cycles 10
Electrical durability for Ie / AC-1 max.
in millions of operating cycles See curves page 2/56
(1) Temperature close to contactor.
(2) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes ■
8 ■
0 to ■
8 ■
8 , see page 0/1.

Other technical information: page 2/32.

2/4 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A and EK 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated


Selection Table

Type EK 110 EK 150 EK 175 EK 210 EK 370 EK 550


Ue max. V 690 2
Rated operational current Ie /AC-1
θ ≤ 40 °C (1) A 200 250 300 350 550 800
θ ≤ 55 °C (1) A 180 230 270 310 470 650
θ ≤ 70 °C (1) A 155 200 215 250 400 575
with conductor cross-sectional area mm2 95 150 185 240 2 x 185 2 x 240

gG (gI) max. fuses A 250 355 630 800

Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 800 1100 3500 3500
- 60 Hz VA 900 1200 4000 4000
- 50/60 Hz (2) VA/VA 500 630 3800/3400 3800/3400
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 44/15 52/18 125/50 125/50
- 60 Hz VA/W 52/18 65/22 140/60 140/60
- 50/60 Hz (2) VA/W 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 140/60 140/60
Mechanical durability
in millions of operating cycles 5

Electrical durability for Ie / AC-1 max.


in millions of operating cycles See curves page 2/56
(1) Temperature close to contactor.
(2) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes E ■ , see page 0/1.

Other technical information: page 2/33.

Low Voltage Products 2/5


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A and AE Contactors
Description

Application
A contactors are mainly used for controlling 3-phase motors and generally speaking for controlling power circuits corresponding to their operating
characteristics up to 690 and even 1000 V a.c. and 440 V d.c.

Description of 3-pole and 4-pole contactors: A 9 - A 110


All A and AE contactors can be assembled side by side.
The add-on or built-in auxiliary contacts are suitable for low level currents.
When fitted with a 4-pole CA5 auxiliary contact block, A9 - A16 2-stack or 1-stack contactors ensure positive safety between their auxiliary contacts.

● Control circuit variants:


– A contactors: a.c. operated with laminated magnetic circuit.
– AE contactors: with laminated magnetic circuit and double-winding coil fed from d.c. supply via a CDL5 insertion contact mounted on the device.
The CDL5 has an N.C. lagging contact for insertion of the second winding.

● Contact variants:
– 3-pole contactors - with N.O. or N.C. built-in auxiliary contact for A 9 - A 40 contactors.
- with or without side-mounted, factory-assembled auxiliary contacts for A 50 - A 110 contactors.
– 4-pole contactors: 4-pole make or 2-pole make and 2-pole break without mounted auxiliary contacts.
– 3-pole/2-stack contactors: the first stack is made of a standard 3-pole contactor and the second stack of an irremovable 4-pole auxiliary contact
block. The width does not exceed that of the 1-stack contactor, only the depth is increased.

● Contactors for specific applications:


– UA and UA..-R types for 3-phase capacitor switching.
– GA and GAE types for d.c. circuit switching.
– TAE d.c. operated type with large coil voltage range.
– AF a.c. and d.c. operated type with controlled supply.

Quick fixing on mounting rail according to IEC 715, Location of surge suppressors
EN 50022 and EN 50023 standards:
35 x 7.5 mm for A 9 - A 40,
35 x 15 mm for A 9 - A 75, Clear marking of coil voltages and frequencies.
75 mm for A 45 - A 110.

Connecting point for control leads in top part of


Location of side-mounted accessories: on right or left
main terminals of A 45 - A 75 contactors.
hand side. Factory-mounted on:
– left hand side for CAL5 on A 50 - A 110-30-11,
– right hand side for CDL5/CCL5 on AE 45 - AE 110.
Terminal marking according to IEC 947-4-1,
EN 50005, EN 50012 and NEMA standards.
Holes for screw fixing (screws not supplied).
Distance between holes according to
EN 50003 (contactors for ≤ 11 kW motors). Location of function marker.

Terminals delivered in open position with captive


Stops for attaching front-mounted accessories.
screws (screws of unused terminals must be tightened).
Screwdriver guidance for all terminals makes it
possible to use motorized screwdrivers.
All terminals provide protection against accidental A 9 - A 110
direct contact with live parts according to Terminal screws:
VDE 0106 - Part. 100. – Pozidriv (+,-) N° 2 for all A9 - A 40 terminals and
All A 9 - A 40 contactor terminals as well as for A 45 - A 110 coil terminals.
A 45 - A 110 contactor auxiliary contact and coil – M8 screws with 6.5 mm slot for A 45 - A 75 main
terminals ensure IP 20 degree of protection according terminals.
to IEC 947-1. – HC, M8 for A 95/110 main terminals.

● Ordering Details ......................................................... pages 2/12, 2/16 ● General - Approvals .............................................................. Section 7
● Technical Data ....................................................................... page 2/32 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ....................................... Section 8
● Accessories ............................................................................ Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................................. Section 9

2/6 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Sommaire
Section
Chapitre
Section Index

A and AE Contactors
Accessories and Thermal O/L Relays

* Use electronic timer TE 5S (page 4/6) with A(E) 95 and A(E) 110 contactors.

The same accessories can be added on to A 9, A 16, A 26, A 45, A50 and A 75 4-pole contactors as 3-pole contactors.

Low Voltage Products 2/7


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Sommaire
Section
Chapitre
Section Index

EH and EK Contactors
Description

Application
EH 3-pole contactors are mainly used for controlling 3-phase motors and generally speaking for controlling power circuits corresponding to their
operating characteristics up to voltages of 1000 V a.c. and 440 V d.c.
EK 4-pole contactors are mainly used for controlling back-up circuits and all distribution circuits where the neutral needs to be broken.

Description of EH 145 - EH 800 and EK 110 - EK 550 contactors


● One N.O. + N.C. auxiliary contact block is fitted to the left hand side of 3-pole and 4-pole contactors. (Three other auxiliary contact blocks can be added). Complete
closing is ensured, even at the lowest control voltage, by a patented spring system. The coil is compound-filled in heat-resistant, glass-fibre
reinforced resin. Exact ordering and marking details are automatically obtained when the coil is changed.
● EH 3-pole contactors and EK 4-pole contactors can be supplied:
– with a laminated magnetic circuit and a coil fed directly from an a.c. current supply for a.c. control
– with a laminated magnetic circuit and a coil fed from a d.c. current supply across an economy resistor connected via an auxiliary contact block
comprising an N.C. lagging contact for d.c. control.

Removable coil for EH 175 - EH 300.


M10 earth screw for EH 370 - 800. Can also be The coil can be changed on the contactor installed. Screw, nut and washer supplied for every main terminal.
fitted at the bottom. Connectors for either copper or aluminium can be
supplied separately.

Dampers for EH 370 - 800 are supplied with


screws and washers.
Plain holes for M4 screws
(auxiliary circuit wires).

High quality plastic case for EH 145 - 300 and


moulded light alloy case for EH 370 - 800. Main contacts with high-conductivity
and low-oxidation coating.

Auxiliary contact block supplied.


Separate arcing contacts for EH 370 - EH 800.

Terminals protected against accidental contact


with live parts (IP 20). Terminal marking according to IEC 947-4-1,
EN 50005, EN 50012 and NEMA. Clearly marked
main terminals and phase conductors.
Quick-release clip for access to arc chute.
Clearly marked coil voltage and frequency. Terminals
provide protection against accidental contact with live
Glass-fibre reinforced polyester arc chute. parts (IP 20).
EH 145 - EH 800

Removable coil for EK 110 - EK 210.


M 10 earth screw for EK 370 and EK 550. The coil can be changed on the contactor installed. Screw, nut and washer supplied for every main
Can also be fitted at the bottom. terminal.
Connectors for either copper or aluminium can be
supplied separately.

Dampers for EK 370 and 550 are supplied with


screws and washers. Plain holes for M4 screws
(auxiliary circuit wires).

Quick-release clip for arc chutes. Main contacts with high-conductivity


and low-oxidation coating.

Separate arcing contacts for EH 370 - EK 550.


Auxiliary contact block supplied.

Terminal marking according to IEC 947-4-1,


EN 50005, EN 50012 and NEMA. Clearly marked
Terminals protected against accidental direct main terminals and phase conductors.
contact with live parts (IP 20).

Clearly marked coil voltage and frequency. Terminals


provide protection against accidental contact with live
Glass-fibre reinforced polyester arc chute. parts (IP 20).
EK 110 - EK 550

● Ordering Details ........................................................... pages 2/13, 2/15, 2/16 ● General - Approvals ......................................................... Section 7
● Technical Data ....................................................................... pages 2/33, 2/39 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ................................. Section 8
● Accessories ....................................................................................... Section 4 ● Dimensions ....................................................................... Section 9

2/8 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

EH and EK Contactors
Accessories and Thermal O/L Relays

The same accessories can be added on to EK 4-pole contactors as EH 3-pole contactors.

Low Voltage Products 2/9


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

BC Contactors
Description

Application
BC contactors are mainly used for controlling 3-phase motors and generally speaking for controlling power circuits corresponding to their operating
characteristics up to 690 V a.c. and 440 V d.c.

Description of 3-pole or 4-pole contactors: BC 9 - BC 30


For BC and TBC type contactors make sure that the mounting distance specified in the "Ordering Details" pages 2/14, 2/17, 2/19 and 2/24 is
respected for "side by side" (position 1) and "stacked" (positions 3 and 4) mounting.
The add-on or built-in auxiliary contacts are suitable for low level currents.
BC 9, BC 16, TBC 9 and TBC 16 2-stack or 1-stack contactors fitted with a 4-pole CA5 auxiliary contact block ensure positive safety between their
auxiliary contacts.

● Type of magnetic circuit:


– Solid magnetic circuit with d.c. fed coil.

● Contact variants:
– 3-pole contactors with built-in N.O. or N.C. auxiliary contact for BC 9 - BC 25 contactors.
– 4-pole contactors: 4-pole make or 2-pole make and 2-pole break without built-in auxiliary contacts.
– 2-stack 3-pole contactors: the first stack is made of a standard contactor and the second stack of an irremovable 4-pole auxiliary contact block.
The width does not exceed that of the 1-stack contactor, only the depth is increased.

● Contactors for specific applications:


– D.C. operated TBC - types with large voltage range. Variants specific to traction are not given in this catalogue. Please consult us.

Quick fixing on mounting rail according to IEC 715 Dove tail anchoring for surge suppressor
and EN 50022 standards: assembly.
– 35 x 7.5 mm,
– 35 x 15 mm.
Clear marking of coil d.c. voltage.

Terminal screw types:


– Pozidriv (+,-) N° 2; M 3.5 for all BC 9 and BC 16 Terminal marking according to IEC 947-4-1,
terminals and BC 18 - BC 30 coil terminals. EN 50005, EN 50012 and NEMA standards.
– Pozidriv (+,-) N° 2; M 4 for BC 18 and BC 25 main
terminals.
– Pozidriv (+,-) N° 2; M 5 for BC 30 main terminals. Terminals delivered in open position with captive
screws (screws of unused terminals must be tightened).
Screwdriver guidance for all terminals makes it
possible to use motorized screwdrivers.
Holes for screw fixing (screws not supplied). All terminals provide protection against accidental
Distance between holes according to direct contact with live parts according to
EN 50003 (contactors for ≤ 11 kW motors). VDE 0106 - Part. 100.

Stops for attaching front-mounted accessories. Location of function marker.

BC 9 - BC 30

● Ordering Details .................................................... pages 2/14, 2/17, 2/19, 2/24 and 2/25 ● General - Approvals .................................................................. Section 7
● Technical Data .................................................................................................. page 2/38 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning .......................................... Section 8
● Accessories ....................................................................................................... Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................................... Section 9

2/10 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

BC Contactors
Accessories and Thermal O/L Relays

The same accessories can be added on to BC 9, BC 16 and BC 25 4-pole contactors as 3-pole contactors.
* For selection and use of surge suppressors, see notes page 4/14.

Low Voltage Products 2/11


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated


A.C. Circuit Switching
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted aux.contacts Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Weight
State coil to be completed with coil 1st stack 2 nd stack voltage 220 V 380 V in kg
voltage: ■ voltage code: ■ ■ AC -1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
θ ≤ 40°C 400 V 240 V Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A kW kW kW kW 1 piece
SB 7312S2

A 9-30-10 ■ 1SBL 14 1001 R ■ ■ 10 1 – – – 25 9 2.2 4 4 5.5 0.34


A 9-30-01 ■ (1) 1SBL 14 1001 R ■ ■ 01 – 1 – – 25 9 2.2 4 4 5.5 0.34
A 9-30-10 A 9-30-22 ■ 1SBL 14 1001 R ■ ■ 22 – – 2 2 25 9 2.2 4 4 5.5 0.40
A 9-30-32 ■ 1SBL 14 1001 R ■ ■ 32 1 – 2 2 25 9 2.2 4 4 5.5 0.40

A 12-30-10 ■ 1SBL 16 1001 R ■ ■ 10 1 – – – 27 12 3 5.5 5.5 7.5 0.34


A 12-30-01 ■ (1) 1SBL 16 1001 R ■ ■ 01 – 1 – – 27 12 3 5.5 5.5 7.5 0.34
A 12-30-22 ■ 1SBL 16 1001 R ■ ■ 22 – – 2 2 27 12 3 5.5 5.5 7.5 0.40
A 12-30-32 ■ 1SBL 16 1001 R ■ ■ 32 1 – 2 2 27 12 3 5.5 5.5 7.5 0.40

A 16-30-10 ■ 1SBL 18 1001 R ■ ■ 10 1 – – – 30 17 4 7.5 9 9 0.34


SB 7310S2

A 16-30-01 ■ (1) 1SBL 18 1001 R ■ ■ 01 – 1 – – 30 17 4 7.5 9 9 0.34


A 16-30-22 ■ 1SBL 18 1001 R ■ ■ 22 – – 2 2 30 17 4 7.5 9 9 0.40
A 16-30-10 A 16-30-32 ■ 1SBL 18 1001 R ■ ■ 32 1 – 2 2 30 17 4 7.5 9 9 0.40

A 26-30-10 ■ 1SBL 24 1001 R ■ ■ 10 1 – – – 45 26 6.5 11 11 15 0.60


A 26-30-01 ■ 1SBL 24 1001 R ■ ■ 01 – 1 – – 45 26 6.5 11 11 15 0.60
A 26-30-32 ■ 1SBL 24 1001 R ■ ■ 32 1 – 2 2 45 26 6.5 11 11 15 0.66

A 30-30-10 ■ 1SBL 28 1001 R ■ ■ 10 1 – – – 55 32 9 15 15 18.5 0.71


A 30-30-01 ■ 1SBL 28 1001 R ■ ■ 01 – 1 – – 55 32 9 15 15 18.5 0.71
A 30-30-32 ■ 1SBL 28 1001 R ■ ■ 32 1 – 2 2 55 32 9 15 15 18.5 0.77

A 40-30-10 ■ 1SBL 32 1001 R ■ ■ 10 1 – – – 60 37 11 18.5 18.5 22 0.71


SB 7320S2

A 40-30-01 ■ 1SBL 32 1001 R ■ ■ 01 – 1 – – 60 37 11 18.5 18.5 22 0.71


A 40-30-32 ■ 1SBL 32 1001 R ■ ■ 32 1 – 2 2 60 37 11 18.5 18.5 22 0.77
A 30-30-10
A 50-30-00 ■ 1SBL 35 1001 R ■ ■ 00 – – – – 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.16
A 50-30-11 ■ 1SBL 35 1001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 – – 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.20
A 50-30-22 ■ 1SBL 35 1001 R ■ ■ 22 – – 2 2 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.23

A 63-30-00 ■ 1SBL 37 1001 R ■ ■ 00 – – – – 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.16


A 63-30-11 ■ 1SBL 37 1001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 – – 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.20
A 63-30-22 ■ 1SBL 37 1001 R ■ ■ 22 – – 2 2 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.23

A 75-30-00 ■ 1SBL 41 1001 R ■ ■ 00 – – – – 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.16


A 75-30-11 ■ 1SBL 41 1001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 – – 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.20
A 75-30-22 ■ 1SBL 41 1001 R ■ ■ 22 – – 2 2 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.23
SB 7315S2

A 95-30-00 ■ 1SFL 43 1001 R ■ ■ 00 – – – – 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.00


A 95-30-11 ■ 1SFL 43 1001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 – – 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.04
A 50-30-00
A 95-30-22 ■ 1SFL 43 1001 R ■ ■ 22 – – 2 2 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.07

A 110-30-00 ■ 1SFL 45 1001 R ■ ■ 00 – – – – 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.00


A 110-30-11 ■ 1SFL 45 1001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 – – 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.04
A 110-30-22 ■ 1SFL 45 1001 R ■ ■ 22 – – 2 2 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.07
(1) In mounting position 5, do not use more than 2 front-mounted N.C. auxiliary contacts.
The CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks provide additional N.C. contacts.
SB 7324S2

A 95-30-00
● Technical Data ...................................................... page 2/32 ● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7
● Accessories ........................................................... Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Thermal O/L Relays .............................................. Section 5 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9

2/12 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated


A.C. Circuit Switching
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Weight
State coil to be completed with coil aux. cont. current 220 V 380 V in kg
voltage: ■ voltage: ■ ■ AC -1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
θ ≤ 40°C 400 V 240 V Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A kW kW kW kW 1 piece

EH 145-30-11 ■ SK 824 021- ■ ■ 1 1 230 145 45 75 75 110 2.30


SB 7338S2

EH 145-30-22 ■ SK 824 031- ■ ■ 2 2 230 145 45 75 75 110 2.35

EH 175-30-11 ■ SK 825 401- ■ ■ 1 1 260 185 55 90 90 132 4.65


EH 145-30-11
EH 175-30-21 ■ SK 825 401- E ■ 2 1 260 185 55 90 90 132 4.65
EH 175-30-22 ■ SK 825 411- ■ ■ 2 2 260 185 55 90 90 132 4.70 2
EH 210-30-11 ■ SK 825 402- ■ ■ 1 1 300 210 59 110 110 160 4.65
EH 210-30-21 ■ SK 825 402- E ■ 2 1 300 210 59 110 110 160 4.65
EH 210-30-22 ■ SK 825 412- ■ ■ 2 2 300 210 59 110 110 160 4.70

EH 260-30-11 ■ SK 826 402- ■ ■ 1 1 400 260 80 140 140 200 6.20


EH 260-30-21 ■ SK 826 402- E ■ 2 1 400 260 80 140 140 200 6.20
SB 7345S2

EH 260-30-22 ■ SK 826 412- ■ ■ 2 2 400 260 80 140 140 200 6.25

EH 300-30-11 ■ SK 826 401- ■ ■ 1 1 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.20


EH 175-30-11 EH 300-30-21 ■ SK 826 401- E ■ 2 1 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.20
EH 300-30-22 ■ SK 826 411- ■ ■ 2 2 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.25

EH 370-30-11 ■ SK 827 004- ■ ■ 1 1 550 400 110 200 220 355 12.40
EH 370-30-22 ■ SK 827 030- ■ ■ 2 2 550 400 110 200 220 355 12.45

EH 550-30-11 ■ SK 827 005- ■ ■ 1 1 800 550 160 280 315 500 12.40
EH 550-30-22 ■ SK 827 031- ■ ■ 2 2 800 550 160 280 315 500 12.45

EH 700-30-11 ■ SK 828 004- ■ ■ 1 1 1000 700 220 370 400 600 17.10
SB 7348S2

EH 700-30-22 ■ SK 828 030- ■ ■ 2 2 1000 700 220 370 400 600 17.15

EH 800-30-11 ■ SK 828 005- ■ ■ 1 1 1000 750 220 400 425 650 17.30
EH 260-30-11
EH 800-30-22 ■ SK 828 031- ■ ■ 2 2 1000 750 220 400 425 650 17.35

- E ■ = 40 - 400 Hz coil with built-in rectifier.


SB 7347S3

EH 370-30-11
SB 7351S3

EH 700-30-11
● Technical Data ............................................ pages 2/33, 2/39 ● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7
● Accessories ............................................................. Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Thermal O/L Relays ................................................ Section 5 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9

Low Voltage Products 2/13


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

BC 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated


A.C. Circuit Switching
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted aux. contacts Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Weight
State coil to be completed with coil 1st stack 2 nd stack current 220 V 380 V in kg
voltage: ■ voltage: ■..■ AC -1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
θ ≤ 40°C 400 V 240 V Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A kW kW kW kW 1 piece

BC 9-30-10 ■ FPL 141 3001 R ■ 10 ■


SB 6997S4

1 – – – 22 9 2.2 4 4 4 0.54
BC 9-30-01 ■ FPL 141 3001 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 – – 22 9 2.2 4 4 4 0.54

BC 9-30-10 BC 16-30-10 ■ FPL 181 3001 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – – – 28 16 4 7.5 7.5 5.5 0.54


BC 16-30-01 ■ FPL 181 3001 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 – – 28 16 4 7.5 7.5 5.5 0.54

BC 18-30-22 ■ GJL 222 3001 R ■ 22 ■ – – 2 2 36 16 4 7.5 7.5 7.5 0.57

BC 25-30-10 ■ GJL 241 3001 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – – – 45 25 6.5 * 11 11 11 0.62


BC 25-30-01 ■ GJL 241 3001 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 – – 45 25 6.5 * 11 11 11 0.62

BC 30-30-00 ■ GJL 281 3001 R ■ 00 ■ – – – – 55 30 9 15 15 15 0.70


SB 6994S4

BC 30-30-22 ■ GJL 282 3001 R ■ 22 ■ – – 2 2 55 30 9 15 15 15 0.76


* 7.5 kW at 240 V.
BC 25-30-10

Mounting Distance required between BC contactors.


d(1) D(2) Ambient temperature Max. switching frequency
mm mm °C Operating cycles/h
2 20 ≤ 20 1200
5 20 ≤ 55 1200
SB 6490S4

BC 30-30-00
Mounting Positions of BC contactors.
The following table gives the permissible mounting positions depending on the ambient temperature, contactor
coil operating limits and whether or not there are add-on accessories: auxiliary contact blocks, pneumatic timer.

Ambient Contactor Permissible Coil Add-on accessories


temp. without accessory mounting operating 1-pole aux. contacts or 4-pole aux. contacts or Timer
Poles Built-in positions limits CA5-10 CA5-01 CA5-40 (4 x N.O.) TP 40 DA/IA
aux. cont. (N.O.) (N.C.) or CA5-31 (3 x N.O. + 1 x N.C.) orTP 180 DA/IA
or CA5-22 (2 x N.O. + 2 x N.C.)
or CA5-04 (4 x N.C.)

θ °C Pos. x Uc Qty: Qty: Qty: Qty:

≤ 55
BC 9 - BC 25 - 30 - 10
BC 30 - 30 - 00
BC 9 - 30 - 01
BC 16 - 30 - 01
} 1, 3, 4 0.85 -1.1
1±30°, 2, 6 0.95 -1.1
1
1
to
to
4
4
1
1
1
1
BC 25 - 30 - 01 5* 0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1** TP..DA
> 55
and
BC 9 - BC 25 - 30 - 10
BC 30 - 30 - 00
BC 9 - 30 - 01
} 1, 1± 30°,
2, 3, 4 Uc 1 to 4 1 1
≤ 70 BC 16 - 30 - 01 5* Uc 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1** TP..DA
BC 25 - 30 - 01
* In position 5, do not use the RD7 diode unit: consult us. Maximum operating voltage: Ue < 440 V a.c.
** In position 5, do not use the CA5-04 auxiliary contact block.

Note: For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diode, varistor, etc.), see notes page 4/14.

● Technical Data ...................................................... page 2/38 ● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7


● Accessories ........................................................... Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Thermal O/L Relays .............................................. Section 5 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9

2/14 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

AE and EH 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated


A.C. Circuit Switching
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Weight
State coil to be completed with coil aux. cont. current 220 V 380 V in kg
voltage: ■ voltage: ■ ■ AC -1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
θ ≤ 40°C 400 V 240 V Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A kW kW kW kW 1 piece

AE 50-30-00 ■ 1SBL 35 9001 R ■ ■ 00 – – 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.20


AE 50-30-11 ■ 1SBL 35 9001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.24

AE 63-30-00 ■ 1SBL 37 9001 R ■ ■ 00 – – 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.20


SB 7582S4

AE 63-30-11 ■ 1SBL 37 9001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.24

AE 75-30-00 ■ 1SBL 41 9001 R ■ ■ 00 – – 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.20 2


AE 50-30-00 AE 75-30-11 ■ 1SBL 41 9001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.24

AE 95-30-00 ■ 1SFL 43 9001 R ■ ■ 00 – – 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.04


AE 95-30-11 ■ 1SFL 43 9001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.07

AE 110-30-00 ■ 1SFL 45 9001 R ■ ■ 00 – – 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.04


AE 110-30-11 ■ 1SFL 45 9001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.07

EH 145-30-21 ■ SK 824 021- ■ ■ 2 1 230 145 45 75 75 110 2.30

EH 175-30-21 ■ SK 825 401- ■ ■ 2 1 260 185 55 90 90 132 4.70

EH 210-30-21 ■ SK 825 402- ■ ■ 2 1 300 210 59 110 110 160 4.70

EH 260-30-21 ■ SK 826 402- ■ ■ 2 1 400 260 80 140 140 200 6.20

EH 300-30-21 ■ SK 826 401- ■ ■ 2 1 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.25

EH 370-30-21 ■ SK 827 004- ■ ■ 2 1 550 400 110 200 220 355 12.40

EH 550-30-21 ■ SK 827 005- ■ ■ 2 1 800 550 160 280 315 500 12.40
SB 7592S4

EH 700-30-21 ■ SK 828 004- ■ ■ 2 1 1000 700 220 370 400 600 17.10

EH 210-30-11

EH 800-30-21■ SK 828 005- ■ ■ 2 1 1000 750 220 400 425 650 17.30

Block diagram for AE Contactor Coil Supply.

N.C. lagging auxiliary contact block with built-in varistor:


– CDL 5-01 type on AE 50-AE 75 contactors.
– CCL 5-01 type on AE 95 and AE110 contactors.

● Technical Data ...................................................... page 2/38 ● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7


● Accessories .......................................................... Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Thermal O/L Relays .............................................. Section 5 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9

Low Voltage Products 2/15


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A and EK 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated


A.C. Circuit Switching

Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted aux. Rated operational Weight
State coil to be completed with coil contacts current in kg
voltage: ■ voltage code: ■ ■ AC -1 AC-1
θ ≤ 40°C θ ≤ 55°C Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A 1 piece
SB 7314S2

A 9-40-00 ■ 1SBL 14 1201 R ■ ■ 00 – – 25 22 0.34


A 9-40-00 A 16-40-00 ■ 1SBL 18 1201 R ■ ■ 00 – – 30 27 0.34
A 26-40-00 ■ 1SBL 24 1201 R ■ ■ 00 – – 45 40 0.61
A 45-40-00 ■ (1) 1SBL 33 1201 R ■ ■ 00 – – 70 60 1.39
A 50-40-00 ■ (1) 1SBL 35 1201 R ■ ■ 00 – – 100 85 1.39
A 75-40-00 ■ (1) 1SBL 41 1201 R ■ ■ 00 – – 125 105 1.39
EK 110-40-11 ■ SK 824 440- ■ ■ 1 1 200 180 4.30
EK 110-40-21 ■ SK 824 440- E ■ 2 1 200 180 4.30
EK 110-40-22 ■ SK 824 450- ■ ■ 2 2 200 180 4.35
EK 150-40-11 ■ SK 824 441- ■ ■ 1 1 250 230 4.35
EK 150-40-21 ■ SK 824 441- E ■ 2 1 250 230 4.35
EK 150-40-22 ■ SK 824 451- ■ ■ 2 2 250 230 4.40
EK 175-40-11 ■ SK 825 440- ■ ■ 1 1 300 270 6.60
SB 7319S3

EK 175-40-21 ■ SK 825 440- E ■ 2 1 300 270 6.60


EK 175-40-22 ■ SK 825 448- ■ ■ 2 2 300 270 6.65
A 45-40-00
EK 210-40-11 ■ SK 825 441- ■ ■ 1 1 350 310 6.60
EK 210-40-21 ■ SK 825 441- E ■ 2 1 350 310 6.60
EK 210-40-22 ■ SK 825 451- ■ ■ 2 2 350 310 6.65
EK 370-40-11 ■ SK 827 040- ■ ■ 1 1 550 470 17.2
EK 370-40-22 ■ SK 827 042- ■ ■ 2 2 550 470 17.2
EK 550-40-11 ■ SK 827 041- ■ ■ 1 1 800 650 17.2
EK 550-40-22 ■ SK 827 043- ■ ■ 2 2 800 650 17.2
- E ■ = 40 - 400 Hz coil with built-in rectifier.
(1) 60 Hz coil voltage
Mounting positions 1 to 5 (see page 2/37) and ambient temperature ≤ 55°C: tolerance reduced to 0.9 - 1.1 Uc (instead of 0.85 - 1.1 Uc) for coil
voltage codes 7 ■ and 8 ■ . This only concerns devices fitted with CA 5 - and CAL5-11 auxiliary contacts or TP timer.
For mounting position 6 or ambient temperature of +55 to +70 °C the information given on page 2/34 remains applicable.
SB 7341S3

EK 175-40-11
SB 7343S3

EK 370-40-11

● Technical Data ....................................................... page 2/32 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Accessories ............................................................. Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
● General - Approvals ................................................ Section 7

2/16 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

BC, AE and EK 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated


A.C. Circuit Switching

Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted aux. Rated operational Weight
State coil to be completed with coil contacts current in kg
voltage: ■ voltage: ■ ■ AC -1 AC-1
θ ≤ 40°C θ ≤ 55°C Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A 1 piece
SB 6992S2

BC 9-40-00 ■ (1) FPL 141 3201 R ■ 00 ■ – – 22 20 0.54


BC 16-40-00 ■ (1) FPL 181 3201 R ■ 00 ■ – – 28 25 0.54
BC 16-40-00
BC 25-40-00 ■ (1) GJL 241 3201 R ■ 00 ■ – – 45 40 0.62
AE 45-40-00 ■ 1SBL 33 9201 R ■ ■ 00 – – 70 60 1.43 2
AE 50-40-00 ■ 1SBL 35 9201 R ■ ■ 00 – – 100 85 1.43
AE 75-40-00 ■ 1SBL 41 9201 R ■ ■ 00 – – 125 105 1.43
EK 110-40-21 ■ SK 824 440- ■ ■ 2 1 200 180 4.35
EK 150-40-21 ■ SK 824 441- ■ ■ 2 1 250 230 4.40
EK 175-40-21 ■ SK 825 440- ■ ■ 2 1 300 270 6.65
EK 210-40-21 ■ SK 825 441- ■ ■ 2 1 350 310 6.65
EK 370-40-21 ■ SK 827 040- ■ ■ 2 1 550 470 17.2
SB 7590S4

EK 550-40-21 ■ SK 827 041- ■ ■ 2 1 800 650 17.2


(1) ● Distances and mounting positions: see page 2/14.
● For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diode, varistor, etc.) see notes page 4/14.

AE 50-40-00
Block Diagram for AE Contactor Coil Supply.

Mounting Distance required between BC contactors.


SB 7594S4

d(1) D(2) Ambient temperature Max. switching frequency


mm mm °C Operating cycles/h
EK 110-40-21 2 20 ≤ 20 1200
5 20 ≤ 55 1200

Mounting Positions of BC contactors.


The following table shows permissible mounting positions depending on the ambient temperature, contactor
coil operating limits and whether or not there are add-on accessories: auxiliary contact blocks, pneumatic timer.

Ambient Contactor Permissible Coil Add-on accessories


temp. without accessory mounting operating 1-pole aux. contacts or 4-pole aux. contacts or Timer
Poles Built-in . positions limits CA5-10 CA5-01 CA5-40 (4 x N.O.) TP 40 DA/IA
aux. cont. (N.O.) (N.C.) or CA5-31 (3 x N.O. + 1 x N.C.) orTP 180 DA/IA
or CA5-22 (2 x N.O. + 2 x N.C.)
or CA5-04 (4 x N.C.)
θ °C Pos. x Uc Qty: Qty: Qty: Qty:

≤ 55 BC 9 - BC 25 - 40 - 00
} 1, 3, 4 0.85 -1.1
1±30°, 2, 6 0.95 -1.1
1
1
to
to
4
4
1
1
1
1
5* 0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1** TP..DA

and
> 55
BC 9 - BC 25 - 40 - 00
} 1,1±30°,2,3,4 Uc 1 to 4 1 1
< 70 5* Uc 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1** TP..DA
* In position 5, do not use the RD7 diode unit, please consult us. Maximum operating voltage: Ue < 440 V a.c.
** In position 5, do not use the CA5-04 auxiliary contact block.

Note: For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diode, varistor, etc.), see notes page 4/14.

● Technical Data ..................................................... page 2/38 ● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7


● Accessories ........................................................... Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Thermal O/L Relay ................................................ Section 5 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9

Low Voltage Products 2/17


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles


A.C. Circuit Switching
A.C. Operated

Description
● 4-pole contactors fitted with 2 N.C. main poles and 2 N.O. main poles.
● These contactors are suitable for controlling 2 separate circuits, i.e. 2 loads with 2 separate supplies, or
1 circuit comprising 2 separate loads with a single supply (see diagram below). When the contactor operates
there is no mechanical overlapping between the N.O. poles and the N.C. poles: BREAK before MAKE.

These contactors are not suitable for a reversing starter or star-delta starter or for controlling a single
load from 2 separate supplies.

Block Diagrams
● Single supply and 2 separate loads ● 2 separate supplies and 2 separate loads
SB 7588S4

A 26-22
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted Rated operational Weight
State coil to be completed with coil aux. contacts current at Ue ≤ 690 V in kg
voltage: ■ voltage: ■■ AC -1 AC-1
θ ≤ 40°C θ ≤ 55°C Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A 1 piece
A 9-22-00 ■ (1) 1SBL 14 1501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 25 22 0.34
A 16-22-00 ■ (1) 1SBL 18 1501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 30 27 0.34
A 26-22-00 ■ 1SBL 24 1501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 45 40 0.61
A 45-22-00 ■ (1) (2) 1SBL 33 1501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 70 60 1.40
A 75-22-00 ■ (1) (2) 1SBL 41 1501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 125 105 1.40
(1) For A 9 and A 16-22 in position 5 or A 45 and A 75-22 in positions 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6 (position 5 unauthorised), do not use more than 2 add-on front-
mounted N.C. auxiliary contact blocks. CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks provide extra N.C. auxiliary contacts
SB 7819S4

(2) A 45 and A 75-22 contactors:


– Shock withstand: in position 1, contactors being screwed on their support and without extra N.C. auxiliary contact.
1/2 sinusoidal shock, 11 ms: no change in contact position.
A 45-22 Shock directions : A, C1, C2 : 20g
B1 : 3g
B2 : 10g.

Mounting positions: – 60 Hz Coil Voltage: for mounting positions 1 to 4 and ambient temperature < 55 °C: tolerance reduced to 0.9 - 1.1 Uc
(instead of 0.85 - 1.1 Uc) for 7 ■ and 8 ■ coil voltage codes.
This only concerns devices fitted with CA 5 - and CAL 5-11 auxiliary contacts or TP timer.
Position 5 unauthorised.
For mounting position 6 or ambient temperature of +55 to +70 °C, the information given on page 2/34 remains applicable.

● Technical Data ....................................................... page 2/32 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Accessories ............................................................. Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
● General - Approvals ................................................ Section 7

2/18 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

BC and AE 4-pole Contactors


with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles
A.C. Circuit Switching - D.C. Operated

Description (as for page 2/18)

Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted Rated operational Weight
State coil to be completed with coil aux. contacts current at Ue ≤ 690 V in kg
voltage: ■ voltage: ■■ AC -1 AC-1
θ ≤ 40°C θ ≤ 55°C Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A 1 piece
BC 9-22-00 ■ FPL 141 3501 R ■ 00 ■ – – 22 20 0.540
2
SB 6993S3

BC 16-22-00 ■ FPL 181 3501 R ■ 00 ■ – – 28 25 0.540


BC 25-22-00 ■ GJL 241 3501 R ■ 00 ■ – – 45 40 0.620
BC 9-22-00 AE 45-22-00 ■ 1SBL 33 9501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 70 60 1.44
AE 75-22-00 ■ 1SBL 41 9501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 125 105 1.44

Mounting Distance required between BC contactors.


d(1) D(2) Ambient temperature Max. switching frequency
mm mm °C Operating cycles/h
2 20 ≤ 20 600
5 20 ≤ 55 600

Mounting Positions of BC 9 - BC 25-22, AE 45 and AE 75-22 4-pole contactors.


The following table shows permissible mounting positions in relation to the ambient temperature, contactor coil
operating limits and whether or not there are add-on accessories: auxiliary contact blocks, pneumatic timer.
SB 7591S4

Ambient Contactor Permissible Coil Add-on accessories


temp. without accessory mounting operating 1-pole aux. contacts or 4-pole aux. contacts or Timer
AE 45-22-00 Poles Built-in positions limits CA5-10 CA5-01 CA5-40 (4 x N.O.) TP 40 DA/IA
aux. cont. (N.O.) (N.C.) or CA5-31 (3 x N.O. + 1 x N.C.) orTP 180 DA/IA
or CA5-22 (2 x N.O. + 2 x N.C.)
θ °C Pos. x Uc Qty: Qty: Qty: Qty:

≤ 55
BC 9 - 22 - 00
BC 16 - 22 - 00
} 1, 2, 3, 4
1 ± 30°
0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C max.
0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 -
1
1 CA5-40
-
-
6 0.95 -1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1 -

and
> 55 BC 9 - 22 - 00
} 1, 2, 3, 4 Uc 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1 -
< 70 BC 16 - 22 - 00 1 ± 30° Uc 1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -

< 55 BC 25 - 22 - 00
} 1, 2 0.85 -1.1
1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -
1±30°,3,4,6 0.95 -1.1

and
> 55
BC 25 - 22 - 00
} 1, 1 ± 30°
2, 3, 4 Uc 1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -
< 70

< 55
AE 45 - 22 - 00
AE 75 - 22 - 00
} 1, 1 ± 30°
2, 3, 4
0.85 - 1.1
1 to 6 inc. 2xN.C.max.
1

+1 to 2 CA5 1-pole
1

+1 to 2 CA5
6 0.95 - 1.1 Do not exceed 2xN.C. 1-pole

and
> 55 AE 45 - 22 - 00
AE 75 - 22 - 00
} 1, 1 ± 30°
2, 3, 4 Uc 1 to 6 inc. 2xN.C.max.
1
+1 to 2 CA5 1-pole
1
+1 to 2 CA5
< 70 Do not exceed 2xN.C. 1-pole

Note: For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diode, varistor, etc.) with BC - contactors
see notes page 4/14.

● Technical Data ....................................................... page 2/38 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Accessories ............................................................. Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
● General - Approvals ................................................ Section 7

Low Voltage Products 2/19


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

3-pole Contactors
for 3-phase Capacitor Switching
A.C. Operated

General
The most common application is the parallel connection of 3-phase capacitors to a load or part of a circuit for power factor correction.
When connecting three-phase capacitors for compensation purposes, a distinction must be made between:
– Compensation via a single capacitor bank.
– Compensation via a stepped capacitor bank.
On energization, the capacitor is connected in parallel with the inductive network. A 3 to 15 kHz high frequency current, which may reach 160 In for
1 to 2 ms in the case of stepped bank compensation, flows through the oscillating circuit set up by the connection of the capacitor with the network.
The presence of harmonics and the supply voltage tolerance lead to a current, estimated to be 1.3 times the nominal current In of the capacitor,
continuously circulating in the circuit.
Taking into account the manufacturing tolerances, the exact power of a capacitor can reach 1.15 times its nominal power.
The contactor must therefore be sized to withstand:
– the short but high peak current during closing. See the Î peak current values in the following tables. Additional reactors may be used to limit
the peak inrush current.
– a permanent current IT able to reach 1.5 times the nominal current of the capacitor. This factor has been taken into account in the selection
tables below.
Short-circuit protection is generally ensured by gG fuses, sized 1.5 - 1.8 In of the capacitor.
Consult us for different conditions of use (higher inrush current, greater rate of harmonics).

Selection Table
Select the type of contactor in relation to the following characteristics:
- operational voltage - power in kvar - maximum contactor Î peak - ambient temperature close to contactor.

The capacitors must be fully discharged (maximum voltage at terminals ≤ 50 V) before being re-energized when the contactors are making.

A and EH Types Standard 3-pole Contactors


For 3-phase capacitors carrying out single capacitor bank or stepped bank compensation.
Î peak max. < 30 times the capacitor nominal r.m.s. current.
Electrical durability: 100 000 operating cycles - Ordering details: see pages 2/12 and 2/13.

Power in kvar 50/60 Hz Max. peak


Type 220/240 V 380/400 V 415/440 V 500/550V 660/690 V current
40 °C 55 °C 70 °C 40 °C 55 °C 70 °C 40 °C 55 °C 70 °C 40 °C 55 °C 70 °C 40 °C 55 °C 70 °C Î (kA)
A9 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
A 12 7 7 6 11 11 9.5 12 12 10.5 14 14 12 19 19 16.5 0.7
A 16 7.5 7.5 6 12.5 12.5 10 14 14 10.5 15.5 15.5 12 21.5 21.5 16.5 1
A 26 11.5 11.5 9 19 19 15 20 20 16.5 23 23 19 32 32 26 1.6
A 30 13 13 11 22 22 18.5 24 24 20.5 28 28 23 38 38 32 1.9
A 40 15 15 12 26 26 20 29 29 22 35 35 25 46 46 34.5 2.1
A 50 22 22 20 38 38 34 42 42 37 48 48 42 65 65 58.5 2.3
A 63 25 25 23 43 43 39 47 47 42.5 54 54 48.5 74 74 67 2.5
A 75 28 28 24.5 48 48 41 52 52 45 60 60 51 82 82 70 2.6
A 95 35 35 33 60 60 53 63 63 58 75 75 70 80 80 75 4
A 110 40 40 35 70 70 60 75 75 65 83 83 78 90 90 85 4
EH 145 50 50 42 90 90 74 93 93 80 110 110 96 110 110 110 4
EH 175 60 60 45 105 105 78 115 115 85 135 135 102 135 135 135 5
EH 210 75 75 57 125 125 99 135 135 108 160 160 130 160 160 160 5
EH 260 85 85 70 140 140 130 155 155 140 180 180 165 200 200 200 8
EH 300 100 100 85 160 160 150 180 180 163 210 210 196 240 240 240 8
EH 370 120 120 105 200 200 185 220 220 200 260 260 241 300 300 300 10
EH 550 160 160 150 260 260 255 290 290 289 340 340 340 440 440 440 10
EH 700 210 210 190 350 350 332 380 380 360 460 460 435 550 550 550 12
EH 800 220 212 191 390 370 332 410 402 360 490 480 435 600 600 600 12

2/20 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

UA 3-pole Contactors
for 3-phase Capacitor Switching
A.C. Operated

UA Type 3-pole Contactors


For 3-phase capacitors carrying out single bank or stepped bank compensation.
Max. peak current Î: 100 times the capacitor nominal r.m.s. current at Ue < 500 V or 90 times for Ue > 500 V
Electrical durability: 100 000 operating cycles - Ordering details: see below.

Power in kvar 50/60 Hz Max. permissible


Type 230/240 V 400/415 V 440 V 500/550 V 660/690 V peak current Î (kA)
40 °C 55 °C 70 °C 40 °C 55 °C 70 °C 40 °C 55 °C 70 °C 40 °C 55 °C 70 °C 40°C 55°C 70 °C Ue < 500 V Ue > 500 V
UA 26 12 11 8.5 20 18.5 14.5 22 20 16 22 22 19.5 30 30 25 3 2.7
UA 30 16 16 11 27.5 27.5 19 30 30 20 34 34 23.5 45 45 32 3.5 3.1
UA 50
UA 63
20
25
20
25
19
21
33
45
33
43
32
37
36
50
36
48
35
41
40
50
40
50
40
45
55
70
55
70
52
60
5
5.5
4.5
5
2
UA 75 30 30 22 50 50 39 55 53 43 62 62 47.5 75 75 65 6 5.8
UA 95 35 35 29 60/65* 60/65* 50/55* 65 65 55 70 70 60 86 86 70 9.3 8
UA 110 40 39 34 74 70/75* 65 75 75 67 80 80 75 90 90 85 10.5 9
* Use these values for Ue = 415 V
For kvar rated power at 220 V and 380 V, apply factor 0.9 on kvar rated power at 230 V and 400 V respectively.
Example with 50 kvar/400 V : 50 x 0.9 = 45 kvar/380 V.

Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted Weight
State coil to be completed with coil aux. cont. in kg
voltage: ■ voltage: ■ ■
Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 1 piece

UA 3-pole contactors
SB 7597S4

UA 26-30-10 ■ 1SBL 24 1022 R ■ ■ 10 1 – 0.60


UA 30-30-10 ■ 1SBL 28 1022 R ■ ■ 10 1 – 0.71
UA 50-30-00 UA 50-30-00 ■ 1SBL 35 1022 R ■ ■ 00 – – 1.16
UA 50-30-11 ■ 1SBL 35 1022 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 1.20
UA 63-30-00 ■ 1SBL 37 1022 R ■ ■ 00 – – 1.16
UA 63-30-11 ■ 1SBL 37 1022 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 1.20
UA 75-30-00 ■ 1SBL 41 1022 R ■ ■ 00 – – 1.16
UA 75-30-11 ■ 1SBL 41 1022 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 1.20
UA 95-30-00 ■ 1SFL 43 1022 R ■ ■ 00 – – 2.00
UA 95-30-11 ■ 1SFL 43 1022 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 2.04

UA 110-30-00■ 1SFL 45 1022 R ■ ■ 00 – – 2.00

UA 110-30-11■ 1SFL 45 1022 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 2.04
SB 7598S4

Accessories
UA contactor accessories are the same as those of standard A contactors (see section 4).
UA 95-30-00

● Accessories ........................................................... Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8


● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9

Low Voltage Products 2/21


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

UA .. -R 3-pole Contactors
for 3-phase Capacitor Switching
A.C. Operated

UA .. -R type 3-pole Contactors


For 3-phase capacitors carrying out single bank or stepped bank compensation.
Rated operational power: according to Ue rated operational voltage and air temperature close to contactor (see table below).

Insertion of resistors releases the contactor from overloading making currents.

Description
UA .. -R contactors are equipped with resistors and the relevant insertion contacts.
The insertion contacts make and break prior to the main poles (shifted operation about a few milliseconds).
Making sequence
– first step: the early-make insertion contacts switch-on the current to the capacitor via the damping resistors.
– second step: main poles are making.
The insertion contacts stay closed, ready to operate as early-breaking contacts for the next breaking sequence.
Breaking sequence
– first step: the insertion contacts operate as early-breaking ones and switch-off the resistances circuitry.
– second step: main poles are breaking the capacitor load.
Block Diagram

The capacitors must be discharged (maximum residual voltage at terminals <50 V) before being re-energized when the contactors are
making.

Rated Operational Power


Type Power in kvar - 50/60 Hz
220/240 V 380/400/415 V 440 V 500/550 V 660/690 V
40 °C 55 °C 70 °C 40 °C 55 °C 70 °C 40 °C 55 °C 70 °C 40 °C 55 °C 70 °C 40 °C 55 °C 70 °C
UA 16-30-10-R 8 7.5 6 12.5 12.5 10 15 13 11 18 16 12.5 22 21 17
UA 26-30-10-R 12.5 11.5 9 22 20 15.5 24 20 17 30 25 20 35 31 26
UA 30-30-10-R 16 16 11 30 27.5 19.5 32 30 20.5 34 34 25 42 42 32
UA 50-30-00-R 25 24 20 40 40 35 50 43 37 55 50 46 72 65 60
UA 63-30-00-R 30 27 23 50 45 39 55 48 42.5 65 60 50 80 75 65
UA 75-30-00-R 35 30 25 60 50 41 65 53 45 75 65 55 100 80 70

Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted Weight
aux. cont. in kg
State coil to be completed
voltage: ■ with coil voltage ■ ■ Packing
(See page 0/1) (See page 0/1) 1 piece
UA 16-30-10-R ■ ■ ■10
1SBL 18 1023 R■ ■ 1 - 0.460
UA 26-30-10-R ■ ■ ■10
1SBL 24 1023 R■ ■ 1 - 0.710
UA 30-30-10-R ■ ■ ■10
1SBL 28 1023 R■ ■ 1 - 0.810
UA 50-30-00-R ■ ■ ■00
1SBL 35 1023 R■ ■ - - 1.350
UA 63-30-00-R ■ ■ ■00
1SBL 37 1023 R■ ■ - - 1.350
UA 75-30-00-R ■ ■ ■00
1SBL 41 1023 R■ ■ - - 1.350

2/22 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

UA .. -R 3-pole Contactors
for 3-phase Capacitor Switching
A.C. Operated

Technical Data
Durability 250 000 operating cycles at Ue <440 V
100 000 operating cycles at Ue >500 V
Operating frequency 240 cycles/h

Degree of protection UA 16..-R, UA 26..-R UA 30..-R … UA 75..-R


acc. to IEC 529,IEC 947-1
and EN 60529, EN 60947-1
SB7822S2

– Main terminals IP 20 IP 10
– Coil terminals
– Auxiliary terminals
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20 2
Connecting capacity UA 16..-R UA 26..-R UA30..-R UA 50..-R…UA 75..-R
UA 16-30-10-R Main conductors (poles)
– rigid solid (<4 mm2)
or rigid stranded (>6 mm2) min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max.
1 x mm2 1…4 1.5 … 6 2.5 …16 6 … 50
2 x mm2 – – 2.5…16 + 2.5…6 6…25 + 6…16
– flexible without cable end min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max.
1 x mm2 0.75 … 2.5 1…4 2.5 … 10 6 … 35
2 x mm2 – – 2.5…10 + 2.5…4 6…16 + 6…10

Short-circuit protection gG fuses sized 1.5 … 1.8 In of the capacitor.


SB7823S2

Other characteristics are the same as those of standard A contactors.

Accessories
UA 26-30-10-R UA .. - R contactor accessories are the same as those of standard A contactors (see section 4).
SB7820S2

UA 30-30-10-R
SB7821S2

UA 75-30-00-R

● Accessories, coils, contacts ................................. Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positionning ...................... Section 8
● Generals, Approvals ............................................... Section 7 ● Dimensions ............................................................. Section 9

Low Voltage Products 2/23


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TBC and TAE Contactors


with Large Coil Voltage Range
D.C. Operated - A.C. Circuit Switching

Application
TBC and TAE contactors with a large coil voltage range are designed to operate in control circuits with large
voltage variations. Example: battery supply.

Ordering Details, 3-pole Contactors


Type Order code Mounted Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Weight
State coil to be completed with coil aux. cont. current 220 V 380 V in kg
voltage: ■ voltage: ■..■ AC -1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
SB 6996S3

θ ≤ 40°C 400 V 240 V Packing


See table opposite See table opposite A A kW kW kW kW 1 piece

TBC 9-30-01 TBC 9-30-10 ■ FPL 141 3061 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 22 9 2.2 4 4 4 0.54


TBC 9-30-01 ■ FPL 141 3061 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 22 9 2.2 4 4 4 0.54
TBC 16-30-10 ■ FPL 181 3061 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 28 16 4 7.5 7.5 5.5 0.54
Coil operating limits: TBC 16-30- 01 ■ FPL 181 3061 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 28 16 4 7.5 7.5 5.5 0.54
Voltage V -d.c. Code
TBC 25-30-10 ■ GJL 241 3061 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 45 25 6.5 11 11 11 0.62
R■ .. ■
TBC 25-30-01 ■ GJL 241 3061 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 45 25 6.5 11 11 11 0.62
or
min. Uc max. R ■ ■ . . TBC 30-30-00 ■ GJL 281 3061 R ■ 00 ■ – – 55 30 9 15 15 15 0.70
TBC 30-30-22 ■ GJL 282 3061 R ■ 22 ■ 2 2 55 30 9 15 15 15 0.76
17 ........... 32 ■
5 ■
1

25 ........... 45 ■
5 ■
2 TAE 50 -30 -00 ■ 1SBL 35 9061 R ■ ■ 00 – – 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.20
36 ........... 65 ■
5 ■
4 TAE 50 -30 -11 ■ 1SBL 35 9061 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.24
42 ........... 78 ■
5 ■
8
TAE 75-30 -00 ■ 1SBL 41 9061 R ■ ■ 00 – – 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.20
50 ........... 90 ■
5 ■
5
TAE 75-30 -11 ■ 1SBL 41 9061 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.24
77 ......... 143 ■
6 ■
2

90 ......... 150 ■
6 ■
6 TAE 95-30 -00 ■ 1SFL 43 9061 R ■ ■ 00 – – 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.04
152 ........ 264 ■
6 ■
8 TAE 95-30 -11 ■ 1SFL 43 9061 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.07
Other voltages: please consult us. TAE 110-30 -00 ■ 1SFL 45 9061 R ■ ■ 00 – – 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.04
TAE 110-30 -11 ■ 1SFL 45 9061 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.07

Ordering Details, 4-pole Contactors


Type Order code Mounted Rated operational Weight
State coil to be completed with coil aux. contacts current in kg
voltage: ■ voltage: ■ ..■ AC -1 AC-1
θ ≤ 40°C θ ≤ 55°C Packing
See table opposite See table opposite A A 1 piece

4-pole contactor fitted with 4 N.O. main poles


FRCTL 6995S5

TBC 9- 40-00 ■ FPL 141 3261 R ■ 00 ■ – – 22 20 0.54


TBC 16- 40-00 ■ FPL 181 3261 R ■ 00 ■ – – 28 25 0.54
TBC 25-40-00
TBC 25- 40-00 ■ GJL 241 3261 R ■ 00 ■ – – 45 40 0.62
TAE 45-40-00 1SBL 33 9261 R ■ ■ 00 – – 70 60 1.43
TAE 50-40-00 1SBL 35 9261 R ■ ■ 00 – – 100 85 1.43
TAE 75-40-00 1SBL 41 9261 R ■ ■ 00 – – 125 105 1.43

4-pole contactor fitted with 2 N.O. main poles and 2 N.C. main poles
These contactors can be used for controlling either 2 separate circuits, i.e. 2 loads with 2 separate supplies,
or 1 circuit comprising 2 separate loads with 1 single supply (see diagram page 2/18).
When the contactor operates, there is no mechanical overlapping between the N.O. main poles and
N.C. main poles: BREAK before MAKE.
FRCTL 6991S5

These contactors are not suitable for a reversing starter or a star-delta starter or for controlling a single
load from 2 separate supplies.
TBC 16-22-00
TBC 9-22-00 ■ FPL 141 3561 R ■ 00 ■ – – 22 20 0.54
TBC 16-22-00 ■ FPL 181 3561 R ■ 00 ■ – – 28 25 0.54
TBC 25-22-00 ■ GJL 241 3561 R ■ 00 ■ – – 45 40 0.62

● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7 ● Cited Acceptable Accessories ............................... Section 4


● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8 ● Railway/Traction Projects ...................................... on request

2/24 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TBC and TAE Contactors


with Large Coil Voltage Range
D.C. Operated - A.C. Circuit Switching

Coil Characteristics
No extra voltages applicable on the Uc min. - max. values of the Coil Voltage table, page 2/24.
– Coil consumption at Uc max. and θ = 20 °C:
- 9 W pull-in/holding for TBC type
- 450 W pull-in/ 7 W holding for TAE 50 and TAE 75 types
- 950 W pull-in/ 7 W holding for TAE 95 and TAE 110 types

– Replacement coils: please consult us (standard BC and AE contactor coils are not suitable for TBC and TAE
contactors).

"Mounting Distance" for coil operating limits U c min. - Uc max.


2
d D Ambient temp. Max. switching frequency
mm mm °C Operating cycles/h
2 20 ≤ 20 1200
5 20 ≤ 55 1200

Technical Data
Identical to standard BC and AE contactor data (see page 2 /38) except:
– Air temperature close to contactor: 55 °C max.
– Shock withstand in position 1 for contactors screwed on their support and without N.C. add-on aux. contact block.
1/2 sinusoidal shock for 11 ms: no change in contact position

Shock direction A B1 B2 C1 C2

Making TBC 15 g* 10 g 10 g 10 g 10 g
position TAE 20 g 10 g 15 g 20 g 20 g
Breaking TBC 10 g 5 g** 6 g*** 4 g 4g
position TAE 20 g 5g 15 g 20 g 20 g
Exceptions: *12g for TBC 30-30-00 ; **4g for TBC 16-22-00 ; ***5g for TBC 25-30-01

Mounting positions: Add-on accessories


Contactors Max. number of auxiliary contact blocks Timer Interlock Function
CA5-10 CA5-01 CA5-40 CA5-31 CA5-22 CA5-04 TP - A unit marker
pos. 1, 3 or 4
TBC - –30 - 00
TBC - –30 - 10 4 2 1 1 1 – – VBC 30 BA 5-50
TBC - –40 - 00
pos. 1, 3 or 4
TBC - –30 - 01 4 1 1 1 – – – VBC 30 BA 5-50
pos. 1, 3 or 4
TBC - –22 - 00 4 – 1 – – – – VBC 30 BA 5-50
pos. 1 ±30°
TBC - all types – – – – – – – VBC 30 BA 5-50
all positions
TAE - 6 6 1 1 1 1 1 VE5-2 (1) BA 5-50
(1) Only valid for TAE 50-30-00 and TAE 75-30-00.

Note: Railway (traction) projects on request.


For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diodes, varistors, etc.) with TBC contactors
see notes p. 4/14.

Low Voltage Products 2/25


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

AF Contactors - a.c. / d.c. operated


with controlled supply
a.c. circuit switching

General
The AF contactors have the same appearance and same dimensions as the a.c. operated A contactors of equal
rating.They are fitted with an electronic coil interface. For a given coil, this interface allows the contactor to
accept a wide control voltage range in d.c. as well as in a.c., 50 or 60 Hz.
The current flow through the coil is a regulated d.c. current and is therefore independent from the control voltage
level and frequency.
Operating advantages :
– The device withstands large control voltage variations without nuisance reopening.
– Reduced holding coil consumption.
– Noiseless working: d.c. regulated coil.
– Pull-in and drop-out voltages are clearly defined.
SB7392S3

AF contactors comply with international standards IEC 947-1, 947-4-1 and European standards
EN 60 947-1, 60 947-4-1. Moreover, in environment 2, they meet the electromagnetic compatibility rules
AF 95-30 (EMC) : amendment A11 for IEC 947-1 and amendment 2 for IEC 947-4-1.
Using these materials in environment 1 may lead to radio-interferences requiring the use of additional mitigation
methods.
Here are the definitions given in the amendment A11 to standard EN 60 947-1.
Environment 1 : "Mainly relates to low-voltage public networks (see EN 50 082-1 article 5) such as residential,
commercial and light industrial locations/installations. Highly disturbing sources such as arc welders are not
covered by this environment".
Environment 2 : "Mainly relates to low-voltage non public or industrial networks/locations/installations
(see EN 50 082-2 article 4) including highly disturbing sources".

Block diagram and operating diagram


SB7406S5

AF 95-30

Technical data
Type AF 45 … AF 75 AF 95, AF 110
Max. electrical switching frequency cycles/h 600 600
Coil consumption - pull-in a.c. VA 210 450
- pull-in d.c. (U min./U max.) W 135/210 290/450
- holding a.c. VA/W 5/1.5 11/3
- holding d.c. W 1.5 3
Operating time
Between coil energization and : - N.O. contact closing ms 20 … 45 25 … 40
- N.C. contact opening ms 17 … 40 22 … 37
Between coil de-energization and : - N.O. contact opening ms 40 … 70 60 … 120
- N.C. contact closing ms 45 … 75 65 … 125

2/26 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Sommaire Général Sommaire
Section
Chapitre
Section Index

AF Contactors - a.c. / d.c. operated


with controlled supply
a.c. circuit switching

Ordering details, 3-pole contactors


Type Order code Mounted Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Weight
State coil to be completed with coil auxiliary current 220 V 380 V in kg
voltage : ■ voltage code : ■■ contacts AC -1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
θ ≤ 40°C 400 V 240 V Packing
See table opposite See table opposite A A kW kW kW kW 1 piece
AF 50-30-00 ■ 1SBL 35 7001 R ■ ■ 00 – – 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.180
AF 50-30-11 ■ 1SBL 35 7001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.220
AF 63-30-00 ■ 1SBL 37 7001 R ■ ■ 00 – – 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.180
AF 63-30-11 ■ 1SBL 37 7001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 115 65 18.5 30 37 37 1.220
2
SB7536S3

AF 75-30-00 ■ 1SBL 41 7001 R ■ ■ 00 – – 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.180


AF 75-30-11 ■ 1SBL 41 7001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.220
AF 63-30 AF 95-30-00 ■ 1SFL 43 7001 R ■ ■ 00 – – 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.030
AF 95-30-11 ■ 1SFL 43 7001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.070
AF 110-30-00 ■ 1SFL 45 7001 R ■ ■ 00 – – 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.030
AF 110-30-11 ■ 1SFL 45 7001 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.070

Ordering details, 4-pole contactors


Type Order code Mounted Rated operational current Weight
State coil to be completed with coil auxiliary in kg
voltage : ■ voltage code : ■■ contacts AC -1 AC-1
θ ≤ 40°C θ ≤ 55°C Packing
See table opposite See table opposite A A 1 piece

4 N.O. main poles :


AF 45-40-00 ■ 1SBL 33 7201 R ■ ■ 00 – – 70 60 1.420
AF 50-40-00 ■ 1SBL 35 7201 R ■ ■ 00 – – 100 85 1.420
AF 75-40-00 ■ 1SBL 41 7201 R ■ ■ 00 – – 125 105 1.420

2 N.O. and 2 N.C. main poles :


SB7534S3

AF 45-22-00 ■ 1SBL 33 7501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 70 60 1.420


AF 45-40 AF 75-22-00 ■ 1SBL 41 7501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 125 105 1.420

These contactors can be used for controlling either 2 separate circuits, i.e. 2 loads with 2 separate supplies,
or 1 circuit comprising 2 separate loads with 1 single supply (see diagrams below).
When the contactor operates, there is no mechanical overlapping between the N.O. main poles
and N.C. main poles : Break before Make.

These contactors are not suitable for a reversing starter or a star-delta starter or for controlling a single
load from 2 separate supplies.

Coil voltages : ● 1 single supply and 2 separate loads ● 2 separate supplies and 2 separate loads
Rated control Code
voltage Uc :
d.c., 50 and 60 Hz a.c.
V .............. V ■ ■
58 ............ 92 6 4
90 .......... 130 6 5
100 .......... 160 6 6
150 .......... 240 6 7
Operating limits 0.85 ... 1.1 x Uc

Accessories (section 4)
AF 45 … AF 110 contactor accessories are the same as those of standard A contactors.
AF … contactor main contacts sets are the same as those of standard A contactors of equal rating ; see page 4/28.
Specific coils are required, see page 4/29.

● Accessories ........................................................... Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8


● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9

Low Voltage Products 2/27


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

GA75 and GAE 75 Contactors


For D.C. Circuit Switching

General
Arc suppression is more difficult in d.c. than in a.c. To choose a contactor, it is necessary to know the current and
voltage to be broken as well as the L/R time constant of the power circuit to be controlled.
For your information, here are some typical time constant values:
– non inductive loads such as resistance furnaces: ......................... L / R ~ 1ms.
– shunt motors: ................................................................................ L / R ~ 2 ms.
– series motors: ............................................................................... L / R ~ 7.5 ms.
Remark: the addition of a resistor in parallel with an inductive winding makes arc suppression easier.
SB 7573S4

Types
GA75-10 - . . a.c. operated contactor
GA75-10-11
GAE 75-10 - . . d.c. operated contactor.

Description
GA and GAE contactors are fitted with arc chutes with permanent magnets specially designed for d.c. breaking.
The three contactor paths are arranged in series via two supplied and fitted insulated connections (25 mm2).
The GA75 and GAE75 are "single-pole" devices for which the connection polarities indicated next to the connection
terminals must be respected. Furthermore, they are marked 1L1 for the positive terminal and 2T1 for the negative
terminal.

Connection Diagrams
In d.c. circuits, the source to earth (or frame) connection mode is an important element.
Three modes are mainly used
A – insulated source, i.e. unearthed (or not connected to the frame).
B – source earthed via its central point.
C – source earthed via one of its outer poles.
Modes A and B do not impose any constraints with regard to the distribution of the contactor poles between the two
source/load connecting branches. Mode C requirements are therefore suitable for modes A and B.
For mode C, all the poles necessary for breaking must be installed in series between the load and the
unearthed (also not connected to the frame) source polarity.
We recommend this solution for all connection modes.
The above provisions relate to power circuit switching, the SCPD (Short-Circuit Protection Device) must comply with
protection rules.
SB 7574S4

Ordering Details
GAE 75-10-11 Rated insulation voltage Ui = 1000 V d.c. according to IEC 947-4-1 and EN 60 947-4-1.
Maximum switching frequencies: 300 operating cycles/h
Type Order code Mounted Max. rated operational current Weight
State coil to be completed with coil auxiliary DC-1 DC-3 DC-5 in kg
voltage:■ voltage:■ ■ contacts Ue ≤ 440 V Ue ≤ 600 V Ue ≤ 440 V Ue ≤ 220 V Ue ≤ 440 V
θ ≤ 40 °C θ ≤ 40 °C Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A A A A 1 piece

GA75-10-00 ■ 1SBL 41 1025 R ■ ■ 00 – – 100 75 85 85 35 1.22


GA75-10-11 ■ 1SBL 41 1025 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 100 75 85 85 35 1.26
GAE 75-10-00 ■ 1SBL 41 9025 R ■ ■ 00 – – 100 75 85 85 35 1.26
GAE 75-10-11 ■ 1SBL 41 9025 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 100 75 85 85 35 1.30

Accessories (section 4)
Standard A and AE 40 - 75 contactor accessories are suitable for GA75 and GAE 75 contactors.
Coils are the standard coils for A and AE 50 - 75 contactors.
Contacts cannot be changed.

● Accessories ............................................................. Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9


● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7

2/28 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

EHL and EKL


Magnetically Latched Contactors
A.C./D.C. Operated

Description
Magnetically latched contactors are fitted with a double-winding coil and a built-in rectifier for both a.c. and d.c.
operation.
On closing, the first winding is energized by a voltage impulse. The contactor remains latched in closed position
owing to the permanent magnet.
For tripping, the effect of the permanent magnet is cancelled by the second winding.
The contactor can also be unlatched manually by exerting pressure on the side of the contactor where the
contact holder is located.

Ordering Details
2
SB 7593S4

Type Order code Mounted Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Weight
State coil to be completed with aux. cont. current 220 V 380 V in kg
voltage: ■ coil voltage: ■ ■ AC -1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
θ ≤ 40°C 400 V 240 V Packing
EHL 210-30-11
See table opposite See table opposite A A kW kW kW kW 1 piece

3-pole contactors
EHL 210-30-11 ■ SK 825 502 - ■ ■ 1 1 260 210 59 110 110 160 4.65
EHL 210-30-22 ■ SK 825 512 - ■ ■ 2 2 260 210 59 110 110 160 4.7

Coil Voltages: EHL 300-30-11 ■ SK 826 502 - ■ ■ 1 1 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.2
EHL 300-30-22 ■ SK 826 512 - ■ ■ 2 2 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.25
Rated control Code
voltage Uc : 4-pole contactors
d.c., 40 - 400 Hz a.c. EKL 150-40-11 ■ SK 824 542 - ■ ■ 1 1 250 145 45 75 75 110 4.35
V ............. V ■ ■ EKL 150-40-22 ■ SK 824 552 - ■ ■ 2 2 250 145 45 75 75 110 4.40
20 ............ 29 L B EKL 210-40-11 ■ SK 825 542 - ■ ■ 1 1 350 210 59 110 110 160 6.60
30 ............ 41 L C EKL 210-40-22 ■ SK 825 552 - ■ ■ 2 2 350 210 59 110 110 160 6.65
42 ............ 59 L D
59 ............ 82 L T
90 .......... 130 L E Winding Consumption
140 .......... 180 L V Consumption varies according to the Uc voltage value applied for each winding.
178 .......... 240 L F For a given voltage range from the table opposite, the lowest consumption corresponds to the lowest voltage
Operating limits 0.85 - 1.1 x Uc in the range and the highest consumption to the highest voltage in the range.
EHL 210 and EKL 150 EHL 300 and EKL 210
Making winding W 300 - 600 400 - 800
Breaking winding W 190 - 350 190 - 380

Wiring Diagram
SB 7596S4

EKL 150-40-11

● Other Technical Data ............................................. page 2/39 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9


● Accessories ............................................................. Section 4

Low Voltage Products 2/29


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Sommaire Général Sommaire
Section
Chapitre
Section Index

EH Mechanically Interlocked Contactors


EH Mechanically Latched Contactors

EH Mechanically Interlocked Contactors - A.C. Operated


Two mechanically interlocked contactors with the same rating mounted side by side on a base plate without
any wiring.
It is also possible for you to put together these combinations yourself using the components figuring in this
section and in section 4, "Accessories".
A mechanical latching device can be added: see page 4/12.

Ordering Details
SK 823 023

Type Mounted Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Mechanical interlocking Weight
aux. cont. current AC-3 220 V 380 V for contactors in kg
to be completed with 400V 230 V 400 V 690 V
coil voltage code 240 V Packing
table opposite: ■ ■ A kW kW kW 1 piece

SK 824 024- ■ ■ 1 1 145 45 75 110 EH 145 EH 145 5.9


SK 825 423- ■ ■ 1 1 185 55 90 132 EH 175 EH 175 9.9
SK 825 424- ■ ■ 1 1 210 59 110 160 EH 210 EH 210 9.9
A.C. Coil Voltages
SK 826 423- ■ ■ 1 1 260 80 140 200 EH 260 EH 260 14.0
50 Hz 60 Hz Code
SK 826 424- ■ ■ 1 1 305 90 160 250 EH 300 EH 300 14.0
V V ■ ■
SK 827 023- ■ ■ 1 1 400 110 200 355 EH 370 EH 370 30.0
24 (1) - A B SK 827 024- ■ ■ 1 1 550 160 280 500 EH 550 EH 550 30.0
110 120 A F SK 828 023- ■ ■ 1 1 700 220 370 600 EH 700 EH 700 40.5
220-230 240 A L
SK 828 024- ■ ■ 1 1 750 220 400 650 EH 800 EH 800 41.0
380-400 440 A P
500 - A U
Technical Data:
(1) only for EH 145 - EH 300
To prevent the risk of a short circuit occurring during changeover switching at high current levels or an arc time
of 40 ms and more on the contactor poles, use a TP 40 IA timer block mounted on an N contactor relay.
If the consumption of the contactor coils to be operated is too high for the timer block contacts (see
characteristics, page 4/9), use an additional contactor relay.
The time delay must be long enough for the arc to be suppressed on the opening of the first contactor before
the second contactor is closed.

EH Mechanically Latched Contactors - A.C. operated


or
- D.C. operated
EH contactor fitted with a WH latching mechanism both mounted on a base plate
Description and operating details: see page 4/12.

Ordering Details
Order code Mounted Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Latching for Weight
SK 825 025

aux. cont. current AC-3 220 V 380 V contactors in kg


to be completed with 400 V 230 V 400 V 690 V
coil voltage 240 V Packing
table opposite: ■ ■ A kW kW kW 1 piece

SK 824 026- ■ ■ 1 1 145 45 75 110 EH 145 4


SK 825 425- ■ ■ 1 1 185 55 90 132 EH 175 6
A.C. Coil Voltages
SK 825 426- ■ ■ 1 1 210 59 110 160 EH 210 6
50 Hz 60 Hz Code
V V ■ ■ SK 826 425- ■ ■ 1 1 260 80 140 200 EH 260 7.7
SK 826 426- ■ ■ 1 1 305 90 160 250 EH 300 7.7
24 (1) - A B
SK 827 025- ■ ■ 1 1 400 110 200 355 EH 370 16.1
110 120 A F
220-230 240 A L SK 827 026- ■ ■ 1 1 550 160 280 500 EH 550 16.1
380-400 440 A P SK 828 025- ■ ■ 1 1 700 220 370 600 EH 700 21
500 - A U SK 828 026- ■ ■ 1 1 750 220 400 650 EH 800 21.2
(1) only for EH 145 - EH 300

D.C. Coil Voltages


Code
V… ■ ■
24 DB
110 DE
Note: for other voltages, ● Technical Data ..................................... pages 2/33 and 2/39 ● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7
please consult us. ● Accessories ............................................................ Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Thermal O/L Relays ............................................... Section 5 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9

2/30 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Sommaire Général Sommaire
Section
Chapitre
Section Index

Star-Delta Starting

Controlgear Selection Guide


Ambient temperature = 40°C; 30 operating cycles/hour (if compatible with starting time)
Motor power, kW Max. Contactors Thermal Timer Set of power Wiring
starting O/L Relay connections diagram
time from (1)
cold
220- 240 V 380- 415 V 500 V 660- KM1 KM3 KM2
230 V 400 V 690 V seconds Main Delta Star

4 4 7.5 7.5 5.5 5.5 15 A9 A9 A9 TA 25 DU TE 5 S BED 16-1


5.5 5.5 11 11 7.5 7.5 15 A 12 A 12 A9 TA 25 DU TE 5 S BED 16-1
9
12.5
15
11
12.5
15
15
22
25
15
22
25
15
22
25
11
15
18.5
15
15
15
A 16
A 26
A 30
A 16
A 26
A 30
A 12
A 16
A 26
TA 25 DU
TA 25 DU
TA 25 DU
TE 5 S
TE 5 S
TE 5 S
BED 16-1
BED 26-1
BED 40-1
2
18.5 22 37 37 37 37 30 A 40 A 40 A 26 TA 42 DU TE 5 S BED 40-1
25 25 45 45 45 45 30 A 50 A 50 A 30 TA 75 DU TE 5 S BED 50-1
30 33 55 55 63 59 30 A 63 A 63 A 40 TA 75 DU TE 5 S BED 50-1
37 40 63 70 75 63 30 A 75 A 75 A 50 TA 75 DU TE 5 S BED 75-1 page
45 45 75 75 90 90 20 A 95 A 95 A 75 TA 110 DU TE 5 S BED 95 8/10
55 59 90 100 110 132 20 A 110 A 110 A 95 TA 110 DU TE 5 S BED 110

75 75 132 132 160 160 20 EH 145 EH 145 A 110 T 200 DU TE 5 S BSD 145
90 90 160 160 200 250 20 EH 175 EH 175 EH 145 T 200 DU TE 5 S BSD 210
110 110 200 200 220 315 20 EH 210 EH 210 EH 175 T 450 DU TE 5 S BSD 210
132 160 250 250 355 450 20 EH 300 EH 300 EH 210 T 450 DU TE 5 S BSD 300
180 200 355 355 450 560 20 EH 370 EH 370 EH 260 T 450 DU TE 5 S BSD 550
250 250 450 475 600 700 20 EH 550 EH 550 EH 300 T 900 DU TE 5 S BSD 550

355 355 600 600 700 800 20 EH 700 EH 700 EH 550 T 900 DU TE 5 S (2) BSD 700 page
400 400 670 670 750 900 20 EH 800 EH 800 EH 550 T 900 DU TE 5 S (2) BSD 800 8/10
1) The setting current value is: motor nominal current x 0.58.
(2) Interpose an N contacteur relay between the TE 5 S timer and the coil of the delta contactor. (see diagram page 8/10)

● Contactors .................................. pages 2/12, 2/13 ● Accessories (timer, set of connections, etc.) ........................ Section 4
Ordering Details: ● Contactor Relays ................................... Section 3 ● Thermal O/L Relays .............................................................. Section 5

Low Voltage Products 2/31


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A Contactors - A.C. Operated


Technical Data

Type A9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95 A 110
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 3

Insulation Characteristics
Rated insulation voltage Ui
according to IEC 947-4-1 and VDE 0110 (Gr. C) V 1000
according to UL/CSA V 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp. 8 kV

Main Pole Utilization Characteristics


Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 690 1000 1000
Conventional free-air thermal current Ith
acc. to IEC 947-4-1, open contactors θ ≤ 40°C A 26 28 30 45 65 65 100 100 125 125 145 160

with conductor cross-sectional area mm2 4 4 4 6 16 16 35 35 50 50 50 70


Rated operational current I e /AC-1 for air temperature
close to contactor. Ue max. 690 V
θ ≤ 40°C A 25 27 30 45 55 60 70 100 115 125 145 160

with conductor cross-sectional area


θ ≤ 55°C
θ ≤ 70°C
{ mm2
A
A
22
18
2.5
25
20
4
27
23
4
40
32
6
55
39
10
60
42
16
60
50
25
85
70
35
95
80
50
105
85
50
135
115
50
145
130
70
Utilization category AC-3 for air temperature
close to contactor ≤ 55°C
Rated operational current Ie /AC-3 (1)
220-230-240 V A 9 12 17 26 33 40 40 53 65 75 96 110
380-400 V A 9 12 17 26 32 37 37 50 65 75 96 110
415 V A 9 12 17 26 32 37 37 50 65 72 96 110
3-phase Motors 440 V A 9 12 16 26 32 37 37 45 65 70 93 100
500 V A 9 12 14 22 28 33 33 45 55 65 80 100
690 V A 7 9 10 17 21 25 25 35 43 46 65 82
1000 V A - - - - - - - 23 25 28 30 30
Rated operational power AC-3 (1)
220-230-240 V kW 2.2 3 4 6.5 9 11 11 15 18.5 22 25 30
380-400 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
1500 r.p.m. - 50 Hz 415 V kW 4 5.5 9 11 15 18.5 18.5 25 37 40 55 59
1800 r.p.m. - 60 Hz 440 V kW 4 5.5 9 15 18.5 22 22 25 37 40 55 59
3-phase Motors 500 V kW 5.5 7.5 9 15 18.5 22 22 30 37 45 55 59
690 V kW 5.5 7.5 9 15 18.5 22 22 30 37 40 55 75
1000 V kW - - - - - - - 30 33 37 40 40

Rated frequency limits Hz 25 - 400


Mechanical durability in millions of operating cycles 10 10

Max. mechanical switching frequency cycles/h 3600 3600


Max. electrical switching for AC-1 cycles/h 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 300 300
frequency for AC-3 cycles/h 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 600 600 600 600 300 300
for AC-2, AC-4 cycles/h 300 300 300 300 300 300 150 150 150 150 150 150
Electrical durability see pages 2/55 - 2/59
Rated making capacity AC-3 according to IEC 947-4-1 10 x Ie AC-3 10 x Ie AC-3
Rated breaking capacity AC-3 according to IEC 947-4-1 8 x Ie AC-3 8 x Ie AC-3
Max. breaking capacity cos ϕ = 0.45 at 440 V A 250 250 250 420 820 820 900 1300 1300 1300 1160 1160
(cos ϕ = 0.35 for Ie > 100 A) at 690 V A 100 100 100 170 340 340 490 630 630 630 800 800
Short-circuit protection for contactors
without thermal O/L relays - Motor protection excluded (2)
Ue ≤ 500 V a.c. - gG (gl) type fuses A 25 32 32 50 63 63 80 100 125 160 160 200
Rated short-time withstand current Icw 1s A 250 280 300 400 600 600 1000 1000 1000 1000 1320 1320
at 40°C ambient temp., in free air, 10 s A 100 120 140 210 400 400 650 650 650 650 800 800
from a cold state 30 s A 60 70 80 110 225 225 370 370 370 370 500 500
1 min A 50 55 60 90 150 150 250 250 250 250 350 350
15 min A 26 28 30 45 65 65 100 100 100 100 160 175
Heat dissipation per pole Ie /AC-1 W 0.8 1 1.2 1.8 2.5 3 2.5 5 6.5 7 6.5 7.5
Ie /AC-3 W 0.1 0.2 0.35 0.6 0.9 1.3 0.65 1.3 1.5 2 2.7 3.6
(1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A values of 1500 r.p.m., 50Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/0.
(2) For the protection of motor starters against short circuits, see page 7/17.

2/32 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

EH and EK Contactors - A.C. Operated


Technical Data

Type EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EK 370 EH 550 EK 550 EH 700 EH 800
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3

Insulation Characteristics
Ui
V 1000
V 600
Uimp. unless otherwise indicated: 8 kV

Main Pole Utilization Characteristics 2


Ue V 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Ith
θ ≤ 40°C A 200 230 250 260 300 350 400 445 550 800 1000
Conductor cross-sectional area
with preparation mm2 95 120 150 150 185 240 300 300 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300
Rated operational current I e /AC-1
Ue max. 690 V
θ ≤ 40°C A 200 230 250 260 300 350 400 445 550 800 1000
{θ ≤ 55°C
θ ≤ 70°C
A
A
with conductor cross-sectional area mm2
180
155
95
200
160
120
230
200
150
230
170
150
270
215
185
310
250
240
340
290
300
375
325
300
470
400
2 x 185
650
575
2 x 240
800
720
2 x 300
Utilization category AC-3 - θ ≤ 55°C

Rated operational current


Ie /AC-3 (1) 220-230-240 V A 120 145 185 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
380-400 V A 120 145 185 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
415 V A 120 145 185 210 260 300 400 550 700 720
440 V A 120 145 185 210 240 280 370 550 700 720
500 V A 120 145 170 210 240 280 370 550 700 720
690 V A 120 120 170 210 220 280 370 550 700 720
1000 V A 64 80 94 113 125 140 155 175 220 220
Rated operational power
AC-3 (1) 220-230-240 V kW 30 45 55 59 80 90 110 160 220 220
380-400 V kW 55 75 90 110 140 160 200 280 370 400
415 V kW 55 75 90 110 140 160 220 315 400 425
440 V kW 59 75 90 110 140 160 220 315 400 450
500 V kW 75 90 110 132 180 200 250 400 480 520
690 V kW 110 110 132 160 200 250 355 500 600 650
1000 V kW 90 110 132 160 180 200 220 250 315 315

Rated frequency limits Hz 25 - 400


Mechanical durability 10 10 10 5 5 5

cycles/h 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600


Max. electrical cycles/h 300 300 300 300 300 300
switching cycles/h 300 300 300 300 300 300
frequency cycles/h 150 120 120 120 120 120
Electrical durability see pages 2/55 - 2/59
Rated making capacity AC-3 10 x Ie /AC-3 10 x Ie /AC-3
Rated breaking capacity AC-3 8 x Ie /AC-3 8 x Ie /AC-3
Max. breaking 440 V A 1400 1500 1800 2000 2600 5000 5400 7200 7500
capacity at cos ϕ = 0.35 690 V A 1100 1200 1500 1700 2500 5000 5400 6700 6900

gG (gl) type fuses A 250 250 355 355 500 630 800 1000 1000
Rated short-time 1s A 1700 1800 2000 2300 3500 5500 5500 7000 7000
withstand 10 s A 900 1200 1680 1680 2400 5300 5300 6400 6400
current Icw 30 s A 600 700 1000 1000 1500 3700 3700 4500 4500
1 min A 450 550 800 800 1100 3000 3000 3500 3500
15 min A 210 250 320 320 500 1000 1000 1300 1300
Heat dissipation per pole W 10 13 14 18 35 40 60 60 60
W 3 5 6 9 15 15 25 25 28
(1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A values of 1500 r.p.m., 50Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/0.
(2) For the protection of motor starters against short circuits, see page 7/17.

Low Voltage Products 2/33


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A Contactors - A.C. Operated


Technical Data (cont.)

Type A9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95 A 110
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 3

General Technical Data


Standards Devices complying with international standards IEC 947-1 / 947-4-1
and European standards EN 60 947-1 / 60 947-4-1
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) according to amendment A11 to IEC 947-1;
EN 60 947-1 and amendment 2 to IEC 947-4-1 - See also section 7
Certifications - approvals See section 7

Air temperature close to contactor


– fitted with thermal O/L relay °C - 25 to + 55 (0.85 - 1.1 Uc) -25 to +55 (0.85 -1.1Uc)
– without thermal O/L relay °C - 40 to + 55 (0.85 - 1.1 Uc) / - 40 to + 70 (Uc) -25 to +70 (0.85 -1.1Uc)
– for storage °C - 60 to + 80 -40 to +70
Climatic withstand acc. to IEC 68-2-30 and 68-2-11 - UTE C 63-100 specification II acc. to IEC 68-2-30

Mounting positions: Positions 1 to 5 - Ambient temperature ≤ 55°C and control voltage 0.85 - 1.1 Uc
(see diagram, p. 2/37) - Ambient temperature 55 - 70°C and control voltage equal to Uc
Position 6 - Ambient temperature ≤ 55°C and control voltage 0.95 - 1.1 Uc
- Ambient temperature > 55°C unauthorized
Operating altitude m ≤ 3000

Shock withstand 1/2 sinusoidal shock for 11 ms: no change in contact position
acc. to IEC 68-2-27
and EN 60068-2-27 Shock direction: A, C1, C2 : 20 g
Mounting position 1 B1 : 5g
(See page 2/37) B2 : 15 g
Nota: only on plate for A 95 and A 110

Fixing • on mounting rail acc. to IEC 715 and EN 50 022 acc. to IEC 715 acc. to IEC 715
35 x 7.5 mm 35 x 15 EN 50 022 and EN 50 023
35 x 15 mm 75 x 25 EN 50 023 75 x 25
• by screws (not supplied) 2xM4 2xM6
Connecting terminals – Main poles (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw M8 HC, M 8 hexagon
(delivered in open position) M 3.5 M4 M 5 with slotted screw head socket screw with
with cable clamp with 2x(5.6x6.5mm) with single connector single connector
clamp double connect. 13 x 10 mm 14 x 14 mm
– Coil terminals M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screws with cable clamp
– Built-in aux. terminals (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw and cable clamp
M 3.5 M4 M 3.5
Connecting capacity
Main conductors (poles) min. - max. min.-max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max.
Rigid solid (≤4 mm2) / rigid stranded (≥6 mm2) 1 x mm2 1-4 1.5 - 6 2.5 - 16 6 - 50 10 - 95
2 x mm2 1-4 1.5 -6 2.5 - 16 6 - 16 6 - 35
Rigid:
with connector (Cu cable)
with connector (AI/Cu cables)
with double connector (AI/Cu cables)
Flexible without cable end 1 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 1 - 4(1) 2.5 - 10 6 - 35 10 - 70
2 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 1 - 4(1) 2.5 - 10 6 - 16 6 - 35
Bars or lugs: max. width mm ≤ 8 10 30 with LW 110
(see section 4)
hole Ø mm > 3.7 4.2 6
Auxiliary conductors (built-in aux. terminals + coil terminals) min. - max.
Rigid solid 1 or 2 x mm2 1-4 0.75 - 2.5
Flexible without cable end 1 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 (1) 0.75 - 2.5 1 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5
2 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 (1) 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5
Earth screw
Degree of protection Protection against direct contact acc. to VDE 0106 - Part. 100
acc. to IEC 529, IEC 947-1 – Main terminals IP 20 IP 10
and EN 60529 – Coil terminals IP 20
– Auxiliary terminals IP 20
(1) 1 or 2 times 0.75 - 4mm2 but with 0.75 and 1 mm2 cable end.

2/34 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

EH and EK Contactors - A.C. Operated


Technical Data (cont.)

Type EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EK 370 EH 550 EK 550 EH 700 EH 800
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3

General Technical Data


Standards Devices complying with international standards IEC 947-1 / 947-4-1 and European standards EN 60 947-1 / 60 947-4-1

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) according to amendment A11 to the above standards


and amendment 2 to standard IEC 947-4-1 - see section 7
Certifications - approvals

Air temperature
See section 7
2
close to °C – 25 to + 55 (0.85 - 1.1 Uc)
contactor °C – 40 to + 70 (1) (0.85 - 1.1 Uc)
°C – 50 to + 70
Climatic Withstand according to IEC 68-2-30

Mounting position Position 1 : ± 30°


Positions 3, 4 and 5 : tolerated
Position 6 : only tolerated for 0.90 - 1.1 Uc
not suitable for devices fitted with a dual frequency coil
Operating altitude m ≤ 3000

Shock withstand 1/2 sinusoidal shock for 15 ms: without change in contact position
in position 1 Contactors in making or breaking position
Shock direction: C1, C2, A : 10 g
B1 : 10 g
B2 : 10 g

Fixing

2 x M5 4 x M 6 2 x M 5 4xM6 4 x M 6 (2)
Connecting Flat type with screws and bolts
terminals

M6 M 10
Cable clamp with M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv screws
Terminals protected against direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100
Connecting
capacity

min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min.-max.


(Cu cable) 25 - 120 25 - 185 70 - 300 70 - 300 - -
(AI/Cu cables) 10 - 70 35 - 120 70 - 300 70 - 300 95-300 -
(AI/Cu cables) - - - 35 - 185 95-300 -

mm ≤ 30 30 33 50 55 65 75
mm > 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 x 2

1 or 2 x mm2 0.5 - 2.5


1 x mm2 0.5 - 2.5
2 x mm2 0.5 - 2.5
Earth screw M10
Degree of protection
– Main terminals IP 00 (terminal shroud, see section 4)
– Coil terminals IP 20
– Auxiliary terminals IP 20
(1) For large coil voltage range, please consult us. (2) Screws and bolts as well as damping elements supplied.

Low Voltage Products 2/35


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A Contactors - A.C. Operated


Technical Data (cont.)

Magnet System Characteristics


Type A9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95 A 110
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 3
Coil operating limits acc. to IEC 947-4-1: 0.85 - 1.1 X Uc θ ≤ 55°C θ ≤ 70°C
Drop-out voltage in % of Uc roughly 40 - 65 %
Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 70 120 180 350
- 60 Hz VA 80 140 210 450
- 50/60 Hz (1) VA/VA 74/70 125/120 190/180 410/365
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5 22/6.5
- 60 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5 26/8
- 50/60 Hz (1) VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5 27/7.5
Rated control circuit voltage Uc
at 50 Hz V 20 - 690
at 60 Hz V 24 - 600
Operating time Between coil energization and:
- N.O. contact closing ms 10 - 26 8 - 21 8 - 27 10 - 25
- N.C. contact opening ms 7 - 21 6 - 18 7 - 22 7 - 22
Between coil de-energization and:
- N.O. contact opening ms 4 - 11 4 - 11 4 - 11 7 - 15
- N.C. contact closing ms 9 - 16 7 - 14 7 - 14 10 - 18
(1) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes ■
8 ■
0 to ■
8 ■
8 , see page 0/1.

Characteristics of A 9 - A 40 Contactor Built-in Auxiliary Contacts


(for additional auxiliary contact blocks: see section 4)

Rated operational voltage Ue V 690


Conventional free air thermal current Ith - θ ≤ 40°C A 16
Rated operational current 24-127 V 50/60 Hz A 6
Ie /AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 220-240 V 50/60 Hz A 4
380-440 V 50/60 Hz A 3
500 V 50/60 Hz A 2
690 V 50/60 Hz A 2
Ie /DC-13 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24 V d.c. A/W 6 / 144
48 V d.c. A/W 2.8 / 134
72 V d.c. A/W 2 / 144
125 V d.c. A/W 1.1 / 138
250 V d.c. A/W 0.55 / 138
Operational current frequency Hz 25 - 400
Rated making capacity acc. to IEC 947-5-1 10 x Ie /AC-15
Rated breaking capacity acc. to IEC 947-5-1 10 x Ie /AC-15
Short-circuit protection - gG (gl) type fuses A 10
Rated short-time withstand current Icw for 1.0 s 100 A
for 0.1 s 140 A
Insulating resistance at 500 V d.c. after durability test: 5 MΩ
Min. switching capacity 17 V / 5 mA
Non-overlapping time between N.O. and N.C. contacts ms ≥2
Heat dissipation per pole at 6 A W 0.10
Electrical durability
Max. switching frequency 1200 cycles/h
AC-15 according to IEC 947-5-1
making current: 10 x Ie with cos ϕ = 0.7 and Ue
breaking current: Ie with cos ϕ = 0.4 and Ue

The curve opposite shows the electrical durability of the


built-in auxiliary contacts with respect to the breaking current.

This curve has been drawn for resistive and inductive


loads up to 690 V, 40 - 60 Hz.

2/36 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

EH and EK Contactors - A.C. Operated


Technical Data (cont.)

Magnet System Characteristics


Type EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EK 370 EH 550 EK 550 EH 700 EH 800
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3
θ ≤ 70 °C
roughly 45 - 65 %
Coil consumption
- 50 Hz VA 800 430 800 1100 2600 3500 2600 3500
- 60 Hz VA 900 490 900 1200 2900 4000 2900 4000
- 50/60 Hz (1) VA/VA 500 460/400 500 630 3800/3400
- 50 Hz
- 60 Hz
VA/W 44/15 30/10
VA/W 52/18 35/12
44/15
52/18
52/18
65/22
2800/2450 3800/3400 2800/2450
90/36 125/50 90/36
105/44 140/60 105/44
125/50
140/60
2
- 50/60 Hz (1) VA/W 2.5/2.5 38/12 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 100/47 140/60 100/47 140/60
Rated control circuit
voltage Uc V 24 - 500 24 - 500 48 - 500
V 24 - 600 48 - 600 110 - 600
Operating
time ms 20 - 40 (30 - 50 (2)) 30 - 60
ms 15 - 35 (25 - 45 (2)) 25 - 55

ms 7 - 15 (95 - 120(2)) 10 - 20
ms 10 - 18 (100 - 125 (2)) 13 - 23
(1) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes ■
8 ■
0 to ■
8 ■
8 and E ■ (see page 0/1) (2) 40 - 400 Hz coils with built-in rectifier (see page 0/1)

Mounting Positions (See pages 2/34 and 2/35)

Low Voltage Products 2/37


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

BC and AE Contactors - D.C. Operated


Technical Data

Type BC 9 BC 16 BC 18 BC 25 BC 30 AE 45 AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 AE 95 AE 110
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 3

Insulation Characteristics
Rated insulation voltage Ui
according to IEC 947-4-1 and VDE 0110 (Gr. C) V 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
according to UL/CSA V 600 600 600 600 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp. 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV

Main Pole Utilization Characteristics


Rated operational voltage Ue V 690 690 1000 1000
Conventional free air thermal current Ith
acc. to IEC 947-4-1, open contactors θ ≤ 40°C A 26 28 36 45 65 100 100 125 125 145 160

with conductor cross-sectional area mm2 4 4 6 6 10 35 35 50 50 50 70


Rated operational current I e /AC-1 for air temperature
close to contactor. Ue max. 690 V
θ ≤ 40°C

with conductor cross-sectional area


θ ≤ 55°C
θ ≤ 70°C
{mm2
A
A
A
22
20
17
2.5
28
25
23
4
36
32
28
6
45
40
32
6
55
45
36
6
70
60
50
25
100
85
70
35
115
95
80
50
125
105
85
50
145
135
115
50
160
145
130
70
Utilization category AC-3 for air temperature
close to contactor ≤ 55°C
Rated operational current Ie /AC-3 (1)
220-230-240 V A 9 16 16 25 33 (2) 40 53 65 75 96 110
380-400 V A 9 16 16 25 30 37 50 65 75 96 110
415 V A 9 16 16 25 30 37 50 65 72 96 110
3-phase motors 440 V A 9 16 16 20 27 37 45 65 70 93 100
500 V A 7 13 13 17 23 33 45 55 65 80 100
690 V A 6 8 9 13 18 25 35 43 46 65 82
1000 V A - - - - - - 23 25 28 30 30
Rated operational power AC-3 (1)
220-230-240 V kW 2.2 4 4 6.5 (3) 9 11 15 18.5 22 25 30
380-400 V kW 4 7.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
1500 r.p.m. - 50 Hz or 415 V kW 4 7.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 25 37 40 55 59
1800 r.p.m. - 60 Hz 440 V kW 4 7.5 7.5 11 15 22 25 37 40 55 59
3-phase motors 500 V kW 4 7.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 45 55 59
690 V kW 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 22 30 37 40 55 75
1000 V kW - - - - - - 30 33 37 40 40

Rated frequency limits Hz 25 - 400


Mechanical durability in millions of operating cycles 10 10 10 10 10

Max. mechanical switching frequency cycles/h 6000 6000 3000 3600 3600
Max. electrical switching for AC-1 cycles/h 600 600 600 300 300
frequency for AC-3 cycles/h 1200 1200 600 300 300
for AC-2, AC-4 cycles/h 300 300 150 150 150
Electrical durability see page 2/60 see pages 2/55 - 2/59
Rated making capacity AC-3 according to IEC 947-4-1 10 x Ie / AC-3 10 x Ie / AC-3
Rated breaking capacity AC-3 according to IEC 947-4-1 8 x Ie / AC-3 8 x Ie / AC-3
Max. breaking capacity with cos ϕ = 0.45 at 440 V A 200 200 315 380 1300 1160
(cos ϕ = 0.35 for Ie > 100 A) at 690 V A 120 120 210 290 630 800
Short-circuit protection for contactors without
thermal O/L relay - Motor protection excluded (4)
Ue ≤ 500 V a.c. - gG (gl) type fuses A 25 32/35 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 160 200
Rated short-time withstand 1s A 200 280 280 350 400 1000 1000 1000 1000 1320 1320
current Icw 10 s A 90 130 130 200 250 650 650 650 650 800 800
at 40°C ambient temperature, in free air, 30 s A 50 70 70 110 150 370 370 370 370 500 500
from cold state 1 min A 40 50 50 90 120 250 250 250 250 350 350
15 min A 22 28 28 45 55 100 100 115 125 160 175
Heat dissipation per pole Ie /AC-1 W 0.55 1.5 1.80 2.4 2.2 2.5 5 6.5 7 6.5 7.5
Ie /AC-3 W 0.10 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.6 0.65 1.3 1.5 2 2.7 3.6
(1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A values of 1500 r.p.m., 50Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/0.
(2) 32 A at 240V (3) 7.5 kW at 240 V
(4) For the protection of motor starters against short circuits, see page 7/17.

2/38 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

EH and EK Contactors - D.C. Operated


Technical Data

Type EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EK 370 EH 550 EK 550 EH 700 EH 800
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3

Insulation Characteristics
Ui
V 1000
V 600
Uimp. Unless otherwise indicated: 8 kV

Main Pole Utilization Characteristics 2


Ue V 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Ith
θ ≤ 40°C A 200 230 250 260 300 350 400 445 550 800 1000
Conductor cross-sectional area
with preparation mm2 95 120 150 150 185 240 300 300 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300
Rated operational current I e /AC-1
Ue max. 690 V
θ ≤ 40°C
{θ ≤ 55°C
θ ≤ 70°C
A
A
A
200
180
155
230
200
160
250
230
200
260
230
170
300
270
215
350
310
250
400
340
290
445
375
325
550
470
400
800
650
575
1000
800
720
with conductor cross-sectional area mm2 95 120 150 150 185 240 300 300 2 x 185 2 x 240 2 x 300
Utilization category AC-3 − θ ≤ 55°C

Rated operational current


Ie /AC-3 (1) 220-230-240 V A 120 145 185 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
380-400 V A 120 145 185 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
415 V A 120 145 185 210 260 300 400 550 700 720
440 V A 120 145 185 210 240 280 370 550 700 720
500 V A 120 145 170 210 240 280 370 550 700 720
690 V A 120 120 170 210 220 280 370 550 700 720
1000 V A 64 80 94 113 125 140 155 175 220 220
Rated operational power
AC-3 (1) 220-230-240 V kW 30 45 55 59 80 90 110 160 220 220
380-400 V kW 55 75 90 110 140 160 200 280 370 400
415 V kW 55 75 90 110 140 160 220 315 400 425
440 V kW 59 75 90 110 140 160 220 315 400 450
500 V kW 75 90 110 132 180 200 250 400 480 520
690 V kW 110 110 132 160 200 250 355 500 600 650
1000 V kW 90 110 132 160 180 200 220 250 315 315

Rated frequency limits Hz 25 - 400


Mechanical durability 10 10 10 5 5 5

cycles/h 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600


Max. electrical cycles/h 300 300 300 300 300 300
switching cycles/h 300 300 300 300 300 300
frequency cycles/h 150 120 120 120 120 120
Electrical durability see pages 2/55 - 2/59
Rated making capacity AC-3 10 x Ie /AC-3 10 x Ie /AC-3
Rated breaking capacity AC-3 8 x Ie /AC-3 8 x Ie /AC-3
Max. breaking 415 V A 1400 1500 1800 2000 2600 5000 5400 7200 7500
capacity 690 V A 1100 1200 1500 1700 2500 5000 5400 6700 6900

gG (gl) type fuses A 250 250 355 355 500 630 800 1000 1000
Rated short-time 1s A 1700 1800 2000 2300 3500 5500 5500 7000 7000
withstand 10 s A 900 1200 1680 1680 2400 5300 5300 6400 6400
current Icw 30 s A 600 700 1000 1000 1500 3700 3700 4500 4500
1 min A 450 550 800 800 1100 3000 3000 3500 3500
15 min A 210 250 320 320 500 1000 1000 1300 1300
Heat dissipation per pole W 10 13 14 18 35 40 60 60 60
W 3 5 6 9 15 15 25 25 28
1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A values of 1500 r.p.m., 50Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/0.
(2) For the protection of motor starters against short circuits, see page 7/17.

Low Voltage Products 2/39


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

BC and AE Contactors - D.C. Operated


Technical Data (cont.)

Type BC 9 BC 16 BC 18 BC 25 BC 30 AE 45 AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 AE 95 AE 110
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 3

General Technical Data


Standards Devices complying with international standards IEC 947-1 / 947-4-1
and European standards EN 60 947-1 / 60 947-4-1
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) according to amendment A11 to IEC 947-1;
EN 60 947-1 and amendment 2 to IEC 947-4-1 - See also section 7
Certifications - approvals See section 7
Air temperature close to contactor
– fitted with a thermal O/L relay °C -25 to +50 (0.85 to 1.1 Uc) -25 to +50 (0.85 to 1.1 Uc) -25 to +55 (0.85 to 1.1U ) c

– without thermal O/L relay °C -40 to +55 (0.85 to 1.1 U ) / +55 to +70 (U ) -40 to +55 (0.85 to 1.1 U ) / +55 to +70 (U ) -25 to +70 (0.85 to 1.1U )
c c c c c

– for storage °C -60 to +80 -60 to +80 -40 to +70


Climatic withstand according to IEC 68-2-30 and 68-2-11 - UTE C 63-100 specification II
Mounting positions: Positions 1,3 ,4 -θ ≤ 55 °C: 0.85 to 1.1 Uc Positions 1to 5 - θ ≤ 55 °C: 0.85 to 1.1 Uc
(see drawing p. 2/43) -θ = 55 to 70 °C: ........ Uc - θ = 55 to 70 °C: ....... Uc
Positions 2,6 -θ ≤ 55 °C: 0.95 to 1.1 Uc Position 6 - θ ≤ 55 °C: 0.95 to 1.1 Uc
-θ > 55 °C: not acceptable - θ > 55 °C: not acceptable
Position 5: see tables p. 2/14; 2/19; 2/24
Operating altitude m ≤ 3000

Shock withstand 1/2 sinusoidal shock for 11 ms: no change in contact position
acc. to IEC 68-2-27
and EN 60068-2-27 Shock direction: A, C1, C2 : 20 g
Mounting position 1 B1 : 5g
(see page 2/43) B2 : 15 g
Nota: only on plate for A 95 and A 110

Fixing • on mounting rail according to IEC 715 and EN 50 022 according to IEC 715 acc. to IEC 715
35 x 7.5 mm 35 x 15 EN 50 022 and EN 50 023
35 x 15 mm 75 x 25 EN 50 023 75 x 25
• by screws (not supplied) 2xM4 2xM6
Connecting terminals – Main poles (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw with cable clamp M8 HC, M8, hexagon
(delivered in open position) M 3.5 M4 M5 slotted screw head socket screw with
with single connector single connector
13 x 10 mm 14 x 14 mm
– Coil terminals M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw with cable clamp
– Built-in aux. terminals (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw with cable clamp
M 3.5 M4
Connecting capacity
Main conductors (poles) min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max.
Rigid solid (≤ 4 mm2) / rigid stranded (≥ 6 mm2) 1 x mm2 1-4 1.5 - 6 2.5 -10 6 - 50 10 - 95
2 x mm2 1-4 1.5 - 6 2.5 -10 6 - 16 6 - 35
Rigid:
with connector (Cu cable)
with connector (AI/Cu cables)
with double connector (AI/Cu cables)
Flexible without cable end 1 x mm2 1 - 2.5 1.5 - 4 2.5- 6 6 - 35 10 - 70
2 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 1.5 - 4 2.5-6 6 - 16 6 - 35
Bars or lugs: max. width mm ≤ 8 10 13 30 avec LW 110
(voir ch. 4)
hole Ø mm > 3.7 4 5 6
Auxiliary conductors (built-in auxiliary terminals + coil terminals) min. - max. min. - max.
Rigid solid 1 or 2 x mm2 1-4 0. 75 - 2.5
Flexible without cable end (1) 1 x mm2 1 - 2.5 min. - max.
2 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5
Earth screw
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 529, IEC 947-1 and EN 60529 Protection against direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100
– Main terminals IP 10 IP 10
– Coil terminals IP 20 IP 20
– Auxiliary terminals IP 10 IP 20
(1) Except auxiliary built into BC 25: 0.75 - 4 mm2

2/40 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

EH and EK Contactors - D.C. Operated


Technical Data (cont.)

Type EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EK 370 EH 550 EK 550 EH 700 EH 800
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3

General Technical Data


Standards Devices complying with international standards IEC 947-1/947-4-1
and European standards EN 60 947-1/60 947-4-1.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) according to amendment A11 to the above standards
and amendment 2 to IEC 947-4-1 - See section 7
Certification - approvals See section 7
Air temperature
close to °C – 25 to + 55 (0.85 to 1.1 Uc)
2
contactor °C – 40 to + 70 (1) (0.85 to 1.1 Uc)
°C – 50 to + 70
Climatic Withstand according to IEC 68-2-30
Mounting position Position 1 : ± 30°
Positions 3, 4 and 5 : tolerated
Position 6 : only tolerated for 0.90 - 1.1 Uc
unsuitable for devices fitted with dual frequency coil

Operating altitude m ≤ 3000

Shock withstand 1/2 sinusoidal shock for 15 ms: no change in contact position
in position 1 Contactors in making or breaking position
Shock direction: C1, C2, A: 10 g
B1 : 10 g
B2 : 10 g

Fixing

2 x M5 4 x M 6 2 x M 5 4xM6 4 x M 6 (2)
Connecting Flat type with screws and bolts
terminals
M6 M 10
Cable clamps with M 3.5 pozidriv (+,-) screws
Terminals protected against direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100

Connecting
capacity

min. - max. min. - max. min.-max. min. - max. min.-max.


(Cu cables) 25 - 120 25 - 185 70-300 70 - 300 - -
(AI/Cu cables) 10 - 70 35 - 120 70-300 70 - 300 95-300 -
(AI/Cu cables) - - - 35 - 185 95-300 -

mm ≤ 30 30 33 50 55 65 75
mm > 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 x 2

1 or 2 x mm2 0.5 - 2.5


2
1 x mm 0.5 - 2.5
2 x mm2 0.5 - 2.5
Earth screw M10
Degree of protection
– Main terminals IP 00 (terminal shroud see section 4)
– Coil terminals IP 20
– Auxiliary terminals IP 20
(1) For large coil voltage range, please consult us. (2) Screws and bolts as well as damping elements supplied.

Low Voltage Products 2/41


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

BC and AE Contactors - D.C. Operated


Technical Data (cont.)

Magnet System Characteristics


Type BC 9 BC 16 BC 18 BC 25 BC 30 AE 45 AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 AE 95 AE 110
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 3
Coil operating limits acc. to IEC 947-4-1: 0.85 to 1.1 X Uc θ ≤ 55°C θ ≤ 70°C
Drop-out voltage % of Uc roughly 15 - 40 %
Coil consumption (average value)
- pull-in, from cold state W 7 200 400
- holding, from warm state W 7 4 2.4
Rated control circuit voltage Uc - open L/R ms 40 15 6
- closed L/R ms 90 25 30-40
V 6 - 250 12 - 250 12 - 250
Operating time Between coil energization and:
- N.O. contact closing ms 50 - 75 13 - 30 15 - 25
- N.C. contact opening ms 45 - 70 10 - 27 12 - 22

Between coil de-energization and:


- N.O. contact opening ms 15 - 30* 5 - 15* 15 - 20*
- N.C. contact closing ms 17 - 32* 8 - 18* 18 - 23*
*The use of surge suppressors increases the opening time on a scale of 1.1 to 1.5
for a varistor suppressor and on a scale of 4 to 8 for a diode suppressor.

Characteristics of BC 9 - BC 25 Contactor Built-in Auxiliary Contacts


(for additional auxiliary contact blocks: see section 4)

Rated operational voltage Ue V 690


Conventional free air thermal current Ith A 10
Rated operational current 24-127 V 50/60 Hz A 6
Ie /AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 220-240 V 50/60 Hz A 4
380-440 V 50/60 Hz A 3
500 V 50/60 Hz A 2
690 V 50/60 Hz A 2
Ie /DC-13 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24 V d.c. A/W 6 / 144
48 V d.c. A/W 2.8 / 134
72 V d.c. A/W 2 / 144
125 V d.c. A/W 1.1 / 138
250 V d.c. A/W 0.55 / 138
Operational current frequency Hz 25 - 400
Rated making capacity acc. to IEC 947-5-1 10 x Ie /AC-15
Rated breaking capacity acc. to IEC 947-5-1 10 x Ie /AC-15
Short-circuit protection - gG (gl) type fuses A 10
Rated short-time withstand current Icw for 1.0 s 50 A
for 0.1 s 100 A
Insulation resistance at 500 V d.c. after durability test: 5 MΩ
Min. switching capacity 24 V / 5 mA
Non-overlapping time between N.O. and N.C. contacts ms ≥2
Heat dissipation per pole at 6 A W 0.15
Electrical durability
Max. switching frequency 1200 cycles/h
AC-15 according to IEC 947-5-1
making current: 10 x Ie with cos ϕ = 0.7 and Ue
breaking current: Ie with cos ϕ = 0.4 and Ue

The curve opposite shows the electrical durability of the built-in


auxiliary contacts with respect to the breaking current.

This curve has been drawn for resistive and inductive


loads up to 690 V, 40 - 60 Hz.

2/42 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

EH and EK Contactors - D.C. Operated


Technical Data (cont.)

Magnet System Characteristics


Type EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EK 370 EH 550 EK 550 EH 700 EH 800
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3
θ ≤ 70 °C
roughly 15 - 50 %
Coil
consumption W 450 330 500 630 800 1100 800 1100
W 3.6 22 2.5 2.5 20 20 20 20
Rated control circuit
voltage Uc V 12 - 220 24 - 220 2
Operating
time ms 30 - 50 60 - 80
ms 27 - 47 55 - 75

ms 10 - 35
ms 13 - 38

Mounting Positions (See pages 2/40 and 2/41)

Low Voltage Products 2/43


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Control of lighting circuits

General
Contactor choice criteria for control of lighting circuits are as follows:
– type, power rating and number of lamps
– connection mode
– current values on closing and in steady state
– power factor
– presence or not of correction capacitors

Lighting circuits
In a given circuit, the number and power rating of lamps are defined and cannot result in overload. Only short-circuit protection has to be provided.
gG fuses or modular circuit-breakers will be chosen for this purpose.
The lamps have very specific technical data, according to their construction type.
– Incandescent lamps have a very high current on closing: more than 15 times normal current.
They do not introduce a large phase displacement between current and voltage.
– Fluorescent tubes are equipped with a ballast whose purpose is two-fold: contribute to ignition and limit current to nominal value once steady state
is reached. This ballast is a reactor that considerably lowers the power factor. It may or may not be compensated.

Individual compensation Serial compensation in dual mounting


(parallel compensation)

Choice of contactors
The following tables indicate, for each contactor type, the maximum permissible number of lamps per phase. Air temperature, near the contactor,
must be limited to 55 °C.
Numbers are given for a 230 V voltage distributed between phase and neutral: single-phase (phase + neutral) or three-phase
(3 phases + neutral) distribution.
In the case of a three-phase supply without neutral, 230 V phase-to-phase, the permissible number of lamps per phase will be that given in the tables
multiplied by 0.58.
Example: 120 x100W/230V incandescent lamps - 400 V three-phase network with distributed neutral.
Calculate the number of lamps per phase: 120 : 3 = 40. On the 100 W line of the incandescent lamp table, contactor A12 is limited to
38 lamps per phase, you must thus select contactor A 16 which accepts up to 42 lamps per phase.

Contactors with a.c. coil Type A9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95 A 110


Contactors with d.c. coil Type – – – – – – AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 AE 95 AE 110
Lamp technical data Maximum permissible number of lamps per phase
W A µF

Incandescent and halogen lamps


60 0.27 – 57 65 70 103 142 155 220 246 272 355 390
100 0.45 – 34 38 42 62 85 93 132 147 163 210 240
200 0.91 – 17 19 20 30 42 46 65 73 80 105 120
220 /240 V a.c.
300 1.37 – 11 12 13 20 28 30 43 48 53 70 80
500 2.28 – 6 7 8 12 16 18 26 29 32 42 48
1000 4.55 – 3 4 4 6 8 9 13 14 16 21 24

Fluorescent lamps without compensation - Fluorescent lamps with electronic starter


20 0.38 – 40 44 50 73 100 110 157 173 192 250 278
40 0.45 – 33 37 42 62 84 93 133 145 162 210 234
65 0.70 – 21 24 27 40 54 60 85 94 104 135 150
220 /240 V a.c.
80 0.80 – 18 21 23 35 47 52 75 82 91 118 132
100 1.15 – 13 14 16 24 33 36 52 57 63 82 92
110 1.20 – 12 14 15 23 31 35 50 55 60 79 88

2/44 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Lighting Circuit Switching

a.c. operated contactors Type A9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95 A 110


d.c. operated contactors Type – – – – – – AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 AE 95 AE 110
Lamps characteristics Maximum permissible number of lamps per phase
W A µF

Fluorescent lamps with parallel compensation


20 0.18 5 83 94 105 155 215 233 335 360 400 530 580
40 0.26 5 58 65 75 107 150 160 230 255 280 365 400
65 0.42 7 35 40 45 66 92 100 142 158 173 225 250
220/240 Va.c. 80 0.52 7 28 32 36 53 74 80 115 126 140 180 200
100
110
0.65
0.70
16
18
23
21
26
24
29
27
43
40
59
55
64
59
92
85
101
94
112
104
145
135
160
150
2
Fluorescent lamps in dual mounting
2 x 20 2 x 0.14 – 2 x 54 2 x 62 2 x 67 2 x 99 2 x 137 2 x 148 2 x 214 2 x 236 2 x 260 2 x 336 2 x 375
2 x 40 2 x 0.25 – 2 x 30 2 x 35 2 x 38 2 x 56 2 x 77 2 x 84 2 x 120 2 x 133 2 x 147 2 x 190 2 x 208
2 x 65 2 x 0.40 – 2 x 19 2 x 21 2 x 23 2 x 35 2 x 48 2 x 52 2 x 75 2 x 83 2 x 90 2 x 120 2 x 130
220/240 Va.c. 2 x 80 2 x 0.48 – 2 x 16 2 x 18 2 x 19 2 x 29 2 x 40 2 x 43 2 x 62 2 x 68 2 x 76 2 x 100 2 x 110
2 x 100 2 x 0.60 – 2 x 12 2 x 14 2 x 15 2 x 22 2 x 32 2 x 34 2 x 49 2 x 55 2 x 60 2 x 80 2 x 88
2 x 110 2 x 0.65 – 2 x 11 2 x 13 2 x 14 2 x 21 2 x 29 2 x 32 2 x 46 2 x 51 2 x 56 2 x 73 2 x 82

Compact fluorescent lamps


5 0.045 – 342 388 422 622 855 930 1330 1470 1630 2100 2350
7 0.075 – 205 233 252 372 512 558 798 886 978 1250 1400
220/240 Va.c. 11 0.105 – 146 166 180 266 366 398 570 632 700 900 1000
15 0.135 – 114 128 140 205 285 310 440 490 540 700 780
20 0.160 – 96 109 118 175 240 262 375 415 458 590 650
23 0.180 – 85 96 105 155 212 230 330 368 408 525 580

Low pressure sodium vapour lamps without compensation


35 1.4 – 10 11 12 17 23 26 36 41 45 58 63
55 1.4 – 10 11 12 17 23 26 36 41 45 58 63
220/240 Va.c. 90 2.1 – 6 7 8 11 16 17 24 27 30 39 42
135 3.1 – 4 5 5 8 11 12 16 18 20 26 28
180 3.1 – 4 5 5 8 11 12 16 18 20 26 28

Low pressure sodium vapour lamps with parallel compensation


35 0.6 20 21 23 25 38 46 50 83 96 104 135 147
55 0.6 20 21 23 25 38 46 50 83 96 104 135 147
220/240 Va.c. 90 0.9 25 14 15 17 25 31 33 56 64 69 90 98
135 0.9 45 14 15 17 25 31 33 56 64 69 90 98
180 0.9 45 14 15 17 25 31 33 56 64 69 90 98

High pressure sodium vapour lamps without compensation


150 1.8 – 6 7 8 11 15 17 23 26 29 38 41
250 3 – 4 4 5 7 9 10 14 16 17 23 25
220/240 Va.c. 400 4.4 – 3 3 3 4 6 7 9 10 12 15 17
600 6.2 – 1 2 2 3 4 5 7 8 8 11 12
1000 10.3 – – 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7

High pressure sodium vapour lamps with parallel compensation


150 1 20 13 14 15 23 28 30 50 58 63 81 88
250 1.5 36 8 9 10 15 18 20 33 38 42 54 59
220/240 Va.c. 400 2.5 48 5 5 6 9 11 12 20 23 25 32 36
600 3.3 65 4 4 5 7 8 9 15 17 19 24 27
1000 6.2 100 – – – 4 4 5 8 9 10 13 14

Low Voltage Products 2/45


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

d.c. Circuit Switching


A(E), GA(E), EH and EK Contactors

General
The arc switching on d.c. is more difficult than on a.c.
● For selecting a contactor it is essential to determine the current, the voltage and the L/R time constant of the controlled load.
● For information, typical time constant values are quoted hereafter: non inductive loads such as resistance furnaces (L/R 1 ms), inductive loads
such as shunt motors (L/R 2 ms) or series motors (L/R 7.5 ms).
● The addition of a resistor in parallel with an inductive winding helps in the elimination of the arcs.
● All the poles required for breaking must be connected in series between the load and the source polarity not linked to earth (or chassis).

Contactor Selection - After selection from the ratings quoted in the tables below, please refer to Ordering Details page 2/ 12…
– a.c. operated contactors Type A9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 63 A 75 GA 75
– d.c. operated contactors Type BC 9 … BC30 see page 2/48 AE 45 AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 GAE 75
Utilization category DC-1, L/R ≤ 1 ms
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 120
110 V A 10 15 20 – – – – – – – 120
A 829 D

220 V A – – – – – – – – – – 120
440 V A – – – – – – – – – – 100
600 V A – – – – – – – – – – 75
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
A 830 D

110 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –


220 V A 10 15 20 – – – – – – – –
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
110 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
A 831 D

220 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –

≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –
110 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –
A 832 D

220 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –


440 V A 10 15 20 – – – – – – – –

Utilization category DC - 3, L/R ≤ 2 ms


≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 120
110 V A 6 7 8 – – – – – – – 120
A 829 D

220 V A – – – – – – – – – – 100
440 V A – – – – – – – – – – 85
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
110 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
A 830 D

220 V A 6 7 8 – – – – – – – –
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
110 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
220 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
A 831 D

≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –
110 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –
A 832 D

220 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –


440 V A 6 7 8 – – – – – – – –

Utilization category DC- 5, L/R ≤ 7.5 ms


≤ 72 V A 9 12 16 25 30 40 50 50 63 75 85
110 V A 4 4 4 – – – – – – – 85
A 829 D

220 V A – – – – – – – – – – 85
440 V A – – – – – – – – – – 35
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
A 830 D

110 V A 10 15 20 30 45 50 80 80 90 100 –
220 V A 4 4 4 – – – – – – – –
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
110 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
A 831 D

220 V A 9 12 16 25 30 40 50 50 63 75 –

≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –
110 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –
A 832 D

220 V A 10 15 20 30 – – 70 70 – 100 –
440 V A 4 4 4 – – – – – – – –

2/46 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

d.c. Circuit Switching


A(E), GA(E), EH and EK Contactors

Technical data
● The tables indicate for the standard contactors the Ie max. operating currents depending on: the utilization category (i.e. L/R) DC-1, DC-3,
DC-5 as defined in the IEC 947-4-1 publication (see section 7 for more details), the operating voltage Ue and the pole coupling details.
Ampere values quoted in the tables below are valid for a –25 … +70 °C temperature close to the contactors, as long as the AC-1 Ampere values
(see page 2/32) for the corresponding ambient temperature are not exceeded.
● Max. switching frequency: 300 ops/h.
● For series connection of the poles, use connecting strips LP and LH described in section 4.
● For switching higher d.c. ratings, we recommend the use of bar mounted contactors, R series (63… 2000 A).
● Accessories, see section 4.

a.c.operated Type A 95 A 110 EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EK 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800 2
d.c.operated Type AE 95 AE 110 EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EK 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800

Utilization category DC-1, L/R ≤ 1 ms


≤ 72 V A 145 160 120 145 145 175 210 210 210 260 305 370 550 700 750
110 V A – – 120 145 145 175 210 210 210 260 305 370 550 700 750

≤ 72 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
110 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
220 V A – – 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
≤ 72 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
110 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
220 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
440 V A – – – – – 170 210 210 210 270 300 450 650 800 800
600 V A – – – – – – – – – – – 450 650 800 800
≤ 72 V A – – 200 – 200 – – 260 300 – – – – – –
110 V A – – 200 – 200 – – 260 300 – – – – – –
220 V A – – 200 – 200 – – 260 300 – – – – – –
440 V A – – 200 – 200 – – 260 300 – – – – – –
600 V A – – – – – – – 260 300 – – – – – –
Utilization category DC-3, L/R ≤ 2 ms
≤ 72 V A 96 110 120 145 145 175 210 210 210 260 305 370 550 700 700

≤ 72 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
110 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
220 V A – – 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
≤ 72 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
110 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
220 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
440 V A – – – – – 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
600 V A – – – – – – – – – – – 450 650 800 800
≤ 72 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
110 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
220 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
440 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
600 V A – – – – – – – 170 210 – – – – – –
Utilization category DC-5, L/R ≤ 7.5 ms

≤ 72 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
110 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
220 V A – – 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
≤ 72 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
110 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
220 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
440 V A – – – – – 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
600 V A – – – – – – – – – – – 450 650 800 800
≤ 72 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
110 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
220 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
440 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
600 V A – – – – – – – 170 210 – – – – – –

Low Voltage Products 2/47


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

d.c. Circuit Switching


BC 9 … BC 30 Contactors

General
The arc switching on d.c. is more difficult than on a.c.
● For selecting a contactor it is essential to determine the current, the voltage and the L/R time constant of the controlled load.
● For information, typical time constant values are quoted hereafter: non inductive loads such as resistance furnaces (L/R 1 ms), inductive loads
such as shunt motors (L/R 2 ms) or series motors (L/R 7.5 ms).
The addition of a resistor in parallel with an inductive winding helps in the elimination of the arcs.
● All the poles required for breaking must be connected in series between the load and the source polarity not linked to earth (or chassis).

Technical data
● The tables indicate for the standard contactors the Ie max. operating currents depending on: the utilization category (i.e. L/R) DC-1, DC-3,
DC-5 as defined in the IEC 947-4-1 publication (see section 7 for more details), the operating voltage Ue and the pole coupling details.
Ampere values quoted in the tables below are valid for a –25 … +70 °C temperature close to the contactors, as long as the AC-1 Ampere values
(see page 2/38) for the corresponding ambient temperature are not exceeded.
● Max. switching frequency: 300 ops/h.
● For series connection of the poles, use connecting strips LP and LH described in section 4.
● For switching higher d.c. ratings, we recommend the use of bar mounted contactors, R series (63… 2000 A).

Contactor Selection - After selection from the ratings quoted in the tables below, please refer to Ordering Details pages 2/ 14, 2/17.
– d.c. operated contactors Type BC 9 BC 16 BC 25 BC 30
Utilization category DC-1, L/R ≤ 1 ms
≤ 72 V A 22 28 45 55
110 V A 5 10 – –
A 829 D

≤ 72 V A 22 28 45 55
110 V A 22 28 45 55
A 830 D

220 V A 5 10 – –
≤ 72 V A 22 28 45 55
A 831 D

110 V A 22 28 45 55
220 V A 22 28 45 55
≤ 72 V A 22 28 45 –
110 V A 22 28 45 –
A 832 D

220 V A 22 28 45 –
440 V A 5 10 – –

Utilization category DC - 3, L/R ≤ 2 ms


Utilization category DC - 5, L/R ≤ 7.5 ms
≤ 72 V A 5 9 15 25
A 829 D

110 V A 2 2 – –

≤ 72 V A 9 18 25 30
110 V A 8 16 20 30
A 830 D

220 V A 2 2 – –
≤ 72 V A 10 16 25 30
110 V A 10 16 25 30
A 831 D

220 V A 10 10 15 25
≤ 72 V A 10 16 25 –
110 V A 10 16 25 –
A 832 D

220 V A 10 16 20 –
440 V A 2 2 – –

2/48 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

LV/LV 3-phase Transformer Switching

Switching the primary of 3-phase transformers, on energization of the transformer, is characterized by high current peaks due to the magnetization
phenomena. These current peaks are roughly 20 to 30 times the transformer nominal current.

The tables below show the operational powers for a maximum switching frequency of 60 operating cycles per hour.

A.C. operated contactors Type A 9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95


D.C. operated contactors Type – – – – – – AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 AE 95

Operational power at Ue : 50/60 Hz


220/240 V kVA 4 4 5 9.5 13 15 19 20 22 23
380/400 V kVA 7 7 8 16.5 22 26 33 35 37.5 39
415/440 V
500 V
kVA 8
kVA 9.5
8
9.5
9
10.5
18
21.5
24
28
28.5
34.5
36
43
38
46
41
49
43
52 2
660/690 V kVA 12.5 12.5 14 28.5 37 45.5 57 60.5 65 68
Max. permissible Îpeak A 330 330 360 750 1000 1200 1500 1600 1700 1800

A.C. operated contactors Type A 110 EH 145 EH 175 EH 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800
D.C. operated contactors Type AE 110 EH 145 EH 175 EH 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800

Operational power at Ue : 50/60 Hz


220/240 V kVA 26 35 45 50 55 60 95 105 130 130
380/400 V kVA 46 60 75 90 95 100 165 180 240 240
415/440V kVA 50 65 80 100 110 115 180 200 260 260
500V kVA 60 80 100 120 130 140 220 240 310 310
660/690V kVA 80 105 130 150 170 180 290 310 410 410
Max. permissible Îpeak A 2100 2800 3500 4200 4600 4900 7700 8400 11000 11000

Low Voltage Products 2/49


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Control of three-phase
slip-ring motors

General
Three kinds of contactor are used to control three-phase slip-ring motors: the stator contactor, the acceleration contactor(s) and the rotor short-
circuit contactor. Refer to the diagram opposite.
The selection tables below concern complete smooth starting, excluding specific cases, such as: intermittent operation, regenerative current,
controlled slipping, etc. for which you need to consult our specialised departments.
The starting and breaking technical data for slip-ring motors are defined in standard IEC 947-4-1 in the AC-2 utilization category.
Operating cycle
The load factor is defined by the equation: L. F. (%) = x 100
Cycle time (Operating cycle + Rest cycle)

Stator contactor
Closing of the starting current, conditioned by the value of the rotor resistances: it may reach 1.5 to 4 times motor rated operational current.
Breaking of the rated operational current, or of the starting current, with possible regenerative current.
The following table gives the permissible values of the rated operational stator current, as a function of load factor.
Maximum switching frequency of 600 cycles an hour and temperature of 55 °C maximum near the contactor.

Contactors with a.c. coil A9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95 A 110


Load factor 15 % A 13.5 19 26 35 50 55 70 95 125 200 220
25 % A 12 17 23 32 45 50 63 85 110 165 185
40 % A 10.5 15 19.5 27 39 42 54 73 95 135 150
60 % A 9.5 13 17.5 24 34 37 48 65 85 120 135
S7 acc. to IEC 34-1:
periodical continuous duty
with electrical braking A 9 12 17 26 32 35 45 60 75 96 110

Acceleration contactors
Number of cycles an hour 1 3 6 12 20 30 60 120
The sizing of these contactors is based on the rated
operational current AC-1 (see p. 2/32 and 2/33) that we Current flow time per cycle Factors applicable to Ie /AC-1
recall below for the maximum ambient temperature of 5s 5.2 4.9 4.7 4.3 4.0 3.7 3.4 2.8
55 °C.
10 s 3.8 3.6 3.4 3.1 3.0 2.8 2.6 2.2
Delta connection of these contactors is considered: reduce
currents by 35% if star connection is used. 20 s 2.8 2.7 2.6 2.5 2.4 2.2 2.0 1.6
The table opposite lists the factors to be applied to 30 s 2.4 2.3 2.2 2.1 2.1 1.9 1.7 -
current AC-1 of the contactors in order to obtain the
40 s 2.2 2.1 2.0 1.9 1.9 1.7 1.5 -
permissible limit value of the motor rated operational rotor
current. This table takes into account the number of cycles 60 s 1.9 1.8 1.8 1.7 1.7 1.5 - -
an hour (without inching) and the current flow time per
cycle, in the contactor.

Rated operational current Ie /AC-1


for air temperature near the
contactor ≤ 55 °C A 22 25 27 40 55 60 85 95 105 135 145

Rotor short-circuit contactor


The duty of this contactor is characterised by small closing stresses. The decisive factor is the thermal stress. Delta connection of the contactor
is considered: reduce currents by 35% if star connection is used.
The following table gives the permissible values of the rated operational rotor current, as a function of load factor.
Temperature: 55 °C maximum near the contactor.

Load factor 15 % A 45 58 70 105 112 125 160 210 245 290 330
25 % A 40 51 63 93 102 115 140 180 215 260 300
40 % A 35 42 54 80 87 95 120 155 185 230 260
60 % A 30 39 47 70 76 86 110 140 163 200 230
S7 acc. to IEC 34-1:
periodical continuous
duty with electrical braking A 28 35 40 58 72 85 100 130 152 170 200
Rated operational rotor voltage:
● Maximum values for starting and breaking V 1100 (1320 if star connection) 2200 (2600)
● Maximum values for starting and
electrical braking V 550 (600 if star connection) 690 (730)

2/50 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Control of three-phase
slip-ring motors

Example of a three-stroke starter


– The first stroke corresponds to energisation of the
motor by the stator contactor: all the resistances are
operational in the rotor circuit.
– At the second stroke, the acceleration contactor
short-circuits the first resistance stack.
– At the third stroke, the rotor short-circuit contactor
is activated by eliminating the last resistance stack, thus
completing the starting period.
2

Contactors with a.c. coil EH 145 EH 175 EH 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800
Load factor 15 % A 335 360 425 530 625 850 1130 1400 1500
25 % A 270 300 350 440 515 680 930 1200 1250
40 % A 215 250 300 370 430 580 780 980 1050
60 % A 180 220 255 315 370 480 670 850 900
S7 acc. to IEC 34-1:
periodical continuous duty
with electrical braking A 145 175 210 260 305 400 550 700 750

Rated operational current Ie /AC-1


for air temperature near the
contactor ≤ 55 °C A 200 230 270 340 375 470 650 800 800

Load factor 15 % A 480 580 660 810 950 1200 1600 2050 2200
25 % A 420 530 600 710 830 1050 1400 1800 2000
40 % A 370 460 520 620 720 950 1250 1500 1700
60 % A 330 400 460 560 650 810 1100 1400 1500
S7 acc. to IEC 34-1:
periodical continuous duty
with electrical braking A 290 350 400 470 550 700 950 1200 1300
Rated operational rotor voltage:
● Maximum values for starting and breaking V 2200 (2600 if star connection) 3000 (3600) 4000 (4800 if star connection)
● Maximum values for starting and
electrical braking V 690 (730 if star connection) 690 (730) 690 (730 if star connection)

Low Voltage Products 2/51


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Influence of the Length of Conductors Used in


Contactor Control Circuit

Under certain conditions the excessive length of the control circuit conductors may prevent the contactor from
carrying out closing and opening orders.
– no closing: due to excessive voltage drop (in a.c. or d.c.).
– no opening: due to excessive capacitance (in a.c.).

1st case: closing (contactor with a.c. or d.c. fed control circuit).
The voltage drop is due to the inrush current (inrush power) and to the resistance of the control circuit
conductors.
The table and graph below can be used to determine the single length of line feeders (distance between the
control device and the contactor coil) in relation to:
● the inrush coil consumption.
● the supply voltage.
● the connecting wire cross-sectional area.

The graph has been drawn for a max. line voltage drop of 5%.
Inrush coil consumption (average value)
A.C. control circuit 50 Hz D.C. control circuit
N Contactor relays KC Contactor relays
4 and 8-pole 70 VA 4 and 8-pole 7W
Contactors: Contactors:
A 9, 12, 16 70 VA BC 9, 16, 18, 25, 30 7W
A 26, 30, 40 120 VA
A 45, 50, 63, 75 180 VA AE 45, 50, 63, 75 200 W
A 95, 110 450 VA AE 95, 110 400 W
EH 145 430 VA EH 145 330 W
EH 175, 210, EK 110, 150 800 VA EH 175, 210, EK 110, 150 500 W
EH 260, 300, EK 175, 210 1100 VA EH 260, 300, EK 175, 210 630 W
EH 370, 550 2600 VA EH 370, 550 800 W
EH 700, 800, EK 370, 550 3500 VA EH 700, 800, EK 370, 550 1100 W

Permissible single length for the control circuit conductors on contactor closing:
Depending on the coil inrush power consumption, on the supply voltage and on the control circuit conductor cross-sectional area.

Example:
A 9 contactor
Coil voltage: 230 V 50 Hz, contactor coil inrush power consumption: 70 VA,
control circuit conductor cross-sectional area: Cu 1.5 mm2. Max. permissible length: 2000 m.

2/52 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Influence of the Length of Conductors Used in


Contactor Control Circuit

2nd case: opening (contactor with a.c. fed control circuit)


Single control line length Under certain conditions, an a.c. operated contactor does not open when the control circuit is de-energized.
This is due to a critical capacity of the excessively long control circuit line and the type of contactor coil control
layout (see diagrams A and B opposite).
This may be caused by the following factors:
● high control voltage.
Wiring diagram A ● low coil holding consumption.
Via maintained pushbutton and ● low contactor drop-out voltage (according to IEC 947-4-1: 0.2 to 0.75 x Uc ).
2-core cable (with a capacity of
0.2 µF /km, for example). If lines longer than those indicated are required, the following measures must be taken:


select a contactor with a higher rating.
select a lower control voltage.
2
● connect "RP" impedances in parallel with the contactor coil:
3
– sizing of parallel resistor: R = 10 (with C in µF)
P
C

The table and graph below can be used to determine the single length of line feeders (distance between the
control device and the contactor coil) in relation to:
Single control line length
● the coil holding consumption VA.
● the supply voltage.
● the capacity in µF/km (depending on the control layout).

Wiring diagrams A and B oppposite show two supply and coil control wiring examples.
Coil holding consumption (average value)
For a.c. control circuit 50Hz For a.c. control circuit 50Hz
Wiring diagram B
Via momentary pushbutton plus
Contactor relays: Contactors:
hold-in contact and 3-core cable N, 4-pole 8 VA A 95, 110 28 VA
(with a capacity of 2 x 0.2 = 0.4 µF /km,
for example).
N, 8-pole 8 VA EH 145 30 VA
Contactors: EH 175, 210, EK 110, 150 44 VA
A 9, 12, 16 8 VA EH 260, 300, EK 175, 210 52 VA
A 26, 30, 40 12 VA EH 370, 550 90 VA
A 45, 50, 63, 75 18 VA EH 700, 800, EK 370, 550 125 VA

Permissible single length for the control circuit conductors on contactor opening:
Depending on the coil holding power consumption, on the supply voltage and on the control circuit conductor capacity.

Examples:
A 16 contactor A 50 contactor
Coil voltage Uc = 500V, 50Hz, 8 VA contactor coil holding consumption, Coil voltage Uc = 230V, 50Hz, 18 VA contactor coil holding consumption,
control type: diagram A, via maintained pushbutton, and 2-core cable with control type: diagram B via momentary pushbutton, hold-in contact and
a capacity of 0.2 µF/km. 3-core cable with a capacity of 2 x 0.2 µF/km = 0.4 µF/km.
Max. permissible length: 60 m. Max. permissible length: 380 m.

Low Voltage Products 2/53


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Parallel Connection of Main Poles


Temporary or Intermittent Duty

Parallel Connection of Main Poles


Purpose: Increasing the a.c. resistive load.
Remark: Parallel connection of main poles to increase the d.c. resistive load is not acceptable.
Means: The poles can be connected in parallel via connecting strips: see accessories section 4.
– LP and LH for parallel connection of 2 poles
– LY and LF for parallel connection of 3 poles
– LG for parallel connection of 4 poles
The table below shows the uprating factor for Ie /AC-1 max. in relation to the number of poles in parallel and for a max. switching frequency of:
– 600 operating cycles per hour for A 9 - EH 300 and EK 110 - EK 210 contactors.
– 300 operating cycles per hour for EH 370 - EH 800, EK 370 and EK 550 contactors.

2 poles in // 3 poles in // 4 poles in //


Contactors Factor to be applied to the rated operational current Ie /AC-1 to obtain the permissible current Ie /AC-1
a.c. Operated d.c. Operated with "n" poles in parallel.
A 9, A 12, A 16 BC 9, BC 16
1.6 2.2 2.6
A 26 BC 25
A 26, A 30 BC 18, BC 30
A 40, A 50 AE 50
1.6 2.2
A 63, A 75 AE 63, AE 75 –
A 95, A 110 AE 95, AE 110
A 45-40, A 50-40 AE 45-40, AE 50-40
1.6 2.2 2.6
A 75-40 AE 75-40
EH145
EH175, EH210
EH260, EH 300
EH370, EH550
EH700, EH800
EK110, EK150
} a.c. and d.c.
Operated 1.6 2.2 –

EK175, EK210
EK370, EK550
} a.c. and d.c.
Operated
1.6 2.2 2.8

Utilization of A 9 - EH 800 and EK 110 - EK 550 Contactors for Temporary/Intermittent Duty


The table below shows the factor to be applied to the rated operational current Ie /AC-1 to obtain the permissible operational current Ie / AC-1 in relation
to the switching frequency and the current flow time per cycle.
Operating cycles per hour 120 60 20 6 2 1
Current flow time Factor to be applied to the rated operational current Ie / AC-1 max.
per cycle in seconds. to obtain the permissible current Ie / AC-1 for temporary/intermittent duty.

5 2.8 3.4 4 4.7 5 5.2


10 2.2 2.6 3 3.4 3.7 3.8
20 1.6 2 2.4 2.6 2.7 2.8
30 – 1.7 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
40 – 1.5 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2
60 – – 1.7 1.8 1.8 1.9

Example:
A 9 contactor (intermittent duty, resistive load)
Rated operational current Ie / AC-1 at 55°C (page 2/32) 22 A
Switching frequency 2 operations/h
Current flow time per cycle 20 s
Factor to be applied to the current Ie / AC-1 2.7
Permissible current: 2.7 x 22 = 59 A

2/54 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Contactor Utilization Categories


and Electrical Durability

General
Utilization categories determine the current making and breaking conditions relating to the characteristics of the loads to be controlled by the
contactors. International standard IEC 947-4-1 and European standard EN 60 947-4-1 are the standards to be referred to.
If Ic is the current to be broken by the contactor and Ie the rated operational current normally drawn by the load, then:

Categories AC-1 and AC-3: Ic = Ie - Category AC-4: Ic = 6 x Ie

Generally speaking Ic = m x Ie where m is a multiple of the load operational current.


On pages 2/56 - 2/59, the curves corresponding to categories AC-1, AC-3 and AC-4 represent the electrical durability variation of standard contactors
in relation to the breaking current Ic .
Electrical durability is expressed in millions of operating cycles.
These curves have been plotted for 400 V - 50 Hz 3-phase currents but remain valid up to 690 V - 40-60 Hz provided that a check is carried out
2
to make sure that at the operational voltage Ue , the current Ie normally drawn by the load does not exceed the value of the contactor rated operational
current: Ie / AC-1 for category AC-1 and Ie / AC-3 for categories AC-3 and AC-4. The values are given for each type of contactor in pages 2/32 and
2/33: Technical data.

Curve Utilization Mode


Electrical durability forecast and contactor selection for categories AC-1, AC-3 or AC-4
● Note the characteristics of the load to be controlled:
– Operational voltage ............................................................................ Ue
– Current normally drawn ...................................................................... Ie - Ue / Ie / kW relation for motors, see page 0/0.
– Utilization category ............................................................................. AC-1, AC-3 or AC-4
– Breaking current ................................................................................. Ic = Ie for AC-1 and for AC-3 ; Ic = 6 x Ie for AC-4
● Define the number of operating cycles N required.
● On the diagram corresponding to the operational category, select the contactor with the curve immediately above the intersection point (Ic; N).

Electrical durability forecast and contactor selection for mixed duty motor control: AC-3 (Ic = Ie) type switching off while "motor running"
and, occasionally, AC-4 (Ic = 6 x Ie) type switching off while "motor accelerating" .
● Note the characteristics of the motor to be controlled:
– Operational voltage ............................................................................ Ue
– Current normally drawn while "motor running" ................................... Ie - Ue / Ie / kW relation for motors, see page 0/0.
– Breaking current for AC-3 ................................................................... Ic = Ie
– Breaking current for AC-4 while "motor accelerating" ........................ Ic = 6 x Ie
– Percentage of AC-4 operations .......................................................... K (on the basis of the total number of operating cycles)
● Define the total number of operating cycles N required.
● Note the smallest contactor rating compatible for AC-3 (Ue / Ie) on pages 2/32 and 2/33.
● For the selected contactor make a note of the following in relation to the voltage using diagram AC-4 page 2/58 or 2/59:
– The number of operating cycles A for Ic = Ie
– The number of operating cycles B for Ic = 6 x Ie
● Calculate the estimated number of cycles N' (N' is always below A)

A
N' =
1 + 0.01 K (A/B - 1)

● If N' is too low in relation to the target N, calculate the estimated number of cycles for a higher contactor rating.

Low Voltage Products 2/55


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A, EH and EK Contactor Utilization Categories


and Electrical Durability

Electrical Durability for AC-1 Utilization Category. Ambient Temperature < 55 °C


Switching non-inductive or slightly inductive loads. The breaking current Ic for AC-1 is equal to the rated operational current of the load.

Example:
Ic/ AC-1 = 24 A – Electrical durability required = 2 million operations.
Using the AC-1 curves above select the A 30 contactor at intersection " " (24A / 2 million operations).

2/56 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A and EH Contactor Utilization Categories


and Electrical Durability

Switching cage motors: starting and switching off running motors. The breaking current Ic for AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current Ie
(Ie = motor full load current).

Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-3 - Ue < 440 V - Ambient Temperature < 55 °C

Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-3 - 440 V < Ue < 690 V - Ambient Temperature < 55 °C

Example:
Motor power 40 kW for AC-3 - Ue = 400 V utilization – Electrical durability required = 1.5 million operations.
As stated on the cover page 0/0: 40 kW, 400 V corresponds to Ie = 79 A. Select the A 110 contactor at intersection " " (79A/1.5 million
operations) on the curves (AC-3 - Ue < 440 V).

Low Voltage Products 2/57


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A and EH Contactor Utilization Categories


and Electrical Durability

Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-4 - Ue < 440 V - Ambient Temperature < 55 °C
Maximum number of AC-4 operations: 300 per hour for A 9 - EH 145
120 per hour for EH 175 - EH 800.
Switching cage motors: starting, reverse operation and step-by-step operation. The breaking current Ic is equal to 6 x Ie, keeping in mind that Ie is
the motor rated operational current (Ie = motor full-load current).

Example:
Motor power 45 kW for AC-4 - Ue = 400 V utilization – Electrical durability required = 0.2 million operations.
As stated on cover page 0/0: 45 kW, 400 V corresponds to Ie = 85 A.
For AC-4: Ic = 6 x Ie = 510 A - Select the EH 260 contactor at intersection " " (510A/0.2 million operations) on the curves (AC-4 - Ue < 440 V).

2/58 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

A and EH Contactor Utilization Categories


and Electrical Durability

Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-4 - 440 V < Ue < 690 V - Ambient Temperature < 55 °C
Maximum number of AC-4 operations: 300 per hour for A 9 - EH 145
120 per hour for EH 175 - EH 800.
Switching cage motors: starting, reverse operation and step-by-step operation. The breaking current Ic is equal to 6 x Ie, keeping in mind that Ie is
the motor rated operational current (Ie = motor full load current).

Example:
Motor power 59 kW for AC-4 - Ue = 600 V utilization – Electrical durability required = 0.04 million operations.
As stated on cover page 0/0: 59 kW, 600 V corresponds to Ie = 71.1 A.
For AC-4: Ic = 6 x Ie = 426.6 A - Select the EH 145 contactor at intersection " " (427A/0.04 million operations) on the curves
(AC-4 - 440 V < Ue < 690 V).

Low Voltage Products 2/59


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

BC Contactor Utilization Categories


and Electrical Durability

Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-1. Ambient Temperature < 55 °C


Switching non-inductive or slightly inductive loads. The breaking current Ic for AC-1 is equal to the rated operational current of the load.

Example:
Ic/ AC-1 = 21 A – Electrical durability required = 1.1 million operations.
Using the AC-1 curves above select the BC 16 contactor at intersection " " (21A / 1.1 million operations).

Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-3 - Ue < 500 V. Ambient Temperature < 55 °C
Switching cage motors: starting and switching off running motors. The breaking current Ic for AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current Ie
(Ie = motor full load current).

Example:
Motor power 9 kW for AC-3 - Ue = 400 V utilization – Electrical durability required = 2.3 million operations.
As stated on the cover page 0/0: 9 kW, 400 V corresponds to Ie = 18.3 A. Select the BC 25 contactor at intersection " " (18.3 A/2.3 million
operations) on the curves (AC-3 - Ue < 500 V).

2/60 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Main Summary Index

N and KC Contactor Relays

Contents

Description and Accessories

N Contactor Relays .............................................................................................................. 3/2


KC and TKC Contactor Relays ............................................................................................ 3/4 3
Ordering Details

N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated .................................................................................... 3/6


KC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated ................................................................................. 3/6
TKC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated with Large Coil Voltage Range ............................. 3/7

Technical Data

General Technical Data ....................................................................................................... 3/8


Electrical Durability Technical Characteristics ..................................................................... 3/8
Pole Utilization Characteristics ............................................................................................ 3/9
Magnet System Characteristics ........................................................................................... 3/9
Specific TKC Contactor Relay Characteristics ..................................................................... 3/7

Additional Information

Accessories and Coils ................................................................................................. Section 4


General Technical Data and Approvals ...................................................................... Section 7
Terminal Marking and Positioning ............................................................................... Section 8
Dimensions ................................................................................................................. Section 9

Low Voltage Products 3/1


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary
Section Index

N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated


Description

Application
N contactor relays are used for switching auxiliary circuits and control circuits.

Description
● a.c. operated with laminated magnetic circuit.

● 2 versions: 4-pole/1 stack or 8-pole/2-stack.


The width of 8-pole devices is identical to that of 4-pole devices; only the depth is increased.

● Side by side mounting possible.

● Self-cleaning auxiliary contacts.

● Alone or fitted with a 4-pole CA 5 auxiliary contact block, these devices offer "positive safety" between their auxiliary contacts.

Holes for screw fixing (screws not supplied). Location of surge suppressors
Distances between holes according to
EN 50 002. A2 z
A 21 2 0 - 2 3 0 V 5V 06 0H H z
2 3 0 - 2 4R08 0

Clear marking of coil voltages


Quick fixing on 35 x 7.5 mm mounting rail and frequencies.
according to IEC 715 and EN 50 022.
43NO
NO - 23 NO7- 33NO8-
5- 13 6
Location of function marker.
Location of side-mounted accessories:
mounting on right or left hand side.
N40E
Stops for attaching front-
mounted accessories.

Terminals delivered in open position with


captive screws (screws of unused terminals
should be tightened).
Screwdriver guidance for all screws makes All terminal screws:
it possible to use motorized screwdrivers. Pozidriv (+, -) N° 2
E0537D3

All terminals provide protection against


8- O
accidental direct contact with live parts 7- O 44N
according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100 and 6- 24NO 34N
5- 14NO
offer IP 20 degree of protection according Terminal marking according to
to IEC 947-1. IEC 947-5-1 and EN 50 011.

● Ordering Details ....................................................................... page 3/6 ● General - Approvals ............................................................... Section 7


● Technical Data .......................................................................... page 3/8 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ....................................... Section 8
● Accessories ............................................................................. Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................................. Section 9

3/2 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

N Contactor Relays
Accessories

4-Pole, 1 Stack N Contactor Relays

RV 5
RC 5-1
Surge
suppressor

CAL 5-11
NC
Side-mounted 2-pole
01 auxiliary contact block
02

NC

01

NC

N 22 E
N 31 E
3
N 40 E
Contactor
Relay
NC

E0573DG
02

VM 5-1
VE 5-1
Interlock unit

CA 5-10 and CA 5-01


Front-mounted 1-pole
auxiliary contact blocks
N 22 E
N 31 E
N 40 E TP 40 DA
Contactor Relay TP 180 DA CA 5...
TP 40 IA Front-mounted 4-pole
TP 180 IA auxiliary contact block
Pneumatic timer
CAL 5-11
Side-mounted 2-pole auxiliary contact block

8-Pole, 2 Stack N Contactor Relays

RV 5
RC 5-1
E0574DG

Surge
suppressor

CAL 5-11
Side-mounted 2-pole
auxiliary contact block
NC

01

02

NC

01

NC N 44 E
N 53 E
N 62 E
N 71 E
N 80 E
5-1
VM Contactor Relay
VM 5-1
VE 5-1
NC

02
Interlock unit

N 44 E
N 53 E
N 62 E
N 71 E
N 80 E
CAL 5-11 Contactor Relay
Side-mounted 2-pole
auxiliary contact block

Low Voltage Products 3/3


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

KC and TKC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated


Description

Application
KC and TKC contactor relays are used for switching auxiliary circuits and control circuits.

Description
● Magnetic circuit variants:
– KC types: d.c. operated with solid magnetic circuits.
– TKC types: d.c. operated with solid magnetic circuit and large coil voltage range.

● 2 versions: 4-pole/1-stack or 8-pole/2-stack


The width of 8-pole devices is identical to that of 4-pole devices; only the depth is increased.

● Double sharp auxiliary contacts.

● Alone or fitted with a 4-pole CA 5 auxiliary contact block, these devices offer "positive safety" between their auxiliary contacts.

Location of surge suppressors. Clear marking of coil voltages.

V DC
24
Quick fixing on 35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm Terminal marking according to
mounting rail according to IEC 715 and A1 IEC 947-5-1 and EN 50 011.
EN 50 022.
33 43
13 6-
23 7-
8-
5-

Holes for screw fixing (screws not supplied). Location of function marker
Distances between holes according to and surge suppressor.
EN 50 002. KC 40 E

Stops for attaching front-


Terminals delivered in open position with mounted accessories.
captive screws (screws of unused terminal
E0536D3

should be tightened).
Screwdriver guidance for all screws makes 7-
8-
44
it possible to use motorized screwdrivers. 6- 24 34
5-
All terminals provide protection against 14
accidental direct contact with live parts All terminal screws:
according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100. M 3.5, pozidriv (+,-) N° 2

● Ordering Details ........................................................ pages 3/6 and 3/7 ● General - Approvals ............................................................... Section 7
● Technical Data ........................................................... pages 3/7 and 3/8 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ....................................... Section 8
● Accessories ............................................................................. Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................................. Section 9

3/4 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

KC and TKC Contactor Relays


Accessories

4-Pole, 1 Stack KC and TKC Contactor Relays


RV-BC 6
RT 7
Surge suppressor*

VBC 30
3
Interlock unit KC 22 E
spacer KC 31 E
KC 40 E
Contactor Relay

VBC 30
Interlock unit

E0571DG
KC 22 E
KC 31 E
KC 40 E
Contactor Relay

CA 5-10 and CA 5-01


Front-mounted 1-pole
auxiliary contact blocks

TP 40 DA
TP 180 DA
CA 5...
TP 40 IA
Front-mounted 4-pole
TP 180 IA
auxiliary contact block
Pneumatic timer

8-Pole, 2 Stack KC and TKC Contactor Relays

RV-BC 6
RT 7
Surge suppressor*
E0572DG

KC 44 E
KC 62 E
Contactor Relay

* For selection and use of surge suppressors, see notes page 4/14.

Low Voltage Products 3/5


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated


KC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated

Ordering Details
Type Order code Number of contacts Weight
1st stack 2nd stack in kg
State coil to completed with coil
voltage: ■ voltage code: ■■ Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 1 piece
SB 7362S2

4-pole, 1 stack, a.c. operated


N 22 E ■ (1) 1SBH 14 1001 R ■■ 22 2 2 – – – – 0.340
N 40 E
N 31 E ■ (1) 1SBH 14 1001 R ■■ 31 3 1 – – – – 0.340
N 40 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 R ■■ 40 4 – – – – – 0.340
(1) In mounting position 5, do not use more than 2 front-mounted N.C. The CAL5-11 side-mounted blocks offer additional N.C. contacts.

8-pole, 2 stack, a.c. operated


N 44 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 R ■■ 44 4 – – 4 – – 0.400
N 53 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 R ■■ 53 4 – 1 3 – – 0.400
N 62 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 R ■■ 62 4 – 2 2 – – 0.400
SB7586S4

N 71 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 R ■■ 71 4 – 3 1 – – 0.400


N 80 E ■ 1SBH 14 1001 R ■■ 80 4 – 4 – – – 0.400
N 44 E with overlapping of lagging/leading contacts (see page 8/4)
N 33/11 ■ 1SBH 14 1001 R ■■ 39 3 1 – 2 1 1 0.400
N 51/11 ■ 1SBH 14 1001 R ■■ 59 4 – 1 1 1 1 0.400
4-pole, 1 stack, d.c. operated
KC 22 E ■ FPH 141 3001 R ■ 22 ■ 2 2 – – – – 0.540
KC 31 E ■ FPH 141 3001 R ■ 31 ■ 3 1 – – – – 0.540
KC 40 E ■ FPH 141 3001 R ■ 40 ■ 4 – – – – – 0.540
SB 6523S3

8-pole, 2 stack, d.c. operated


KC 44 E ■ FPH 142 3001 R ■ 44 ■ 4 – – 4 – – 0.600
KC 22 E
KC 62 E ■ FPH 142 3001 R ■ 62 ■ 4 – 2 2 – – 0.600

Mounting Distance required between KC contactor relays.


d
d D Ambient temperature Max. switching frequency
°C

ABB
mm mm Operating cycles/h
ABB ABB
2 20 < 20 1200 Pos. 3, 4

D
5 20 < 55 1200
SB 6514S3

E0201D1
ABB
Pos.1, 2, 5, 6

KC 44 E Mounting Positions of KC contactor relays.


The following table shows permissible mounting positions depending on the ambient temperature, contactor
30° 30° coil operating limits and whether or not there are add-on accessories: auxiliary contact blocks, pneumatic timer.

Ambient Contactor relay Permissible Coil Add-on accessories


ABB temp. without access. mounting operating 1-pole aux. contacts or 4-pole aux. contacts or Timer
Built-in auxiliary positions limits CA5-10 CA5-01 CA5-40 (4 x N.O.) TP 40 DA/IA
contacts (N.O.) (N.C.) or CA5-31 (3 x N.O. + 1 x N.C.) or TP 180 DA/IA
or CA5-22 (2 x N.O. + 2 x N.C.)

Pos. 1 Pos. 1 ± 30°


θ °C Pos. x Uc Qty : Qty : Qty : Qty :

KC 40 E
KC 31 E
} 1, 3, 4
1±30°, 2, 6
0.85-1.1
0.95-1.1
1
1
to
to
4
4
1**
1**
1
1
5* 0.85-1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max. 1 TP..DA
ABB

< 55

ABB
Pos. 3
KC 22 E
} 1, 2, 3, 4
1 ± 30°
0.85-1.1
0.85-1.1
1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max.
1 to 4 -
1
1 CA5-40
-
-
6 0.95-1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max. 1 -
ABB

Pos. 2
( 55 °C) > 55
KC 40 E
} 1, 1±30°, 2, 3, 4 Uc 1 to 4 1** 1
KC 31 E 5* Uc 1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max. 1 TP..DA
and
Pos. 4
≤ 70 KC 22 E
} 1, 2, 3, 4 Uc 1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max. 1 -
1 ± 30° Uc 1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -
* In position 5, do not use the RD7 diode unit: consult us. Maximum operating voltage: Ue < 440 V a.c.
**The CA5-04 four-pole auxiliary contact block (4 x N.C. contacts) can be used on those type.

Note: For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diode, varistor, etc.), see notes page 4/14.
E0203DG1

Pos. 5 Pos. 6 ( 55 °C) ● Accessories ........................................................... Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
except KC 22 E ● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9

3/6 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TKC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated


with Large Coil Voltage Range

Application
TKC contactor relays with a large coil voltage range have been designed to operate in control circuits
characterized by large variations in voltage supply. Example: battery supply.

Ordering Details
Type Order code Number of contacts Weight
State coil to be completed with coil 1st stack 2nd stack in kg
FRCTL 6524S5

voltage: ■ voltage code: ■..■


Packing
See table opposite See table opposite 1 piece
TKC 22 E
4-pole, 1 stack
TKC22 E ■ FPH 141 3061 R ■ 22 ■ 2 2 – – 0.540
TKC 31 E ■ FPH 141 3061 R ■ 31 ■ 3 1 – – 0.540
Coil operating limits: TKC 40 E ■ FPH 141 3061 R ■ 40 ■ 4 – – – 0.540

Voltage: V -d.c. Code 8-pole, 2 stack


min. Uc max. R ■ .. ■

9 .......... 15 5 .. 6
TKC44 E ■
TKC62 E ■
FPH 142 3061 R ■ 44 ■
FPH 142 3061 R ■ 62 ■
4
4



2
4
2
0.600
0.600
3
17 .......... 32 5 .. 1
25 .......... 45 5 .. 2
36 .......... 65 5 .. 4 Coil Characteristics
50 .......... 90 5 .. 5
77 ........ 143 6 .. 2 ! No extra tolerances applicable to the Uc min. ... max. values quoted in table opposite.
90 ........ 150 6 .. 6 – Coil consumption at Uc max. θ = 20 °C: 9 W pull-in/holding
120 ........ 167 6 .. 3 – Replacement coils: consult us (standard coils used on KC contactor relays are not suitable for TKC contactor
Other voltages: consult us. relays).

Mounting Distance for coil operating limits U c min. … Uc max. d

ABB
d D Ambient temp. Max. switching frequency
ABB ABB
mm mm °C Operating cycles/h
Pos. 3, 4

D
2 20 < 20 1200
5 20 < 55 1200

E0201D2
ABB
Pos.1

Technical Characteristics
FRCTL 6522S2

Identical to those of standard KC contactor relays (see page 3/8) except:


– Air temperature near contactor: 55 °C max.
TKC 62 E – Mounting positions : 1, 1±30°, 3 and 4 only
– Shock withstand in position 1 for contactors screwed on their support and without N.C. add-on aux. contact block.
1/2 sinusoidal shock of 11 ms: no change in contact position C1

Shock direction A B1 B2 C1 C2
Making position 15 g 10 g 10 g 10 g 10 g ABB
A A B1 B2
Breaking position 10 g 5 g* 6 g** 4g 4g
Exceptions: *4g for TKC 22 ; **5g for TKC 31 ; Consult us for TKC 44
Mounting positions:
E0202D

*3g for TKC 62 ; **3g for TKC 62


C2

Add-on Accessories
Contactor Max. number of auxiliary contact blocks Timer Mechanical Function
ABB relays CA5-10 CA5-01 CA5-40 CA5-31 CA5-22 CA5-04 TP interlock marker
Pos. 1, 3 or 4
TKC 40-E 4 2 1 1 1 – – VBC 30 BA 5-50
Pos. 1, 3 or 4
TKC 31-E 4 1 1 1 – – – VBC 30 BA 5-50
Pos. 1, 3 or 4
TKC 22-E 4 – 1 – – – – VBC 30 BA 5-50
ABB

Pos. 1 ±30°
TKC - all types – – – – – – – VBC 30 BA 5-50
For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diodes, varistors, etc.) with TKC contactor relays, see notes page 4/14.
ABB

Note: Railway (Traction) projects ..... on request.


E0204D

● Accessories ........................................................... Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8


● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9

Low Voltage Products 3/7


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated


KC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated
Technical Data
Type N22, N31, N40 N44 ... N80, N33/11, N51/11 KC22, KC31, KC40 KC44, KC62
Number of poles 4 8 4 8

Insulation Characteristics
Rated insulation voltage Ui
acc. to IEC 947-5-1 and VDE 0110 (Gr. C) V 690
acc. to UL/CSA V 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
acc. to IEC 947-5-1 kV 8

General Technical Data


Standards Devices complying with international standards IEC 947-5-1/947-4-1
and European standards EN 60 947-5-1/60 947-4-1
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) according to amendment A11 to IEC 947-1;
EN 60 947-1 and amendment 2 to IEC 947-4-1 - See also section 7
Certifications - approvals See section 7
Air temperature near contactor
– for operation in free air: °C -40 to +55 (0.85 - 1.1 Uc) / +55 to +70 (Uc)
– for storage: °C -60 to +80
Climatic withstand according to IEC 68-2-30 and 68-2-11 - UTE C 63-100, Specification II
Mounting positions: Positions 1 to 5 - θ < 55°C : 0.85 ........ 1.1Uc Pos. 1, 3, 4 and 5 - θ < 55°C : 0.85 ... 1.1 Uc
- θ = 55 ... 70°C : ............ Uc Pos. 1±30°, 2 and 6 - θ < 55°C : 0.95 ... 1.1 Uc
Position 6 - θ < 55°C : 0.95 ........ 1.1Uc Pos. 1 or 1±30° to 5 - θ = 55 ... 70°C : ........ Uc
(see diagrams below) - θ > 55°C : not acceptable . Pos. 6 - θ > 55°C : not acceptable
Operating altitude m < 3000
Shock withstand according to C1 1/2 sinusoidal shock, 11 ms: no change in contact position
IEC 68-2-27 and
EN 60068-2-27 A
ABB
A B1 B2 Shock direction: A, C1, C2 : 20 g
Mounting pos. 1 B1 : 5g
E0202D1

(see below) B2 : 15 g
C2

Fixing – on mounting rail 35 mm according to IEC 715 and EN 50022


– with screws (not supplied) 2 x M4
Connection terminals (delivered in open position, M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw with cable clamp
screws of unused terminals must be tightened)
Connecting capacity
Rigid solid 1 x mm2 1-4
2 x mm2 1-4
Flexible without 1 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 1 - 2.5
cable end 2 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5
With lugs max. width mm 8
hole Ø mm 3.7
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 947-1, EN 60947-1,
IEC 529, EN 60529
- Pole terminals IP 20 IP 10
- Coil terminals IP 20 IP 20

Mounting positions Electrical durability of contacts


utilization category AC - 15 according to IEC 947-5-1
making current: 10 x Ie with cos ϕ = 0.7 and Ue
breaking current: Ie with cos ϕ = 0.4 and Ue
30

The curves opposite 20


show the electrical
10
durability of the
CA5, CAL 5
contactor relays as 4a
5 nd
well as the add-on 8-p
4a ole
ABB 3 Nt
auxiliary contact nd ype
Million ops

2
8-p s
blocks in relation to ole
KC
the breaking current Ic. 1
typ
es
These curves have
been drawn for 0.5

resistive and inductive 0.3


loads up to 690 V,
E0298DG

0.2
40...60 Hz.
E0200D1

0.1
0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 10

Breaking current (A)

3/8 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated


KC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated
Technical data
Type N22, N31, N40 N44 ... N80, N33/11, N51/11 KC22, KC31, KC40 KC44, KC62
Number of poles 4 8 4 8

Pole Utilization Characteristics


Rated operational voltage Ue V 690
Conventional thermal current in free air Ith
according to IEC 947-5-1 θ ≤ 40°C A 16 10
Rated operating current Ie
in AC-15 according to IEC 947-5-1
24-127 V 50/60 Hz A 6 6
230-240 V 50/60 Hz A 4 4
400-415 V 50/60 Hz A 3 3
500 V 50/60 Hz A 2 2
690 V 50/60 Hz A 2 2
in DC-13 according to IEC 947-5-1
24 V d.c. A/W 6/144 6/144
48 V d.c.
72 V d.c.
A/W
A/W
2.8/134
1/72
2.8/134
1/72
3
125 V d.c. A/W 0.55/69 0.55/69
250 V d.c. A/W 0.3/75 0.3/75
Field of rated frequencies Hz 25 - 400
Mechanical durability in operating cycles > 20 million 30 million
Max. switching frequency cycles/h 6000 6000
Electrical durability in operating cycles See curves page 3/8
Max. switching frequency cycles/h 1200
Rated making capacity according to IEC 947-5-1 10 x Ie /AC-15
Rated breaking capacity according to IEC 947-5-1 10 x Ie /AC-15
gG (gl) protection fuse A 10
Rated short-time withstand current 1.0 s 100 A 50 A
at ambient temp. of 40 °C, in free air, from cold state 0.1 s 140 A 100 A
Insulation resistance at 500 V d.c. after durability test: 5 MΩ
Min. switching capacity
with failure rate below 10-6 17 V / 5 mA 24 V / 5 mA
Non-overlapping time between N.O. and N.C.
contacts ms ≥2
Power loss per pole at 6A W 0.10 0.15

Magnet System Characteristics


Coil operating limits θ ≤ 40°C according to IEC 947-5-1 : 0.85 - 1.1 Uc
Drop-out voltage in % of Uc roughly 40 - 65% roughly 10 - 30%
Coil consumption (average value)
– a.c. operation: 50 Hz pull-in VA 70
60 Hz pull-in VA 80
50/60 Hz (1) pull-in VA/VA 74/70
50/60Hz holding VA/W 8/2
– d.c. operation: cold pull-in W 7
warm holding W 7
Rated control voltage Uc
– a.c. operation: 50/60 Hz V 20 - 690 -
– d.c. operation: V d.c. - 24 - 240
Max. permissible short supply interruption
without opening of contacts ms 2 2
Operating time
between coil energization and:
– closing of N.O. contact ms 10 - 26 50 - 75
– opening of N.C. contact ms 7 - 21 45 - 70
between coil de-energization and:
– opening of N.O. contact ms 4 - 11 15 - 30 *
– closing of N.C. contact ms 9 - 16 17 - 32 *
*Using surge suppressors increases the opening time by a
ratio of 1.1 to 1.5 for a varistor suppressor and by 4 to 8 for a
diode suppressor .

Influence of length of conductors in control


circuit on contactor opening and closing see pages 2 /52 and 2/53
(1) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes ■
8 ■
0 to ■
8 ■
8 , see page 0/1.

Low Voltage Products 3/9


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Notes

3/10 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Main Summary Index

Accessories for Contactors


and Contactor Relays

Contents

Main Accessories for Contactors and Contactor Relays: Compatibility ................................ 4/3
Auxiliary Contact Blocks ....................................................................................................... 4/4
TE5S Electronic Timer for Star-Delta Starters ...................................................................... 4/6
TP Pneumatic Timer Blocks .................................................................................................. 4/8
Mechanical Interlock Units/ Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units ............................... 4/10
Mechanical Latching Units .................................................................................................. 4/12
Surge Suppressors for Contactor Coils .............................................................................. 4/14
RA 30 and RA 5 Interface Relays ....................................................................................... 4/16 4
Connection Auxiliaries for Control Leads- Impulse Contact Blocks .................................... 4/18
Lamp Holder - Fuse Holder - Function Markers .................................................................. 4/19
Terminal Connecting Strips ................................................................................................. 4/20
Connectors - Flat Pin Terminal Blocks ................................................................................ 4/21
Terminal Accessories .......................................................................................................... 4/22
Terminal Shrouds ................................................................................................................ 4/23
Connection Sets .................................................................................................................. 4/24
Plates for: EH 145 - EH 800 3-pole Contactors
EK 110 - EK 550 4-pole Contactors ................................................................... 4/26
Main Contact Sets - Arc Chutes .......................................................................................... 4/28
Contactor Operating Coils ................................................................................................... 4/29

Low Voltage Products 4/1


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary
Section Index
A 9 - A 110 and AE 45 - AE 110 Contactors
N Contactor Relays

NC

01

02

NC

01

NC

NC

02

VM 5 ...
VE 5 ...
Interlock unit

E0566DG
CA 5...
Front-mounted
CAL 5-11 1-pole auxiliary
Side-mounted contact blocks
2-pole auxiliary
contact block
CA 5...
Front-mounted
4-pole auxiliary
contact block

* TP...
Pneumatic
timer

*Use Electronic Timer TE 5S (page 4/6) with A(E) 95 and A(E) 110 Contactors

EH 145 - EH 800 and EK 110 - EK 550 Contactors


E0567D

VH ...
VK ...

CAL 16-11

4/2 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Main Accessories for Contactors


and Contactor Relays
Compatibility
Configurations of accessories are different depending on whether these are front-mounted or side-mounted.
N Contactor Relays Accessories - Front mounting Accessories - Side mounting
A and AE Contactors Auxiliary contact blocks TP - A Pneumatic Auxiliary contact Blocks Interlock units
1-pole CA 5- 4-pole CA 5- timer block 2-pole CAL5-11 ● mechanical VM 5-
Type Main Built-in ● mech. + elec. VE 5-
poles auxiliary
contacts

E0542D3

E0552D3

E0543D3

E0544D3
E0722D
N ............................... (1) 2 2 E 1 to 4 CA 5- 1 CA 5- 1 to 2 1 VM/E 5-1 block
N ............................... (1) 3 1 E 1-pole blocks or 4-pole block or 1 TP - A block + CAL 5-11 blocks or
+ 1 CAL5-11 block
N ................................... 4 0 E
N ................................... 4 4 E
N ................................... 5 3 E 1 to 2 1 VM/E 5-1 block
N ................................... 6 2 E — — — + CAL 5-11 blocks or
+ 1 CAL5-1 block
N ................................... 7 1 E
N ................................... 8 0 E
A 9 - A 26 - 3 0 - 1 0
A 9 - A 26 - 3 0 - 0 1 1 to 4 CA 5- 1 CA 5- 1 to 2 M
(1)
or or 1 TP. - A block + or 1 V /E 5-1 block
A 9 - A 26 - 4 0 - 0 0 1-pole blocks 4-pole block CAL 5-11 blocks + 1 CAL5-11 block
A 9 - A 26 - 2 2 - 0 0 (1)
A 9 - A 16 - 3 0 - 2 2 1 to 2 1 VM/E 5-1 block
A 9 - A 26 - 3 0 - 3 2 — — — + CAL 5-11 blocks or + 1 CAL5-11 block
A 30, A 40 - 3 0 - 1 0 1 to 5 CA 5- 1 CA 5- 4-pole block 1 TP - A block 1 to 2 1 VM/E 5-1 block
+
A 30, A 40
A 30, A 40
- 3 0
- 3 0
-
-
0
3
1
2
1-pole blocks
1 CA 5-
or
+ 1 CA 5- 1-pole block


or
+ 1 CA 5- 1-pole block

— +
CAL 5-11 blocks
1 to 2
or
+ 1 CAL5-11 block
1 VM/E 5-1 block
or + 1 CAL5-11 block
4
1-pole block CAL 5-11 blocks
A 50 - A 75 - 3 0 - 0 0 1 to 6 CA 5- 1 CA 5- 4-pole block 1 TP - A block
A 45 - A 75 - 4 0 - 0 0 1-pole blocks + 2 CA 5- 1-pole blocks + 2 CA 5- 1 to 2 1 VE 5-2 block
A 45, A 75 - 2 2 - 0 0 (2)
or or
1-pole blocks
+ CAL 5-11 blocks
or
+ 1 CAL5-11 block
A 95, A 110 - 3 0 - 0 0 —
A 50 - A 75 - 3 0 - 2 2 2 CA 5- 1 to 2 1 VE 5-2 block
A 95, A 110 - 3 0 - 2 2 1-pole blocks — — + CAL 5-11 blocks or + 1 CAL5-11 block
AE 50 - AE 75 - 3 0 - 0 0 1 CA 5- 4-pole block 1 TP - A block
AE 45 - AE 75 - 4 0 - 0 0 1 to 6 CA 5- + 2 CA 5- 1-pole blocks or + 2 CA 5- 1 CAL 5-11 block 1 VE 5-2 block
AE 45, AE 75 - 2 2 - 0 0 (2) 1-pole blocks
or
1-pole blocks
+ or
AE 95, AE 110 - 3 0 - 0 0 —
A 50 - A 75 - 3 0 - 1 1 1 CA 5- 4-pole block 1 TP - A block 1 CAL 5-11 block 1 VE 5-2 block
AE 50, AE 75 - 3 0 - 1 1 1 to 6 CA 5- + 2 CA 5- 1-pole blocks + 2 CA 5- — or —
A 95, A 110 - 3 0 - 1 1 1-pole blocks or or 1-pole blocks 1 CAL 5-11 block 1 VE 5-2 block
AE 95, AE 110 - 3 0 - 1 1 + — or —
(1) In mounting position 5 (see pages 2/37 and 3/8), there should be no more than 2 "N.C." front-mounted auxiliary contacts - The CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks offer additional "N.C." contacts.
(2) Whatever the mounting position (see page 2/37), there should be no more than 2 "N.C." front-mounted auxiliary contacts - The CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks offer additional "N.C." contacts.

EH 3-pole and EK 4-pole contactors CAL16-11. 2-pole auxiliary contact blocks with side mounting
and reversing contactors with VH 550 and VH 800 13 21 31 43 53 61 71 83 35 47
mechanical interlock units (rear-mounted)
E0723D

Built-in
14 22 32 44 54 62 72 84 36 48
Type Main auxiliary
poles contacts CAL16-11 A CAL16-11 B CAL16-11 C CAL16-11 D CAL16-11 E

Contact 35-36
delivered wired
CA B D in the coil circuit
E0724D

CA B D KP
EH 145 - EH 800 - 3 0 1 1 ---->
E0725D

CA 40 ... E CA E
and 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ->
E0725D
E0726D

400 Hz

EK 110 - EK 550 - 4 0 2 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -> - - ->

EH 3-pole and EK 4-pole reversing contactors VH 145 - VH 300 mechanical and electrical interlock units
with VH.. mechanical and electrical interlock units. Factory-mounted auxiliary contact blocks (A or E) and add-on blocks (B, C, D)

"Lefthand" Interlocking "Righthand"


contactor contactor CA B D E 40 ... 40 ... E
E0729D
E0728D

400 Hz 400 Hz

EH 145 VH 145 EH 145


EH 175 - EH 210 VH 210A EH 145
EH 175 - EH 300 VH 300 EH 175 - EH 300
KP KP
EK 110 - EK 150 VH 145 EK 110, EK 150
E E
EK 175, EK 210 VH 210A EK 110, EK 150
E0730D

EK 175, EK 210 VH 300 EK 175, EK 210

Low Voltage Products 4/3


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Auxiliary Contact Blocks

Description
Auxiliary contact blocks are available in 1-pole, 2-pole or 4-pole versions.
Types – CA- : instantaneous, N.O. or N.C.
– CC- : N.O. leading or N.C. lagging.
They are equipped with screw type connecting terminals delivered open and protected against accidental direct
SB7603S2

contact and have function marking.


The CA 5 4-pole block, mounted on the A 9 to A 16 and BC 9 to BC 16 contactors or on the N and KC contactor
CA 5-10
relays, provides "positive safety", i.e. there is no overlapping between auxiliary contacts performing opposite
functions (N.O.//N.C.) in accordance with regulations (ZH 1/457, INRS, SÜV specifications).
Front mounting:
– CA-, CC- 1-pole or 4-pole blocks: clipped onto the front of A 9 to A 110, AE 45 to AE 110, BC 9 to BC 30
contactors, N and KC contactor relays (refer to the configurations shown on the "ordering details" pages in section 2 for the BC type
and section 3 for the KC type)
Side mounting:
– CAL 5-11 2-pole blocks: clipped onto the right and/or lefthand side of A 9 to A 110 contactors and onto the
lefthand side of AE 45 to AE 110 contactors.
– CAL16-11 2-pole blocks: screwed onto the right and/or lefthand side of the EH 145 to EH 800 and
EK 110 to EK 550 contactors.

Ordering Details
Type Order code Contact blocks Max. number of blocks Packing Weight
SB7379S4

that can be clipped onto


the contactors
pieces kg
CA 5-40 E
1-pole auxiliary contact blocks Front mounting (1)
for A(E), N, BC, KC contactors
CA 5-10 1SBN 01 0010 R1010 1 – – – ● 4 blocks:- A 9 to A 26 10 0.014
CA 5-01 1SBN 01 0010 R1001 – 1 – – -N 10 0.014
CC 5-10 1SBN 01 0011 R1010 – – 1 – - BC 9 to BC 30 10 0.014
CC 5-01 1SBN 01 0011 R1001 – – – 1 - KC 10 0.014
● 5 blocks:- A 30, A 40
● 6 blocks:- A 45 to A 110
- AE 45 to AE 110
2-pole auxiliary contact blocks Side mounting
for A(E) and N contactors
CAL 5-11 1SBN 01 0020 R1011 1 1 – – ● 2 blocks: A 9 to A 110, N 2 0.050
● 1 block: AE 45 to AE 110
for EH and EK contactors
CAL 16-11 A SK 829 002-A 1 1 – – ● 1 block: EH, EK 1 0.050
CAL 16-11 B SK 829 002-B 1 1 – – ● 1 block: EH, EK 1 0.050
CAL 16-11 C SK 829 002-C 1 1 – – ● 1 block: EH, EK 1 0.050
CAL 16-11 D SK 829 002-D 1 1 – – ● 1 block: EH, EK 1 0.050
CCL 16-11 E (2) SK 829 002-E 1 – – 1 ● 1 block: EH, EK 1 0.050
SB7375S4

4-pole auxiliary contact blocks Front mounting (1)


for A(E), N, BC, KC contactors
CAL 5-11 CA 5-40 E 1SBN 01 0040 R1040 4 – – – ● 1 block: - A 9 to A 26-40-00 2 0.060
CA 5-31 E 1SBN 01 0040 R1031 3 1 – – - A 45 to A 110 2 0.060
CA 5-22 E 1SBN 01 0040 R1022 2 2 – – - AE 45 to AE 110 2 0.060
CA 5-04 E 1SBN 01 0040 R1004 0 4 – – - BC9 to BC25-40-00 2 0.060
CA 5-11/11 E 1SBN 01 0040 R1018 1 1 1 1 - BC 30-30-00 2 0.060
CA 5-31 M 1SBN 01 0040 R1131 3 1 – – ● 1 block: - A 9 to A 40-30-10 2 0.060
CA 5-22 M 1SBN 01 0040 R1122 2 2 – – - BC9 to BC25-30-10 2 0.060
CA 5-04 M 1SBN 01 0040 R1104 0 4 – – 2 0.060
CA 5-11/11 M 1SBN 01 0040 R1118 1 1 1 1 2 0.060
CA 5-40 N 1SBN 01 0040 R1240 4 – – – ● 1 block: N and KC 2 0.060
CA 5-22 N 1SBN 01 0040 R1222 2 2 – – 4-pole 2 0.060
CA 5-04 N 1SBN 01 0040 R1204 0 4 – – 2 0.060
(1) a) In mounting position 5 (see p. 2/37 and 3/8), there should be no more than 2 N.C. front-mounted auxiliary contacts on types N 22 E, N 31 E,
A 9 to A 26-30-01, A 9 to A 26-22-00. The CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks offer additional N.C. contacts.
b) Whatever the mounting position (see p. 2/37), there should be no more than 2 N.C. front-mounted auxiliary contacts on types A(E) 45 to A(E) 75-22-00.
The CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks offer additional N.C. contacts.
A 144 D

(2) Mounting of a CCL 16-11 E block does not allow an additional second block to be added on top of it.

CAL 16-11 .
● Terminal Marking and Positioning ........................ Section 8 ● Mounting and Compatibility ................................. page 4/3
● Dimensions ............................................................. Section 9

4/4 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Auxiliary Contact Blocks

Technical Data
Types 1-pole CA 5, 4-pole CA 5 2-pole CAL 16-11
2-pole CAL 5-11 and 1-pole CC 5 2-pole CCL 16-11
Standards IEC 947-5-1 and EN 60947-5-1
Certifications and approvals See section 7
Rated insulation voltage Ui
according to IEC 947-5-1 V 690 690
according to UL/CSA V 600 600
Rated operational voltage Ue ~V 24 to 690 24 to 690
Conventional thermal current Ith A 16 10
Rated operational current Ie
in AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24 to 127 V A 6 6
220 to 240 V A 4 6
380 to 440 V A 3 4
500 to 690 V A 2 1
in DC-13 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24 V A 6 6
48 V A 2.8 6
72 V A 1 4
125 V A 0.55 1.8
250 V A 0.3 0.6
Connecting terminals M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw
(delivered in open position. Screws of unused terminals should be tightened).

Connecting capacity
with cable clamp 4
● Rigid solid 1 or 2 x mm2 1 to 4 0.5 to 2.5
● Flexible with cable end 1 x mm2 0.75 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5
2 x mm2 0.75 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5
● Flexible with sleeve 1 or 2 x mm2 — 0.5 to 1.5
Mechanical durability cycles 10 million
Max. switching frequency cycles/h 3600
Electrical durability See curve below
Max. switching frequency cycles/h 1200
Rated making capacity 10 x Ie AC-15
Rated breaking capacity 10 x Ie AC-15
Rated short-time withstand current Icw 1s A 100 50
θ = 40°C 0.1 s A 140 100
Min. switching capacity 17 V / 5 mA 0.25 VA / 12 V or 0.25 VA / 5 mA
Short-circuit protection - gG (gl) fuses A 10 10
Power loss per pole at 6 A W 0.15 0.2
Degree of protection according to IEC 529,
IEC 144, DIN 40 050 and NFC 20-010 IP 20 IP 20

Electrical durability 30
20
AC-15 according to IEC 947-5-1
making current: 10 x Ie where cos ϕ = 0.7 and Ue 10
breaking current: Ie where cos ϕ = 0.4 and Ue
5
The curves opposite show the electrical durability of the auxiliary CA 5, CAL 5
Million ops

3
contact blocks according to breaking current Ic.
2
These curves have been plotted for resistive and inductive loads up to CAL 16
1
690 V, 40 to 60 Hz.
0.5
0.3
0.2
E0731DG

0.1
0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 10
Breaking current (A)

Low Voltage Products 4/5


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TE5S Electronic Timer


for Star-Delta Starters

Application
Utilization
When used in star-delta starters, the TE5S lags the star connection and provides a lapse of 50 ms before the
switchover to delta connection.

Description
According to the type of device chosen, the electronic circuit has a 24 V a.c/d.c.,
110 to 120 V a.c., 220 to 240 V a.c. or 380…440 V a.c. supply. An output relay with reversing contact ensures
high current switching. A two-position switch allows selection of one of the two time delay ranges: 0.8 to 8 s
or 6 to 60 s. The 0.1 to 1.0 graduated button allows an initial setting without steps within the previously selected
range which can then be adjusted using a chronometer.
Note: We recommend that you allow for temperature drift for the final adjustment of the time delay setting.
Drift: – 0.2% per °C.
For example, a setting made at 20 °C will yield a time delay shorter by 7% at 55 °C in a cubicle.
SB7558S4

( – 0.2% per °C i.e.– 0.2 x 35 = – 7%).


The TE5S, which is not affected by these settings, establishes a fixed "lapse" of 50 ms between the opening
TE5S ... of contact 15-16 and the closing of contact 15-18. It is this time delay that prevents from arc short-circuit during
star to delta switching.

Operation
On energization, the green U indicator light (voltage applied) comes on. Contact 15-16 then immediately moves
to the closed position.
U Count-down of the programmed time immediately commences.
When the time delay has elapsed, contact 15-16 opens and at the same time the 50 ms lapse, t2, begins after
15-16
R
which contact 15-18 moves to the closed position. The yellow R indicator light comes on.
E0719D

15-18 On de-energization, the U and R indicator lights go out and, after the 250 ms resetting time, the device is ready
for a new cycle.
t1 t2 (t2 = 50ms)

Chart Mounting
On 35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm mounting rail according to EN 50022.

Ordering details
Type Order code Rated control For contactors Packing Weight
voltage Uc
V piece kg
TE5S-24 1SBN 02 0010 R1001 24 a.c./d.c. A 9 ... EH 800 (1) 1 0.080
TE5S-120 1SBN 02 0010 R1002 110 ... 120 a.c. A 9 ... EH 800 (1) 1 0.080
A1
15

t1 t1+t2
TE5S-240 1SBN 02 0010 R1003 220 ... 240 a.c. A 9 ... EH 800 (1) 1 0.080
TE5S-440 1SBN 02 0010 R1004 380 ... 440 a.c. A 9 ... EH 800 (1) 1 0.080
E0718D
A2
16

18

(1) Interpose an N Contactor Relay between the TE 5S Timer and the Coil of EH 700 and EH 800 Contactors.

Equivalent diagram

A1 15

TE5S
U
U c=
0.5

x 0.1

1.0

8s t1 60s

R
Star-Delta Timer
E0720D

16 18 A2

Front face

4/6 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TE5S Electronic Timer


for Star-Delta Starters

Technical data
Type TE5S - 24 TE5S - 120 TE5S - 240 TE5S - 440
Compliance with standards IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 and VDE 0435
Rated insulation voltage Ui according to IEC 947-5-1 V 440
Rated supply voltage Uc V d.c. 24 – – –
V a.c. 24 110 to 120 220 to 240 380 to 440
Rated frequency limits Hz 48 to 63
Supply voltage range 0.85 to 1.1 Uc
Overvoltage protection Built-in varistor
Load factor % 100
Average consumption in d.c. W 0.7 – – –
in a.c. VA 1.5 3.5 6.5 12.5
Time delay range (t1 ) selected by switch S 0.8 to 8 and 6 to 60
Temperature drift % per °C - 0.2
Mechanical setting accuracy ± 15 % of the setting range
On-load reiteration accuracy
under constant conditions ± 2 % after 1 million operations
Minimum time lapse (t2 ) ms 50
Min. time lapse after 1 million operations
Resetting time (maximum)
ms
ms
40
250
4
Front panel display: green indicator light Energization
yellow indicator light Output relay activated
Rated operational voltage Ue acc. to IEC 947-5-1 V d.c. 24 –
V a.c. 24 to 240 440
Conventional free air thermal current Ith A 10
Rated operational current Ie acc. to IEC 947-5-1
DC-13 24 V d.c. A 4 –
AC-15 24 to 120 V a.c. A 5 –
220 to 240 V a.c. A 4 –
380 to 440 V a.c. A – –
Permissible air temperature
for operation °C - 25 to + 60
for storage °C - 40 to + 85
Mechanical durability in millions of operations 5
Electrical durability in millions of operations 1
On-load maximum switching frequency ops./h 720 600
Short-circuit protection - gG (gl) type fuses A 10
Vibration withstand acc. to C

IEC68-2-6 and EN60 068-2-6 3g from 10 to 300Hz in the 3 directions


A A B B

Shock withstand acc. to 20g/11ms in directions A and C


E0863D

IEC68-2-27 and EN60 068-2-27 C 15g/11ms in direction B


Fixing on mounting rail according to EN 50022 35 x 7.5 or 35 x 15
Connecting terminals (+,-) pozidriv 1 screw
Tightening torque N.m 0.6 to 0.8 max.
Connecting capacity
Rigid solid 1 or 2 x mm2 1 to 2.5
Flexible without cable end 1 or 2 x mm2 0.75 to 2.5
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 529, IEC 947-1 and EN 60 529
Housing IP 50
Terminals IP 20

Low Voltage Products 4/7


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TP… Pneumatic Timer Blocks

Application
The timer blocks are equipped with adjustable time delay auxiliary contacts.

Types:
– TP- DA (blue button) for time delay on energization.
– TP- IA (black button) for time delay on de-energization.

Description:
● Pneumatic timer with 350° linear scale and setting via marked knurled knob.
SB7589S3

● Block equipped with 2 time-delayed auxiliary contacts: 1N.O. and 1N.C. (electrically separate).

TP 40DA ● Captive screw type connecting terminals with built-in cable clamps. M 3.5 (+, –) pozidriv 2 screw with
screwdriver guidance, supplied untightened and protected against accidental direct contact.

Mounting:
Clipped onto the front panel of A 9 to A 75, BC 9 to BC 30, AE 45 to AE 75, GA 75, GAE 75 contactors and
N and KC contactor relays, except for devices equipped with TBC and TKC type coils having large voltage
ranges.
For further details, please turn to page 4/3 describing mounting compatibility with the other accessories.

Accessory:
BX-TP plastic sealed cover protecting access to the time delay setting.

Ordering Details
Type Order code Time delay Packing Weight
setting
piece kg
TP 40 DA 1SBN 02 0300 R1000 0.1 to 40 s 1 0.07
TP 180 DA 1SBN 02 0300 R1001 10 to 180 s 1 0.07
PTM 89 6185

TP 40 IA 1SBN 02 0301 R1000 0.1 to 40 s 1 0.07


TP 180 IA 1SBN 02 0301 R1001 10 to 180 s 1 0.07
BX-TP FPTN 472 657 R0001 – 1 0.006
BX-TP

4/8 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TP… Pneumatic Timer Blocks

Technical Data
Standards IEC 947-5-1 ; EN 60947-5-1
Certifications and approvals see section 7
Connection capacity
rigid mm2 1 or 2 x 1to 2.5
supple 1 x mm2 1 to 2.5
2 x mm2 0.75 to 2.5
Rated insulation voltage Ui
acc. to IEC 947-1 ~V 690
Rated operational voltage Ue ~V 24 to 690
Conventional thermal current Ith A 10
Rated operational current Ie
AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24-127 V A 6
220-240 V A 4
380-400 V A 3
500/690 V A 1/0.5
DC-13 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24 V A 6
48 V A 2.8
72 V A 1
125 V A 0.55
250 V A 0.3
Mechanical durability
Electrical durability
cycles
see curve below
5 million
4
Max. switching frequency cycles/h 1200
Rated making capacity 10 x Ie AC -15
Rated breaking capacity 10 x Ie AC-15
Rated short-time withstand current Icw at θ = 40°C
1s A 50
0.1 s A 100
Short-circuit protection - Gg (gl) fuses 10 A
Heat loss per pole at 6 A W 0.15
N.O. and N.C. contact non-overlapping time ms 1 to 2
Resetting time ms approx. 40
Accuracy (measured over 10 successive cycles) ±2 %
Drift (variation in mean value during TP lifetime) TP…DA: –15 to 15 %
TP…IA: –25 to +15 %
Drift according to ambient temperature
between –20°C and +20°C 0.25 % per °Kelvin
between +20°C and +65°C 0.20 % per °Kelvin

Electrical durability
AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 and EN 60947-5-1:
– making current: 10 x Ie where cos ϕ = 0.7 and Ue
– breaking current: Ie where cos ϕ = 0.4 and Ue
The curve opposite shows the electrical durability of the timer blocks in relation to the breaking current Ic.
This curve has been plotted for resistive and inductive loads up to 690 V, 40 to 60 Hz provided that the contactor is activated by the control device
in random manner with respect to the mains phase.
30
20
Terminal marking 10
5
TP 40 DA TP 40 IA
Million ops

3
TP 180 DA TP 180 IA 2
TP
55 67 57 65 1

0.5
A 406 D

A 407 D

0.3
E0732DG

56 68 58 66 0.2

0.1
0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 4 56 10
Breaking current (A)

● Mounting and Compatibility .................................................... page 4/3 ● Dimensions ............................................................................. Section 9

Low Voltage Products 4/9


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Mechanical Interlock Units


Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units

Utilization
When mounted between two contactors, the mechanical interlock unit prevents one of the contactors from closing as long as the other contactor is closed.
Range
● Mechanical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil

Type For contactors Fixing


On left On right
VBC 30 KC, BC 9 to 30 (1 stack) KC, BC 9 to 30 (1 stack) or plate not supplied
VM 5-1 N, A 9 to 40 N, A9 to 40 or plate not supplied
VH 550 EH 370, 550 EH 260 to 550 pre-drilled plate supplied
VH 800 EH 700, 800 EH 370 to 800 pre-drilled plate supplied
EK 370, 550 EK 370, 550 pre-drilled plate supplied
VH 145 W EH 145 EH 145 pre-drilled plate supplied for
VH 210 W EH 175, 210 EH 175, 210 utilization with WH… mechanical
VH 300 W EH 260, 300 EH 260, 300 latching units

● Mechanical and electrical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil
Type For contactors Fixing
On left On right
VE 5-1 N, A 9 to 40 N, A 9 to 40 or plate not supplied
VE 5-2 (1) A(E) 45 to 110 A(E) 45 to 110 or plate not supplied
VH 145 EH 145 EH 145 additional plate PN 145-21 (see p.4/26)
EK 110, 150 EK 110, 150 additional plate PN 210-22 (see p.4/26)
VH 210 A EH 175, 210 EH 145 additional plate PN 210-22 (see p.4/26)
VH 300 EH 175 to 300 EH 175 to 300 additional plate PN 210-22 (see p.4/26)
EK 175, 210 EK 175, 210 additional plate PN 300-22 (see p.4/26)
(1) The combination of A(E) 45 - 75 interlocked with A(E) 95/110 cannot be mounted on symmetrical rail (75mm EN50023).
(2) Suitable for interlocking of 2 contactors with the same number of poles (3P or 4P), the same magnetic circuit type (A or AE type), a same or different rating (as per selection tables below).

● Mechanical and electrical interlocking of two vertical mounted contactors, a.c. coil only
Optional mounting of two additional CA 16 - auxiliary contact blocks
Type For contactors Fixing
Up Down
VHV 145 EH 145 EH 145
VKV 150
VHV 210
VHV 300

VHV 210 A
EK 110, 150
EH 175, 210
EH 260, 300
EK 175, 210
EK 175, 210
EK 110, 150
EH 175, 210
EH 260, 300
EK 175, 210
EH 145
} additional plate not supplied

Selection tables
● Mechanical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil
Right
KC, BC 9 - 30 N, A 9 - 26 A 30, 40 A(E) 45- 75 A(E) 95, 110 EH 145 EH 175, 210 EH 260, 300 EH 370, 550 EH 700, 800
Left
KC, BC 9 - 30 VBC 30
N, A 9 - A 26 VM/E 5-1 VM/E 5-1
A 30, 40 VM/E 5-1 VM/E 5-1 VE 5-2
A(E) 45- 75 VE 5-2 VE 5-2 VE 5-2
A(E) 95, 110 VE 5-2 VE 5-2
EH 145 VH 145
EH 175, 210 VH 210 A VH 300
EH 260 VH 300 VH 300
EH 300 VH 300
EH 370, 550 VH 550 VH 550
EH 700, 800 VH 800 VH 800

● Interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, ● Interlocking of two vertical mounted contactors,
a.c. or d.c. coil a.c. coil only
Right Down
EK 110, 150 EK 175, 210 EK 370, 550 EH 145 EH 175, 210 EH 260, 300 EK 110, 150 EK 175, 210
Left Up
EK 110, 150 VH 145 EH 145 VHV 145
EK 175, 210 VH 300 EH 175, 210 VHV 210
EK 370, 550 VH 800 EH 260, 300 VHV 300
● For mechanical interlocking of two horizontal mounted
EK 110, 150 VKV 150
contactors equipped with mechanical latching units: EK 175, 210 VHV 300
see page 4/12
● Mounting and Compatibility of Accessories ............................................... page 4/3 ● Dimensions .................................................................................................... Section 9

4/10 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Mechanical Interlock Units


Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units

Ordering Details
Mechanical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil
Type Order code Packing Weight
piece kg
VBC 30 GJL 280 1911 R0001 1 0.015
VM 5-1 1SBN 03 0100 R1000 1 0.066
6530

VH 550 SK 829 070-E 1 5.00


VBC30 VH 800 SK 829 070-F 1 6.00
VH 145 W SK 829 070-B 1 2.300
VH 210 W SK 829 070-C 1 2.400
VH 300 W SK 829 070-D 1 2.800
Mechanical and electrical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil
Type Order code Packing Weight
piece kg
SB7282S4

VE 5-1 1SBN 03 0110 R1000 1 0.076


VE 5-2 1SBN 03 0210 R1000 1 0.146
VH 145 SK 829 071-A 1 0.130
VE 5-1
VH 210 A SK 829 071-D 1 0.390
VH 300 SK 829 071-B 1 0.130
Mechanical and electrical interlocking of two vertical mounted contactors, a.c. coil only
Type Order code Packing Weight
piece kg
VHV 145
VKV 150
SK 829 072-A
SK 829 072-B
1
1
0.250
0.430
4
VHV 210 SK 829 072-C 1 0.220
VHV 300 SK 829 072-D 1 0.430
A 090

VHV 210 A SK 829 072-F 1 0.600


SK 829 070 .
Additional contact blocks for VH 145 - VH 300 and VHV 145 - VHV 300.
Type Order code Contacts Packing Weight
93 91
94 92 piece kg
CA 16-10 SK 829 003-A 1 - 1 0.013
CA 16-01 SK 829 003-B - 1 1 0.013

Technical Data
VH 145 Types VE 5-1 VH(V) Types VE 5-1 / VE 5-2
VE 5-2 145 - 300 VH(V)145...300
Standards IEC 947-5-1 & Connecting terminals delivered M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2
EN 60947-5-1 in open position (screws of unused screw
Rated insulation voltage Ui terminals should be tightened) with cable clamp
acc. to IEC 947-5-1 V 690 Connection capacity
acc. to UL/CSA V 600 ● Rigid solid 1 or 2 x mm2 1 to 4(1)
Rated operational voltage Ue ~V 24 to 690 ● Flexible with end 1 or 2 x mm2 0.75 to 2.5
Conventional thermal current Ith Mechanical durability cycles 5 million (2)
A 16 10 Max. switching
frequency cycles /h 600
Rated operational current Ie
Rated making capacity 10 x Ie AC-15
in AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1
A 859

Rated breaking capacity 10 x Ie AC-15


24 to 127 V A 6 6
220 to 240 V A 4 6 Rated short-time withstand
VHV …
380 to 440 V A 3 4 current Icw - θ = 40°C
500 to 690 V A 2 1 1s A 100
0.1 s A 140
in DC-13 acc. to IEC 947-5-1
Short-circuit protection
24 V A 6 6
gG (gl) fuses A 10
48 V A 2.8 6
72 V A 1 4 Heat loss per pole at 6A W 0.15
125 V A 0.55 1.8 Degree of protection acc. to IEC 529,
250 V A 0.3 0.6 IEC 144, DIN 40050, NFC 20010 IP 20
(1) 1 … 2.5 mm2 for VH(V)145 to 300
(2) 1 million for VH(V)145 to 300
A 860

Technical note
When, during switching, the arc time is estimated at more than 40 ms, the closing signal of one of the two contactors
CA 16-. must be delayed with respect to the opening signal of the other contactor in order to prevent a short-circuit.
Use a TP 40 pneumatic timer or a TE5S electronic timer with time lapse, as applicable.
● Mounting and Compatibility of Accessories ........ Page 4/3 ● Plates ...................................................................... page 4/26
● Power Connections .............................................. Page 4/24 ● Dimensions .............................................................. Section 9

Low Voltage Products 4/11


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Mechanical Latching Units

Utilization
For converting standard contactors into latched contactors.
Types
WB 75-A for A9 - A75, BC 9 - BC 30, AE45 - AE75 contactors and N and KC 1-stack contactor relays.
WH 145 - WH 800 for EH 145 - EH 800 contactors with a.c. and d.c. coil.
WH 145 R - WH 800 R for mounting on the righthand side contactor in a reversing combination.
SB6548S3

WH 145 L - WH 800 L for mounting on the lefthand side contactor in a reversing combination.
Description
WB 75-A
● WB 75-A block: contains a mechanical latching device with electromagnetic impulse unlatching (a.c. or
d.c.) or manual unlatching.
Captive screw type connecting terminals, built-in cable clamps, M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 1 screw with screwdriver
guidance; delivered untightened and protected against accidental direct contact.
Operation:
after closing, the contactor continues to be held in the closed position by the latching mechanism should the
supply voltage fail at the contactor coil terminals.
Contactor opening can be controlled:
– electrically by an impulse* (a.c. or d.c.) on the WB 75-A block coil.
A_031

* the coil is not designed to be permanently energized.

WH 300 – manually by pressing the pushbutton on the front face of the WB 75-A block.
● WH 145 - WH 800: consisting of a block containing the latching mechanism and a plate for fixing to a
contactor, they come with an a.c. impulse operated coil* or a d.c. impulse operated coil*.
* the coils are not designed to be permanently energized.
As regards the horizontal mounted reversing contactors, these can be directly fixed onto the plate holding the
2 contactors.
Each (or only one contactor with the same or different) ratings can be equipped with a mechanical latching
A_091

mechanism (see table below).


Note: EH contactors equipped with a WH device are described on page 2/30.
WH 300 L
– Operation: closing of the K1 contactor (see overleaf) causes it to be mechanically latched by the WH .. block
which holds it in the closed position and cuts off the power supply to its coil via the built-in auxiliary contact
(11 – 12). (Contactors equipped with d.c. coils must be controlled by the K5 contactor relay). The contactor
A.C. and D.C. Coil is opened by an electrical impulse at the terminals of the WH ... block coil.
WB 75-A mechan. latching units With respect to a ≥ 380 V d.c. operated contactors with mechanical latching, the economy resistor device of
V d.c. Code the K1 contactor must be removed and the N.C. contact (11 – 12) of the latching unit must be connected as
V (50 Hz) V (60 Hz) .. ■■ shown on the diagram: see page opposite
For d.c. operation, connect 2 auxiliary contacts in series with the latching unit coil, i.e. 13 – 14 and 43 – 44.
24 24-28 ..01
42 42-48 ..02 Mounting
48 48-55 ..03
WB 75-A ................................... : Clipped onto the front face of the contactor where it takes up two slots
110 110-127 ..04
and prevents other accessories from being mounted on the two slots
220-230 220-255 ..06
immediately to the right and left.
230-240 230-277 ..05
WH 145 - WH 800 .................... : The contactor and the mechanical latching unit are screwed
380-415 380-440 ..07
onto the same plate.
415-440 440-480 ..08
WH 145 - WH 800 (R or L) ...... : The contactors and the mechanical latching units are screwed
onto the mechanical interlocking plate of the reversing combination.
A.C. Coil The WH mechanical latching units do not prevent other contactor accessories from being mounted.
EH … contactors
WH … mechanical latching units Ordering Details
Code Type Order code Mounting on contactors Packing Weight
V (50 Hz) V (60 Hz) ■ ■ to be completed with the
24 24 A B state coil coil voltage code acc. to
42 42-48 A C voltage: ■ the table opposite piece kg
48 48 A D
WB 75-A ■ FPTN 372 726 R10 ■ ■ A9 to A75, BC 9 to BC 30, AE 45 to AE 75, N, KC 1 0.12
110-115 110 -120 A F
127 127 A G WH 145 ■ SK 829 051 – ■ ■ EH 145 1 1.65
– 208 A Z WH 210 ■ SK 829 052 – ■ ■ EH 175, 210 1 1.70
220-240 220-255 A L WH 300 ■ SK 829 053 – ■ ■ EH 260, 300 1 1.80
380- 400 380-440 A P WH 550 ■ SK 829 054 – ■ ■ EH 370, 550 1 3.70
400- 415 – A R
WH 800 ■ SK 829 055 – ■ ■ EH 700, 800 1 3.90
440 480 A S
500 – A U Righthand side contactor With mechanical
– 600 A V of the reversing combination interlock:
WH 145 R – ■ SK 829 061 – ■ ■ EH 145 VH 145 W / SK 829 070-B 1 1.05
WH 210 R – ■ SK 829 062 – ■ ■ EH 175, 210 VH 210 W / SK 829 070-C 1 1.07
D.C. Coil WH 300 R – ■ SK 829 063 – ■ ■ EH 260, 300 VH 300 W / SK 829 070 -D 1 1.09
EH … contactors WH 550 R – ■ SK 829 064 – ■ ■ EH 370, 550 VH 550 W / SK 829 070 -E 1 2.30
WH … mechanical latching units WH 800 R – ■ SK 829 065 – ■ ■ EH 700, 800 VH 800 W / SK 829 070 -F 1 2.40
Code Code
Lefthand side contactor With mechanical
V d.c. ■ ■ V d.c. ■ ■
of the reversing combination interlock:
12 DA 75 DG WH 145 L – ■ SK 829 081 – ■ ■ EH 145 VH 145 W / SK 829 070 -B 1 1.05
24 DB 110 DE WH 210 L – ■ SK 829 082 – ■ ■ EH 175, 210 VH 210 W / SK 829 070 -C 1 1.07
36 DC 125 DU
WH 300 L – ■ SK 829 083 – ■ ■ EH 260, 300 VH 300 W / SK 829 070 -D 1 1.09
48 DD 220 DF
60 DT WH 550 L – ■ SK 829 084 – ■ ■ EH 370, 550 VH 550 W / SK 829 070 -E 1 2.30
WH 800 L – ■ SK 829 085 – ■ ■ EH 700, 800 VH 800 W / SK 829 070 -F 1 2.40

4/12 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Mechanical Latching Units

Technical Data
Types WB75-A WH145 WH210 WH300 WH550 WH800
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690
Cable cross-sectional area:
– 1 or 2 rigid conductors mm2 1 to 4 0.5 to 1.5
– 1 or 2 flexible conductors mm2 0.75 to 2.5 0.5 to 1.5
Mechanical durability million ops. 1 1
Max. switching ops/h 3600 with 1200 with
frequency on-load factor of 8% on-load factor of 25%
Rated control voltage UC a.c. 24 to 480 V 24 to 600 V
d.c. 24 to 415 V 12 to 220 V
Coil operating range 0.85 to 1.1 UC 0.85 to 1.1 UC
Max. electrical impulse time
– on a.c. coil s 20 20
with load factor % 5 20
– on d.c. coil s 8 20
with load factor % 3 20
Min. electrical impulse time
– for latching: BC 9 - 30 A 9 - 40
A(E)45 - 75
(energizing of the ms in a.c. 40 50 30 30 50
contactor coil)
– for pull-out:
ms in d.c. 80 50 30 40 80
4
(energizing of the ms in a.c. 30 20
WB/WH block coil) ms in d.c. 50 20
Coil consumption (mean value)
– a.c. operated coil inrush VA 90 300
holding VA 60 35
– d.c. operated coil W 110 350
Operating time
– on contactor closing (latching)
between coil energization and:
N.O. contact closing
N.C. contact opening } see pages 2/36 and 2/42: no difference with the operation of a contactor only.
– on contactor opening (unlatching)
between WB.. coil energization and: A, BC, AE
N.O. contact opening ms 5 to 25 10 to 18 13 to 25
N.C. contact closing ms 7to 28 13 to 20 15 to 28
Suggestion for a diagram of an EH contactor with a WH mechanical latching unit
a.c. coil d.c. coil
I/O impulse pushbuttons I/O impulse pushbuttons
(–) +
US US
34

O S0 I S1
I S1 O S0 K5

12
33

12
11
E2 A2

AS K1
11
91 A 425

E1 A1
US N
44 24

K1 K5
S0 OFF pushbutton
K1 Contactor 43 23
S1 ON pushbutton
AS Mechanical latching unit 14 14
K5 Contactor relay
K1 K5
Block diagram:
13 13

A2 E2 A2

K5 As K1
91 A 303

A1 E1 A1
91 A 426

US N
(+) –

Low Voltage Products 4/13


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Surge Suppressors
for Contactor Coils

(V)
General
1000
The operation of inductive circuits causes overvoltages, in particular on opening of the contactor coil.
T (µs)
0 100 The electromagnetic energy stored by the coil during contactor closing is restored on opening in the form of
1000 surges, the slope and amplitude of which may rise to several kilovolts. A number of drawbacks are observed
ranging from interference on the electronic devices to breakdown of insulators and even destruction of certain
0 100
sensitive components.
A 884D

The graph opposite reproduces the oscillogram showing voltage discharges at the terminals of a 42V/50Hz coil
without peak clipping. The coil was switched by 8 series-connected poles of a contactor relay.
Following a burst of discharges with a very steep slope a damped oscillation emerges with a peak value of
3500V.

Overvoltage Factor
SB7610S3

The overvoltage factor k is defined as the ratio of the maximum overvoltage peak value Ûs to the peak value
Ûc of the coil rated control voltage Uc:
RT 7/...
Ûs max. Ûs max. Ûs max.
k = _______ in d.c.: k = _______ or in a.c.: k = _______
Ûc Uc Uc√2

3500
For example the following is obtained for the above graph: k = _____ ≈ 60
42 √2

Surge Suppressors
To guard against the harmful effects of these overvoltages, ABB has developed a range of surge suppressors
designed to reduce the k factor defined above and to limit or even completely eliminate the high pre-damping
voltage frequencies.
Each case is different, but the technical data tolerances and the generous sizing of parts have enabled us to
reduce the number of variants.
We have chosen the following solutions: transil diodes, varistors and RC blocks.
Note: A varistor is a resistor whose value increases to a very large extent when a certain voltage is applied
at its terminals.
SB7400S4

Wiring Diagrams
Transil diode Varistor (only) RC type Varistor + RC
RV 5/50

A1 A1 A1 A1
E0734D

U
E0733D

E0735D

E0736D

A2 A2 A2 A2

General Technical Data


SB7389S4

The housings and impregnation resins of the surge suppressors are made of flame-resistant materials in
accordance with the UL 94 standard.
RC 5-1/150
These systems are not polarized, i.e. d.c. operated devices do not have to be connected in a specific direction.
● Operating temperature: -20 to +70 °C
● Connection to the coil terminals (parallel mounting)
– For RT 7, RV-BC 6 and RC-EH: flexible, accessible leads, equipped with forked lugs.
Except for the RV-BC 6 F variant: 2.8 mm faston.
– For RT 5, RV 5, RC 5-1 and RC 5-2: clip-on for both fixing and connection.
● Fixing:
– RV-BC 6 and RT 7: dovetail mounting on both the top and bottom part of the contactor base.
Alternatively, they can be clipped onto the front part of the contactor head.
A_078

– RT 5, RV 5 and RC 5: clipped onto the top part of the contactor base. This mounting method
RC-EH…/... prevents any projections and change in contactor dimensions.
– RC-EH: glued to the top part of the contactor base.

4/14 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Surge Suppressors
for Contactor Coils

Technical Data
Type Control Opening time Residual overvoltage Remarks
circuit growth factor or clipping voltage
RT 7 or RT 5 /... transil diode 2.5 to 3 Advantages ● Good energy absorption
32 d.c. 50 V ● Unpolarized system
E0737D

65 d.c. 100 V ● Simple, reliable system


90 d.c. 150 V Drawback ● A certain delay on drop out which does not
150 d.c. 210 V however reduce contactor breaking capacity.
264 d.c. 390 V
Varistor RV-BC 6 /... 1.1 to 1.5 Advantages ● High energy absorption: good damping
60 d.c. 137 V ● Unpolarized system
E0738D

127 d.c. 305 V


250 d.c. 510 V
380 d.c. 730 V Drawback ● Clipping as from Uvdr*, thus voltage
RV 5/... 1.1 to 1.5 front up to this point.
50 a.c./d.c. 132 V
133 a.c./d.c. 270 V
250 a.c./d.c. 480 V
440 a.c./d.c. 825 V
RC 5-1/... or RC 5-2/... see table
RC-EH 300/... below } a.c. 1.2 to 3 2 to 3 x Uc Advantages ●

Very fast clipping
Attenuation of steep fronts and thus of
high frequencies
E0740D

● No operating delays
Varistor + RC RC-EH ... 1.1 to 1.5 Advantages ● High energy absorption: good damping
800/110 a.c./d.c.
800/600 a.c.
205 V
1100 V


Unpolarized system
The RC system damps the voltage
4
E0739D

front under the Uvdr* threshold.

*Uvdr = Varistor operating voltage (voltage dependent resistor), tolerance ± 10%

Ordering Details
Type Order code Control voltage Mounting on contactors Packing Weight

V d.c. a.c. kg
RT 7/32 FPTN 377 043 R0001 12 to 32 ● 10 0.007
RT 7/65 FPTN 377 044 R0001 25t to 65 ● 10 0.007
RT 7/90 FPTN 377 045 R0001 50 to 90 ● (T)KC and (T)BC9 to (T)BC 30 10 0.007
RT 7/150 FPTN 377 046 R0001 77 to 150 ● 10 0.007
RT 7/264 FPTN 377 047 R0001 150 to 264 ● 10 0.007
RV-BC 6/60 GHV 250 1902 R0002 24 to 60 ● 10 0.004
RV-BC 6/127 GHV 250 1908 R0002 50 to 127 ● KC and BC 9 to BC 30 10 0.004
RV-BC 6/250 GHV 250 1903 R0002 110 to 250 ● 10 0.004
RV-BC 6/380 GHV 250 1904 R0002 200 to 420 ● 10 0.004
RV-BC 6-F/60 GHV 250 1902 R0003 24 to 60 ● 10 0.004
RV-BC 6-F/127 GHV 250 1908 R0003 50 to 127 ● KC and BC 9 to BC 30 10 0.004
RV-BC 6-F/250 GHV 250 1903 R0003 110 to 250 ● The coils must be equipped with 2.8 mm flat pin lugs. 10 0.004
RV-BC 6-F/380 GHV 250 1904 R0003 200 to 420 ● 10 0.004
RT 5/32 1SBN 05 0020 R1000 12 to 32 ● 2 0.015
RT 5/65 1SBN 05 0020 R1001 25 to 65 ● 2 0.015
RT 5/90 1SBN 05 0020 R1002 50 to 90 ● (T)AE 45 to (T)AE 75 and AE 95/110 2 0.015
RT 5/150 1SBN 05 0020 R1003 77 to 150 ● 2 0.015
RT 5/264 1SBN 05 0020 R1004 150 to 264 ● 2 0.015
RV 5/50 1SBN 05 0010 R1000 24 to 50 ● ● 2 0.015
RV 5/133 1SBN 05 0010 R1001 50 to 133 ● ● 2 0.015
RV 5/250 1SBN 05 0010 R1002 110 to 250 ● ● N, A 9 to A 110 and AE 45 to AE 110 2 0.015
RV 5/440 1SBN 05 0010 R1003 250 to 440 ● ● 2 0.015
RC 5-1/50 1SBN 05 0100 R1000 24 to 50 ● 2 0.012
RC 5-1/133 1SBN 05 0100 R1001 50 to 133 ● N and A 9 to A 40 2 0.012
RC 5-1/250 1SBN 05 0100 R1002 110 to 250 ● 2 0.012
RC 5-1/440 1SBN 05 0100 R1003 250 to 440 ● 2 0.012
RC 5-2/50 1SBN 05 0200 R1000 24 to 50 ● 2 0.015
RC 5-2/133 1SBN 05 0200 R1001 50 to 133 ● 2 0.015
RC 5-2/250 1SBN 05 0200 R1002 110 to 250 ● A 45 to A 110 2 0.015
RC 5-2/440 1SBN 05 0200 R1003 250 to 440 ● 2 0.015
RC-EH 300/48 SK 829 007-A 24 to 48 ● EH 145 to EH 300 and 1 0.015
RC-EH 300/415 SK 829 007-B 110 to 415 ● EK 110 to EK 210 1 0.015
RC-EH 800/110 SK 829 007-C 48 to 110 ● EH 370 to 800 and EK 370 to 550 1 0.015
24 to 125 ● EH 145 to 800 and EK 110 to 550 1 0.015
RC-EH 800/600 SK 829 007-D 220 to 600 ● EH 370 to 800 and EK 370 to 550 1 0.015

Low Voltage Products 4/15


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

RA 30 and RA 5 Interface Relays

Utilization
RA 30 and RA 5 interface relays are designed to receive 24 V d.c. signals delivered by PLC's or other sources
with a low output power and to restore them with sufficient power to operate the coils of the relevant
contactors.
SB7117S4

Types
RA 30 – RA 30 for combination with B C 9 to BC 30 contactors and KC contactor relays.
– RA 5 for combination with A 9 - A 110 contactors and N contactor relays.

Description
RA 30 and RA 5 interface relays are made up of a miniature electromechanical relay equipped with a N.O.
contact and with a low consumption 24 V d.c. coil.
The interface relay coil is controlled by the PLC while the N.O. contact ensures switching of the power contactor.
Coil switching gives rise to overvoltages which have adverse effects on the electronic devices, insulators and,
more generally, on component lifetime. The RA 30 and RA 5 are equipped with surge suppressors:
– on the 24 V d.c. relay coil via a diode
– on the power contactor coil via a varistor.
Furthermore, the RA 30 and RA 5 are protected against relay pole reversal by a diode inserted between the
E1 and E2 input terminals.
SB 7615S3

Connection
BC 9-30-10 + RA 30
The "E1+" and "E2 –" input terminals must be connected, according to their polarity, to the PLC output.
● The RA 30 has two leads to be connected to the A1 and A2 terminals of the contactor coil. This coil is supplied
between its own A2 terminal and the A0 terminal of the RA 30.
● The RA 5 is equipped with two terminal pads for connection to the A1 and A2 terminals of the contactor coil.
This coil is supplied between the A0 and A2 terminals of the RA 5.

RA 30 interface relay for the BC 9 - BC 30 RA 5 interface relay for the A 9 - A 110


contactors and KC contactor relays contactors and N contactor relays

PLC PLC
Output Output
Uc – +
– +
24 V d.c. 250 V a.c. 24 V d.c.
A0 E2 – E1 +
A0 A2 E2 – E1 +
SB 7611S3

RA 30
RA 5

RA 5
Uc 250 V d.c.

A1
A1
KM1
E0742DG

KM1
E0741DG

A2
A2

Mounting
– RA 30: dovetail mounting at the top of the contactor base.
– RA 5: terminal pads clamped inside the contactor coil terminals.

Ordering Details
Type Order code Control Mounting on contactors Packing Weight
SB 7614S3

voltage types coil voltages


Uc piece kg
RA 30 FPTN 472 770 R0002 24V d.c. KC, BC 9 - BC30 12 - 250V d.c. 1* 0.035
A 75 + RA 5 RA 5 1SBN 06 0000 R1001 24V d.c. N, A 9 - A 110 24 - 250V 50, 60Hz 1* 0.050
* Packing 10 : RA 30 FPTN 472 770 R0001 Qty/Order: 10 or multiple of 10
RA 5 1SBN 06 0000 T1001 Qty/Order: 10 or multiple of 10

4/16 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

RA 30 and RA 5 Interface Relays


Technical Data

Types RA 30 RA 5

General Technical Data


Standards IEC 255-5
Rated insulation voltage Ui
acc. to IEC 947-4-1 and VDE 0110 (Gr.C) V a.c. 250
Permissible ambient temperature:
● for free air operation:
– at Uc = 24 V d.c. (between E1 and E2) °C – 25 to + 70
– from 0.85 to 1.1 Uc °C – 25 to + 55
● for storage °C – 40 to + 70
Climatic withstand Complies with that of associated contactors
Mounting position No limitation
Operating height metres ≤ 3000
Fixing Dovetail mounting in the top part Using the contactor A1 and A2
of the contactors terminal connecting parts
Connecting terminals (open on delivery) Cable clamps and M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw
Cable cross-sectional area:
● rigid solid
● flexible
2 x mm2
2 x mm2
1 to 4
0.75 to 2.5 4
Degree of protection Protection against direct contact acc. to VDE 0106 - Part. 100

Construction Data
Surge suppression:
● for contactor coil Varistor
● for interface relay coil Diode
Protection against polarity reversal between terminals E1 and E2 Diode
Use on contactors with coils:
● 24 to 250 V / 50, 60 Hz types – N, A9 - A110
● 12 to 250 V d.c. types KC, BC9 - BC30 –
Interface relay operating time ms Closing and drop-out ≤ 10
Total operating time,
interface relay + contactor:
● between energization and:
– N.O. contact closing ms 59 to 84 19 to 36
– N.C. contact opening ms 54 to 79 16 to 32
● between de-energization and:
– N.O. contact opening ms 25 to 40 15 to 25
– N.C. contact closing ms 27 to 42 18 to 28

Electrical Input Data


Control voltage (E1and E2 terminals) Uc : rated value V d.c. 24
max. range V d.c. 17 to 30
Max. consumption for Uc = 24V d.c., θ = 20 °C W 0.3
"0" status (relay open) for Uc V d.c. ≤ 2.4
or I c mA <1
"1" status (relay closed) for Uc V d.c. ≥ 17
Max. short supply interruption immunity time ms 4

Electrical Output Data


Switching voltage (A 0 and A 2 terminals) V a.c. – ≤ 250
V d.c. ≤ 250 –
Electrical lifetime million of operations 10 (1200 ops./h) 4 (600 ops./h) on A 9 … A 40
2 (600 ops./h) on A 45 … A 110

Low Voltage Products 4/17


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Connecting Auxiliaries
for Control Leads
Impulse Contact Blocks
Terminals for control lead connections: LK
Utilization
Terminals designed to connect the control conductors to the main poles of the A and AE 45 to 110 contactors.
SB7576S3

Degree of protection IP 20
Connecting terminal delivered in open position: cable clamp and M3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw.
Cable cross-sectional area: - 1 or 2 rigid conductors 1 to 4 mm2
LK 75-A - 1 or 2 flexible conductors 1 to 2.5 mm2
Mounting
Clipped into the slots placed above each power terminal connector.
The LK 75 are fitted with a pin designed to hold them in place until the connector has been fully clamped
with its power cable.
The LK 110 must be held in place until the connector has been clamped.
Ordering details
SB7577S3

Type Order code Connection Packing Weight

piece kg
LK 75-A 1
LK 75-A 1SBN 07 3552 R1000 right and left on A(E) 45 to 75 2 0.006
LK 75-A 1 1SBN 07 3552 R1001 opposite on A(E) 45 to 75 2 0.006
LK 110 1SFN 07 4352 R1000 right and left on A(E) 95 to 110 2 0.010

Screw, for control lead connection to the main terminals of the EH/EK contactors
Utilization
M4 x 12 screws for connecting the control conductors to the terminal pads of the main poles of the
EH 145 to 800 and EK 110 to 550 contactors.
Ordering details
SB7575S3

Type Order code Mounting on contactor Packing Weight

piece kg
LK 110
- 2121 2415 - 291 EH 145 to 800 and EK 110 to 550 10 0.002

Impulse Contact Blocks: CB 5 -


Utilization
Impulse contact blocks are available in two different types:
CB 5-10 - N.O. contact with a black pushbutton ("ON" contact of d.o.l. starter)
CB 5-01 - N.C. contact with a red pushbutton ("OFF" function)
These blocks are equipped with 2 connecting leads with end, approx. 10 cm long.
Mounting
Clipped onto the front face of A 9 - A 110, AE 45 - AE 110 and BC 9 - BC 30 contactors.
E0266D

Ordering details
Type Order code Contact Packing Weight
LK ... positioning
piece kg
CB 5-10 1SBN 01 0013 R1010 1 - 1 0.012
CB 5-01 1SBN 01 0013 R1001 - 1 1 0.012
SB7571S3

CB 5 …

4/18 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Lamp Holder
Fuse Holder
Function Markers

Lamp Holder Block: BL 5 - L


Utilization
Lamp holder for indicator light.
Description
Block designed to hold a bulb (BA 9 s type, max. P = 1.2 W, max. voltage = 400 V, max. length = 28 mm), not
supplied.
SB7568S2

Equipped with 2 connecting leads (1 mm2 and approx. 10 cm long), with 3 lenses (green, red, colourless) for
fixing on the front face of the d.o.l. starter enclosures (insulated enclosures).
Mounting
Clipped onto the front face of A 9 to A 110, AE 45 to AE 110 and BC 9 to BC 30 contactors.
Ordering details
SB7567S3

SB7569S3

Type Order code Packing Weight

piece kg
BL 5 - L
BL 5 - L 1SBN 07 0054 R1000 1 0.022

Fuse Holder Block: BL 5 - F


Utilization
Fuse holder for the control circuit.
Description
Block designed to hold a fuse cartridge (5 x 20, 4A max), not supplied.
Equipped with 2 connecting leads 1mm2 and approx. 10 cm long. 4
Mounting
Clipped onto the front face of A 9 to A 110, AE 45 to AE 110 and BC 9 to BC 30 contactors and N or KC
4-pole contactor relays.
SB7570S1

Ordering details
Type Order code Packing Weight

kg
SB7567S3

BL 5 - F 1SBN 07 0055 R1000 1 0.020

BL 5 - F
Function Marker: BA 5 - 50
Utilization
For marking contactors, thermal O/L relays, contactor relays and accessories.
Description
The BA 5 - 50 is a set of 50 function markers designed to be clipped onto the front face of devices.
Effective marking surface: 7 x 19 mm
Details can be added to these markers using a ball point pen, indelible felt-tip pen or pentel white. Self-
adhesive labels (not supplied) can also be added to them.
Ordering details
Type Order code Mounting on: Packing Weight

box kg
BA 5 - 50 1SBN 11 0000 R1000 contactors (except EH and EK), 1 0.017
SB7587S4

thermal O/L relays, contactor relays,


accessories

BA 5 - 50

Low Voltage Products 4/19


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Terminal Connecting Strips

Utilization
Parallel and series connection of 3-pole and 4-pole contactor poles:
● To obtain a star point (3 parallel-connected poles): LY, LF, (LY allows 3 phases to be short-circuited)
● To connect poles in parallel and thus increase the a.c. load passing through the flow path made up of the
parallel-connected poles: LP and LH (2 poles); LY and LF (3 poles); LG (4 poles).
SB7584S2

The maximum permissible current values with parallel-connected poles are given on page 2/54.
The relevant cable cross-sectional area may limit the maximum permissible current. Consult the information
in the table below.
LP 25 ● To connect poles in series and thus increase the d.c. load controlled by the poles: LP and LH.

Types Mounting on contactors


● LP 16, LY 16, LH 16, LF 16, LG 16 A 9 to A 16, BC 9, BC 16.
● LP 25, LH 25 A 26, BC 25.
● LF 30 BC 30
● LH 75, LF 75 A 45 to A 75, AE 45 to AE 75
● LY 110 A 95, 110, AE 95, 110
● LY 210 EH 145, EH 175, EH 210
SB7583S2

● LY 300 EH 260, EH 300


● LY 550 EH 370, 550.

LY 16 Description
Strip for connection of "n" poles with terminal insulated
LP ... n= 2 no yes
LY 16, LY 110 n= 3 no yes
LH ... n= 2 yes no
LF ... n= 3 yes no
LG ... n= 4 yes no
LY 210 - LY 550 n= 3 no no
SB7170S3/1

Ordering Details
Type Order code for max. nominal Cable cross- Packing Weight
LH contactor continuous sectional area
current with
"n" poles
A mm2 piece kg
LP 16 FPEP 407 000 R0001 N, KC - 6 10 0.002
A 9, BC 9 30 6
A 12 32 6
A 16, BC 16 34 6
SB7170S3/2

LP 25 FPEP 407 001 R0001 A 26, BC 25 50 10 10 0.004


LY 16 FPEP 407 002 R0001 A 9, BC 9 33 6 10 0.005
A 12 36 6
LF A 16, BC 16 39 6
LH 16 FPTN 477 017 R0001 A 9, BC 9 35 10 2 0.010
A 12 38 10
A 16, BC 16 45 10
LH 25 FPTN 472 669 R0001 A 26, BC 25 72 16 2 0.014
LH 75 FPTN 472 734 R0001 A(E) 45
to 200 95 2 0.085
A(E) 75
SB7170S3/3

LF 16 FPTN 477 017 R0002 A 9, BC 9 50 16 2 0.010


A 12 54 16
A 16, BC 16 63 16
LG LF 30 FPTN 472 743 R0001 BC 30 121 50 2 0.035
LF 75 FPTN 472 735 R0001 A(E) 45 2 0.095
to 275 150
A(E) 75
LG 16 FPTN 477 017 R0003 A9, BC 9 62 16 2 0.012
A 12 67 16
A 16, BC 16 72 16
LY 110 1SFN 07 4303 R1000 A(E) 95, 110 350 – 1 0.055
LY 210 2631 0243-6 EH 145 510 1 0.100
A 200

EH 175 575 –
EH 210 660
LY 210 - LY 550
LY 300 2631 0243-4 EH 260, 300 980 – 1 0.200
LY 550 2631 0243-5 EH 370 1250 – 1 0.250
EH 550 1800

4/20 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Sommaire Général Sommaire
Section
Chapitre
Section Index

Connectors
Flat Pin Terminal Blocks

Connectors
Utilization
Connection of copper and aluminium cables to the terminal pads of the poles of EH and EK contactors.
Types
There are three kinds of connectors:
- OXFB ... for copper cables : single steel connector with brass core for
EH 145 - EH 550 and EK 110 - EK 550.
A092

- TC ... for aluminium or copper cables : single aluminium connector for


OXFB . . EH 145 - EH 700 and EK 110 - EK 550.
- TCD ... for aluminium or copper cables : double aluminium connector for
EH 370 - EH 700, EK 370 and EK 550.
Ordering details
Type Order code Cable for contactors Packing Weight
cross-sectional
area in mm2 pieces kg
Single connector for copper cables
A047

OXFB 70 SK 175 0001 25 to 70 EK 110 3 0.05


TC . .
OXFB 120 SK 175 0003 25 to 120 EK 110 3 0.06
OXFB 150 SK 175 0005 35 to 150 EH 145, 175, 210, EK 150 to 210 3 0.07
OXFB 185 SK 175 0007 25 to 185 EH 145, 175, 210, EK 150 to 210 3 0.07
OXFB 300 SK 175 0009 70 to 300 EH 260 to 550, EK 370, 550 3 0.13
Single connector for aluminium or copper cables
TC 70-15 SK 173 001-AB 10 to 70 EK 110 3 0.04
4
TC 120-20 SK 173 001-AC 35 to 120 EH 145, 175, 210, EK 150 to 210 3 0.08
TC 300-25 SK 173 001-AD 70 to 300 EH 260 to 550, EK 370, 550 3 0.16
TC 300-40 SK 173 001-AE 95 to 300 EH 700 3 0.20
Double connector for aluminium or copper cables
A079

TCD 185-25 SK 173 001-BD 2 x (35 to 185) EH 370, 550, EK 370, 550 3 0.25
TCD . . TCD 300-40 SK 173 001-BE 2 x (95 to 300) EH 700 3 0.26

Flat Pin Terminal Blocks


Utilization
Flat pin terminal blocks are used to connect by means of clips the contactors equipped with screw terminals.
Types
Flat pin terminal blocks are available for A 9 to A 26 and BC 9 to BC 25 contactors, N and KC contactor relays
and CA-5 4-pole auxiliary contact blocks.
Description
Set made up of two flat pin terminals allowing two 6.3 mm or 2.8 mm clips to be connected to each pole
and two flat pins which are added to the coil terminals.
Protection against direct contact acc. to VDE 106 - Part. 100.
As stipulated by the NFC 20-120 and DIN 46249 standards, the maximum permissible current for the flat
! pins is 25 A.
A099

Mounting
LC16-B Flat pin terminal blocks are fixed by the screw terminals with which the contactor is equipped.

Ordering details
Type Order code for mounting Packing Weight
on contactors
set kg
LC 16-B GJL 280 1912 R0002 KC, BC 9 to BC 16 1 stack 1 0.025
For 2-stack contactors,
2 sets are required.
LC 26-B2 GJL 280 1912 R0005 BC 18 2 stacks 1 0.048
LC 25-B1 GJL 280 1912 R0003 BC 25 1 stack 1 0.023
LC 16-A 1SBN 07 1400 R1000 N, A 9 to A 16 1 stack 1 0.025
4-pole CA 5
LC 26-A1 1SBN 07 2400 R1000 A 26 1 stack 1 0.027
LC 26-A2 1SBN 07 2401 R1000 A 26 2 stacks 1 0.048

Low Voltage Products 4/21


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Terminal Accessories

Additional Terminal Block: LD 110


Utilization
The LD 110 terminal block is designed to increase the connection capacity of the contactor on which it is
mounted: A(E) 95 or A(E) 110.
Description
Block housing three connectors: 1 per phase. Each connector is equipped with an HC, M8 socket head
screw and has the following connection details:
- Stranded rigid conductor: 1 x (10 to 70 mm2) or 2 x (10 to 35 mm2)
- Flexible conductor : 1 x (10 to 50 mm2) or 2 x (10 to 25 mm2)
- Bar : max. width 12 mm
Mounting
The LD 110 terminal block is fixed in the 3 apertures located above the built-in connectors.
Ordering details
Type Order code Mounting on contactors Packing Weight
E0721D1

piece kg
LD 110 1SFN 07 4308 R1000 A(E) 95 and A(E) 110 1 0.150

LD 110
Terminal Extension Pieces: LX ...
Utilization
LX ... extension pieces are designed to extend the terminal pads of the EH contactors for simultaneous mounting
of the connectors (see page 4/21) and the connection sets (see page 4/24).
Description
The LX ... set contains 3 bars delivered with straps to prevent them from rotating.
Ordering details
Type Order code Dimensions Mounting on contactors Packing Weight
hole Ø bar
mm mm set kg
LX 210 SK879 902-C 11 20 x 5 EH 145 - EH 210 1 0.15
SB6561S3

LX 550 SK879 902-D 11 25 x 6 EH 260 - EH 550 1 0.30


LX 700 SK879 902-E 11 40 x 6 EH 700 1 0.70
LX…

Enlargement Pieces: LW ...


Utilization
LW ... enlargement pieces are designed to increase the width of the contactor terminal pads in order to
allow larger connectors to be mounted.
LW 210 pieces can be combined with the connectors provided for EH 260 and EH 300.
Description
LW ... sets contain 3 bars delivered with straps to prevent them from rotating.
Ordering details
SB6562S3

Type Order code Dimensions Mounting on contactors Packing Weight


hole Ø bar
mm mm set kg
LW 210 LW 110 1SFN 07 4307 R1000 6 15 x 3 A(E) 95, A(E) 110 1 0.10
LW 210 SK 879 901 - C 11 25 x 6 EH 145 - EH 210 1 0.30

4/22 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Terminal Shrouds

Utilization
The use of terminal shrouds on the main terminals of EH contactors is required in electrical panels or cubicles
to be built in compliance with the rules for protection against accidental direct contact with live parts according
to VDE 0106 - Part. 100.
A 9 to A 110, BC 9 to BC 30 and AE 45 to AE 110 contactors do not require additional terminal shrouds as their
terminals are all already protected against accidental direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100.

Types
On EH 145 to EH 800 and EK 110 to EK 550 contactors:
- the auxiliary contact blocks and coils are designed to provide an IP 20 degree of protection.
- the main terminals, equipped with lugs or connectors, can be protected against accidental direct contact after
wiring (VDE 0106 - Part. 100) by the addition of terminal shrouds (see table below).
Each terminal shroud protects all the terminals on one side of the contactor. Two terminal shrouds should be
provided for each separate contactor.
When the contactor is connected to a thermal O/L relay, use a single LT - E terminal shroud from the table below
Protcov1

for line side protection and a set of LT... terminal shrouds for thermal O/L relay side protection
(see page 5/9).
LT 210 terminal shroud
Ordering details
Type Order code Mounting on contactors Packing Weight

piece kg
LT 210-EL SK 178 001-CB EH 145 - EH 210
with lugs
1 0.060
4
LT 210-EC SK 178 003-CB EH 145 - EH 210 1 0.057
with connectors
LT 300-E SK 178 001-DB EH 260, EH 300 1 0.157
with lugs or connectors
LT 550-E SK 178 001-EB EH 370, EH 550 1 0.168
with lugs or connectors
LT 700-E SK 178 001-FB EH 700 1 0.182
with lugs or connectors
LT 800-E SK 178 001-GB EH 800 1 0.182
with lugs
LT 150-EK SK 178 001-HB EK 110, EK 150 1 0.139
A_818D1

with lugs or connectors


LT 210-EK SK 178 001-KB EK 175, EK 210 1 0.152
with lugs or connectors
LT 300 - LT 800 terminal shroud
LT 550-EK SK 178 001-LB EK 370, EK 550 1 0.190
with lugs or connectors

Low Voltage Products 4/23


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Connection Sets

Connections for reversing contactors


Utilization
A1 A1 Connections between the main poles of two 3-pole contactors mounted side by side so that they operate as
1 3 5 1 3 5
reversing contactors.
2 4 6 2 4 6
A2 A2
E0744D

Description

BEM … The sets are made up of three upstream connections and three downstream connections.
BEM 16-30 - Insulated, solid, rigid copper wires
BEM 26 and 40-30 - Insulated, stranded, rigid copper wires
BEM 75 and 110-30 - Insulated, solid copper bars
BSM 16-30, BSM 25 and 30-30 BC - Insulated, solid, rigid copper wires
BSH 145 - BSH 250 - Insulated, flexible copper bars.
BSH 550 - BSH 800 - Bare, solid copper bars.
On the EH contactors, the power supply by bars or cables equipped with lugs is directly connected to the
terminal pads of the main poles. For flange connectors (see page 4/21), LX … terminal extension pieces should
be used (see page 4/22).

Ordering details
E0745D

Type Order code Mounting on 3-pole Packing Weight


contactors
BSH 145 - BSH 250
set kg
BEM 16 -30 1SBN 08 1401 R1000 A 9 - A 16 1 0.025
BEM 26-30 1SBN 08 2401 R1000 A 26 1 0.056
BEM 40-30 1SBN 08 2801 R1000 A 30, A 40 1 0.096
BEM 75-30 1SBN 08 3501 R1000 A 50 - A 75 1 0.243
BEM 110-30 1SFN 08 4301 R1000 A 95, A 110 1 0.450
BSM 16-30 FPTN 477 022 R0001 BC 9, BC 16 1 0.015
BSM 25-30 BC FPTN 477 041 R0001 BC 25 1 0.020
BSM 30-30 BC FPTN 477 041 R0002 BC 30 1 0.025
BSH 145 SK 829 091-C EH 145 1 1.000
BSH 210 SK 829 091-D EH 175, 210 1 1.100
E0746D

BSH 300 SK 829 091-E EH 260, 300 1 2.500


BSH 550 - BSH 800 BSH 550 SK 829 091-F EH 370, 550 1 5.600
BSH 700 SK 829 091-G EH 700 1 6.400
BSH 800 SK 829 091-H EH 800 1 6.400

3-pole Connections
Utilization
Connections between the main poles of two 3-pole contactors horizontal mounted.

Description
This set is made up of three downstream connections.

A1 A1 Ordering details
1 3 5 1 3 5

2 4 6 2 4 6 Type Order code Mounting on 3-pole Packing Weight


A2 A2
contactors
E0860D

set kg
BES 75-30 1SBN 08 3504 R1000 A(E) 50-30 … A(E) 75-30 1 0.130
BES 110 BES 110 1SFN 08 4304 R1000 A(E) 95, A(E) 110 1 0.250

4/24 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Connection Sets

A1 A1
Connections for 4-pole Changeover Contactors
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7

2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 Utilization
A2 A2
Connection between the main poles of two 4-pole contactors mounted side by side so that they operate as

E0743D
source reversing contactors.

BES 75-40 Description


These sets are made up of four downstream connections.
BES 75-40 - Insulated, stranded, rigid copper cables.
BSS 100 - BSS 210 - Insulated, flexible copper bars.
BSS 550 - Bare, solid copper bars.
A1 A1
1 3 5 7 7 5 3 1
Ordering details
2 4 6 8 8 6 4 2
A2 A2
Type Order code Mounting on 4-pole Packing Weight
E0747D

contactors set kg
BES 75-40 1SBN 08 3302 R1000 A(E) 45, 50, 75 1 0.400
BSS 100 - BSS 550 BSS 100 SK 829 090-B EK 110 1 0.400
BSS 145 SK 829 090-F EK 150 1 0.700
BSS 210 SK 829 090-G EK 175, 210 1 1.000
BSS 550 SK 829 090-E EK 370, 550 1 3.300

Connections for Star-delta Starters


Utilization
Connections between the main poles of a star-delta starter.
Description
4
These sets are made up of:
– Three line contactor/star contactor connections - Upstream side.
E0859D

– Three connections for star and delta contactors mounting joined side by side - Downstream side.
– The necessary elements to create the star point upstream of the star contactor.
Alternatively BED 16 … BED 75 connection sets suitable for mechanically interlocked star and delta contactors
BED 40
may be supplied if required.
BED 16-1 - BED 26-1 - Insulated, solid copper wires.
BED 40-1 - Insulated, stranded solid copper wires.
BED 50-1, BED 75-1 - Solid copper bars and insulated stranded copper wires.
5
BED 95 - BED 110 - Insulated, solid copper bars.
1 3

BED 145 - BSD 210 - BSD 300 - Insulated, flexible copper bars.
BSD 550 - BSD 800 - Bare, solid copper bars.
The above BED 95 … BSD 800 connection sets allow a mechanical interlock unit to be mounted between the
star and delta contactors if required.
E1143D

Ordering details
BED 75-1 Type Order code Mounting on contactors Packing Weight
Line and Delta Star set kg
BED 16-1 1SBN 08 1403 R1001 A9 A9
A 12 A9 1 0.040
A 16 A 12
BED 26-1 1SBN 08 2403 R1001 A 26 A 16 1 0.050
BED 40-1 1SBN 08 2803 R1001 A 30 A 26 1 0.070
A 40 A 26
A 854D

BED 50-1 1SBN 08 3503 R1001 A 50 A 30 1 0.280


A 63 A 40
BED 75-1 1SBN 08 4103 R1001 A 75 A 50 1 0.280
BED 95 1SFN 08 4303 R1000 A 95 A 75 1 0.400
BSD 145 … BSD 300
BED 110 1SFN 08 4503 R1000 A 110 A 95 1 0.500
BED 145 SK 829 092-L EH 145 A 110 1 0.700
BSD 210 SK 829 092-E EH 175 EH 145 1 1.200
EH 210 EH 175
BSD 300 SK 829 092-F EH 300 EH 210 1 2.000
BSD 550 SK 829 092-G EH 370 EH 260 1 4.800
EH 550 EH 300
A 855D

BSD 700 SK 829 092-H EH 700 EH 550 1 6.600


BSD 800 SK 829 092-K EH 800 EH 550 1 6.600
BSD 550 … BSD 800
Controlgear selection guide for Star-Delta starters ............................................................................................................... page 2/27

Low Voltage Products 4/25


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Plates for:
EH 145 to EH 800 3-Pole Contactors
EK 110 to EK 550 4-Pole Contactors
Description
The range is made up of plates for one contactor only, for two horizontal mounted contactors or for two vertical
mounted contactors and which may be combined with a thermal O/L relay (see section 5) for starters or with
other accessories such as, for example, a mechanical interlock unit (see page 4/10) for reversing contactors.

Ordering details
● Plates for two horizontal mounted contactors with or without a mechanical interlock unit and/or
thermal O/L relay.
Type Order code to use with: Packing Weight

Lefthand contactor Righthand contactor piece kg


PN 145-21 SK 829 075-B EH 145 VH 145 EH 145 1 1.180
PN 210-22 SK 829 075-C EH 175, 210 VH 210 A EH 145 1 1.400
EH 175, 210 VH 300 EH 175, 210
EK 110, 150 VH 145 EK 110, 150
PN 300-22 SK 829 075-E EH 260, 300 VH 300 EH 175, 210 1 2.070
(1) EH 260, 300 VH 300 EH 260, 300
EK 175, 210 VH 300 EK 175, 210
Plate

(1) To mount the thermal O/L relay, use the additional PR 450-9A plate below.

Plate
●Plates for two horizontal mounted contactors without mechanical interlock unit and/or thermal
O/L relay.
Type Order code to use with: Packing Weight

Lefthand contactor – Righthand contactor piece kg


PN 550-21 21 75 0297-5 EH 370, 550 – EH 370, 550 1 4.100
PN 800-22 21 75 0297-6 EH 700, 800 – EH 700, 800 1 5.000
EH 370, 550 – EH 370, 550

● Additional plates for mounting a thermal O/L relay on a main plate holding the contactors.
Type Order code to use with: Packing Weight
thermal O/L relay main plate piece
PR 450-9A SK 829 073-A T 450 DU PN 300-22 1 0.180
PR 900-9A SK 829 073-B T 450 DU, T 900 DU PN 550-21, plate 1 0.800
supplied with the
VH 550 interlocking
PR 900-9B SK 829 073-C T 900 DU PN 800-22, plate 1 0.960
supplied with the
VH 800 interlocking

● Plates for mounting a contactor combined with a thermal O/L relay.


Type Order code to use with: Packing Weight
contactor thermal O/L relay piece
PN 300-11A 21 61 142-51 EH 145 to EH 210 T 200 DU 1 0.900
EH 175 to EH 300 T 450 DU
PN 700-11 21 61 142-98 EH 370, 550 T 450 DU 1 2.100
EH 550, 700 T 900 DU

4/26 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Plates for:
EH 145 to EH 800 3-Pole Contactors
EK 110 to EK 550 4-Pole Contactors

Dimensions in mm

280
260 5
160
195

E0749D2
E0749D1

ø 6.8

PN 145-21

430 3
340
400
320 5

200
230
180
200

ø 15
4

E0748D1G

E0748D2
E0750D2
E0750D1

Additional plate
ø 6.8 PR 450-9A

PN 210-22 PN 300-22

580 46
480 46 550
450
295
265
295
265

452.5
417.5

ø 15
ø 15
E0752D1G

E0752D2
E0751D2
E0751D1G

Additional plate
Additional plate PR 900-9B
PR 900-9A

PN 550-21 PN 800-22

ø7

ø7
429

415
323
310

E0754D1

E0754D2
E0753D2
E0753D1

180 1.5 240 2


220 8 285 13

PN 300-11A PN 700-11

Low Voltage Products 4/27


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Main Contact Sets


Arc Chutes

Main Contact Sets for 3-pole Contactors


Description
The contact sets for 3-pole contactors consist of six fixed contacts, three moving contacts, springs and the
necessary screws. In addition, the sets include three moving arcing contacts for EH 370 to EH 800 contactors.
Ordering details
Type Order code for contactors Packing Weight
set kg
KLC 9 FPTN 477 035 R0002 (T)BC 9-30 1 0.020
KLC 16 FPTN 477 037 R0002 (T)BC 16-30 1 0.020
KLC 18 GJL 220 1901 R0003 BC 18-30 1 0.040
SB6543

KLC 25 GJL 200 1901 R0003 (T)BC 25-30 1 0.040


KLC 30 GJL 280 1901 R0002 (T)BC 30-30 1 0.050
KL …
ZL 50 1SBN 16 3503 R1000 A/AE/AF/TAE 50-30 1 0.115
ZL 63 1SBN 16 3703 R1000 A/AE/AF/TAE 63-30 1 0.130
ZL 75 1SBN 16 4103 R1000 A/AE/AF/TAE 75-30 1 0.145
ZL 95 1SFN 16 4303 R1000 A/AE/AF 95-30 1 0.190
ZL 110 1SFN 16 4503 R1000 A/AE/AF 110-30 1 0.190
KZ 145 SK 824 220-B EH 145 1 0.320
KZ 175 SK 825 200-B EH 175 1 0.500
KZ 210 SK 825 200-A EH 210 1 0.500
KZ 260 SK 826 200-B EH 260 1 0.600
KZ 300 SK 826 200-A EH 300 1 0.600
KZ 370 SK 827 200-D EH 370 1 1.800
KZ 550 SK 827 200-C EH 550 1 1.800
KZ 700 SK 828 200-D EH 700 1 2.000
KZ 800 SK 828 200-C EH 800 1 2.000
ZLU 50 1SBN 16 3502 R1000 UA 50, UA 50-R 1 0.115
ZLU 63 1SBN 16 3702 R1000 UA 63, UA 63-R 1 0.145
KZ … ZLU 75 1SBN 16 4102 R1000 UA 75, UA 75-R 1 0.145
ZLU 95 1SFN 16 4302 R1000 UA 95 1 0.190
ZLU 110 1SFN 16 4502 R1000 UA 110 1 0.190

Main Contact Sets for 4-pole Contactors


Description
The contact sets for 4-pole contactors consist of eight fixed contacts, four moving contacts, springs and the
necessary screws. In addition, the sets include four moving arcing contacts for EK 370 to EK 550 contactors.
Ordering details
Type Order code for contactors Packing Weight
set kg
ZLT 45 1SBN 16 3304 R1000 A/AE/AF 45-40 1 0.150
ZLT 50 1SBN 16 3504 R1000 A/AE/AF 50-40 1 0.150
ZLT 75 1SBN 16 4104 R1000 A/AE/AF 75-40 1 0.160
KZK 110 SK 824 204-A EK 110 1 0.450
KZK 150 SK 824 204-B EK 150 1 0.450
KZK 175 SK 825 204-A EK 175 1 0.700
KZK 210 SK 825 204-B EK 210 1 0.700
KZK 370 SK 827 204-A EK 370 1 2.400
KZK 550 SK 827 204-B EK 550 1 2.400

Arc Chutes
Ordering details
Type Order code for contactors Packing Weight
set kg
KW 145 5223 351-V EH 145 1 0.395
KW 175 5223 351-AD EH 175 1 0.820
KW 210 5223 351-AE EH 210 1 0.820
KW 260 5223 351-AF EH 260 1 1.070
KW 300 5223 351-AG EH 300 1 1.070
KW 370 5223 351-L EH 370 1 2.360
KW 550 5223 351-M EH 550 1 2.360
SB 7602S4

KW 700 5223 351-N EH 700 1 2.890


KW 800 5223 351-P EH 800 1 2.890
KWK 110 5223 351-AH EK 110 1 0.660
KWK 150 5223 351-AK EK 150 1 0.660
Arc Chutes KWK 175 5223 351-AL EK 175 1 1.260
KWK 210 5223 351-AM EK 210 1 1.260
KWK 370 5223 351-Y EK 370 1 3.170
KWK 550 5223 351-Z EK 550 1 3.170

4/28 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Contactor Coils

A.C. Operated Coils for N Contactor Relays


and A 9 to A 110 Contactors
Coils
Type Order code for contactors Packing Weight
state coil to be completed with
voltage: ■ coil voltage code: ■ ■ ..
see page 0/1 see page 0/1 piece kg
ZA 16 ■ 1SBN 15 1410 R ■ ■ 06 N, A 9 to A 16 ; UA 16..-R 1 0.093
SB 7380S4

ZA 40 ■ 1SBN 15 2410 R ■ ■ 06 A 26 to A 40 ; UA 26, UA 30 1 0.148


UA 26..-R, UA 30..-R
ZA 16 ZA 75 ■ 1SBN 15 3510 R ■ ■ 06 A 45 to A 75 ; UA 50 to UA 75 1 0.166
UA 50..-R to UA 75..-R ; GA 75
ZA 110 ■ 1SFN 15 4310 R ■ ■ 06 A 95 to A 110 ; UA 95 to UA 110 1 0.195

AF Contactors - a.c./d.c. operated with controlled supply


Coils c/w electronic coil interface
Type Order code For contactors Packing Weight
state coil to be completed with
voltage: ■ coil voltage code: ■ ■
see page 2/27 see page 2/27 piece kg
ZAF 75 ■ 1SBN 15 3570 R ■ ■ 06 AF 45 … AF 75 0.170
ZAF 110 ■ 1SFN 15 4370 R ■ ■ 06 AF 95, AF 110 0.200
4
SB 7868S3

D.C. Operated Coils for KC Contactor Relays,


ZAF 110
BC 9 to BC 30 and AE 45 to AE 110 Contactors
Type Order code for contactors Packing Weight
state coil to be completed with
voltage: ■ coil voltage code: ■ .. ■
see page 0/1 see page 0/1 piece kg

Coils only
KBC 30 G ■ GJL 200 1530 R ■ 46 ■ KC and BC 9 to BC 30 1 0.170
ZAE 75 ■ 1SBN 15 3590 R ■ ■ 06 AE 45 to AE 75 ; GAE 75 1 0.170
ZAE 110 ■ 1SFN 15 4390 R ■ ■ 06 AE 95 and AE 110 1 0.195
Auxiliary device including an insertion contact and a varistor
CDL 5-01 1SBN 01 3522 R1001 AE 45 to AE 75 1 0.040
CCL 5-01 1SFN 01 4321 R1001 AE 95 and AE 110 1 0.040

Low Voltage Products 4/29


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Contactor Coils

A.C. or D.C. Operated Coils for EH and EK Contactors


Type Order code for contactors Packing Weight
state coil to be completed with
voltage: ■ coil voltage code: - ■ ■ piece
or
see page 0/1 see page 0/1 set kg

a.c. or d.c. coils only


KH 145 ■ SK 824 101 - ■ ■ EH 145 1 0.240
A_081

KH 210 ■ SK 825 400 - ■ ■ EH 175, 210 ; EK 110, 150 1 0.360


KH 300 ■ SK 826 400 - ■ ■ EH 260, 300 ; EK 175, 210 1 0.440
KH145
KH 550 ■ SK 827 100 - ■ ■ EH 370, 550 1 0.780
KH 800 ■ SK 828 100 - ■ ■ EH 700, 800 ; EK 370, 550 1 0.950
Sets including a d.c. coil, an economy resistor and an insertion contact
KP 145 ■ SK 824 151 - ■ ■ EH 145 1 set 0.240
KP 210 ■ (1) SK 825 450 - ■ ■ EH 175, 210 ; EK 110, 150 1 set 0.360
KP 300 ■ (1) SK 826 450 - ■ ■ EH 260, 300 ; EK 175, 210 1 set 0.440
KP 550 ■ SK 827 150 - ■ ■ EH 370, 550 1 set 0.780
KP 800 ■ SK 828 150 - ■ ■ EH 700, 800 ; EK 370, 550 1 set 0.950
(1) The KP 210 and KP 300 have a double coil winding instead of an economy resistor

Sets including a multi-frequency coil and an insertion contact for contactor with built-in rectifier
KP 210 ■ SK 825 450 - E ■ EH 175, 210 ; EK 110, 150 1 set 0.300
A_088

KP 300 ■ SK 826 450 - E ■ EH 260, 300 ; EK 175, 210 1 set 0.400

KH 550 - KH 800

A.C. and D.C. Operated Coils for the Mechanical Latching Units
on EH 145 to EH 800 Contactors
Coils
Type Order code for contactors Packing Weight
state coil to be completed with
voltage: ■ coil voltage code: - ■ ■
A_083

see page 0/1 see page 0/1 piece kg


KX 800 ■ SK 829 100 - ■ ■ d.c. operated 1 0.09
KX 800

4/30 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Main Summary Index

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


E Electronic O/L Relay

Contents - TA and T Thermal O/L Relays

Panorama .............................................................................................................................. 5/2

Ordering details:

Standard Types and EEx e Special Version ................................................................. 5/4 - 5/6


Accessories ................................................................................................................... 5/7 - 5/9

Technical Data:

Description and Construction Details .................................................................................. 5/10


Technical Data .................................................................................................................... 5/11
Choice of Protective Device ................................................................................................ 5/14
Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase, Short-Circuit Protection ..................................... 5/15
Tripping Curves ................................................................................................................... 5/17
Tripping Times for EEx e Protection ................................................................................... 5/18 5
Certifications and Approvals ........................................................................................ Section 7

Contents - E Electronic O/L Relay

Ordering Details ................................................................................................................... 5/19


Technical Data ..................................................................................................................... 5/20
Tripping Curves .................................................................................................................... 5/21
Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase, Short-Circuit Protection ..................................... 5/22
Certifications and Approvals ................................................................................................ 5/22

Low Voltage Products 5/1


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary
Section Index

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


Panorama

Thermal O/L Relays

Types TA 25 DU TA 42 DU TA 75 DU TA 80 DU
Main Characteristics
Construction 3-pole with ambient temperature variation compensation.
Protection against single-phase operation. Built-in auxiliary contacts: 1N.O. + 1N.C.

A 310
Resetting Convertible: Manual Automatic
Setting ranges Number 18 3 6 4
from 0.1 - 0.16 A 18 - 25 A 18 - 25 A 29 - 42 A
to 24 - 32 A 29 - 42 A 60 - 80 A 60 - 80 A

Mounted with Contactors


Mounting kit No kit is required for mounting thermal O/L relays below contactors
Types of contactors A9 BC 9
for combined mounting A 12
A 16 BC 16
BC 18
A 26 BC 25
A 30 BC 30 A 30
A 40 A 40
A 50 AE 50
A 63 AE 63
A 75 AE 75
A 95 AE 95
A 110 AE 110

Mounted separately (i.e. separate from contactor)


Separate mounting kit DB 25 DB 80
Accessories
Tripping coil DS 25-A
Resetting coil DR 25-A
Terminal shroud Terminals protected against direct contact (without the addition of terminal shrouds)

Function markers BA 5-50


Variants
Relays for motors with long starting time
Relays for EEx e protection TA 25 DU - V 1000 TA 42 DU - V 1000 TA 75 DU - V 1000 TA 80 DU - V 1000

5/2 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


Panorama

TA 110 DU T 200 DU T 450 DU T 900 DU

3-pole with ambient temperature variation compensation.


Protection against single-phase operation. Built-in auxiliary contacts: 1N.O. + 1N.C.
A 310

A 324
Convertible: Manual Automatic
2 4 4 4
65 - 90 A 100 - 135 A 130 - 185 A 265 - 375 A
80 - 110 A 150 - 200 A 285 - 400 A 610 - 850 A

No kit is required for mounting thermal O/L relays below contactors AT 450/EH - see accessories AT 900/EH -
page 5/7

A 95 AE 95
A 110 AE 110
EH 145
EH 175 EH 175 + AT 450/EH 160
EH 210 EH 210 + AT 450/EH 160
EH 260 + AT 450/EH 300
EH 300 + AT 450/EH 300
EH 370 + AT 450/EH 370 EH 370 + AT 900/EH 370/550
EH 550 + AT 900/EH 550
EH 700 + AT 900/EH 700
EH 800 + AT 900/EH 800

DB 200 No kit is required for separate mounting of thermal O/L relays.

Terminals protected against direct contact LT 200 – . LT 450 – . LT 900 – .


(without the addition of terminal shrouds)

BA 5-50

T 450 SU T 900 SU
TA 110 DU - V 1000 T 200 DU - V 1000 T 450 DU - V 1000 T 900 DU - V 1000

Low Voltage Products 5/3


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


TA 25 DU and TA 42 DU
Ordering Details

Thermal O/L relays Order code Setting Associated Packing Weight


range max. fuse in
aM gG(gl)
Type A - A A A pieces kg

TA 25 DU for A 9 - A 40 and BC 9 - BC 30 contactors


TA 25 DU 0.16 1SAZ 21 1201 R1005 0.1 - 0.16 – 0.5 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 0.25 1SAZ 21 1201 R1009 0.16 - 0.25 – 0.63 1 0.150
SB 7386

TA 25 DU 0.4 1SAZ 21 1201 R1013 0.25 - 0.4 – 1.25 1 0.150


TA 25 DU 0.63 1SAZ 21 1201 R1017 0.4 - 0.63 – 2 1 0.150
TA 25 DU TA 25 DU 1.0 1SAZ 21 1201 R1021 0.63 - 1.0 2 4 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 1.4 1SAZ 21 1201 R1023 1.0 - 1.4 2 4 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 1.8 1SAZ 21 1201 R1025 1.3 - 1.8 4 6 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 2.4 1SAZ 21 1201 R1028 1.7 - 2.4 4 6 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 3.1 1SAZ 21 1201 R1031 2.2 - 3.1 6 10 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 4.0 1SAZ 21 1201 R1033 2.8 - 4.0 6 10 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 5.0 1SAZ 21 1201 R1035 3.5 - 5.0 10 16 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 6.5 1SAZ 21 1201 R1038 4.5 - 6.5 16 20 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 8.5 1SAZ 21 1201 R1040 6.0 - 8.5 20 25 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 11 1SAZ 21 1201 R1043 7.5 - 11 25 35 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 14 1SAZ 21 1201 R1045 10 - 14 25 35 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 19 1SAZ 21 1201 R1047 13 - 19 35 50 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 25 1SAZ 21 1201 R1051 18 - 25 50 63 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 32 1SAZ 21 1201 R1053 24 - 32 (1) 63 80 1 0.170
(1) with DX 25 terminal block: 1 x 16 mm2 cable

TA 25 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for A 9 - A 40 and BC 9 - BC 30 contactors


TA 25 DU 0.16 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1005 0.1 - 0.16 – 0.5 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 0.25 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1009 0.16 - 0.25 – 0.63 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 0.4 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1013 0.25 - 0.4 – 1.25 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 0.63 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1017 0.4 - 0.63 – 2 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 1.0 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1021 0.63 - 1.0 2 4 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 1.4 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1023 1.0 - 1.4 2 4 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 1.8 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1025 1.3 - 1.8 4 6 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 2.4 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1028 1.7 - 2.4 4 6 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 3.1 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1031 2.2 - 3.1 6 10 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 4.0 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1033 2.8 - 4.0 6 10 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 5.0 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1035 3.5 - 5.0 10 16 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 6.5 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1038 4.5 - 6.5 16 20 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 8.5 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1040 6.0 - 8.5 20 25 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 11 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1043 7.5 - 11.0 25 35 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 14 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1045 10 - 14 25 35 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 19 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1047 13 - 19 35 50 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 25 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1051 18 - 25 50 63 1 0.150
TA 25 DU 32 V 1000 1SAZ 21 1301 R1053 24 - 32 (1) 63 80 1 0.170
(1) with DX 25 terminal block: 1 x 16 mm2 cable

TA 42 DU for A 30, A 40 and BC 30 contactors


TA 42 DU 25 1SAZ 31 1201 R1001 18 - 25 50 63 1 0.33
TA 42 DU 32 1SAZ 31 1201 R1002 22 - 32 63 80 1 0.33
TA 42 DU 42 1SAZ 31 1201 R1003 29 - 42 80 100 1 0.33

TA 42 DU - V1000 (EEx e) for A 30, A 40 and BC 30 contactors


SB 7361

TA 42 DU 25 V1000 1SAZ 31 1301 R1001 18 - 25 50 63 1 0.33


TA 42 DU 32 V1000 1SAZ 31 1301 R1002 22 - 32 63 80 1 0.33
TA 42 DU 42 V1000 1SAZ 31 1301 R1003 29 - 42 80 100 1 0.33
TA 42 DU

● Technical Data .................................................. pages 5/10 - 5/18 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ............................... section 8
● General - Approvals ....................................................... section 7 ● Dimensions .................................................................... section 9

5/4 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU, TA 110 DU and T 200 DU
Ordering Details

Thermal O/L relays Order code Setting Associated Packing Weight


range max. fuse in
aM gG(gl)
Type A - A A A pieces kg

TA 75 DU for A 50 - A 75 and AE 50 - AE 75 contactors


TA 75 DU 25 1SAZ 32 1201 R1001 18 - 25 50 63 1 0.330
SB 7387

TA 75 DU 32 1SAZ 32 1201 R1002 22 - 32 63 80 1 0.330


TA 75 DU 42 1SAZ 32 1201 R1003 29 - 42 80 100 1 0.330

TA 75 DU TA 75 DU 52 1SAZ 32 1201 R1004 36 - 52 100 125 1 0.330


TA 75 DU 63 1SAZ 32 1201 R1005 45 - 63 125 160 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 80 1SAZ 32 1201 R1006 60 - 80 160 200 1 0.330

TA 75 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for A 50 - A 75 and AE 50 - AE 75 contactors


TA 75 DU 25 V 1000 1SAZ 32 1301 R1001 18 - 25 50 63 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 32 V 1000 1SAZ 32 1301 R1002 22 - 32 63 80 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 42 V 1000 1SAZ 32 1301 R1003 29 - 42 80 100 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 52 V 1000 1SAZ 32 1301 R1004 36 - 52 100 125 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 63 V 1000 1SAZ 32 1301 R1005 45 - 63 125 160 1 0.330
TA 75 DU 80 V 1000 1SAZ 32 1301 R1006 60 - 80 160 200 1 0.330
SB 7399

TA 80 DU for A 95, A 110, AE 95 and AE 110 contactors


TA 80 DU 42 1SAZ 33 1201 R1003 29 - 42 80 100 1 0.360
TA 80 DU TA 80 DU 52 1SAZ 33 1201 R1004 36 - 52 100 125 1 0.360
TA 80 DU 63 1SAZ 33 1201 R1005 45 - 63 125 160 1 0.360
TA 80 DU 80 1SAZ 33 1201 R1006 60 - 80 160 200 1 0.360

TA 80 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for A 95, A 110, AE 95 and AE 110 contactors


TA 80 DU 42 V 1000 1SAZ 33 1301 R1003 29 - 42 80 100 1 0.360 5
TA 80 DU 52 V 1000 1SAZ 33 1301 R1004 36 - 52 100 125 1 0.360
TA 80 DU 63 V 1000 1SAZ 33 1301 R1005 45 - 63 125 160 1 0.360
TA 80 DU 80 V 1000 1SAZ 33 1301 R1006 60 - 80 160 200 1 0.360

TA 110 DU for A 95, A 110, AE 95 and AE 110 contactors


TA 110 DU 90 1SAZ 41 1201 R1001 65 - 90 160 200 1 0.750
SB 7398

TA 110 DU 110 1SAZ 41 1201 R1002 80 - 110 200 224 1 0.750

TA 110 DU TA 110 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for A 95, A 110, AE 95 and AE 110 contactors
TA 110 DU 90 V 1000 1SAZ 41 1301 R1001 65 - 90 160 200 1 0.750
TA 110 DU 110 V 1000 1SAZ 41 1301 R1002 80 - 110 200 224 1 0.750

T 200 DU for EH 145, EH 175 and EH 210 contactors


T 200 DU 110 GJZ 432 1401 R 0002 80 - 110 200 224 1 0.910
Plate delivered with T 200 DU
for mounting with EH 175 and EH 210
T 200 DU 135 GJZ 432 1401 R 0003 100 - 135 200 224 1 0.910
contactors T 200 DU 150 GJZ 432 1401 R 0004 110 - 150 224 250 1 0.910
T 200 DU 175 GJZ 432 1401 R 0005 130 - 175 250 315 1 0.910
T 200 DU 200 GJZ 432 1401 R 0006 150 - 200 250 315 1 0.910

T 200 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 145, EH 175 and EH 210 contactors


T 200 DU 135 V 1000 GJZ 433 1401 R 0003 100 - 135 200 224 1 0.910
T 200 DU 150 V 1000 GJZ 433 1401 R 0004 110 - 150 224 250 1 0.910
T 200 DU 175 V 1000 GJZ 433 1401 R 0005 130 - 175 250 315 1 0.910
T 200 DU 200 V 1000 GJZ 433 1401 R 0006 150 - 200 250 315 1 0.910
SB 7029

T 200 DU
● Technical Data ................................................. pages 5/10 - 5/18 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ............................... section 8
● General - Approvals ....................................................... section 7 ● Dimensions .................................................................... section 9

Low Voltage Products 5/5


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


T 450 DU, T 450 SU, T 900 DU and T 900 SU
Ordering Details

Thermal O/L relays Order code Setting Associated Packing Weight


range max. fuse in
aM gG(gl)
Type A - A A A pieces kg

T 450 DU for EH 175…EH 370 contactors - Order AT 450… kit: page 5/7
T 450 DU 185 GJZ 542 1001 R 0001 130 - 185 355 1 1.500
T 450 DU 235 GJZ 542 1001 R 0002 165 - 235 400 1 1.500
T 450 DU 310 GJZ 542 1001 R 0003 220 - 310 500 1 1.500
SB 6570

T 450 DU 400 GJZ 542 1001 R 0004 285 - 400 630 1 1.500

T 450 DU / SU T 450 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 175…EH 370 contactors - Order AT 450… kit: page 5/7
T 450 DU 185 V 1000 GJZ 543 1001 R 0001 130 - 185 355 1 1.500
T 450 DU 235 V 1000 GJZ 543 1001 R 0002 165 - 235 400 1 1.500
T 450 DU 310 V 1000 GJZ 543 1001 R 0003 220 - 310 500 1 1.500
T 450 DU 400 V 1000 GJZ 543 1001 R 0004 285 - 400 630 1 1.500

T 450 SU for EH 175…EH 370 contactors - Order AT 450… kit: page 5/7
T 450 SU 60 GJZ 552 1001 R 0005 40 - 60 125 1 0.700
T 450 SU 80 GJZ 552 1001 R 0006 55 - 80 160 1 0.700
T 450 SU 105 GJZ 552 1001 R 0007 70 - 105 200 1 0.700
T 450 SU 140 GJZ 552 1001 R 0008 95 - 140 315 1 0.700
T 450 SU 185 GJZ 552 1001 R 0001 130 - 185 355 1 0.700
T 450 SU 235 GJZ 552 1001 R 0002 165 - 235 400 1 0.700
T 450 SU 310 GJZ 552 1001 R 0003 220 - 310 500 1 0.700
SB 6569

T 450 SU 400 GJZ 552 1001 R 0004 285 - 400 630 1 0.700

T 900 DU / SU T 450 SU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 175…EH 370 contactors - Order AT 450… kit: page 5/7
T 450 SU 60 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0005 40 - 60 125 1 0.700
T 450 SU 80 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0006 55 - 80 160 1 0.700
T 450 SU 105 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0007 70 - 105 200 1 0.700
T 450 SU 140 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0008 95 - 140 315 1 0.700
T 450 SU 185 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0001 130 - 185 355 1 0.700
T 450 SU 235 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0002 165 - 235 400 1 0.700
T 450 SU 310 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0003 220 - 310 500 1 0.700
T 450 SU 400 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0004 285 - 400 630 1 0.700

T 900 DU for EH 370…EH 800 contactors - Order AT 900… kit: page 5/7
T 900 DU 375 GJZ 602 1001 R 0001 265 - 375 500 1 3.000
T 900 DU 500 GJZ 602 1001 R 0002 355 - 500 800 1 3.000
T 900 DU 650 GJZ 602 1001 R 0003 465 - 650 1000 1 3.000
T 900 DU 850 GJZ 602 1001 R 0004 610 - 850 1250 1 3.000

T 900 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 370…EH 800 contactors - Order AT 900… kit: page 5/7
T 900 DU 375 V 1000 GJZ 603 1001 R 0001 265 - 375 500 1 3.000
T 900 DU 500 V 1000 GJZ 603 1001 R 0002 355 - 500 800 1 3.000
T 900 DU 650 V 1000 GJZ 603 1001 R 0003 465 - 650 1000 1 3.000
T 900 DU 850 V 1000 GJZ 603 1001 R 0004 610 - 850 1250 1 3.000

T 900 SU for EH 370…EH 800 contactors - Order AT 900… kit: page 5/7
T 900 SU 375 GJZ 612 1001 R 0001 265 - 375 500 1 1.500
T 900 SU 500 GJZ 612 1001 R 0002 355 - 500 800 1 1.500
T 900 SU 650 GJZ 612 1001 R 0003 465 - 650 1000 1 1.500
T 900 SU 850 GJZ 612 1001 R 0004 610 - 850 1250 1 1.500

T 900 SU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 370…EH 800 contactors - Order AT 900… kit: page 5/7
T 900 SU 375 V 1000 GJZ 613 1001 R 0001 265 - 375 500 1 1.500
T 900 SU 500 V 1000 GJZ 613 1001 R 0002 355 - 500 800 1 1.500
T 900 SU 650 V 1000 GJZ 613 1001 R 0003 465 - 650 1000 1 1.500
T 900 SU 850 V 1000 GJZ 613 1001 R 0004 610 - 850 1250 1 1.500

● Technical Data .................................................. pages 5/10 - 5/18 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ............................... section 8
● General - Approvals ....................................................... section 7 ● Dimensions .................................................................... section 9

5/6 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Accessories for TA and T Thermal O/L Relays

Kits for Mounting thermal O/L relays on contactors


Ordering Details
TA25 DU to T200 DU thermal O/L relays can be mounted directly on contactors without a mounting kit.

SST 182 91 R
T450 DU/SU and T900 DU/SU to be combined with contactors require an additional mounting kit.

Type Order code For mounting on contactors Packing Weight


in
set kg
DB 25
AT 450/EH 160 GJZ 520 1901 R0002 EH 175 / 210 1 0.500
AT 450/EH 300 GJZ 520 1909 R0002 EH 260 / 300 1 0.750
AT 450/EH 370 GJZ 520 1903 R0002 EH 370 1 1.100
AT 900/EH 550 GJZ 520 1911 R0002 EH 370/550 1 0.800
AT 900/EH 700 GJZ 520 1912 R0002 EH 700 1 1.900
AT 900/EH 800 GJZ 520 1913 R0002 EH 800 1 3.000

Separate Mounting Kit


Ordering Details
SST 193 91 R

Type Order code For Fixing Packing Weight


thermal in
O/L relays pieces kg
DB 80
DB 25/25 A 1SAZ 20 1108 R0001 TA 25 DU ≤ 25 fixing 1 0.050
DB 25/32 A 1SAZ 20 1108 R0002 TA 25 DU 32 screws 1 0.075
TA 42 DU or
DB 80 1SAZ 30 1110 R0001 TA 75 DU 35 mm 1 0.170
TA 80 DU

DB 200 1SAZ 40 1110 R0001


TA 110 DU fixing
screws 1 0.230
5
T 200 DU only

LC - Flat Pin Terminal Blocks


SST 279 92 R

Description
LC terminal blocks can be used to transform standard connections into Faston connections:
DB 200
2 x 6.3 mm or 4 x 2.8 mm per pole. The connections are protected against accidental contact.
The LC 30-T has a first terminal block for the 3 power terminals and a second for the 4 auxiliary terminals of
a TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay.
The LC 26-B1 has two identical terminal blocks each for 3 power terminals. This block allows the power
terminals to be fitted with two DB 25 kits or a TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay and DB 25 kit assembly.
According to DIN 46429 part 1 and NFC 20-120 the max. capacity of a Faston connection is 25 A.
!
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounting on: Packing Weight
in
kg
A 067

LC 30-T GJL 280 1912 R0001 TA 25 DU relay 1 piece 0.021


LC 26-B1 GJL 280 1912 R0004 DB 25/25 A or DB 25/32 A 1 set 0.015
LC 26-B1
separate mounting kit

Terminal Block for 10 mm2 Cross-sectional Widening


Type Order code Mounting on: Packing Weight
in
pieces kg
DX 25 1SAZ 20 1307 R0002 TA 25 DU < 25 or 1 0.030
SST 014 94 R

DB 25/25 A

DX 25

● Dimensions .................................................. section 9 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ......................................... section 8

Low Voltage Products 5/7


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Accessories for TA and T Thermal O/L Relays

Application
– The DS 25-A coil is used for remote electrical tripping of the TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay.
The DS 25-A coil is connected to the relay's normally closed 95-96 auxiliary contact.
– The DR 25-A coil is used for remote electrical resetting of the TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay which is
adjusted for "Manual resetting".
The DR 25-A coil is connected to the relay's normally open 97-98 auxiliary contact.
SST 205 91 R

The coils are not designed for continuous duty. Impulse duration: 0.2 to 0.35 s.
Set the button to "Man" (Manual resetting).
DS 25 A
Mounting: clipped on to TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay.

Ordering Details
Type Order code Uc voltage Packing Weight
at 50/60 Hz in
pieces kg

DS 25-A Remote Tripping Coil


DS 25 -A-24 1SAZ 20 1501 R0001 24 V 1 0.10
DS 25 -A-48 1SAZ 20 1501 R0002 48 V 1 0.10
DS 25 -A-110 1SAZ 20 1501 R0003 110 V 1 0.10
DS 25 -A-220/380 1SAZ 20 1501 R0005 220/380 V 1 0.10
SST 204 91 R

DS 25 -A-500 1SAZ 20 1501 R0006 500 V 1 0.10

DR 25-A Remote Resetting Coil


DR 25 A
DR 25 -A-24 1SAZ 20 1504 R0001 24 V 1 0.10
DR 25 -A-48 1SAZ 20 1504 R0002 48 V 1 0.10
DR 25 -A-110 1SAZ 20 1504 R0003 110 V 1 0.10
DR 25 -A-220/380 1SAZ 20 1504 R0005 220/380 V 1 0.10
DR 25 -A-500 1SAZ 20 1504 R0006 500 V 1 0.10

Installation diagram
For connection of DS 25-A to TA 25 DU relay For connection of DR 25-A to TA 25 DU relay
ABB 86 6680/1S
ABB 86 6679/1S

ABB 86 6679/2S

ABB 86 6680/2S

5/8 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Accessories for TA and T Thermal O/L Relays

Terminal Shroud for Thermal O/L Relays


Utilization:
Protection against direct contact with live parts.
The presence of terminal shrouds on the thermal O/L relays is required in electrical panels or cubicles meeting
the specifications for protection against electrical accidents.
Protection is ensured as follows:
– TA 25 DU, TA 42 DU, TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU and TA 110 DU thermal O/L relays come with their main and
auxiliary terminals protected against direct contact (no need to add a cover or terminal shroud).
– T 200 DU, T 450 DU/SU and T 900 DU/SU thermal O/L relays come with their auxiliary terminals protected
against direct contact. However, the main terminals must be protected by the additional terminal shrouds
described below.
The terminal shrouds are made from a transparent insulating material.

Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted on: Packing Weight
in
set kg
SST 289 92 R

LT 200 /160 GJZ 430 1907 R0001 T 200 DU + EH 145 /175 / 210 1 0.150
LT 450 /250 GJZ 520 1930 R0001 T 450 DU/SU + EH 175 / 210 /260 / 300 1 0.310
LT 450 /370 GJZ 520 1932 R0002 T 450 DU/SU + EH 370 1 0.410
LT …
LT 900 /700 GJZ 520 1935 R0002 T 900 DU/SU + EH 370/550/700 1 0.450
LT 900/800 GJZ 520 1937 R0002 T 900 DU/SU + EH 800 1 0.600

BA 5-50 Function Markers


Description
The BA 5-50 is a set of 50 function markers which can be clipped on to the front face of devices. 5
Dimensions of effective surface 7 x 19 mm.
Written details can be added to these markers using a ballpoint pen, indelible felt-tip or pentel white.
Self-adhesive labels can also be added to them.

Ordering Details
SB 7587S4

Type Order code Mounted on: Packing Weight


BA 5-50 in
box kg
BA 5-50 1SBN 11 0000 R1000 all thermal O/L relays 1 0.017

Connectors for Cu cables


Type Order code Mounted on Packing Weight
thermal O/L mm2 in
relays pieces kg
OXFB 150 SK 1750005 T 200 DU 35-150 3 0.07
A 092

OXFB 150

Low Voltage Products 5/9


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


Description

Application
TA and T thermal O/L relays are used with A, BC, AE and EH contactors for the protection of motors having
a nominal voltage of up to 690 V a.c. and 800 V d.c.

Product Range
● Standard Relays:
Types: TA 25 DU, TA 42 DU, TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU, TA 110 DU, T 200 DU, T 450 DU/SU and T 900 DU/SU
– TA 25 to TA 110 and T 200 are directly connected in the motor circuit.
– T 450 DU and T 900 DU relays are fed through a linear type transformer.
– T 450 SU and T 900 SU are fed through a saturable transformer and consequently have a longer tripping time.
See page 5/11, "Protection of Motors with Long Starting Time".
● Special Construction
Thermal O/L relays with different certifications and approvals, see page 7/5.
Relays for protection of EEx e motors, see page 5/11.

Construction and Function


SB 7601S3

● General
Thermal O/L relays and their accessories meet the most important international standards (IEC),
TA 25 DU European standards (EN) and the most important national standards (DIN-VDE, NFC-UTE, BS, etc.).
They meet the certification and approval directives required throughout the world.
Thermal O/L relays are 3-pole.
The motor current flows through their bimetals (1 per phase) which are thus indirectly heated. Under the effect
of the heating, the bimetals bend, cause the relay to trip and the position of the auxiliary contacts to change.
The relay setting range is graduated in amps. In compliance with international and national standards, the
setting current is the motor nominal current and not the tripping current (no tripping at 1.05 x setting current,
tripping at 1.2 times setting current).
The tripping curves (cold or warm starting, 3 phases and 2 phases) are shown on page 5/17.
The relays are built to be self-protecting in the event of an overload until the short-circuit protection device, as
specified in the association tables, is activated.

Technical Data
All the relays have:
– Free tripping: the resetting button, even if held in, does not prevent tripping of the thermal O/L relay in the
event of a fault.
– Temperature compensation: see page 5/11
– Phase failure protection according to IEC 947-4-1: Within the limits of the setting range a reduced tripping
time, and thus improved motor protection, is obtained in case of a phase failure.
– Tripping class (see page 7/8): 10 A, for TA and T - DU relays
30, for T - SU relays
– Test functions and resetting, see table below.
Auxiliary contacts
The relays have two built-in auxiliary contacts: N.C. marked 95 – 96
N.O. marked 97 – 98
Both contacts are physically separate and can thus be used for 2 different circuits (control circuit, indication
circuit).

Function of TA 25 DU - T 900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays


Resetting Relay tripped { 95-96
97-98
Open
Closed
Relay not tripped { 95-96
97-98
Closed
Open
Contacts Manual Automatic Both Manual and Automatic
Effect of blue Resetting Yes No No
button indexed
on R 95-96 Closed when the
button is pressed
No effect No effect
97-98 Open when the
button is pressed
Effect of blue Resetting Yes No No
button indexed
on R/O 95-96 Closed when the Open when the button is pressed
button is released Closed when the button is released
No effect
97-98 Open when the
button is pressed No effect

5/10 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


Technical Data

● Switching Frequency:
Intermittent duty To avoid untimely tripping, TA and T thermal O/L relays have been designed to withstand roughly 15 switching
operations per hour with an approximately equal distribution between working and rest cycles.
In these conditions, the motor starting time must not exceed 1 second and the starting current must be lower
(ops./h) than or equal to 6 times the motor In.
For intermittent operations, the diagram opposite specifies relay operating limits.
Example: Motor starting time: ......................... 1 sec.
Switching frequency

Load factor: ..................................... 40 %


Switching frequency: ....................... 60 ops./h according to diagram
For a higher number of operations and for load variations (e.g. frequent starting and braking), it is advisable
to use CUSTORAPID® protection.
For motors subject to particularly severe operating conditions (e.g. locked rotor) it is advisable to use
protection combined with a thermal O/L relay and the CUSTORAPID® system.
ABB 827 833

Protection of Motors with Long Starting Time


Closing time
T 450SU/T 900SU relays must be used for especially long starting times. The setting ranges listed on
page 5/6 are for a single cable passage in the current transformer. The relay can also be used for smaller sized
motors. This is possible through multiple cable passages through the current transformer. The setting range
Switching frequency
indicated on the rating plate varies in inverse proportion to the number of cable passages.
in relation to load factor.
ta: motor starting time. Example: a T 450DU/SU relay with a setting range of 130 to 185 A is suitable for currents of 65 - 92.5 A in the
case of 2 passages and 43 - 61.6 A in the case of 3 passages.

● Mounting position
On a support at an angle of ± 30° in relation to the vertical plane (standard position).
Other mounting positions possible, except mounting on a horizontal plane (in this case the tripping
mechanism would be located above the bimetals).

● Special version for EEx e motors


TA 25 DU…V1000 to T 900 DU/SU…V1000 relays are suitable for EEx e motors. They are approved and
certified in compliance with the "Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt" (PTB) at Braunschweig.
Introduction and definition of chapter on "Characteristics of Increased Safety e", see publication DNG 80543
"Protection against explosions according to European Standards" (on request). When choosing a protective
relay, specific attention must be paid to the tripping curves. The determining values are: the ratio of the starting
5
current Ia to the nominal current In and the shortest time tE . These values must be indicated on the PTB approval
certificate and on the motor rating plate. The relay must trip within a time lapse tE, i.e. starting from a cold state
the tripping curve must be located below the point of co-ordinates: Ia / In and tE.
Tripping time

Example for the capability of a TA protective relay:


The increased safety motor has the following characteristics:
Power = 7.5 kW ; Ia / In = 7.4 ; tE = 11 s.
According to the tripping curve opposite, the tripping time is indeed located below the motor tE value. Compared
ABB 83 6246

with the normal version, special versions for EEx e motors have the following features:
Multiple of the setting current – special in-factory tripping time test
– special ordering details
The tripping curves for individual setting ranges as well as the PTB approval certificates are available on
TA - and T - thermal O/L request.
relay cold-state tripping
PTB numbers:
characteristics
Type PTB Numbers Type PTB Numbers
TA 25 DU…V1000 being prepared T450 DU, T900 DU…V1000 3.53/38 1.671
TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU, TA 110 DU…V1000 being prepared T450 SU, T900 SU…V1000 3.53/38 1.672
T200 DU…V1000 3.53-5315/ 93

Tripping Limits at Ambient Temperatures varying by + 20°C

Ambient Temperature Compensation


Ambient temperature
compensation limits Thermal O/L relays are compensated against ambient temperature variations by a
according to IEC 947-4-1
compensation bimetal which is sensitive to the ambient temperature.
Multiple of the setting current

Thermal O/L relays are designed to operate between –5 °C and +40 °C in compliance
Tripping with standard IEC 947-4-1. For a wider range of –25° C to +55 °C consult the graph
opposite.
Example: tripping at – 25 °C. Tripping takes place before 1.5 times the setting current.
No tripping
Resetting: TA 25 DU – T900 DU/SU thermal O/L relays have convertible manual/
automatic resetting.
SST 085 92 K

Delivery: in manual resetting mode.


Ambient temperature

Low Voltage Products 5/11


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


Technical Data

General Technical Data


Types TA 25 DU TA 42 DU TA 75 DU TA 80 DU
Standards: IEC 947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1
(international, european)
Certifications and approvals see section 7
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
according to IEC 947-4-1
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6
according to IEC 947-4-1
Permissible ambient temperature
– for storage °C –40 to +70
– for operation °C –25 to +55 with temperature compensation (maximum values: see page 5 /11)
Climatic withstand DIN 50017 Humidity in alternate climate KFW, 30 cycles
Mounting positions On a support at an angle of ±30° in relation to the vertical plane (standard position). Other positions possible
except mounting on a horizontal plane (in this case the tripping mechanism would be located above the bimetals) .
Shock withstand shock duration ms 15
at nominal Ie A2
E0526D

Critical direction A1
of shocks A1, A2 multiples of g 12
Resistance to vibrations
(±1 mm, 50 Hz) multiples of g 8
Mounting – on contactor Latching below the contactor, screw fixing on main terminals
– separate with DB - kit Using screws: 2 x M4 or 35 mm EN 50022
Terminals and cross-sectional areas TA25DU setting ranges:
for main conductors (motor side) from 0.1-0.16 A
24-32 A
● screw terminal to 18-25 A
– with cable clamp M4 –
– via tunnel connector – M5 M6 M6 M6
– flat type for lug or bar – – – – –
● conductor cross-sectional area
– rigid solid or rigid stranded mm2 2 x 1.5 - 6 1 x 10 1 x 2.5 - 35 or 2 x 2.5 x 16
– flexible with cable end mm2 2 x 1.5 - 4 2 x 0.75- 6 1 x 2.5 - 25 or 2 x 2.5 x 10
– recommended bars mm – – – – –
Terminals and cross-sectional area
for auxiliary conductors
● screw terminal (screw size)
– with cable clamp M 3.5
● conductor cross-sectional area
– rigid solid or rigid stranded 2 x mm2 0.75 - 4
– flexible with cable end 2 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5
Degree of protection All the terminals are protected against direct contact according to see page
VDE 0106/Part. 100. (without additional terminal shrouds) opposite

Pole Technical Characteristics


Types TA 25 TA 42 TA 75 TA 80 TA 110 T200 T450 T900 T 450 T 900
DU DU DU DU DU DU DU DU SU SU
Number of poles 3
Setting ranges see pages 5/4 - 5 /6
Tripping class according to IEC 947-4-1, EN 60947-1 10 A 30 A
Rated operational frequencies Hz 0 - 400 50/60
Max. switching frequency Up to 15 starts/h or 60 starts/h with 40 % on-load factor when neither
without untimely tripping the starting current of 6 x In nor the starting time 1 s are exceeded.
Resistance per phase in mΩ
and heat dissipation in W see pages 5/15 and 5/16
at the maximum current setting
Protection fuses
required for short-circuit protection see pages 5/4 - 5/6 (co-ordination: pages 7/19 - 7/21)

5/12 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


Technical Data

General Technical Data (cont.)


TA 110 DU T 200 DU T 450 DU/SU T 900 DU/SU
IEC 947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1

see section 7
V 690 1000

kV 6 8

°C –40 to +70
°C –25 to +55 with temperature compensation (maximum values: see page 5/11)
Humidity in alternate climate KFW, 30 cycles
On a support at an angle of ±30° in relation to the vertical plane (standard position). Other mounting positions
possible, except mounting on a horizontal plane (in this case the tripping mechanism would be located above the bimetals).
ms 15

xg 12

xg 8

4 x M5 screws 4 x M6 screws

HC, M8 – – –
5
– M10 M10 M10

mm2 16 - 35 25 - 120 2 x 240 2 x 300


mm2 16 - 35 25 - 95 2 x 240 2 x 300
mm 12 x 3 20 x 4 20 x 4…5 40 x 5…8

M 3.5

2 x mm2 0.75 - 4
2 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5
All the terminals are protected against direct contact according to VDE 0106/Part. 100.
(with additional terminal shrouds for the main terminals)

Technical Characteristics of Auxiliary Contacts for Thermal O/L Relays: TA 25 to T900


Auxiliary contacts "normally closed N.C." "normally open N.O."
Terminal marking 95-96 97-98
Rated operational voltage Ue Va.c. 500 500
Conventional thermal current (in free air) Ith A 10 6
Rated operational current Ie, AC-15
up to 240 V A 3.0 1.5
up to 440 V A 1.9 0.95
up to 500 V A 1.0 0.75
Rated operational current Ie DC-13
up to 250 V A 0.12 0.04
Protection against short circuits
gG (gl) fuses (according to IEC 269) A 10 6
S 271/S 281circuit-breaker A k3 k1
Maximum potential difference a.c. V 500 500
between N.C. and N.O. auxiliary contacts d.c. V 440 440

Low Voltage Products 5/13


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Motor Protection
Choice of Protective Device

Motor Protection - General


It is very important to choose an adequate protective device for the safety of the motor during operation and for its durability.
The efficiency of protection methods varies according to the application. The overview below will help you to choose.
There is no general rule and we are available to advise you for special applications and especially in the case of difficult starting.

Protective Devices and Efficiency


Protection in relation to current: Protection in relation to temperature:

Fuses Protective relay with Motor protection Motor protection


phase fault protection via CUSTORAPID® via SPEM electronic
thermistor relay

SST 081 91 M2

SST 081 91 M1

SST 081 91 M3

SST 081 91 M4
SPEM

M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~

Causes of dangerous overloads for the motor windings

1 Overload with current ■ ● ● ●


1.2 times the nominal current

2 S1-S8 nominal duties ■ ■ ● ●


according to IEC 34-I

3 Operation with starting, ■ ■ ● ●


braking, reversal in operating direction

4 Operation with starting ■ ■ ● ●


rate at > 15 cycles/hour

5 Locked rotor ■ ● ■ for motors with ●


special rotor

6 Overloads due to phase failure ■ ● ● ●

7 Network undervoltage or overvoltage ■ ● ● ●

8 Fluctuation of network frequency ■ ● ● ■

9 Ambient temperature too high ■ ● ● ■

10 Overheating due to external ■ ■ ● ■


cause (i.e. overheating of bearings)

11 Motor cooling disturbed ■ ■ ● ■


12 Undercurrent protection
on drop in load
13 Protection of asymmetry:
wrong phase direction
rotation or asymmetrical load
14 Earth fault protection
15 Automatic disconnection for
auxiliary load fault

Protection efficiency: Note: Fuses


Fuses do not protect motors against overloads. They are only used to protect installations and lines against short
■ unsuitable circuits.
■ very average efficiency
To ensure efficient protection of a motor against short circuits, it is advisable to use aM type fuses in association
with thermal O/L relays.
● perfectly efficient For the selection of fuses or circuit-breakers, refer to the indications given in this catalogue concerning contactors
on the one hand and thermal O/L relays on the other.
In general, fuse protection for direct-on-line starting must be sized as follows:
– aM fuses: choose the fuse rating immediately above the full load value of the motor current.
– gG (gI) fuses: determine the fuse rating immediately above the motor current value and choose the next highest
fuse rating.

5/14 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase,
Short-circuit Protection

Setting range Resistance Joule losses


per phase per phase at
max. setting
current
from - to
A A mΩ W

TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay


0.1 - 0.16 85850 2.2
0.16 - 0.25 85150 2.2
0.25 - 0.4 13750 2.2
0.4 - 0.63 5370 2.2
0.63 - 1.0 2190 2.2
1.0 - 1.4 1120 2.2
1.3 - 1.8 670 2.2
1.7 - 2.4 383 2.2
2.2 - 3.1 229 2.2
2.8 - 4.0 137 2.2
3.5 - 5.0 87.5 2.2
4.5 - 6.5 61 2.2
6.0 - 8.5 30.4 2.2
7.5 - 11 18.2 2.2
10 - 14 11.2 2.2
13 - 19 6.3 2.3
18 - 25 4.7 2.9
24 - 32 3.2 3.3

TA 42 DU Thermal O/L Relay


Setting range

A A
Resistance
per phase
mΩ
Joule losses
per phase
W
5
18 - 25 5.5 3.43
22 - 32 2.89 2.91
29 - 42 1.84 3.24

TA 75 DU Thermal O/L Relay


18 - 25 5.5 3.43
22 - 32 2.89 2.91
29 - 42 1.84 3.24
36 - 52 1.3 3.51
45 - 63 0.936 3.72
60 - 80 0.615 3.94

TA 80 DU Thermal O/L Relay


29 - 42 1.84 3.24
36 - 52 1.3 3.51
45 - 63 0.936 3.72
60 - 80 0.615 3.94

Short-circuit protection: see page 7/19.

Low Voltage Products 5/15


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase,
Short-circuit Protection

Setting range Resistance Joule losses


per phase per phase at
max. setting
current
from - to
A A mΩ W

TA 110 DU Thermal O/L Relay


80 - 110 0.378 3.78

T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relay


100 - 135 0.318 5.79
110 - 150 0.255 5.74
130 - 175 0.214 6.55
150 - 200 0.182 7.28

T 450 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relay


130 - 185 – 2.5
165 - 235 – 2.5
220 - 310 – 2.5
285 - 400 – 2.5

T 900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relay


265 - 375 – 2.5
355 - 500 – 2.5
465 - 650 – 2.5
610 - 850 – 2.5

Short-circuit protection: see page 7/19

5/16 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TA and T Thermal O/L Relays


Tripping Curves

SB 6569
SB 7361
SB 7386

SB 7029
TA 25 DU TA 75 DU T 200 DU T900 DU

TA-DU and T-DU thermal O/L relays are 3-pole with manual or automatic resetting mode selection.
The resetting button can also be used for stopping.
Built-in auxiliary contacts are physically separate and, consequently, can be used in different circuits (control circuit/indication circuit).
Each relay is temperature compensated and ensures phase failure protection.
Protective relays up to size TA 75 DU are protected against direct contact via the front face. Terminal shrouds are available for T 200 DU to
T 900 DU/SU size relays.
The connecting terminals are delivered in open position with (+,-) pozidriv screws and screwdriver guidance. It is advisable to tighten unused terminal
screws.

Thermal O/L Relay Tripping Curves


TA 25 DU TA 42 DU, TA 75 DU and TA 80 DU TA 110 DU
(tripping class 10A) (tripping class 10A) (tripping class 10A)
120 120 120
100 100 100
80 80 80
60 60 60
40 40 40

20 20 20

10 10 10

5
8 8 8
6 6 from cold state 6
4 4 4
Minutes

Minutes
Minutes

from cold state


2 from cold state 2 2
Tripping time

Tripping time

Tripping time

2 Phases
1 1 1 2 Phases

40 2 Phases 40 3 Phases 40
3 Phases

20 20 20
Seconds

2 Phases
Second

Seconds

3 Phases
10 10
3 Phases
10 2 Phases 3 Phases
8 8 8
6 6 6
4 3 Phases 4 4 2 Phases
from warm state
SST 0003 90 K

SST 005 90 K

2 2 2
from warm state

91 A 383
from warm state
1 1 1
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Tripping current Tripping current Tripping current


in multiples of the setting current in multiples of the setting current in multiples of the setting current

T 200 DU T 450 DU and T 900 DU T 450 SU and T 900 SU


(tripping class 10A) (tripping class 10A) (tripping class 30)
120 120 120
100 100 100
80 80 80
60 60 60
40 40 40

20 20 20

10 10 10
8 8 8
6 6 6
4 4 4
Minutes

Minutes
Minutes

from cold state from cold state from cold state


2 2 2
Tripping time

Tripping time
Tripping time

2 Phases 3 Phases 3 Phases


1 1 1
40 3 Phases 40 40 2 Phases
2 Phases
20 20 20
Seconds
Seconds

Seconds

3 Phases 2 Phases
10 10 10
8 8 2 Phases 8
6 6 6
4 2 Phases 3 Phases
4 4
3 Phases
SST 031 99 K

2 from warm state 2 2


from warm state from warm state
91 A 384

91 A 385

1 1 1
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Tripping current Tripping current Tripping current


in multiples of the setting current in multiples of the setting current in multiples of the setting current

Low Voltage Products 5/17


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TA and T - V 1000 Thermal O/L Relays


Choice of Thermal O/L Relays for Protection
of EEx e Motors

Choice of thermal O/L relays for EEx e motor protection.


Thermal O/L relay tripping times are a function of the setting current multiples (tolerance ± 20% tripping time).
PTB approval: see page 5/11.
Setting range Tripping time in seconds for
of thermal O/L 3-8 multiples of the setting current:
relays
from to 3 4 5 6 7.2 8
A A s s s s s s

TA 25 DU…V1000 Thermal O/L Relay


0.1 … 0.16 17.3 10 7 5.6 4.5 4
0.16 … 0.25 16.8 10 7.2 6 4.7 4.3
0.25 … 0.4 16.3 10 7 5.6 4.4 3.9
0.4 … 0.63 17.3 10.3 7.1 5.7 4.5 4
0.63 … 1.0 20 12.6 8.4 6.7 5.3 4.5
1.0 … 1.4 18.3 11.2 8 6.3 5 4.6
1.3 … 1.8 18.8 11.1 7.5 6 4.7 4.2
1.7 … 2.4 19.6 11.5 8 6 4.9 4.5
2.2 … 3.1 18.3 10.5 7.6 6 4.7 4.2
2.8 … 4.0 18.8 11.2 8 6.1 4.7 4.2
3.5 … 5.0 17.8 10.9 7.7 6 4.5 4.1
4.5 … 6.5 17.8 10.5 7.5 5.6 4.6 4
6.0 … 8.5 17.8 10.9 7.7 6.1 5 4.5
7.5 … 11 18.8 11.5 8.3 6.5 5.1 4.5
10 … 14 17.8 10.9 7.7 6 4.7 4.2
13 … 19 20.5 11.9 8.8 6 4.7 4
18 … 25 22.4 13.3 8 6.8 5 4.5
24 … 32 23.7 14 10 7.7 6 5.3

TA 42 DU, TA 75 DU and TA 80 DU…V1000 Thermal O/L Relays


18 … 25 41 23.2 16 11.8 9 7.5
22 … 32 37 21 13.8 10.6 8 6.8
29 … 42 34 18.5 12.6 9.5 6.8 6
36 … 52 43 23.9 16.1 11.8 9 7.3
45 … 63 37.4 21.3 15.2 10.6 7.6 6.6
60 … 80 46.7 23 15.7 11.5 7.9 6.7

TA 110 DU…V1000 Thermal O/L Relay


66 … 90 32 16.7 11.5 8.5 6.3 5.4
80 … 110 34.5 18.2 12.2 8.8 6.7 5.1

T 450 DU…V1000 Thermal O/L Relay


130 … 185 14.9 8.9 7.1 5.6 4.5 4.2
165 … 235 18 10 7.1 5.5 4 3.8
220 … 310 16.8 10 7.1 5.7 4.7 4
285 … 400 17 10 7.5 5.5 4.3 4

T 900 DU…V1000 Thermal O/L Relay


265 … 375 16 8.9 7 5.5 4.2 3.8
355 … 500 17 10.6 7.5 6 4.5 4
465 … 650 20 11.9 7.9 6 5 4.5
610 … 850 18.8 11.2 7.9 6 4.7 4.2

T 450 SU and T 900 SU…V1000 Thermal O/L Relays


Individual tripping curve for each setting range, on request.

5/18 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay

Ordering Details
Electronic O/L relay Order code Setting Associated Packing Weight
range max. fuse in
aM gG(gl)
Type A … A A A pieces kg

E 16 DU - tripping class 10 - for B6(S), B7(S), BC 6, BC 7, A 9, A 12, A 16 contactors


E16 DU 0.32-10 1SAX 11 1201 R0001 0.1 ... 0.32 1 1 0.150
E16 DU 1.0-10 1SAX 11 1201 R0002 0.3 ... 1.0 4 1 0.150
E16 DU 2.7-10 1SAX 11 1201 R0003 0.9 ... 2.7 10 1 0.150
E16 DU 6.3-10 1SAX 11 1201 R0004 2.0 ... 6.3 20 1 0.150
E16 DU 18.9-10 1SAX 11 1201 R0005 5.7 ... 18.9 50 1 0.150
SST09898

E 16 DU - tripping class 20 - for B6(S), B7(S), BC 6, BC 7, A 9, A 12, A 16 contactors


E 16 DU
E16 DU 0.32-20 1SAX 11 1301 R0001 0.1 ... 0.32 1 1 0.150
E16 DU 1.0-20 1SAX 11 1301 R0002 0.3 ... 1.0 4 1 0.150
E16 DU 2.7-20 1SAX 11 1301 R0003 0.9 ... 2.7 10 1 0.150
E16 DU 6.3-20 1SAX 11 1301 R0004 2.0 ... 6.3 20 1 0.150
E16 DU 18.9-20 1SAX 11 1301 R0005 5.7 ... 18.9 50 1 0.150

E 16 DU - tripping class 30 - for B6(S), B7(S), BC 6, BC 7, A 9, A 12, A 16 contactors


E16 DU 0.32-30 1SAX 11 1401 R0001 0.1 ... 0.32 1 1 0.150
E16 DU 1.0-30 1SAX 11 1401 R0002 0.3 ... 1.0 4 1 0.150
E16 DU 2.7-30 1SAX 11 1401 R0003 0.9 ... 2.7 10 1 0.150
E16 DU 6.3-30 1SAX 11 1401 R0004 2.0 ... 6.3 20 1 0.150
E16 DU 18.9-30 1SAX 11 1401 R0005 5.7 ... 18.9 50 1 0.150

● Technical data and approvals ......................................................................................................................................... pages 5/20 - 5/22

Low Voltage Products 5/19


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay


Technical Data

General Technical Data


Type E 16 DU
Standards: IEC 947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1
(international, european)
Certifications and approvals see page 5/22
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
according to IEC 947-4-1
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6
according to IEC 947-4-1
Permissible ambient temperature
– for storage °C –40 … +70
– for operation °C –25 … +70 with temperature compensation
Climatic withstand acc. to IEC 68-2-1, IEC 68-2-2, IEC 86-2-14, IEC 68-2-30
Mounting positions free
Shock withstand shock duration ms 11
multiples of g 15
Resistance to vibrations
(±1 mm, 10…100 Hz) multiples of g 5
Mounting Latching below the contactor, screw fixing on main terminals
Terminals and cross-sectional areas
for main conductors (motor side)
and for auxiliary conductors
● screw terminal with cable clamp
– screw size M 3.5
– tightening torque Nm 1
● conductor cross-sectional area
– rigid solid 2 x mm2 0.75 … 4
– flexible with cable end 2 x mm2 0.75 … 4
Degree of protection All the terminals are protected against direct contact according to
VDE 0106/Part. 100

Pole Technical Characteristics


Number of poles 3
Setting ranges see page 5/19
Tripping class according to IEC 947-4-1, EN 60947-4-1 10, 20 or 30
Rated operational frequencies Hz 50/60
Max. switching frequency 80 starts/h with 40 % on-load factor,
without untimely tripping starting current 6 x In max. and starting time 1s max.
Resistance per phase in mΩ
and heat dissipation in W see page 5/22
at the maximum current setting
Protection fuses
required for short-circuit protection see page 5/22

5/20 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay


Technical Data

Technical Characteristics of Auxiliary Contacts


Type E 16 DU
N.C. N.O.
95-96 97-98
Rated operational voltage Ue V 500
Conventional free air thermal current Ith A 6
Rated operational current Ie
on AC-15 230 V A 3
on AC-15 400 V A 1.1
on AC-15 500 V A 0.9
on AC-15 690 V A 0.7
on DC-13 24 V A 1.5
on DC-13 60 V A 0.5
on DC-13 110 V A 0.4
on DC-13 220 V A 0.2
Short-circuit protection gG(gl) fuses A 6

Tripping Curves, 3-phase applications


120
100
80
60
40

20
3 phases
10
8
6
from cold state
5
4
Minutes

Class 30
Tripping time

1
40
Class 20
20
Seconds

Class 10
10
8
6
4
SST23598GB

1
0,8 1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Tripping current
in multiples of the setting current

Low Voltage Products 5/21


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay


Technical Data

Resistance and Joule Losses per phase - Short-circuit Protection


Setting ranges Short-circuit protection Resistance Joule losses
Associated per phase per phase at max.
max. fuse current setting
aM gG(gl)
A … A A A mΩ W
0.1 … 0.32 1 970 0.1
0.3 … 1.0 4 113 0.11
0.9 … 2.7 10 14 0.1
2.0 … 6.3 20 2.4 0.1
5.7 … 18.9 50 0.8 0.29

Certifications and Approvals


Approvals Certifications of ship classification societies

PTB
UL CSA Ex "e"* GL LRS BV DNV
USA Canada Germany Germany Great Britain France Norway
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■ Standard design approved ; identification plates bear the approval mark if it is mandatory.
■ Submitted to approval.
* Protection of explosion protected motors (EN 50019) class Ex "e" according to DIN VDE 0165/02.91.

5/22 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Main Summary Index

B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 Mini Contactors


VB(C) 6 and VB(C) 7
VB(C) 6A and VB(C) 7A
Compact Reversing Contactors
K(C) 6 Mini Contactor Relays
T7 DU Thermal O/L Relay

Contents

Ordering Details

B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 Mini Contactors ...................................................................................... 6/2


VB(C) 6, VB(C) 7 and VB(C) 6A, VB(C) 7A Compact Reversing Contactors ..................... 6/3
BC 6 and BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors ............................................................................ 6/5
B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors for PLC Outputs ................................................................. 6/5
K(C) 6 Mini Contactor Relays .............................................................................................. 6/6
KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays .................................................................................. 6/6
K6 S Mini Contactor Relays for PLC Output ........................................................................ 6/6
Accessories for Mini Contactors .......................................................................................... 6/7
TBC 7 Mini Contactors and TKC 6 Mini Contactor Relays -
D.C. Operated with Large Coil Voltage Range .................................................................... 6/8
T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay for Mini Contactors ................................................................. 6/17

Technical Data

B 6, BC 6 and B6 S Mini Contactors .................................................................................... 6/9


VB 6, VBC 6, VB 6A and VBC 6A Compact Reversing Contactors ..................................... 6/9
K 6, KC 6 and K6 S Mini Contactor Relays .......................................................................... 6/9
B 7, BC 7 and B7 S Mini Contactors .................................................................................. 6/10
VB 7, VBC 7, VB 7A and VBC 7A Compact Reversing Contactors ................................... 6/10
D.C. Power Circuit Switching ............................................................................................. 6/11
6
Lighting Circuit Switching ................................................................................................... 6/12
T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay ................................................................................................ 6/18

Additional Information

Approvals ................................................................................................................... 6/13, 6/19


Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................................................................................... 6/14
Dimensions ........................................................................................................................ 6/15

Coil voltage codes:


B6, B7, BC6, BC7,
VB6(A), VB7(A), VBC6(A), VBC7(A),
K6 KC6
40-450Hz Order d.c. Order
code code
V (1) (2) ■ .. ■ V (1) ■ .. ■
24 0 .. 1 12 0 .. 7
42 0 .. 2 24 0 .. 1
48 0 .. 3 42 0 .. 2
110 - 127 8 .. 4 48 1 .. 6
220 - 240 8 .. 0 60 0 .. 3
380 - 415 8 .. 5 110 - 125 0 .. 4
220 - 240 0 .. 5
(1) For other voltages, please consult us.
(2) Coil voltage range: 0.85 - 1.1 x Uc

Low Voltage Products 6/1


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary
Section Index

B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 Mini Contactors


Ordering Details

B 6 and BC 6 Mini Contactors


Type Order code Mounted Motor power AC-2, AC-3 Packing Weight
to be completed with coil aux. cont. 220 V 380 V in
voltage code ■ .. ■ 240 V 440 V
see page 6/1 kW kW pieces kg

Screw connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA


B 6-30-10 GJL 121 1001 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 10 0.180
SST1589

B 6-30-01 GJL 121 1001 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 10 0.180


B 6-40-00 GJL 121 1201 R ■ 00 ■ – – 10 0.180
B6 30-10
Flat pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA
B 6-30-10-F GJL 121 1003 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 10 0.170
B 6-30-01-F GJL 121 1003 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 10 0.170
B 6-40-00-F GJL 121 1203 R ■ 00 ■ – – 10 0.170

Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA, Ith < 8 A
SST 159 91 R

B 6-30-10-P GJL 121 1009 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 10 0.170


B 6-30-01-P GJL 121 1009 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 10 0.170

B 6-30-10-F Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W


BC 6-30-10 GJL 121 3001 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 10 0.180
BC 6-30-01 GJL 121 3001 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 10 0.180

Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W


SST 161 91 R

BC 6-30-10-F GJL 121 3003 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 10 0.170


BC 6-30-01-F GJL 121 3003 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 10 0.170

Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W, Ith < 8 A


B 6-30-10-P BC 6-30-10-P GJL 121 3009 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 10 0.170
BC 6-30-01-P GJL 121 3009 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 10 0.170

B 7 and BC 7 Mini Contactors


SST15891.APS

Screw connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA


B 7-30-10 GJL 131 1001 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
B 7-30-01 GJL 131 1001 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 10 0.180
B 7-30-10 B 7-40-00 GJL 131 1201 R ■ 00 ■ – – 10 0.180

Flat pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA


B 7-30-10-F GJL 131 1003 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
B 7-30-01-F GJL 131 1003 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 10 0.170
B 7-40-00-F GJL 131 1203 R ■ 00 ■ – – 10 0.170
SST 010 93 R

Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA, Ith < 8 A
B 7-30-10-P GJL 131 1009 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
B 7-40-00
B 7-30-01-P GJL 131 1009 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 10 0.170

Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W


BC 7-30-10 GJL 131 3001 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
BC 7-30-01 GJL 131 3001 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 10 0.180
SST 009 93 R

Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W


BC 7-30-10-F GJL 131 3003 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
BC 7-30-01-F GJL 131 3003 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 10 0.170
B 7-40-00 with CAF6-11
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W, Ith < 8 A
auxiliary contact blocks to be
screwed in. BC 7-30-10-P GJL 131 3009 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
BC 7-30-01-P GJL 131 3009 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 10 0.170

6/2 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Compact Reversing Contactors


with Mechanical Interlock

Description, VB 6, VB 7 and VB 6 A, VB 7 A Compact Reversing Contactors


Compact reversing contactors are available with two types of mechanical interlocking: VB 6 and VB 7 on the one hand or
VB 6A and VB 7A on the other.

BBC 89 6136
The VB 6 and VB 7 type allows fast reversing to be carried out. However, the first contactor's opening process must be
completed before the second contactor receives the order to close. Electrical interlocking must be used for this.
In the VB 6A and VB 7A type there is safety locking to prevent short circuits which would cause an excessively fast reversing
order. As soon as this premature control signal is withdrawn, locking is automatically cancelled. De-energization of the coils
On switching, the coils of the 2 for a period of 50 ms ensures that safety locking is not activated.
VB 6A and VB 7A contactors
must be de-energized for more
than 50 ms. Ordering Details, VB 6, VBC 6 Compact Reversing Contactors
Type Order code Mounted Motor power AC-2, AC-3 Packing Weight
to be completed with coil aux. cont. 220 V 380 V in
voltage code ■ .. ■ 240 V 440 V
see page 6/1 kW kW pieces kg

Screw connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA


VB 6-30-10 GJL 121 1901 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
VB 6-30-01 GJL 121 1901 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Flat pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA


SST 165 91 R

VB 6-30-10-F GJL 121 1903 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340


VB 6-30-01-F GJL 121 1903 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA, Ith < 8 A
VB 6-30-01 VB 6-30-10-P GJL 121 1909 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
VB 6-30-01-P GJL 121 1909 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W


VBC 6-30-10 GJL 121 3901 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
VBC 6-30-01 GJL 121 3901 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W


VBC 6-30-10-F GJL 121 3903 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
VBC 6-30-01-F GJL 121 3903 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W, Ith < 8 A


VBC 6-30-10-P GJL 121 3909 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
6
VBC 6-30-01-P GJL 121 3909 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Ordering Details, VB 7, VBC 7 Compact Reversing Contactors


Screw connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA
VB 7-30-10 GJL 131 1901 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7-30-01 GJL 131 1901 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Flat pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA


VB 7-30-10-F GJL 131 1903 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7-30-01-F GJL 131 1903 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340
SST16591/1

Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA, Ith < 8 A
VB 7-30-10-P GJL 131 1909 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7-30-01-P GJL 131 1909 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

VB 7-30-01
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W
VBC 7-30-10 GJL 131 3901 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VBC 7-30-01 GJL 131 3901 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W


VBC 7-30-10-F GJL 131 3903 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VBC 7-30-01-F GJL 131 3903 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W, Ith < 8 A


VBC 7-30-10-P GJL 131 3909 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VBC 7-30-01-P GJL 131 3909 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Low Voltage Products 6/3


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Compact Reversing Contactors


with Mechanical Interlock

Ordering Details, VB 6A, VBC 6A Compact Reversing Contactors


Type Order code Mounted Motor power AC-2, AC-3 Packing Weight
to be completed with coil aux. cont. 220 V 380 V in
voltage code ■ .. ■ 240 V 440 V
see page 6/1 kW kW pieces kg

Screw connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA


VB 6A-30-10 GJL 121 1911 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
VB 6A-30-01 GJL 121 1911 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Flat pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA


VB 6A-30-10-F GJL 121 1913 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
VB 6A-30-01-F GJL 121 1913 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA, Ith < 8 A
VB 6A-30-10-P GJL 121 1919 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
VB 6A-30-01-P GJL 121 1919 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W


VBC 6A-30-10 GJL 121 3911 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
VBC 6A-30-01 GJL 121 3911 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W


VBC 6A-30-10-F GJL 121 3913 R ■ 10 ■
SST 278 92 R

1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
VBC 6A-30-01-F GJL 121 3913 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W, Ith < 8 A


VBC 6A-30-10 reversing contactor
with BMS 6-30 power connections VBC 6A-30-10-P GJL 121 3919 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
VBC 6A-30-01-P GJL 121 3919 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Ordering Details, VB 7A, VBC 7A Compact Reversing Contactors


Screw connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA
VB 7A-30-10 GJL 131 1911 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7A-30-01 GJL 131 1911 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Flat pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA


VB 7A-30-10-F GJL 131 1913 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7A-30-01-F GJL 131 1913 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA, Ith < 8 A
VB 7A-30-10-P GJL 131 1919 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7A-30-01-P GJL 131 1919 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W


VBC 7A-30-10 GJL 131 3911 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VBC 7A-30-01 GJL 131 3911 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W


VBC 7A-30-10-F GJL 131 3913 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VBC 7A-30-01-F GJL 131 3913 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W, Ith < 8 A


VBC 7A-30-10-P GJL 131 3919 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VBC 7A-30-01-P GJL 131 3919 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340

6/4 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

BC 6 and BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors


B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors for PLC Outputs
Ordering Details

BC 6 Interface Mini Contactors Do not add auxiliary contact blocks!


Type Order code Mounted Motor power AC-2, AC-3 Packing Weight
aux. cont. 220 V 380 V in
240 V 440 V
kW kW pieces kg

Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 24V/1.4 W


BC 6-30-10-1.4 GJL 121 3001 R 8101 1 – 2.2 4 10 0.180
BC 6-30-01-1.4 GJL 121 3001 R 8011 – 1 2.2 4 10 0.180
Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 24V/1.4 W
BC 6-30-10-F-1.4 GJL 121 3003 R 8101 1 – 2.2 4 10 0.170
BC 6-30-01-F-1.4 GJL 121 3003 R 8011 – 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 24V/1.4 W, Ith < 8 A
BC 6-30-10-P-1.4 GJL 121 3009 R 8101 1 – 2.2 4 10 0.170
BC 6-30-01-P-1.4 GJL 121 3009 R 8011 – 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.4 W
BC 6-30-10-2.4 GJL 121 3001 R 5101 1 – 2.2 4 10 0.180
BC 6-30-01-2.4 GJL 121 3001 R 5011 – 1 2.2 4 10 0.180
Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.4 W
BC 6-30-10-F-2.4 GJL 121 3003 R 5101 1 – 2.2 4 10 0.170
BC 6-30-01-F-2.4 GJL 121 3003 R 5011 – 1 2.2 4 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.4 W, Ith < 8 A
BC 6-30-10-P-2.4 GJL 121 3009 R 5101 1 – 2.2 4 10 0.170
BC 6-30-01-P-2.4 GJL 121 3009 R 5011 – 1 2.2 4 10 0.170

BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors Do not add auxiliary contact blocks!


Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 24V/1.4 W
BC 7-30-10-1.4 GJL 131 3001 R 8101 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
BC 7-30-01-1.4 GJL 121 3001 R 8011 – 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
ABB 89 0844 R

Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 24V/1.4 W


BC 7-30-10-F-1.4 GJL 131 3003 R 8101 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
BC 7-30-01-F-1.4 GJL 131 3003 R 8011 – 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 24V/1.4 W, Ith < 8 A
BC 7-30-10- 1.4 BC 7-30-10-P-1.4 GJL 131 3009 R 8101 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
BC 7-30-01-P-1.4 GJL 131 3009 R 8011 – 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.4 W
BC 7-30-10-2.4 GJL 131 3001 R 5101 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
6
BC 7-30-01-2.4 GJL 131 3001 R 5011 – 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.4 W
BC 7-30-10-F-2.4 GJL 131 3003 R 5101 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
BC 7-30-01-F-2.4 GJL 131 3003 R 5011 – 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
Oscillograms of control circuit Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.4 W, Ith < 8 A
interruption (24 V d.c.)
BC 7-30-10-P-2.4 GJL 131 3009 R 5101 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
BC 7-30-01-P-2.4 GJL 131 3009 R 5011 – 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
24 V
0

B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors with built-in surge suppressor for use on PLC outputs.
Do not add auxiliary contact blocks!
-1000 V
Mini contactors directly operated by PLC's; protection via built-in diodes and add-on surge suppressors; coil
0 280 µs
connection with polarizing slot; T7DU thermal O/L relay can be added (see page 6/17).
BC 6 and BC 7 without surge suppressor.
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 24 V/1.7 W
B6 S-30-10-1.7 GJL 121 3001 R 7101 1 – 2.2 4.0 10 0.180
B6 S-30-01-1.7 GJL 121 3001 R 7011 – 1 2.2 4.0 10 0.180
SST 016 91 K

24 V
0
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.8 W
B6 S-30-10-2.8 GJL 121 3001 R 7102 1 – 2.2 4.0 10 0.180
0
Interruption
B6 S-30-01-2.8 GJL 121 3001 R 7012 – 1 2.2 4.0 10 0.180

B6 S and B7 S with built-in surge suppressor.


Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 24 V/1.7 W
B7 S-30-10-1.7 GJL 131 3001 R 7101 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
B7 S-30-01-1.7 GJL 131 3001 R 7011 – 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V / 2.8 W
B7 S-30-10-2.8 GJL 131 3001 R 7102 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.180
B7 S-30-01-2.8 GJL 131 3001 R 7012 – 1 3.0 5.5 10 0.180

Low Voltage Products 6/5


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

KC 6-Interface
K 6, KC 6 Mini Contactor Relays and K6 S for PLC's
Ordering Details
K 6 and KC 6 Mini Contactor Relays
Type Order code Mounted AC-15 Packing Weight
to be completed with coil aux. cont. 220 V 380 V 500 V in
voltage code ■ .. ■ 240 V 440 V
see page 6/1 A A A pieces kg

Screw connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA


K 6-40 E GJH 121 1001 R ■ 40 ■ 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.180
K 6-31 Z GJH 121 1001 R ■ 31 ■ 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
K 6-22 Z GJH 121 1001 R ■ 22 ■ 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
SST 166 91 R

Flat pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA


K 6-40 E- F GJH 121 1003 R ■ 40 ■ 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.170
K 6-31 Z- F GJH 121 1003 R ■ 31 ■ 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
K 6-22 Z- F GJH 121 1003 R ■ 22 ■ 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.170
K 6-40 E-P
Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA
K 6-40 E- P GJH 121 1009 R ■ 40 ■ 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.170
K 6-31 Z- P GJH 121 1009 R ■ 31 ■ 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
K 6-22 Z- P GJH 121 1009 R ■ 22 ■ 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.170

Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W


KC 6-40 E GJH 121 3001 R ■ 40 ■ 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.180
KC 6-31 Z GJH 121 3001 R ■ 31 ■ 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
KC 6-22 Z GJH 121 3001 R ■ 22 ■ 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W
KC 6-40 E- F GJH 121 3003 R ■ 40 ■ 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-31 Z- F GJH 121 3003 R ■ 31 ■ 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-22 Z- F GJH 121 3003 R ■ 22 ■ 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W
KC 6-40 E- P GJH 121 3009 R ■ 40 ■ 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-31 Z- P GJH 121 3009 R ■ 31 ■ 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-22 Z- P GJH 121 3009 R ■ 22 ■ 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.170

KC 6-Interface Mini Contactor Relays Do not add auxiliary contact blocks!


Type Order code Mounted AC-15 Packing Weight
aux. cont. 220 V 380 V 500 V in
240 V 440 V
A A A pieces kg

Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 24 V/1.4 W


KC 6-40 E-1.4 GJH 121 3001 R8401 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.180
KC 6-31 Z-1.4 GJH 121 3001 R8311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 24 V/1.4 W
KC 6-40 E-F-1.4 GJH 121 3003 R8401 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-31 Z-F-1.4 GJH 121 3003 R8311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 24 V/1.4 W
KC 6-40 E-P-1.4 GJH 121 3009 R8401 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-31 Z-P-1.4 GJH 121 3009 R8311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.4 W
KC 6-40 E-2.4 GJH 121 3001 R5401 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.180
KC 6-31 Z-2.4 GJH 121 3001 R5311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
Oscillograms of control circuit
interruption (24 V d.c.)
Flat pin connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.4 W
KC 6-40 E-F-2.4 GJH 121 3003 R5401 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-31 Z-F-2.4 GJH 121 3003 R5311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170
24 V
0 Soldering pin connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V / 2.4 W
KC 6-40 E-P-2.4 GJH 121 3009 R5401 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.170
KC 6-31 Z-P-2.4 GJH 121 3009 R5311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.170

-1000 V

0 280 µs K6 S Mini Contactor Relays with built-in surge suppressor for use on PLC outputs.
KC 6 without surge suppressor. Do not add auxiliary contact blocks!
Mini contactors directly operated by PLC's; protection via built-in diodes and add-on surge suppressors; coil
connection with polarizing slot.
SST 016 91 K

24 V
0 Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 24 V/1.7 W
K6 S-40 E-1.7 GJH 121 3001 R 7401 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.180
K6 S-31 Z-1.7 GJH 121 3001 R 7311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
0
Interruption K6 S-22 Z-1.7 GJH 121 3001 R 7221 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
K6 S with built-in surge suppressor. Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.8 W
K6 S-40 E-2.8 GJH 121 3001 R 7402 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.180
K6 S-31 Z-2.8 GJH 121 3001 R 7312 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
K6 S-22 Z-2.8 GJH 121 3001 R 7222 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180

6/6 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Accessories
for Mini Contactors
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted For mounting on Packing Weight
aux. cont. in

pieces kg

Side-mounted auxiliary contact blocks CA 6 and CAF 6 auxiliary contact blocks must not be mounted simultaneously.
SST 162 91 R

Screw terminals
CA 6-11K GJL 120 1317 R 0001 1 1 K6- and KC6- 10 0.030
CA 6-11E GJL 120 1317 R 0002 1 1 B6(7)-40-00; BC6(7)-40-00 10 0.030
CA 6-11M GJL 120 1317 R 0003 1 1 B6(7)-30-10; BC6(7)-30-10 10 0.030
CA 6-11N GJL 120 1317 R 0004 1 1 B6(7)-30-01; BC6(7)-30-01 10 0.030
Flat pin terminals
CA 6-11K-F GJL 120 1318 R 0001 1 1 K6-F ; KC6-F 10 0.030
CA 6-11E-F GJL 120 1318 R 0002 1 1 B6(7)-40-00-F; BC6(7)-40-00-F 10 0.030
SST 163 91 R

CA 6-11M-F GJL 120 1318 R 0003 1 1 B6(7)-30-10-F; BC6(7)-30-10-F 10 0.030


CA 6-11N-F GJL 120 1318 R 0004 1 1 B6(7)-30-01-F; BC6(7)-30-01-F 10 0.030
Soldering pins
CA 6-11K-P GJL 120 1319 R 0001 1 1 K6-P ; KC6-P 10 0.030
CA 6-11E-P GJL 120 1319 R 0002 1 1 B6(7)-40-00-P -; BC6(7)-40-00-P 10 0.030
CA 6-11M-P GJL 120 1319 R 0003 1 1 B6(7)-30-10-P -; BC6(7)-30-10-P 10 0.030
CA 6-11N-P GJL 120 1319 R 0004 1 1 B6(7)-30-01-P -; BC6(7)-30-01-P 10 0.030
SST 164 91 R

Front-mounted auxiliary contact blocks CA 6 and CAF 6 auxiliary contact blocks must not be mounted simultaneously.

Screw terminals
CAF 6- 11K GJL 120 1330 R 0001 1 1 K 6 and KC 6 10 0.035
CA 6-11K CAF 6- 20K GJL 120 1330 R 0005 2 – K 6 and KC 6 10 0.035
CA 6-11E-F CAF 6- 02K GJL 120 1330 R 0009 – 2 K 6 and KC 6 10 0.035
CA 6-11M-P
CAF 6- 11E GJL 120 1330 R 0002 1 1 B(C)6- to B(C)7-40-00, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 20E GJL 120 1330 R 0006 2 – B(C)6- to B(C)7-40-00, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 02E GJL 120 1330 R 0010 – 2 B(C)6- to B(C)7-40-00, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 11M GJL 120 1330 R 0003 1 1 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-10, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 20M GJL 120 1330 R 0007 2 – B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-10, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
SST 011 93 R

CAF 6- 02M GJL 120 1330 R 0011 – 2 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-10, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 11N GJL 120 1330 R 0004 1 1 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-01, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 20N GJL 120 1330 R 0008 2 – B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-01, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 11M CAF 6- 02N GJL 120 1330 R 0012 – 2 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-01, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035

Base with soldering pins, Ith < 8 A


LB 6 GJL 120 1902 R 0001 - for B, BC, K and KC mini contactors 10 0.014
LB 6-CA GJL 120 1903 R 0001 for 2-pole aux. contacts 10 0.006
SST 186 91 R

Plunger 6
BN 6 GJL 120 1904 R 0001 - for manual operation 50 0.060
RV-BC 6/-
Varistor-type
surge suppressor Function marker
BA 5-50 1SBN 11 0000R 1000 - 50 clip-on label holders 1 box 0.017
Effective surface 7 x 19 mm
For writing details in ball-point pen,
indelible felt-tip or pentel white

Surge suppressor units (varistor-type for d.c. operation)


Note: for a.c. operated mini contactors this accessory is built-in.
RV-BC6/60 GHV 250 1902 R 0002 - 24–60 V with forked terminal 10 0.004
SST 147 90 R

RV-BC6-F/60 GHV 250 1902 R 0003 - 24–60 V for 2.8 mm flat pin terminals 10 0.004
RV-BC6/250 GHV 250 1903 R 0002 - 50–250 V with forked terminal 10 0.004
RV-BC6-F/250 GHV 250 1903 R 0003 - 50–250 V for 2.8 mm flat pin terminals 10 0.004
LT 6-B Protective cover RV-BC6/380 GHV 250 1904 R 0002 - 380 V with forked terminal 10 0.004
RV-BC6-F/380 GHV 250 1904 R 0003 - 380 V for 2.8 mm flat pin terminals 10 0.004

Protective cover (transparent, washable, IP 20 protection category)


LT 6-B GJL 120 1906 R 0001 - for B, BC, K and KC 6 contactors 10 0.001
with screw terminals

Connecting strip for reversing contactor


SST 277 92 R

BSM 6-30 GJL 120 1908 R 0001 - for VB- VBC- compact reversing 10 0.010
contactors with screw terminal
and 1.8 mm2 cross-sectional area

BSM 6-30 Parallel connecting strip for poles


Connecting strip
LP 6 GJL 120 1907 R 0001 - for B and BC contactors 100 0.001
with screw terminals.
1 mm thick.

Low Voltage Products 6/7


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

TBC 7 Mini Contactors


TKC 6 Mini Contactor Relays
D.C. Operated with Large Coil Voltage Range

Application
TBC 7 mini contactors and TKC 6 mini contactor relays with large coil voltage range are designed to operate
in control circuits characterised by large voltage variations.
Example: storage batteries.

Ordering Details
TBC 7 Mini Contactors
Coil operating limits: Type Order code Mounted Motor power AC-2, AC-3 Packing Weight
to be completed with coil aux. cont. 220 V 380 V 500 V in
Voltage V d.c. Code
voltage code: ■ ..■ 240 V 440 V
min. Uc max. R ■ . . ■
See table opposite kW kW kW pieces kg
17 ........ 32 ■
5 ■1

50 ........ 90 ■
5 ■5 Screw connection
77 ...... 143 ■
6 ■2

140 ...... 260 ■


6 ■8 TBC 7- 30-10 GJL 131 3061 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 4 10 0.180
TBC 7- 30-01 GJL 131 3061 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 3.0 5.5 4 10 0.180

TKC 6 Mini Contactor Relays


Type Order code Mounted AC-15 Packing Weight
to be completed with coil aux. cont. 220 V 380 V in
voltage code: ■ ..■ 240 V 440 V 500 V
See table opposite kW kW kW pieces kg

Screw connection
TKC 6-22 Z GJH 121 3061 R ■ 22 ■ 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
TKC 6-31 Z GJH 121 3061 R ■ 31 ■ 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
TKC 6- 40 E GJH 121 3061 R ■ 40 ■ 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.180

Flat pin connection


TKC 6-22 Z-F GJH 121 3063 R ■ 22 ■ 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
TKC 6-31 Z-F GJH 121 3063 R ■ 31 ■ 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
TKC 6- 40 E-F GJH 121 3063 R ■ 40 ■ 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.180

Coil characteristics
! No extra tolerances applicable to the Uc min. - max. values quoted in the table above (top left).

– Coil consumption at Uc max. θ = 20 °C: 5 W pull-in/holding.


Definite drop-out: < 0.2 Uc
Definite pull-in: ≥ Uc min.

Technical Data
Identical to the data for BC 7 and KC 6 standard mini contactors (see following pages), except:
Permissible surrounding temperatures:
with own heating °C –30 to +55
without own heating °C –30 to +70
storage temperature °C –40 to +85

Addition of Accessories
CA 6 or CAF 6 auxiliary contact blocks must not be added.
!

6/8 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

B(C) 6 and B6 S Mini Contactors


VB(C) 6 and VB(C) 6A Compact Reversing Contactors
K(C) 6 and K6 S Mini Contactor Relays

AC-1/AC-3 Utilization Categories General Technical Data according to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1
Electrical durability curves
B 6, BC 6, B6 S Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
Air temperature close to contactor
10 – fitted with a thermal O/L relay °C – 25 to + 50
°C
8
6 – without thermal O/L relay – 25 to + 55
°C
5
4 – for storage – 40 to + 80
3

2 Climatic withstand acc. to DIN 50 017 humidity in alternate climate


acc. to UTE C 63-100 30 cycles, specification 1
Millions of operating cycles

1
0.8 Mounting positions all positions
0.6
0.5
0.4 Mechanical durability 10 million operating cycles
0.3

0.2 Max. switching frequency


AC-1 cycles/h 300
0.1
DC-1, DC-3, DC-5, AC-2, AC-3, AC-15, DC-13 cycles/h 600
0.08
0.06
Rated operational voltage Ue V a.c. 12 - 500
SST 010 91 K1 + 2

0.05
0.04
0.03
AC-3 AC-1
Rated operational current Ie/AC-1, AC-3 AC-1/Ie (A) AC-2, AC-3
55 °C 40 °C
0.02
Rated operational power at: Ie (A) P (kW)
0.01 220-240 V 16 20 9 2.2
1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30
380-440 V 16 20 9/8 4.0
Rated operational current Ie (A)
500 V 12 12 5.5 3.0
Shock withstand see table page 6/10
AC-4 Utilization category
Cage motors: starting, plugging, inching Operating time B6 BC6 K6 KC6
The breaking current Ic is equal Between coil energization and:
to 6 x Ie motor rated operational current. - N.O. contact closing/N.C. contact opening ms 14 - 26 14 - 26 14 - 26 14 - 26
10
8 Between coil de-energization and:
6
5 - N.O. contact opening/N.C. contact closing ms 16 - 40 4 - 10 16 - 40 4 - 10
4
3 Heat dissipation per pole 2 W at 20 A
2
AC-4 Short-circuit protection
Millions of operating cycles

1 gG (gl) type fuses, type 1 and type 2 co-ordination 20 A


0.8
0.6
0.5
0.4 Technical Data of built-in or add-on auxiliary contacts of K 6, KC 6, K6 S, CA 6, CAF 6
0.3

0.2 Rated operational voltage Ue V d.c. 12 - 240


V a.c. 12 - 500
0.1
0.08
0.06
0.05
Conventional free air thermal current Ith A 6 6
Short-circuit protection, type fuses gG (gl) A 10
SST 046 91 K/GB

0.04
0.03
Rated operational current Ie/ AC-15
0.02
220-240 V A 4
0.01 380-440 V A 3
1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30 500 V A 2
Breaking current Ic (A)
Rated operational current Ie/ DC-13
AC-15 Utilization category 24 V A 1.5
Electrical durability curve 60 V A 0.5
K6, KC6, CA6, CAF6 110 V A 0.4
10 220-240 V A 0.04
Min. switching capacity of auxiliary contacts > 17 V and > 5 mA
5

Technical Data of magnet system


Millions of operating cycles

Coil consumption (average value)


2
Standard contactors pull-in/holding
AC-15
B 6/K 6, VB 6 a.c. VA 3.5
1 BC 6/KC 6, VBC 6 d.c. W 3.5
Interface contactors
0.5
BC 6/KC 6-1.4 d.c. 24 V W 1.4
BC 6/KC 6-2.4 d.c. 17 - 32 V W 2.4

Mini contactors for PLC outputs cold state warm state


SST 251 93 K1 + 2

0.2 I (mA) P (W) I (mA) P (W)

0.1
B 6 S-1.7, KS 6-1.7 d.c. 24 V W 77 1.75 60 1.35
0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 3 5 10 B 6 S-2.8, K6 S-2.8 d.c. 17 - 32 V W 125 2.80 94 2.10
Breaking current (A)
Coil operating limits 0.85 - 1.1x Uc

Low Voltage Products 6/9


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

B(C) 7 and B7 S Mini Contactors


VB(C) 7 and VB(C) 7A Compact Reversing Contactors

General Technical Data according to IEC 947-4-1


AC-1/AC-3 Utilization Categories
Electrical durability curves
B 7, BC 7, B7 S
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 500
Air temperature close to contactor
10
8 - fitted with thermal O/L relay °C - 25 to + 50
6
5 - without thermal O/L relay °C - 25 to + 55
4
3
- for storage °C - 40 to + 80
2 Climatic withstand acc. to DIN 50 017 humidity in alternate climate KFW,
acc. to UTE C 63-100 30 cycles, specification 1
Millions of operating cycles

1
0.8 Mounting positions all positions
0.6
0.5
0.4 Mechanical durability 10 million operating cycles
0.3

0.2
Max. electrical switching frequency
AC-1 cycles/h 300
0.1 DC-1, DC-3, DC-5, AC-2, AC-3, AC-15, DC-13 cycles/h 600
0.08
0.06
0.05
Rated operational voltage Ue V a.c. 12 - 500
SST 209 93 K/GB

0.04
0.03 Rated operational current Ie/AC-1, AC-3 AC-1/Ie (A) AC-2, AC-3
AC-3 AC-1
55 °C 40 °C
0.02
Rated operational power at: Ie (A) P (kW)
0.01
1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30
220-240 V 16 20 12/11 3
Rated operational current Ie (A) 380-440 V 16 20 12/11 5.5
500 V 12 12 7 4
Shock withstand 1/2 sinusoidal shock for 10 ms:
AC-4 Utilization category
Cage motors: starting, plugging, inching
standard mounting position: position 1 no change in contact position
C1
The breaking current Ic is equal
to 6 x Ie motor rated operational current.
B1
1L1 3L2 5L3 13NO shock directions A B1 B2 C1 C2
A A1 A

10
0
A2 making position 20 g 20 g 20 g 20 g 20 g
8 B2
A 394

6T3 14NO
2T1 4T2
6
5 C2
breaking position 10 g 20 g 20 g 20 g 20 g
4
3 Operating time B7 BC7
2
Millions of operating cycles

Between coil energization and:


1
0.8
- N.O. contact closing/N.C. contact opening ms 14 - 26 14 - 26
0.6
0.5
0.4 AC-4 Between coil de-energization and:
0.3 - N.O. contact opening/N.C. contact closing ms 16 - 14 4 - 10
0.2
Heat dissipation per pole 2 W at 20 A
0,1
0.08
Short-circuit protection
0.06 for contactors without add-on thermal O/L relay
0.05
Type fuses gG (gl) - Co-ordination: type 1 25 A
SST 208 93 K/GB

0.04
0.03 type 2 20 A
0.02

0.01
1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30
Breaking current (A)
Technical Data of built-in auxiliary contacts
Min. switching capacity of
auxiliary contacts > 17 V and > 5 mA
AC-15 Utilization category
Electrical durability curve
K6, KC6, CA6, CAF6
10 Technical Data of magnet system
Coil consumption (average value)
5 Standard contactors pull-in/holding
B 7 / VB 7 a.c. VA 3.5
Millions of operating cycles

BC 7 / VBC 7 d.c. W 3.5


2 Interface contactors
AC-15 BC 7-1.4 d.c. 24 V W 1.4
BC 7-2.4 d.c. 17 - 32 V W 2.4
1
Mini contactors for PLC output cold state warm state
I (mA) P (W) I (mA) P (W)
0.5

B 7 S-1.7 d.c. 24 V 77 175 60 1.35


B 7 S-2.8 d.c. 17 - 32 V 125 2.80 94 2.10
SST 251 93 K1 + 2

0.2 Coil operating limits 0.85 - 1.1x Uc

0.1
0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 3 5 10
Breaking current (A)

6/10 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 Mini Contactors


VB(C) 6 and VB(C) 7 Compact Reversing Contactors

D.C. Power Circuit Switching


Utilization category DC-1 DC-3 DC-5
L/R ≤ 1 ms L/R ≤ 2 ms L/R ≤ 7.5 ms
24 V A 16.0 16.0 16.0
+ – 48 V A 16.0 8.0 2.0
60 V A 16.0 4.0 1.25
A 829 D

110 V A 7.0 1.5 0.4


220 V A 0.8 0.25 0.2
24 V A 16.0 16.0 16.0
+ –
48 V A 16.0 16.0 16.0
A 830 D

60 V A 16.0 15.0 12.0


110 V A 16.0 7.0 2.0
220 V A 5.0 1.5 0.5
24 V A 16.0 16.0 16.0
+ – 48 V A 16.0 16.0 16.0
60 V A 16.0 16.0 16.0
A 831 D

110 V A 16.0 15.0 8.0


220 V A 14.0 4.0 2.0

Electrical Durability Curves for DC-1, DC-3 and DC-5


The curves below take into account the time constant L/R for each utilization category and show the electrical durability of the contactors during
DC-1, DC-3 and DC-5 use for 3 poles connected in series.

If one single pole is used, the corresponding breaking capacity (W) is reduced to 1/3 and for 2 poles connected in series it is reduced to 2/3.

A = DC-1 3 poles in series


B = DC-3 3 poles in series
C = DC-5 3 poles in series
Millions of operating cycles

6
89 6151/1 + 2

Breaking power (W)

Low Voltage Products 6/11


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 Mini Contactors


VB(C) 6 and VB(C) 7 Compact Reversing Contactors

Lighting Circuit Switching


The table below shows the number of lamps per phase in 230 V/50 Hz for the main poles (terminals marked 1 to 8):
Note that overshooting of the announced capacitive loads may generate on energisation unacceptable current peaks.
Other factors may influence peak amplitude on energisation.
● Lengths and cross-sections of installation conductors
● Electronic arcing devices
● Lamp manufacture

For these reasons, the values in the following tables are given for information only.

Type of lamps Characteristics Number of lamps Capacitive Type of lamps Characteristics Number of lamps Capacitive
per phase load per phase load
(230 V, 50 Hz) in µF (230 V, 50 Hz) in µF
In for contactors: In for contactors:
Watt A B6, B7, BC6 and BC7 Watt A B6, B7, BC6 and BC7

Incandescent 60 0.26 20 Metal without compensation


lamps 100 0.43 12 iodide 35 0.53 10
200 0.87 6 lamps 70 1 5
300 1.30 4 e.g. HQI, HPI 150 1.8 3
500 2.17 2 250 3 2
1000 4.35 1 400 3.5 1

Fluorescent without compensation and series compensation parallel compensation


lamps 15 0.35 25 35 0.25 6 6
20 0.37 23 70 0.45 3 12
40 0.43 20 150 0.75 1 20
58 0.67 16 250 1.5 1 33
65 0.67 12 400 2.5 1 35
115 1.5 5 Low pressure without compensation
140 1.5 5 sodium lamps 35 1.5 4
2-lamp circuit 55 1.5 4
90 2.4 2
2 x 20 2 x 0.13
2 x 40 2 x 0.22
2 x 58 2 x 0.32
2 x 65 2 x 0.34
2 x 26
2 x 20
2 x 16
2 x 12
{ Dual
Mounting
135
150
180
200
3.5
3.3
3.3
2.3
2
2
2
2
2 x 115 2 x 0.65 2x 5
2 x 140 2 x 0.75 2x 5 parallel compensation
parallel compensation 35 0.31 – 20
15 0.11 7 4.5 55 0.42 – 20
20 0.13 6 4.5 90 0.63 – 30
40 0.22 7 4.5 135 0.94 – 45
58 0.32 5 7 150 1.0 – 40
65 0.34 4 7 180 1.16 – 40
115 0.65 1 18 200 1.32 – 25
140 0.75 1 18 High pressure without compensation
High pressure without compensation sodium lamps 150 1.8 3
mercury 50 0.61 10 250 3.0 2
vapour 80 0.8 7 330 3.7 2
lamps 125 1.15 5 400 4.7 1
e.g. HQL, HPL 250 2.15 3 parallel compensation
400 3.25 2
150 0.83 – 20
700 5.40 1
250 1.5 – 33
parallel compensation 330 2.0 – 40
50 0.28 4 7 400 2.4 – 48
80 0.41 3 8 1000 6.3 – 106
125 0.65 2 10 Transformers Transformer Number of transformers
250 1.22 1 18 for low voltage power per phase
400 1.95 1 25 halogen (230 V, 50 Hz)
700 3.45 – 45 lamps for contactors:
1000 4.8 – 60 Watt B6, B7, BC6, BC7

Lamps with 1 x 18 – 17 20 40
electronic 2 x 18 – 8 50 20
ignition 1 x 36 – 11 75 13
device 2 x 36 – 6 100 10
1 x 56 – 11 150 7
2 x 58 – 6 200 5
300 3

6/12 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Mini Contactors, Mini Contactor Relays


Accessories
Approvals
The devices listed below have been certified or are in the process of being accepted in the countries listed or
from organizations who award approvals. For some countries, special versions of devices are available. The
use of certified devices does not exonerate the supplier of control boxes or electrical equipment from building
the entire installation in compliance with the legal specifications applicable in the country.
Marks

EL
Abbreviations SEV DEMKO NEMKO SEMKO Inspect. CSA GL
Approvals Switzerland Denmark Norway Sweden Finland Canada USA Germany

Mini Contactors ➀
B6../ B7.. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ ■
B6/B7..-F ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
B6/B7..-P ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
BC6/BC 7.. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ ■
BC6/BC 7..-F ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
BC6/BC7..-P ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
BC6/BC7..-1.4 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ ■
BC6/BC7..-F-1.4 ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
BC6/BC7..-P-1.4 ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■
BC6/BC7..-2.4 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ ■
91 A 043

BC6/BC7..-F-2.4 ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
BC6/BC7..-P-2.4 ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
B 6-30-10 B 6 S/B7 S – – – – – ■ – ■ ■

Compact Reversing Contactors


VB6/VB7.. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
VBC 6/VBC7 – – – – – – – ■ ■

Mini Contactor Relays


K6.. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ –
K6..-F ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ – –
K6..-P ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ – –
KC6.. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ –
KC6..-F ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ – –
KC6..-P ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ – –
KC6..-1.4 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ –
KC6..-F-1.4
KC6..-P-1.4


















6
KC6..-2.4 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ –
KC6..-F-2.4 ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ – –
KC6..-P-2.4 ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ – –
91 A 050

Accessories
KC 6 - 31 Z CA6-11.. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ –
CA F6 – – – – – – – ■ –
LB6 – ■ – – ■ – ■ – –
LB6 -CA – – – – – – – – –
■ Certified standard version; the device label must bear the approval mark, if it is mandatory.
■ Being certified, ask on delivery.
➀ For B7 mini contactors, besides NEMKO, all approvals have been acquired.

Motor power values (Motor-rating) and rated current values (Amp-rating) in The values approved for contactors and contactor relays are given below.
compliance with CSA and UL for B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 contactors and K(C) 6 The reference values are given on the device and listed in the table below.
contactor relays.
CSA and UL approvals for contactors concern both the motor-rating and the amp-
rating that is generally used.

Motor-rating for B( C) 6 contactors: Motor-rating for B ( C)7 contactors:


Nominal voltage Ue ~ (V) 110/120 V 220/240 V 440/480 V 540/600 V Nominal voltage Ue ~ (V) 110/120 V 220/240 V 440/480 V 540/600 V
3-phase motor P (hp) 1 2 1 1 3-phase motor P (hp) 1 3 5 5
Ie (A) 7.2 6.8 1.8 1.4 Ie (A) 7.2 9.6 7.6 6.1

1-phase motor P (hp) 1/3 3/4 – – 1-phase motor P (hp) 1/2 1.5 2 2
Ie (A) 7.2 6.9 – – Ie (A) 9.8 10 6 4.8

Amp-rating: – 12 A-300 V, a.c. for B(C) 6 contactor main contacts Amp-rating: – 12 A-600 V, a.c. for B(C) 7 contactor main contacts
Pilot duty: A600 – 5 A-600 V a.c. for auxiliary contacts built into B(C)6, K(C)6 and B(C)7 contactors as well as for CA6 auxiliary contact blocks.
Values for 200 - 208V = (220 - 240V) x 1.15

Low Voltage Products 6/13


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Mini Contactors
Mini Contactor Relays

Terminal Marking and Positioning


1 3 5 7 A1 1 3 5 13 A1 1 3 5 21 A1

A 364 D
2 4 6 8 A2 2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 22 A2
Mini Contactors B 6(7)-40-00 - B 6(7)-30-10 - B 6(7)-30-01 -
BC 6(7)-40-00 - BC 6(7)-30-10 - BC 6(7)-30-01 -

A1 13 1 3 5 1 3 5 13 A1 A1 21 1 3 5 1 3 5 21 A1

A 365 D
A2 14 2 4 6 2 4 6 14 A2 A2 22 2 4 6 2 4 6 22 A2
Compact Reversing Contactors VB 6(7)-30-10 - VB 6(7)-30-01 -
VBC 6(7)-30-10 - VBC 6(7)-30-01 -

13 23 33 43 A1 13 33 43 21 A1 13 43 21 31 A1

A 366 D
14 24 34 44 A2 14 34 44 22 A2 14 44 22 32 A2
Mini Contactor Relays K 6-40 E - K 6-31 Z - K 6-22 Z -
KC 6-40 E - KC 6-31 Z - KC 6-22 Z -

CA 6/CAF 6 Auxiliary Contact Blocks


Their addition enables the number of auxiliary contacts for B 6, B 7, BC 6, BC 7, K 6 and KC 6 mini contactors to be increased.
Only one of the two types of auxiliary contact blocks can be mounted on a given contactor. The auxiliary contact blocks must not be
mounted on interface contactors, interface contactor relays, contactors connected to PLC's and compact reversing contactors assembled
with contactors of this type.
It is possible to mount two CAF 6 auxiliary contact blocks on the front face of VB(C) 6, VB(C) 7, VB(C) 6A and VB(C) 7A standard compact
reversing contactors.

Auxiliary contact blocks Types of Types of Auxiliary contact blocks


for side mounting contactors contactors to be screwed on to the front face
Cannot be mounted on compact reversing contactors (see photo page 6/2)
13 1 3 5 7 13 1 3 5 7
21 21 13 21 13 23
CA 6-11E B(C) 6(7)-40-00 B(C) 6-40-00 11 21
1 = CAF 6-11E
CA 6-11E-F ➟ B(C) 6(7)-40-00-F B(C) 7-40-00 ➟ CAF 6
2 = CAF 6-20E
A 368 D

A 368 D

22 22
14 22
CA 6-11E-P 14 2 4 6 8 B(C) 6(7)-40-00-P 14 2 4 6 8 14 24 12 22
3 = CAF 6-02E

33 1 3 5 13 33 1 3 5 13
33 21 23 33
CA 6-11M 21 B(C) 6(7)-30-10 B(C) 6-30-10
21 21 31
1 = CAF 6-11M
CA 6-11M-F ➟ B(C) 6(7)-30-10-F B(C) 7-30-10 ➟ CAF 6 2 = CAF 6-20M
A 369 D

A 369 D

22 22 34 22
CA 6-11M-P 34 2 4 6 14 B(C) 6(7)-30-10-P 34 2 4 6 14
24 34 22 32
3 = CAF 6-02M

13 1 3 5 21 13 1 3 5 21
31 13 31 13 33
CA 6-11N 31 B(C) 6(7)-30-01 B(C) 6-30-01 11 31
1 = CAF 6-11N
CA 6-11N-F ➟ B(C) 6(7)-30-01-F B(C) 7-30-01 ➟ CAF 6 2 = CAF 6-20N
A 370 D

A 370 D

32 32 14 32 14 34
CA 6-11N-P 14 2 4 6 22 B(C) 6(7)-30-01-P 14 2 4 6 22 12 32
3 = CAF 6-02N
SST 239...250 93 S

53 40 E 53 40 E
53 61 53 63
CA 6-11K 61 K(C) 6 ..... K(C) 6 .....61 51 61
1 = CAF 6-11K
CA 6-11K-F ➟ 31 Z
K(C) 6 ..... F ➟ 31 Z
2 = CAF 6-20K
A 371 D

A 371 D

62 62 54 62
CA 6-11K-P 54 22 Z K(C) 6 ..... P 54 22 Z 54 64 52 62
3 = CAF 6-02K

1 2 3

6/14 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Sommaire
Section
Chapitre Index

Mini Contactors, Mini Contactor Relays


and Accessories
Dimensions (in mm)

BBC 87 6101
BBC 87 6100

B 6(7)-, BC 6(7)-, K 6-, KC 6- B 6(7)-, BC 6(7)-, K 6-, KC 6-


screw connection flat pin connection

46.5
68 43.5
4 57.5
33.5

25.4
42
BBC 87 6102

BBC 87 6103
4.5

B 6(7)-, BC 6(7)-, K 6-, KC 6-, B 6(7)-, BC 6(7)-, K 6-, KC 6-


soldering pin connection with CA6 auxiliary contact blocks

6
BBC 87 6104-1

BBC 87 6104-2

BBC 87 6642-2
BBC 87 6642-1

VB 6(7), VBC 6(7) Compact reversing contactor VB 6(7), VBC 6(7) Compact reversing contactor
screw connection flat pin connection

Drilling diagrams

For M4 fixing screws For printed circuit


BBC 87 6643

BBC 87 6644
BBC 87 6107

BBC 87 6108
BBC 87 6106

B 6(7)-, BC 6(7)-, VB 6(7), VBC 6(7) Standard Standard device Compact reversing
K 6-, KC 6- VB 6A(7A), VBC 6A(7A) 4-pole with auxiliary contactor
device contact block

Low Voltage Products 6/15


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Mini Contactors, Mini Contactor Relays


and Accessories
Dimensions (in mm)

4 50
35 ... 45
47,5
9,1 9,1 9,1 9,1 46,5
¯4,5 4,5

25,4
50
BBC 87 6645

42

105
47
B 6 (7) - F with LB 6

Auxiliary Contact Blocks

SST20398
32 4 6,5
5 45 56

B 6(7) with T 7 DU
BBC 87 6646

CA 6, screw connection

4.0 min.
4

BBC 87 6649
BBC 87 6647
BBC 87 6648

CA 6- P, soldering pin connection CA 6- F, flat pin connection CA 6 with LB 6- CA

ON/OFF indicator
SST 210 94 M

SST 211 94 M

35 mm
EN 50022

B(C) 6, B(C) 7, K(C) 6 with CAF 6 front-mounted auxiliary contact block CAF 6, screw connection

6/16 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay for Mini Contactors

Ordering details
Type Order Code Setting Range Max. fuse Packing Weight

aM gG(gl)
A ... A A A piece kg

T 7 DU Thermal Overload Relays


for B 6, BC 6, B 6S, VB 6, VBC 6, B 7, BC 7, B 7S, VB 7, VBC 7 mini contactors.
T 7 DU 0.16 1SAZ 111 301 R 0001 0.1 ... 0.16 0.5 1 0.070
SST 002 98

T 7 DU 0.24 1SAZ 111 301 R 0002 0.16 ... 0.24 1 1 0.070


T7 DU 0.4 1SAZ 111 301 R 0003 0.24 ... 0.4 2 1 0.070
T 7 DU
T 7 DU 0.6 1SAZ 111 301 R 0004 0.4 ... 0.6 2 1 0.070
T 7 DU 1.0 1SAZ 111 301 R 0005 0.6 ... 1.0 4 1 0.070
T 7 DU 1.6 1SAZ 111 301 R 0006 1.0 ... 1.6 6 1 0.070
T 7 DU 2.4 1SAZ 111 301 R 0007 1.6 ... 2.4 6 1 0.070
T 7 DU 4.0 1SAZ 111 301 R 0008 2.4 ... 4.0 10 1 0.070
T 7 DU 6.0 1SAZ 111 301 R 0009 4.0 ... 6.0 10 1 0.070
T 7 DU 9.0 1SAZ 111 301 R 0010 6.0 ... 9.0 10 1 0.070
T 7 DU12.0 1SAZ 111 301 R 0011 9.0 ... 12.0 20 1 0.070

Tripping curves
120
100
80
60
40

20
from cold state
10
SST 001 98

8
6
4
Minutes

T 7 DU + B 7-30-01
Tripping time

1
40
3 phase
6
20
Seconds

2 phase
10
8
6
4

2
SST20198G

1
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Tripping current
in multiples of the setting current

3
SST 206 98

Setting 2

1 Button for setting on motor nominal current

2 Reset
Position A: automatic reset Neutral
push
Position H: manual reset position
pull
3 Test: Neutral position : Running free
Push position : Stop action
NO 97 NC 95
i.e. N.C. contact (95-96) operated
A310

Pull position : Tripping


SST 209 98

NO 98 NC 96
i.e. both N.O. and N.C. contacts operated

Low Voltage Products 6/17


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay for Mini Contactors

Technical Data
Type T 7 DU
Standards (international, european) IEC 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1
Approvals and certifications UL, CSA, PTB
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
according to IEC 947-4-1
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6
according to IEC 947-4-1
Air temperature close to thermal O/L relay
– for storage °C –40 to +70
– during operation (temperature compensation) °C –25 to +50 (open-air)
Climatic withstand according to IEC 68-2-3, IEC 68-2-30 -
Mounting position ± 30° from standard vertical mounting position
not horizontally, not upside down
(5 mm side by side mounting distance)
Shock withstand A2
shock duration ms 10
Critical direction
91 A 373

A1

of shocks A1, A2 multiples of g 10


Mounting Latching below the contactor, screw fixing on main terminals
Terminals and cross-sectional areas
for main conductors (motor side)
● screw terminal with cable clamps M 3.5
● conductor cross-sectional area
– rigid solid 2 x mm2 0.75...2.5
– flexible with cable end 2 x mm2 0.5...1.5
Terminals and cross-sectional area for auxiliary conductors
● screw terminal with cable clamp M 3.5
● conductor cross-sectional area
– rigid solid 2 x mm2 0.75...2.5
– flexible with cable end 2 x mm2 0.5...1.5
Degree of protection according to IEC 947-1/EN 60 947-1 All the terminals are protected against
direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part 100

Pole Technical Characteristics


Number of poles 3
Setting ranges see page 6/17
Tripping class according to IEC 947-4-1/EN 60 947-4-1 10 A
Rated operational frequencies Hz 0 ... 400
Max. switching frequency up to 15 starts/h or 60 starts/h with 40 % on-load factor when neither
without untimely tripping the starting current of 6 x In nor the starting time 1 s are exceeded.
Resistance per phase in Ω
and heat dissipation per phase in W see page 6/19
at maximum setting current
Protection fuses required for short-circuit protection see page 6/19

Auxiliary contacts Technical Characteritics


Auxiliary contacts "normally closed N.C." "normally open N.O."
Terminal marking 95-96 97-98
Rated operational voltage Ue V 500 500
Conventional free air thermal current Ith A 6 6
Rated operational current Ie
for AC-15 220 to 240 V A 1.5 1.5
for AC-15 380 to 415 V A 0.7 0.5
for AC-15 to 500 V A 0.5 0.3
for DC-15 220 V A 0.2 0.2
Short-circuit protection: gG(gl) type fuse A 4 4

6/18 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay for Mini Contactors

Technical Data (cont.)


Setting range Short-circuit protection Fuses Resistance Joule losses
Co-ordination type 2 Co-ordination type 1 per phase per phase
at upper
gG (gl) gG (gl) current setting
A ... A A A Ω W

0.1 ... 0.16 0.5 20 62.3 1.6


0.16 ... 0.24 1 20 27 1.6
0.24 ... 0.4 2 20 11.7 1.9
0.4 ... 0.6 2 20 4.61 1.7
0.6 ... 1.0 4 20 1.66 1.7
1.0 ... 1.6 6 20 0.63 1.6
1.6 ... 2.4 6 20 0.27 1.6
2.4 ... 4.0 10 20 0.107 1.7
4.0 ... 6.0 10 20 0.049 1.8
6.0 ... 9.0 10 20 0.021 1.7
9.0 ... 12.0 20 20 0.010 1.4

Approvals and Certifications


Approvals Certifications of
ship classification
societies

UL CSA EZU PTB GL LRS


USA Canada Czech Germany Germany Great
Republic Britain

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ Approved through normal procedure, the company labels
bear the certification mark when it is mandatory.
■ Being approved, availability date on request.
6

Low Voltage Products 6/19


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Notes

6/20 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Main Summary Index

General Technical Data


Standards, Approvals…

Contents

Standards, Specifications and Certifying Organizations ......................................................... 7/2


Certifications and Approvals ................................................................................................... 7/4
CSA and UL Approvals ........................................................................................................... 7/6
Terms and Technical Definitions ............................................................................................. 7/8
Standards and Utilization Categories .................................................................................... 7/10
Degrees of Protection ........................................................................................................... 7/12
Climatic Withstand of Devices .............................................................................................. 7/13
Connections .......................................................................................................................... 7/14
Tightening Torques for Contactors, Contactor Relays and Accessories .............................. 7/16
Co-ordination with Short-circuit Protection Devices .............................................................. 7/17

Low Voltage Products 7/1


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary
Section Index

General Technical Data


Standards, Specifications and Certifying Organizations

Definitions
ABB low voltage devices are developed and manufactured according to the rules set out in IEC international publications, in EN European
specifications and in national standards such as UTE, VDE and BS.
In most countries, low voltage apparatus is built according to such rules with checking being the responsibility of the manufacturer. The devices
are therefore not subject to any further obligation for approval. However, for devices designed for domestic use or for the general public, a test report
from our laboratories can be remitted to our customers, on request, for presentation to different qualified local organizations.
In other countries, certifications are required by law.
For devices installed on board ships, maritime insurance companies require the devices to be approved by independent certification organisations
such as BV, GL and LRS.
Certification and approval requirements are described on pages 7/4 and 7/5.

Specifications
● International Specifications
The International Electrotechnical Commission, IEC, which is part of the International Standards Organization, ISO, publishes IEC publications
which act as a basis for the world market.

● European Specifications and National Specifications


The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC), which groups together 18 European countries, publishes EN
standards. These European standards differ very little from IEC international standards and have similar numbering.
The same applies for national standards which use, without exception, the same numbering and reproduce the texts of these unified standards in
their entirety. Contradicting national standards are withdrawn.

● European Directives
The guarantee of the free movement of goods within the European Community means that any regulatory differences between member states have
been eliminated. The European directives set up common rules that are included in the legislation of each state while contradictory regulations are
cancelled.
Three directives are essential:
– Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC concerns electrical equipment from 50 to 1000 V a.c. and from 75 to 1500 V d.c.
This specifies that compliance with the requirements that it sets out is acquired once the equipment conforms with the standards harmonized on
a European level: EN 60 947-1 and EN 60 947-4-1 for contactors.
– Machines Directive 89/392/EEC for safety specifications of machines and equipment on complete machines. Machines bearing the CE mark
comply with these specifications.
– Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC which concerns all devices able to create electromagnetic disturbance. Amendment A11
to standard EN 60 947-4-1 does not set out any requirement concerning the level of emission or immunity of contactors which do not have any
active electronic components. Owing to this fact, compliance with standard EN 60 947-4-1 meets the requirements for CE marking, with respect
to this directive.
CE Marking:
CE marking must not be confused with a quality label.
CE marking is proof of conformity with the European Directives concerning the product.
CE marking is part of a procedure for exclusively administrative use and is intended to guarantee the free movement of the product within the
European Community.

● Specifications in Canada and the USA


Canadian and American specifications are more or less equivalent but differ greatly from IEC, UTE, VDE and BS specifications.
UL Underwriters Laboratories USA File ref. E39231, E48139 (on request)
CSA Canadian Standards Canada File ref. LR56745-14/15 (on request)
UL (USA) specifications make the following distinction between devices:
"Recognized" Authorized to be included in equipment, if the equipment in question has been entirely mounted and wired by qualified
personnel.
These devices bear the mark
"Listed" Authorized to be included in equipment and for separate sale as components in the USA.
These devices bear the mark

● Other Specifications and Certifications


The following specifications must be respected when these devices are used on ships:
BV Bureau Veritas France LRS LIoyd's Register of Shipping Great Britain
DNV Det Norske Veritas Norway PRS Polski Rejestr Statkow Poland
GL Germanischer LIoyd Germany R.I.Na Registro Italiano Navale Italy

7/2 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


Standards, Specifications and Certifying Organizations

Specifications (cont.)
●International Standards
IEC 947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 1: General rules (NFC 63-001).
IEC 947-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 4: Contactors and motor starters – Section 1: Electromechanical contactors
and motor starters (NFC 63-001).
IEC 947- 5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5: Control circuit devices and switching elements –
Section 1: Electromechanical control circuit devices (NFC 63-146).
IEC 947- 6-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 6: Multiple function equipment – Section 1: Automatic transfer switching
equipment (NFC 63-160).
IEC 204-1 Electrical equipment of industrial machines – Part 1: General requirements (≈ NFC 79-130).
IEC 204-2 Electrical equipment of industrial machines – Part 2: Item designation and examples of drawings, diagrams, tables
and instructions (Appendices D and E of Publication 204-1).
●European Standards
EN 50 001 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Dimensions: General requirements (NFC 63-090).
EN 50 002 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Dimensions: Fixing holes of contactor relays (NFC 63-091).
EN 50 003 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Dimensions - Motor contactor fixing holes (NFC 63-092).
EN 50 005 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Terminal marking and distinctive number: General rules
(NFC 63-030).
EN 50 011 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Terminal marking, distinctive number and distinctive letter for
particular contactor relays (NFC 63-031).
EN 50 012 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Terminal marking and distinctive number for auxiliary contacts of
particular contactors (NFC 63-032).
EN 50 022 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Mounting rails - Top hat rails 35 mm wide for snap-on mounting
of equipment (NFC 63-015).
EN 50 023 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Mounting rails - Top hat rails 75 mm wide for snap-on mounting
of equipment (NFC 63-016).
EN 60 947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 1: General rules (NFC 63-001) + amendment A11.
EN 60 947-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 4: Contactors and motor starters - Section 1: Electromechanical contactors
and motor starters (NFC 63-110).
EN 60 947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5: Control circuit devices and switching elements - Section 1: Electrome-
chanical control circuit devices (NFC 63-146).
● National Standards
– Germany: DIN VDE 0660
Part 100 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – General rules (EN 60 947-1).
Part 100/A11 Amendment A11.
Part 102 Electromechanical contactors and motor starters (EN 60 947-4-1).
Part 200 Control circuit devices and switching elements; Electromechanical control circuit devices (EN 60 947-5-1).
– France
UTE NFC 63-001 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 1: General rules + Amendment 11 (EN 60 947-1 + A11).
UTE NFC 63-110 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 4: Contactors and motor starters - Section 1: Electromechanical contactors
and motor starters (EN 60 947-4-1).
UTE NFC 63-140 Control switches (Low voltage switching devices for control and auxiliary circuits, including contactor relays)
– Part 1 - Section 1: General requirements.
UTE NFC 63-146 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5: Control circuit devices and switching elements -
Section 1: Electromechanical control circuit devices (EN 60 947-5-1).
– Switzerland: SEV Publication
N° 1025
TP 17 B/2A -d
Safety regulations for contactors.
Requirements and condition of testing for motor protection or overload protection switch.
7
TP 17 B/4A -d Requirements and condition of testing for motor protection or overload protection switch.
– Great Britain
BS 5424 (Part 1) Specifications for controlgear for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c. and 1200 V d.c.
BS 4794 Control switches (switching devices including contactor relays for control and auxiliary circuits) up to and including 1000 V
a.c. and 1200 V d.c. (similar to IEC 337 Publication).
BS 4941 Motor starter for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c. and 1200 V d.c. (similar to IEC 292 Publication).
– Sweden
SS 428 0600 Switching devices for max. 1KV. Survey of standards - International standards - Validity of Swedish standard.

Test Certifying Organizations


● LOVAG
ABB Control is a member of the ASEFA (Association of French Test Stations for Electrical Apparatus) whose platforms are accredited by the
RNE (national test network).
This independent organization is authorized to deliver certificates of testing and conformity with standards, especially IEC.
ASEFA is one of the signatories of the LOVAG (Low Voltage Agreement Group) agreement which ensures reciprocal recognition between the
main European certifying organizations for low voltage electrical tests by delivering certificates of LOVAG conformity.
Members of LOVAG: ACAE SEMKO ALPHA ASEFA ASTA KEMA CEBEC
Countries: Italy Sweden Germany France Great Britain Holland Belgium
Production centres
LOVAG affiliated ABB: ABB Sace ABB Control – ABB Control – – –
(Italy) (Sweden) (France)

Low Voltage Products 7/3


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


Certifications and Approvals

Designed according to the appropriate specifications, the devices in this catalogue have been built and tested by ourselves. They can be used in most countries without any further certifications being
necessary.
Some countries, however, require certification according to their own national standards. In other cases, the Marine for example, approvals ratifying that particular specifications have been met are
necessary.
The table below shows the state of approvals and certifications for different devices.
The following documents may be obtained on request: - certificates of conformity.
- certificates of certification or approval.
The use of certified devices does not exonerate the equipment supplier from complying with the legal specifications of the country concerned.
Explanation of symbols:
■ Standard design approved, the company labels bear the certification mark when this is required. ● No approval required, except in specific cases.
▲ Draft approval in progress. ▲ Approved with restrictions.

Type Approvals Certifications of ship classification societies


of device

Mark

Abbreviation CSA UL BV GL LRS DNV PRS RINa MRS


Approved in Canada USA France Germany Gr. Britain Norway Poland Italy Russia

Contactors: (3P) 3-pole and (4P) 4-pole


BC 9 (3P), BC 16 (3P), BC 18 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
BC 25 (3P), BC 30 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
A 9 (3P), A 12 (3P), A 16 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
A 9 (4P), A 16 (4P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
A 26 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
A 26 (4P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
A 30 (3P), A 40 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
A 45 (4P), AE 45 (4P) ■ ■ ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
A 50 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
AE 50 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ● ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
A 50 (4P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
AE 50 (4P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
A 63 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
AE 63 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ● ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
A 75 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
AE 75 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ● ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
A 75 (4P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
AE 75 (4P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
A 95 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ■ ■
AE 95 (3P) ■ ■
A 110 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ■ ■
AE 110 (3P) ■ ■
EK 110, 150 (4P) ■ ■
EH 145 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲■ ■ ■ ■
EH 175 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
EH 210 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
EK 175, 210 (4P) ■ ■
EH 260 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
EH 300 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
EH 370 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ▲ ■ ■
EK 370 (4P) ■ ■
EH 550 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ▲ ▲ ■ ■ ■
EK 550 (4P) ■ ■
EH 700 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ▲ ▲ ■ ▲ ■
EH 800 (3P) ■ ■ ■ ▲ ▲ ■ ■ ■

7/4 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


Certifications and Approvals

Designed according to the appropriate specifications, the devices in this catalogue have been built and tested by ourselves. They can be used in most countries without any further certifications being
necessary.
Some countries, however, require certification according to their own national standards. In other cases, the Marine for example, approvals ratifying that particular specifications have been met are
necessary.
The table below shows the state of approvals and certifications for different devices.
The following documents may be obtained on request: - certificates of conformity.
- certificates of certification or approval.
The use of certified devices does not exonerate the equipment supplier from complying with the legal specifications of the country concerned.
Explanation of symbols:
■ Standard design approved, the company labels bear the certification mark when this is required. ● No approval required, except in specific cases.
▲ Draft approval in progress. ▲ Approved with restrictions.

Type Approvals Certifications of ship classification societies


of device

Mark

Abbreviation CSA UL UL PTB BV GL LRS DNV PRS RINa MRS


Approved in Canada USA USA Germany France Germany Gr. Britain Norway Poland Italy Russia

Contactor Relays
4-pole KC - ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ● ▲
8-pole KC - ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ● ▲
4-pole N - ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ▲ ▲
8-pole N - ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ▲ ▲

Thermal O/L Relays


TA25 DU ■ ■ ▲ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
TA42 DU ■ ■ ▲ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
TA75 DU ■ ■ ▲ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
TA80 DU ■ ■ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
TA110 DU ■ ■ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
T 200 DU ■ ● ■ ■ (1) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
T 450 DU/SU ■ ● ■ ■ (1) ■ ■ ■ ■ (2) ■ ■ ■
T 900 DU/SU ■ ● ■ ■ (1) ■ ■ ■ ■ (2) ■ ■ ■
(1) Specific tests. (2) Except for SU types.

Electronic O/L Relay: see page 5/22


Accessories for Contactors, Contactor Relays
CA 5, 1-pole
CA 5, 4-pole


















7
CAL 5-11 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
CAL 16-11 ■ ■ ▲
TE5S-24, 120, 240 ■
TP 40 DA/IA, TP 180 DA/IA ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
WB 75 ■ ■
Mechanical latching
for EH 145 - 800 ■
Mechanical interlocking
for EH 145 - 300 (3) ■ ■
for EH 145 - 800 (4) ■ ■
RV 5 ▲ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
RC 5 ▲ ■ ▲ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ■ ▲
RT 5 ▲ ■ ▲ ■ ■ ■ ● ■ ●
VM 5 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
VE 5 ■ ■ ■ ● ● ● ● ● ●
(3) SK 829 071-A, B, C, D and E types (4) SK 829 070-A, B, C, D, E and F types

Low Voltage Products 7/5


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


CSA and UL Approvals

CSA and UL Approvals stipulate the following for contactors:


– the "3-phase motor-rating": motor power (hp) and corresponding current (A).
– the "amp-rating": usual operational current (A) and nominal voltage (V).
Contactor relays are approved in amp-rating.
The technical characteristics figuring on devices must be respected and have been reproduced in the tables
below.

3-phase motor-rating
A 998

Contactors Size Motor power P Nominal voltage Ue


NEMA Nominal current Ie
Type 200V/208V 220V/240V 440V/480V 500V/600V
A9 00 P hp 2 2 5 7.5
Ie A 7.8 6.8 7.6 9
A 12 0 P hp 3 3 7.5 10
Ie A 11 9.6 11 11
A 16 0 P hp 5 5 10 15
Ie A 17.5 15.2 14 17
A 26 1 P hp 7.5 10 20 25
A 984

Ie A 25.3 28 27 27
A 30 1P P hp 10 10 25 30
Ie A 32.2 28 34 32
A 40 – P hp 10 15 30 40
Ie A 32.2 42 40 41
A 45, A 50 2 P hp 15 20 40 50
Ie A 48.3 54 52 52
A 63 – P hp 20 25 60 75
Ie A 62.1 68 77 77
A 75 3 P hp 25 30 60 75
Ie A 78.2 80 77 77
A 95 – P hp 30 30 60 75
Ie A 92 80 77 77
A 110 – P hp 30 40 75 100
Ie A 92 104 96 99
EH 145 4 P hp 40 50 100 125
Ie A 119.6 130 124 125
EH 175 4 P hp 50 60 125 150
Ie A 149.5 145 156 144
EH 210 – P hp 60 75 150 200
Ie A 166.7 192 180 192
EH 260 5 P hp 75 100 200 250
Ie A 220.8 248 240 242
EH 300 5 P hp 100 100 250 250
Ie A 285 248 302 242
EH 370 – P hp 125 150 350 400
Ie A 358 360 414 382
EH 550 6 P hp 150 200 400 500
Ie A 414 480 477 472
EH 700 – P hp 200 250 500 600
Ie A 552 602 590 –
EH 800 7 P hp 250 300 600 700
Ie A 692 – – –
Note: Other specific versions for the North-American market can be delivered on request.

7/6 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


CSA and UL Approvals

Amp-rating for A, BC, AE, EH and EK Contactors


The "amp-rating" value corresponds to the "General Use Rating" defined in specification UL 508:
the operational current, both during pull-in and steady-state conditions, must not exceed the "amp-rating" value
of the device. In alternating current, the inductive cos ϕ of the load is between 0.75 and 0.8.
Contactors Main contacts (General Use Rating) Auxiliary contacts:
Nominal current Nominal voltage "pilot-duty" Nominal current Nominal voltage
Type A V a.c. A V a.c.
A 998

BC 9 21 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600


B C 16 21 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
B C 25 33 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
B C 30 45 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600

A9 21 600 A 600, P 300 10 600


A 12 25 600 A 600, P 300 10 600
A 16 28 600 A 600, P 300 10 600
A 26 40 600 A 600, P 300 10 600
A 984

A 30 50 600 A 600, P 300 10 600


A 40 60 600 A 600, P 300 10 600
A(E) 45, A(E) 50 80 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
A(E) 63 90 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
A(E) 75 105 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
A(E) 95 125 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
A(E) 110 140 600 A 600, Q 300 10 600
EK 110 170 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 145, EK 150 200 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 175 200 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 210, EK 175 230/250 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 260, EK 210 300 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 300 350 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 370, EK 370 420 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 550, EK 550 540 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 700 650 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
EH 800 810 600 A 600, P 600 10 600
7
Amp-rating for N and KC Contactor Relays
Contactor Relays "pilot-duty" Nominal current Nominal voltage
Type A V a.c.

N, KC - (4 poles per stack) A 600, Q 300 10 600

Amp-rating for Main Accessories


Accessories "pilot-duty" Nominal current Nominal voltage
Type A V a.c.

CA 5 auxiliary contacts A 600, Q 300 10 600


CAL 5-11 auxiliary contacts A 600, Q 300 10 600
CAL 16-11 auxiliary contacts A 600 10 600
TP - pneumatic timer A 600 10 600

Low Voltage Products 7/7


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


Terms and Technical Definitions

Altitude
Characterizes the place of use. It is expressed in metres above sea level.

Circuits
– auxiliary circuit:
All the conductive parts of a contactor designed to be inserted in a different circuit from the main circuit and the contactor control circuits.
– control circuit:
All the conductive parts of a contactor (other than the main circuit and the auxiliary circuit) used to control the contactor's closing operation or opening
operation or both.
– main circuit:
All the conductive parts of a contactor designed to be inserted in the circuit that it controls.

Thermal O/L Relay Tripping Classes


IEC 947-4-1 defines tripping classes 10 A, 10, 20, and 30. Types 10 A, 10, etc. correspond to the maximum tripping time for a making current at 7.2
times the setting current.
Furthermore, for each class the standard specifies the tripping time for 1.5 times the setting current and sets the non tripping condition at 1.05 times
the setting current.
All these data are summarized in the table below.

Extract from IEC 947-4-1:


Tripping class 10 A 10 20 30
Max. tripping time for 1.5 times
the setting current (s) 120 240 480 720
(warm state)
Tripping time for 7.2 times
the setting current (s) 2 - 10 4 - 10 6 - 20 9 - 30
(cold state)
For 1.05 times the setting current No tripping

Insulation Class according to NFC 20 040 and VDE 0110


Characterizes adaptation of the devices to ambient temperature and operating conditions.
For given clearances and creepage distances a device will have different insulating voltages depending on insulation classes A, B, C and D.
Class C corresponds to most industrial applications.
The devices in this catalogue belong to class C.

Co-ordination of Equipment Protections during a Short Circuit


This is the addition upstream of the contactor and thermal O/L relay of a short-circuit (SCPD) protection device such as a circuit-breaker, a fuse with
a high breaking capacity or other fuses.
IEC publication 947-4-1 defines co-ordination types "1" and "2":
- Type "1" co-ordination requires that, in the event of a short-circuit, the contactor or starter does not endanger persons or installations and will not
then be able to operate without being repaired or parts being replaced.
- Type "2" co-ordination requires that, in short-circuit conditions, the contactor or starter does not endanger persons or installations and will be able
to operate afterwards. The risk of contacts being welded is acceptable. In this case, the manufacturer must stipulate the measures to be taken with
respect to maintenance of the equipment.

Rated Operational Current Ie


Current rated by the manufacturer. It is mainly based on the rated operational voltage Ue, the rated frequency, the utilization category, the rated duty
and the type of protective enclosure, if necessary.

Conventional Free Air Thermal Current Ith


Current that the contactor can withstand in free air for a duty time of 8 hours without the temperature rise of its various parts exceeding the maximum
values given by the standard.

Cycle Time
This is the sum of the current flow time and the no-current time for given cycle.

Electrical Durability
Number of on-load operations that the contactor is able to carry out. It depends on the utilization category.

Mechanical Durability
Number of no-current operations that a contactor is able to carry out.

Load Factor
Ratio of the on-load operating time to the total cycle time x 100.

Switching Frequency
Number of switching cycles per hour.

7/8 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


Technical Terms and Definitions

Plugging
Stopping or fast reversal in rotation direction of a motor by two supply leads being interchanged while the motor is running.

Inching
Energization of a motor's circuit repeatedly or for short periods with the aim of obtaining small movements of the driven mechanism.

Coil Operating Limits


Expressed in multiples of the nominal control circuit voltage Uc for the upper and lower limits.

Mounting Position
Comply with the manufacturer's instructions. Restrictions are to be taken into account for certain mounting positions.

Rated Breaking or Making Capacity


Root mean square value of the current that the contactor is able to break or make at a given voltage according to the conditions specified by standards
and for a given utilization category.

Intermittent Duty
Duty during which the contactor is successively closed or open for periods which are too short to enable the contactor to achieve thermal balance.

Ambient Temperature
Air temperature close to the contactor.

Time
– Time constant:
Ratio of the inductance to the resistance (L/R = mH/Ω = ms).
– Short-time withstand current:
Current that the contactor is able to withstand in closed position for a short time interval and in specified conditions.
– Minimum switching time:
This is the minimum closing or opening order time necessary for the contactor to reach complete closing or opening.
– Closing time:
Time interval between the beginning of the closing operation and the instant the contacts touch on all the poles.
– Opening time:
Time interval between the specified starting instant of the opening operation and the instant the arcing contacts separate on all the poles.

Rated Control Voltage Uc


Control voltage value for which the control circuit is sized.

Rated Operational Voltage Ue


Voltage to which the contactor's utilization characteristics refer. In three-phase it is the phase-to-phase voltage.

Rated Insulation Voltage Ui


Reference voltage for dielectric tests and creepage distances.

Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage Uimp


Peak value of an impulse voltage, having a specified form and polarity, which does not cause breakdown in specific test conditions.

Shock Withstand 7
Requirement for vehicles, crane drives, installations on board ships and plug-in equipment. For the acceptable "g" values, the contactors must not
change position and the thermal O/L relays must not trip.

Resistance to Vibrations
Requirements for vehicles, boats and other means of transport. For the specified vibration amplitude and frequency values the device must remain
able to operate.

Low Voltage Products 7/9


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


Standards and Utilization Categories

Standards:
IEC publications 941-1, 947-4-1 and 947-5-1 should be referred to on an international level with respect to contactors, contactor relays and thermal
O/L relays.

Utilization Categories:
A contactor's duty is characterised by the utilization category together with the rated operational voltage and current indicated.

Utilization Categories for Contactors According to IEC 947-4-1:


Alternating current: AC-1 Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces.
AC-2 Slip-ring motors: starting, switching off.
AC-3 Cage motors: starting, switching off running motors.
AC-4 Cage motors: starting, plugging, inching.
AC-5a Discharge lamp switching.
AC-5b Incandescent lamp switching.
AC-6a Transformer switching.
AC-6b Capacitor bank switching.
AC-7a Slightly inductive loads for domestic devices and similar applications.
AC-7b Motors for domestic applications.
AC-8a Hermetic refrigeration compressor motor control with manual resetting of overload releases.
AC-8b Hermetic refrigeration compressor motor control with automatic resetting of overload releases.

Direct current: DC-1 Non inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces.
DC-3 Shunt motors: starting, plugging, inching, dynamic breaking of d.c. motors.
DC-5 Series motors: starting, plugging, inching, dynamic breaking of d.c. motors.
DC-6 Incandescent lamp switching.

Utilization Categories for Contactor Relays According to IEC 947-5-1:


Alternating current: AC-12 Control of resistive loads and static loads with opto-coupler isolation.
AC-13 Control of static loads with transformer isolation.
AC-14 Control of weak electromagnetic loads (≤ 72 VA).
AC-15 Control of electromagnetic loads (> 72 VA).

Direct current: DC-12 Control of resistive loads and static loads with opto-coupler isolation.
DC-13 Control of d.c. electromagnets.
DC-14 Control of d.c. electromagnets having economy resistors.

In fact some applications, and the specific criteria characterizing the various loads controlled by contactors, may modify the utilization characteristics
of the contactors. The main applications concerned are:
Capacitor Bank Switching
Account must be taken of high peaks when the current is made and of harmonic currents during continuous duty. For this application, IEC publication
947-4-1 stipulates utilization category AC-6b. The operational currents or powers acceptable for the contactors are determined by our electrical tests;
IEC publication 947-4-1 gives the calculating formula for determining the operational current (Table VII b).
Transformer Switching
Account must be taken of the peaks due to magnetization phenomena when the current is made.
For this application, IEC publication 947-4-1 stipulates utilization category AC-6a. The operational currents or powers acceptable for the contactors
are determined using the values obtained for AC-3 or AC-4 category tests and the calculating formula given in IEC 947-4-1 (Table VII b).
Lighting Circuit Switching
The current peaks occurring on energization of the circuit and the power factor depend on the type of lamps, the connection mode and whether or
not there is compensation.
For this application, IEC publication 947-4-1 stipulates two standard utilization categories:
– AC-5a for discharge lamp switching.
– AC-5b for incandescent lamp switching.
Slip-ring Motor Switching
The contactors used for short-circuiting rotor resistors can be used for rotor voltages above their natural nominal operational voltage.
The conditions of use of rotor contactors depend on the connection mode of the main poles.
The current values on circuit closing and the current and voltage values on circuit opening (as well as a generally low load factor) are easily withstood
by the contactors.

7/10 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


Standards and Utilization Categories

Utilization Categories (cont.)


D.C. Power Circuit Switching
Arc suppression is more difficult in direct current than in alternating current and this is all the more true the higher the circuit time constant which is
why it is necessary to connect several poles in series in order to improve breaking conditions.
A.C. High Current Circuit Switching
Possibility of increasing performances by connecting poles in parallel.
Circuit Switching during Temporary and Intermittent Duty
In these cases higher operational currents are acceptable, the appropriate uprating factors are given in this catalogue.
Influence of the Length of the Conductors used in the Contactor Control Circuit
According to the operational voltages, the cross-sectional areas, the coil consumption and the control layout, difficulties due to line resistances and
capacitances may appear during contactor closing and opening orders. The corresponding information is given in this catalogue (section 2).

Making and Breaking Conditions for Utilization Categories


Utilization category Durability test conditions Occasional operation
Making conditions Breaking conditions Making conditions Breaking conditions
I/Ie U/Ue Cos. ϕ I/Ie U/Ue Cos. ϕ Ic /Ie Ur /Ue Cos. ϕ Ic /Ie Ur /Ue Cos. ϕ
or or or or
L/R (ms) L/R (ms) L/R (ms) L/R (ms)

Contactors for A.C. Circuit Switching


AC-1 1 1 0.95 1 1 0.95 1.5 1.05 0.8 1.5 1.05 0.8
AC-2 2.5 1 0.65 2.5 1 0.65 4 1.05 0.65 4 1.05 0.65
AC-3 Ie < 17 A 6 1 0.65 1 0.17 0.65 10 1.05 0.45 8 1.05 0.45
17 < Ie < 100 A 6 1 0.35 1 0.17 0.35 10 1.05 0.45 8 1.05 0.45
Ie > 100 A 6 1 0.35 1 0.17 0.35 10 1.05 0.35 8 1.05 0.35
AC-4 Ie < 17 A 6 1 0.65 6 1 0.65 12 1.05 0.45 10 1.05 0.45
17 < Ie < 100 A 6 1 0.35 6 1 0.35 12 1.05 0.45 10 1.05 0.45
Ie > 100 A 6 1 0.35 6 1 0.35 12 1.05 0.35 10 1.05 0.35

Contactors for D.C. Circuit Switching


DC-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 1.05 1 1.5 1.05 1
DC-3 2.5 1 2 2.5 1 2 4 1.05 2.5 4 1.05 2.5
DC-5 2.5 1 7.5 2.5 1 7.5 4 1.05 15 4 1.05 15

Contactor Relays for A.C. Circuit Switching


AC-14 (< 72 VA) – – – – – – 6 1.1 0.7 6 1.1 0.7
AC-15 (> 72 VA) 10 1 0.7 1 1 0.4 10 1.1 0.3 10 1.1 0.3 7
Contactor Relays for D.C. Circuit Switching
Standard operation Occasional operation
Making conditions Breaking conditions Making conditions Breaking conditions
I/Ie U/Ue T0.95 I/Ie U/Ue T0.95 I/Ie U/Ue T0.95 I/Ie U/Ue T0.95
(1) (1) (1)
DC-13 1 1 6P 1 1 6P 1.1 1.1 6P 1.1 1.1 6 P(1)
DC-14 – – – – – – 10 1.1 15 ms 10 1.1 15 ms
(1) The value "6 x P" is the result of an empirical relation which is estimated to represent most d.c. magnetic loads up to the highest limit of P = 50 W (6 x P = 300 ms). It is accepted that loads
having drawn energy above 50 W are made up of weaker loads in parallel. As a consequence, the 300 ms value must form the highest limit whatever the value of the power drawn.

Key:
U (I) = applied voltage (current) Ic = making and breaking current expressed in d.c. or in a.c. like the
Ur = recovery voltage r.m.s. value of the symmetrical components
L/R = test circuit time constant T0.95 = time required to reach 95% of the current in steady-state conditions,
Ue (Ie) = rated operational voltage (current) expressed in milliseconds

Low Voltage Products 7/11


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


Degrees of Protection

General
In an installation, the degree of protection required for electrical equipment depends on the environmental characteristics. The degree of protection,
ensured by the enclosure of equipment or by the cubicle containing the equipment is expressed by the IP code which gives the level of protection
against access to hazardous parts, the ingress of foreign bodies and/or the ingress of water, in compliance with IEC 529, EN 60529, IEC 947-1 and
EN 60947-1. Besides the IP symbol, the complete code has two figures followed (optionally) by two additional letters. A short description of the
elements used in IP coding is given below.

Element Figures Specifications for installation Protection of persons


or letters protection

Codes IP

First figure Against ingress of Against access to hazardous parts


foreign bodies with:

0 No protection No protection
1 Diameter > 50 mm Back of hand
2 Diameter > 12.5 mm Finger
3 Diameter > 2.5 mm Tool
4 Diameter > 1 mm Wire
5 Limited protection against dust Wire
6 Total protection against dust Wire

Second figure Against entrance of water


having a harmful effect

0 No protection –
1 Vertical dripping
2 Dripping at a vertical angle of < 15°
3 Rain at a vertical angle of < 60°
4 Splashing
5 Low pressure water jet
6 Powerful water jets
7 Temporary immersion
8 Permanent immersion

Additional letter (optional) Against ingress Against access to hazardous


for use with: of foreign bodies parts with:

First figure 0 A Stopped by a barrier with a 50 mm Ø sphere Back of hand


First figure 0 or 1 B Entrance of test finger limited to 80 mm Finger
First figure 1 or 2 C Wire with 2.5 mm Ø and length of 100 mm Tool
First figure 2 or 3 D Wire with 1 mm Ø and length of 100 mm Wire

Additional letter (optional) Specific additional information:

H High voltage apparatus –


M Moving parts which are moving during
water test
S Moving parts which are stationary during
water test
W Specified atmospheric conditions

Note: The type of enclosure or cubicle in which the equipment must be installed prevails with respect to the degree of protection.

7/12 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


Climatic Withstand of Devices

The life time and dependability of devices are mainly influenced by a series of climatic factors which cause their
corrosion.
In practice, besides climatic conditions, there are other factors which may damage equipment such as fungi,
insects (termites), dust, work site dirt and aggressive environment (salty or sulphurous atmosphere, etc.) which
can often only be identified at the place of installation.
Climatic stress, definitions and test conditions are dealt with in national publications such as the DIN 50 series
and NFC 20 series which are attached to international publications such as IEC 68.
ABB devices meet the requirements of UTE publication 63-100 (specification II): humid heat tests in successive
cycles at different temperatures and at a relative humidity of 95%.

The test conditions are:

Description Symbolization Time of Cycle phase Temperature Relative


one cycle time in test humidity
chamber
Humidity UTE 63-100 24 hours 12 hours including 40 °C 95 %
and Specification II rise in temperature
variable 12 hours including 25 °C 95 %
temperature cooling
(open device)

ABB contactors have been used for many years in the most varied countries, with hot and humid climates for
example: Brazil, Indonesia, India or on ships. Experience has shown that ABB devices can be used in most
countries throughout the world.
The climate of the country in which the apparatus is installed is not the determining choice factor.
Account must be taken of:
– the immediate environment of the devices (sheltered, ventilated, temperature),
– the aggressivity of the immediate atmosphere at the place of installation,
– the length and frequency of non operating periods.

In the case of frequent condensation (i.e. the formation of steam caused by rapid changes in temperature),
heating resistors must be installed in cubicles (100 to 250 W per m3 of enclosure).
The table below gives the cases where heating is necessary.

Environment Operating Climate Internal heating


conditions of enclosure
Inside No running water Continuous or not All climates Without
premises No condensation
With running water Continuous All climates Without
Frequent or long Temperate Without
stops

Outside, sheltered No running water Continuous or not


Tropical
Temperate
With
Without 7
no condensation
Tropical With
Outside or With running water Continuous All climates Without
by the seaside
Frequent or long Temperate Without
stops
Tropical With

The entrance of dust, insects, dirt, etc. in devices may be prevented if the appropriate degree of protection
according to IEC 529 is chosen (See "Degree of protection" table).

Low Voltage Products 7/13


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


Connections

Connection mode and capacity


Type of device Connection mode: Cross-sectional areas:
screws and tunnel accessible rigid solid ≤ 4 mm2 flexible Width x Ø Max. width of
clamps terminals flat terminals rigid stranded ≥ 6 mm2 without cable end max. of lugs L x I
(1) bars or L
lugs
l
h
l
E0525D

E0523D

E0522D
M l e ø

E0520D

E0521D
E0524D

hxl exl-Ø mm2 mm2 mm x mm mm x mm


Contactor relays
- KC M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 x 1 - 2.5 or — 8 x 3.7
2 x 0.75 - 2.5
-N M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 -2.5 — 8 x 3.7
Contactors
● Main poles:
- BC9, 16 M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 1- 4 1 x 1 - 2.5 or — 8 x 3.7
2 x 0.75 - 2.5
- BC18, 25 M4 — — 1 or 2 x 1.5 - 6 1 or 2 x 1.5 - 4 — 10 x 4.2
- BC30 M5 — — 1 or 2 x 2.5 - 10 1 or 2 x 2.5 - 6 — 13 x 5
- A9, 12, 16 M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 — 8 x 3.7
- A26 M4 — — 1 or 2 x 1.5 - 6 1 or 2 x 1 - 4(2) — 10 x 4.2
- A30, 40 — 2x(5.6x6.5) — 1 or 2 x 2.5 - 16 1 or 2 x 2.5 - 10 — —
- A/AE45, 50, 63, 75 — 13 x 10 — 1 x 6 - 50 or 1 x 6 - 35 or — —
2 x 6 - 25 2 x 6 - 16
- A/AE95, 110 — 14 x 14 — 1 x 10 - 95 or 1 x 10 - 70 or — —
2 x 6 - 35 2 x 6 - 35
- EK110 — — 4 x 15 - Ø 6.6 1 x 10 - 70 — 30 x 6 —
- EH145, EK 150 — — 4 x 20 - Ø 11 1 x 35 - 120 — 30 x 10 —
- EH175, EH210, EK 175, EK 210 — — 5 x 20 - Ø 11 1 x 35 - 120 — 33 x 10 —
- EH260, EH300 — — 5 x 25 - Ø 11 1 x 70 - 300 — 50 x 10 —
- EH370, EK 370 — — 6 x 25 - Ø 11 1 x 70 - 300 or — 55 x 10 —
2 x 35 - 185
- EH550, EK 550 — — 6 x 25 - Ø 11 1 x 70 - 300 or — 55 x 10 —
2 x 35 - 185
- EH700 — — 6 x 40 - Ø 11 1 or 2 x 95 - 300 — 65 x 10 —
- EH800 — — 6 x 50 - 2 Ø 11 — — 75 x (10x2) —
● Built-in auxiliary contacts:
- BC9 - BC25 M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 x 1 - 2.5 or — —
2 x 0.75 - 2.5
- A9 - A16 M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 — 8 x 3.7
- A26 M4 — — 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 4(2) — 10 x 4.2
- A30 - A40 M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 — 8 x 3.7
Additional auxiliary contacts
- 1-pole CA 5 M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 — 8 x 3.7
- 4-pole CAL 5 and CA 5 M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 — 8 x 3.7
- CAL 16 M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 0.5 - 2.5 1 or 2 x 0.5 - 2.5 — 8 x 3.7
Coil terminals
- KC, BC9 - 30, A and AE45 - 75 M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 x 1 - 2.5 or — 8 x 3.7
2 x 0.75 - 2.5
- A and AE95/110 M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 — 8 x 3.7
- A9 - A40 M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 1 - 4 1 or 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 — 8 x 3.7
- EH and EK M 3.5 — — 1 or 2 x 0.5 - 2.5 1 or 2 x 0.5 - 2.5 — 8 x 3.7
(1) EH and EK contactors: with Al/Cu cable connectors - (other possibilities, see section 4)
(2) With cable end for 0.75 and 1 mm2

7/14 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


Connections

Connection Mode and Capacity


Type of device Connection mode: Connectable cross-sectional areas:
screws and tunnel accessible rigid solid ≤ 4 mm2 flexible Max. bars
clamps terminals flat terminals rigid stranded ≥ 6 mm2 with cable end or lugs

h
l

E0525D

E0523D

E0522D
M l e ø

E0524D
Width - Ø
hxl exl-Ø mm2 mm2 mm
Thermal O/L relays
● Poles:
- TA 25 DU ≤ 25 M4 — — 2 x 1.5 - 6 2 x 1.5 - 4 —
- TA 25 DU 32 — 4.5 x 5.5 — 1 x 10 2 x 0.75 - 6 —
- TA 42, TA 75, TA 80 — 9 x 10 — 1 x 2.5 - 35 or 2 x 2.5 - 16 1 x 2.5 - 25 or 2 x 2.5 - 10 —
- TA 110 — 14 x 14 — 16 - 35 16 - 35 —
- T 200 — — 4 x 20 - Ø11 25 - 120 25 - 95 30 - Ø11
- T 450 + AT 450 — — 5 x 30 - Ø11 2 x 240 2 x 240 30 - Ø11
- T 900 + AT 900 — — 5 - 8 x 50 - Ø11 2 x 300 2 x 300 50 - Ø11
● Auxiliary contact terminals:
- TA 25 - 110, T 200 - 900 M 3.5 — — 2 x 0.75 - 4 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 —

Electronic O/L Relay


● Poles and auxiliary
contact terminals:
- E 16 DU M 3.5 — — 2 x 0.75 - 4 2 x 0.75 - 4 —

Low Voltage Products 7/15


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

General Technical Data


Tightening Torques for Contactors,
Contactor Relays and Accessories

Contactors: A(E) 45 - A(E) 110 Contactors


BC 9 - BC 30
A 9 - A 40
Contactor relays:
N and KC

B A A' C B A D C

E0509D

E0510D
Type of Main poles Built-in aux. poles Coil terminals Housing assembly Cover fixing Contact screws
contactors A A' B C D

M3.5 ± poz. 2 M3.5 ± poz.2 M3.5 ± poz.2 Ø 3.5

Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque:


recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended max.
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Screws Ncm/lb.in Ncm
KC, BC 9, BC 16 ± Poz.2 160/14.4 175
100/9 120 100/9 120 100/9 120
N, A 9, A 12, A 16 ± Poz.2 120/10.5 135

M4 ± poz. 2 M4 ± poz.2 M3.5 ± poz.2 Ø 3.5

Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque:


recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended max.
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Screws Ncm/lb.in Ncm
BC 18, BC 25 ± Poz.2 160/14.4 175
170/15 220 170/15 220 100/9 120
A 26 ± Poz.1 120/10.5 135

M5 ± poz. 2 M3.5 ± poz.2 Ø 3.5 ± poz.2 M2.5 slotted screws

Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque:


recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended max.
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm
BC 30 280/25 320 100/9 120 160/14.4 175 80/7.2 90

M5 ± poz. 2 M3.5 ± poz. 2 M3.5 ± poz.2 Ø 3.5 ± poz.1

Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque:


recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended max.
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm
A 30, A 40 230/20 260 100/9 120 100/9 120 120/10.5 135

M8 slotted screws M3.5 ± poz.2 Ø 3.5 ± poz.2 Ø 3.5 ± poz.2 Ø 3 ± poz.1


for Ø 6.5
Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque:
recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended max.
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm
A(E) 45 - A(E) 75 400/35 450 100/9 120 120/10.5 135 100/9 110 60/5.4 70

HC, M8 M3.5 ± poz.2 M 3.5 ± poz.2 Ø 3.5 ± poz.2 CBLX - M5 / T25

Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque:
recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in
A(E) 95/110 600/53 650 100/9 120 135/12 150 100/9 120 500/45

M 10 M 3.5 ± poz.2

Tightening torque: Tightening torque:


recommended max. recommended max.
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm
EH 145 … EH 800 1800/160 2200 100/9 120

Accessories Pole terminals


CA 5, CAL 5, CC 5 M3.5 ± poz. 2
CAL 16, CCL 16

TP Tightening torque:
LK 75-A, LK 75-A1 recommended max.
VE 5-1, VE 5-2 Ncm Ncm
WB 75 (± poz.1 screw) 100 120

7/16 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Co-ordination with Short-circuit


Protection Devices

In compliance with standards IEC 947-4-1 and EN 60 947-4-1, we define for the contactors and starters the type, rating and characteristics of the
short-circuit protection devices SCPD which allow selective protection against overloads and ensure protection against short circuits.

Basic Functions
In order to protect the connecting cable and the motor, the switchgear must ensure the four following essential functions:
– Protection against overloads - This protection concerns the motor and the cable and is ensured by the starter overload relay.
– Motor control - This function is commonly carried out by the contactor.
– Protection against short-circuits.
– Isolation.
The latter two functions can be carried out by a circuit-breaker or by a switch-disconnector-fuse protecting the motor and the cable against short
circuits and ensuring isolation with positive contact indication.

Applicable Standards
IEC 947-4-1 (EN 60 947-4-1) precisely defines the different points to be considered in order to carry out correct co-ordination.
Complete co-ordination for a combination includes the following points:
– Selectivity test between the overload relay and the short-circuit protection device SCPD.
– Short-circuit condition tests:
● at prospective "r" currents - These currents depend on the rated operational current of the starter (Ie AC-3) and are given by the standard
(Table XI). For example: r = 1kA for Ie AC-3 < 16 A; r = 3 kA for 16 A < Ie AC-3 < 63 A ; r = 5 kA for 63 A < Ie AC-3 < 125 A etc.
● at the rated short-circuit current "Iq" - This is the maximum current that the combination can withstand, for example 50 kA.

Types of Co-ordination
IEC 947-4-1 (EN 60 947-4-1) defines two types of co-ordination according to the expected level of service continuity. Acceptable extreme damage
for the switchgear is divided into two types.
Type 1: In short-circuit conditions, the contactor or starter does not endanger persons or installations and will not be able to then operate without
being repaired or having parts replaced.
Type 2: In short-circuit conditions, the contactor or starter does not endanger persons or installations and will be able to operate afterwards. The
risk of contacts welding is acceptable.

The Complete ABB Offer


ABB has acquired years of experience with respect to problems of co-ordination and is able to make a complete offer based on tests performed in
its qualified laboratories.
A complete collection of co-ordination tables, according to IEC 947-4-1 (EN 60 947-4-1), is available on request ; see extracts on following pages.
In the co-ordination tables the following short-circuit protection devices are recommended:
● Moulded case circuit-breakers (MCCBs)
● Modular circuit-breakers (MCBs)
● Switch-disconnector-fuses (aM and gG)
● Manual Motor Starters (M.M.S.)
7
General Remarks Applicable to all Tables
● Each table is defined for a maximum ambient temperature of 40 °C. For higher temperatures, apply a derating factor according to the following
rules:
– Fuses: factor of 0.8 applied to In for an ambient temperature of 70 °C.
– MCCBs and MCBs: factor of 0.8 applied to In for an ambient temperature of 60 °C.
– The starter derating factor depends on the operating conditions of thermal O/L relays:
Factor of 0.9 applied to In for an ambient temperature of 70 °C - No derating up to 55 °C.
● Each table is defined for motor currents: 3-phase motors, 4-pole.
● Normal starting means a starting time < 2 s. - Difficult starting means an accelerating time 10 s < ts < 30 s.
Tripping classes of thermal O/L relays according to IEC 947-4-1 (EN 60 947-4-1): 10 A and 10 for DU types and 30 for SU types.
● In the tables with MCCBs, these are fitted with the magnetic relay alone. Setting is always carried out at > 12.3 Ie AC-3 so that the transient
current peak occurring during starting can be withstood.
● The minimum cable cross-sectional areas given in each table are determined to withstand the energy flow resulting from the rated short-circuit
current but do not have to correspond to the cable installation rules: voltage drop, ambient temperature, etc.

Low Voltage Products 7/17


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Direct-on-line Starters
Co-ordination according to IEC 947-4-1

Type 1 Co-ordination Direct on-line Starters


Normal start-up, 400 V - 50 kA with MS 325 M.M.S.

Motor Manual Motor Starter Contactor Group


Rated Rated Type Magnetic Overload Type Safety Max.
Power Current tripping Release clearance (1) Current
current Setting range
Pe kW Ie A A A mm I max. A
0.37 1.2 MS 325 - 1.6 18.4 1 - 1.6 A9 70/5 x 15 x 5 1.6
0.55 1.5 MS 325 - 1.6 18.4 1 - 1.6 A9 70/5 x 15 x 5 1.6
0.75 2 MS 325 - 2.5 29 1.6 - 2.5 A9 70/5 x 15 x 5 2.5
1.1 2.6 MS 325 - 4.0 50 2.5 - 4 A9 70/5 x 15 x 5 4
1.5 3.5 MS 325 - 4.0 50 2.5 - 4 A9 70/5 x 15 x 5 4
2.2 5 MS 325 - 6.3 79 4 - 6.3 A9 70/5 x 15 x 5 6.3
3 6.6 MS 325 - 9.0 112.5 6.3 - 9 A9 70/5 x 15 x 5 9
4 8.5 MS 325 - 9.0 112.5 6.3 - 9 A9 70/5 x 15 x 5 9
5.5 11.5 MS 325 - 12.5 156 9 - 12.5 A 12 70/5 x 15 x 5 12
7.5 15.5 MS 325 - 16 200 12.5 - 16 A 16 70/5 x 15 x 5 16
11 22 MS 325 - 25 300 20 - 25 A 26 70/5 x 15 x 5 25

Type 2 Co-ordination Direct on-line Starters


Normal start-up, 400 V - 50 kA with MS 325 M.M.S.

Motor Manual Motor Starter Contactor Group


Rated Rated Type Magnetic Overload Type Safety Max.
Power Current tripping Release clearance (1) Current
current Setting range
Pe kW Ie A A A mm I max. A
0.37 1.2 MS 325 - 1.6 18.4 1 - 1.6 A9 70/5 x 15 x 5 1.6
0.55 1.5 MS 325 - 1.6 18.4 1 - 1.6 A9 70/5 x 15 x 5 1.6
0.75 2 MS 325 - 2.5 29 1.6 - 2.5 A9 70/5 x 15 x 5 2.5
1.1 2.6 MS 325 - 4.0 50 2.5 - 4 A9 70/5 x 15 x 5 4
1.5 3.5 MS 325 - 4.0 50 2.5 - 4 A 12 70/5 x 15 x 5 4
2.2 5 MS 325 - 6.3 79 4 - 6.3 A 12 70/5 x 15 x 5 6.3
3 6.6 MS 325 - 9.0 112.5 6.3 - 9 A 26 70/5 x 15 x 5 9
4 8.5 MS 325 - 9.0 112.5 6.3 - 9 A 26 70/5 x 15 x 5 9
5.5 11.5 MS 325 - 12.5 156 9 - 12.5 A 26 70/5 x 15 x 5 12.5
7.5 15.5 MS 325 - 16 200 12.5 - 16 A 26 70/5 x 15 x 5 16
11 22 MS 325 - 25 300 20 - 25 A 26 70/5 x 15 x 5 25

(1) Safety clearance - Example : 70 / 5 x 15 x 5


70 mm above the MS 325 M.M.S. 5 mm on each side of both the M.M.S. and contactor

5 mm below the A 9 … A 26 Contactors 15 mm in front of both the M.M.S. and contactor

7/18 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Direct-on-line Starters
Co-ordination according to IEC 947-4-1

Type 2 Co-ordination Direct on-line Starters


Normal start-up, 400 V - 50 kA with M.C.C.B.

Motor Moulded Case Circuit-Breaker Contactor Thermal O/L Relay Group


Rated Rated Type Magnetic Type Safety Type Current Max.
Power Current tripping clearance setting Current
current range
Pe kW Ie A A mm A I max. A
0.37 1.1 LNA32RM2.5 22 A9 15 TA 25 DU 1.4 1.0 - 1.4 1.35
0.55 1.5 LNA32RM2.5 22 A9 15 TA 25 DU 1.8 1.3 - 1.8 1.75
0.75 1.9 LNA32RM2.5 22 A9 15 TA 25 DU 2.4 1.7 - 2.4 2.3
1.1 2.8 LNA32RM3.2 32 A9 15 TA 25 DU 3.1 2.2 - 3.1 2.95
1.5 3.5 LNA32RM4.5 45 A 16 15 TA 25 DU 4.0 2.8 - 4 3.75
LNA32RM4.5 45 A 16 15 TA 25 DU 5.0 3.5 - 5 4.75
2.2 5 LNA32RM6.3 63 A 26 15 TA 25 DU 6.5 4.5 - 6.5 6.25
3 6.6 LNA32RM9 84 A 26 15 TA 25 DU 8.5 6 - 8.5 8
4 8.5 LNA32RM16 155 A 30 15 TA 25 DU 11 7.5 - 11 10.5
5.5 11.5 LNA32RM16 155 A 30 15 TA 25 DU 14 10 - 14 13.5
7.5 15.5 LNA32RM20 210 A 30 15 TA 25 DU 19 13 - 19 18.5
11 22 LNA32RM27 280 A 40 15 TA 42 DU 25 18 - 25 24
15 30 LNA32RM32 365 A 40 15 TA 42 DU 32 22 - 32 30.5
18.5 37 LNA63RM52 550 A 40 15 TA 42 DU 42 29 - 42 37
22 42 LNA63RM52 550 A 63 20 TA 75 DU 52 36 - 52 48.5
30 60 S3H160MCPR125 900 A 75 20 TA 75 DU 63 45 - 63 61.5
37 72 S3H160MCPR125 1050 A 75 20 TA 75 DU 80 60 - 80 72
45 85 S3H160MCPR125 1250 A 95 25 TA 110 DU 90 65 - 90 85
55 105 S3H160MCPR125 1500 A 110 25 TA 110 DU 110 80 - 110 105
75 140 S3H250MCPR250 2150 EH 145 40 T 200 DU 150 110 - 150 140
90 170 S4H250PR211R2501 2500 EH 175 40 T 200 DU 175 130 - 175 170
110 205 S5H400PR211R3201 3200 EH 210 40 T 450 DU 235 165 - 235 210
S5H400PR211R3201 3200 EH 260 40 T 450 DU 235 165 - 235 227.5
132 245 S5H400PR211R3201 3840 EH 260 40 T 450 DU 310 220 - 310 260
160 295 S5H400PR211R4001 4800 EH 370 40 T 450 DU 310 220 - 310 298
200 370 S6S630PR211R6301 6300 EH 370 40 T 450 DU 400 285 - 400 380
250 460 S6S630PR211R6301 7560 EH 550 40 T 900 DU 500 355 - 500 483
290 530 S6S800PR211R8001 9600 EH 550 40 T 900 DU 650 465 - 650 550
315 580 S6S800PR211R8001 9600 EH 700 40 T 900 DU 650 465 - 650 650
355 630 S6S800PR211R8001 9600 EH 700 40 T 900 DU 650 465 - 650 650 7

Low Voltage Products 7/19


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Direct-on-line Starters
Co-ordination according to IEC 947-4-1

Type 2 Co-ordination Direct on-line Starters


Normal start-up, 400 V - 80 kA with Switch-fuse and gG type fuses

Motor Switch-fuse Contactor Thermal O/L Relay Group


Rated Rated Type Fuse Size Type Safety Type Current Max.
Power Current type clearance setting Current
gG range
Pe kW Ie A A mm A I max. A
0.37 1.2 OESA32 4 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 1.4 1.0 - 1.4 1.4
0.55 1.5 OESA32 6 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 1.8 1.3 - 1.8 1.8
0.75 2 OESA32 6 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 2.4 1.7 - 2.4 2.4
1.1 2.6 OESA32 10 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 3.1 2.2 - 3.1 3.1
1.5 3.5 OESA32 10 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 4.0 2.8 - 4 4
2.2 5 OESA32 16 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 6.5 4.5 - 6.5 6.5
3 6.6 OESA32 16 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 8.5 6 - 8.5 8.5
4 8.5 OESA32 25 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 11 7.5 - 11 9
5.5 11.5 OESA32 32 00 A 12 15 TA 25 DU 14 10 - 14 12
7.5 15.5 OESA32 32 00 A 16 15 TA 25 DU 19 13 - 19 16
11 22 OESA32 50 00 A 26 20 TA 25 DU 25 18 - 25 25
15 30 OESA63 63 00 A 30 20 TA 25 DU 32 24 - 32 30
18.5 37 OESA63 80 00 A 40 20 TA 42 DU 42 29 - 42 40
22 44 OESA125 100 00 A 50 20 TA 75 DU 52 36 - 52 50
30 60 OESA125 125 00 A 63 20 TA 75 DU 63 45 - 63 63
37 72 OESA125 160 00 A 75 20 TA 75 DU 80 60 - 80 75
45 85 OESA125 160 00 A 95 20 TA 110 DU 90 65 - 90 90
55 105 OESA250 200 1 A 110 20 TA 110 DU 110 80 - 110 110

7/20 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Direct-on-line Starters
Co-ordination according to IEC 947-4-1

Type 2 Co-ordination Direct on-line Starters


Normal start-up, 400 V - 80 kA with Switch-fuse and aM type fuses

Motor Switch-fuse Contactor Thermal O/L Relay Group


Rated Rated Type Fuse Size Type Safety Type Current Max.
Power Current type clearance setting Current
aM range
Pe kW Ie A A mm A I max. A
0.37 1.2 OESA32 2 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 1.4 1.0 - 1.4 1.4
0.55 1.5 OESA32 2 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 1.8 1.3 - 1.8 1.8
0.75 2 OESA32 4 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 2.4 1.7 - 2.4 2.4
1.1 2.6 OESA32 4 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 3.1 2.2 - 3.1 3.1
1.5 3.5 OESA32 6 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 4.0 2.8 - 4 4
2.2 5 OESA32 6 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 6.5 4.5 - 6.5 6.5
3 6.6 OESA32 8 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 8.5 6 - 8.5 8.5
4 8.5 OESA32 10 00 A9 15 TA 25 DU 11 7.5 - 11 9
5.5 11.5 OESA32 16 00 A 12 15 TA 25 DU 14 10 - 14 12
7.5 15.5 OESA32 20 00 A 16 15 TA 25 DU 19 13 - 19 16
11 22 OESA32 25 00 A 26 20 TA 25 DU 25 18 - 25 25
15 30 OESA32 32 00 A 30 20 TA 25 DU 32 24 - 32 30
18.5 37 OESA63 40 00 A 40 20 TA 42 DU 42 29 - 42 40
22 44 OESA63 50 00 A 50 20 TA 75 DU 52 36 - 52 50
30 60 OESA63 63 00 A 63 20 TA 75 DU 63 45 - 63 63
37 72 OESA125 100 00 A 75 20 TA 75 DU 80 60 - 80 75
45 85 OESA125 100 00 A 95 20 TA 110 DU 90 65 - 90 90
55 105 OESA125 125 00 A 110 20 TA 110 DU 110 80 - 110 110

Low Voltage Products 7/21


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Notes

7/22 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Main Summary Index

Terminal Marking
and Positioning
Star-Delta Starter Diagrams

Contents

General ................................................................................................................................ 8/2

Terminal Marking and Positioning:

– CA, CC, CAL and CCL Auxiliary Contacts ......................................................................... 8/3


– N Contactor Relays ............................................................................................................ 8/4
– KC and TKC Contactor Relays .......................................................................................... 8/5
– A Contactors ..................................................................................................................... 8/6
– AE, TAE, BC and TBC Contactors .................................................................................... 8/7
– EH and EK Contactors ............................................................................................... 8/8, 8/9
– TA and T Thermal O/L Relays .......................................................................................... 8/9

Star-Delta Starter Diagrams ............................................................................................ 8/10

Low Voltage Products 8/1


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary
Section Index

Terminal Marking and Positioning


General

1-Standards
Terminal marking of contactors, contactor relays, auxiliary contacts and thermal O/L relays generally complies with international and European
standards IEC 445, IEC 947-1 and EN50005. In addition, the marking of these devices also meets the following specific standards:
– IEC 947-4-1, EN60947-4-1 and EN50012 for contactors and contactor auxiliary contacts,
– IEC 947-5-1 and EN50011 for contactor relays,
– IEC 947-4-1 and EN60047-4-1 for thermal O/L relays.

2-Contactor Marking
2.1-Marking of contactor main pole terminals
Main pole terminals are marked by codes made up of a figure followed by an alphanumerical combination: e.g. 1L-2T1, 3L2-4T2, etc.
2.2-Marking of contactor auxiliary contact terminals
Contactor auxiliary contacts are marked by two-figure numbers:
● The unit figure marks the function:
– 1-2 for N.C. contacts, – 5-6 for N.C. contacts with a special function,
– 3-4 for N.O. contacts, – 7-8 for N.O. contacts with a special function.
The tens figure is a serial number allocated in continuous order starting from 1, regardless of the function of the contacts and running from left

to right on the device starting with the 1st stack for 2-stack devices.
Furthermore, to meet the requirements of the American market these numbers are followed by the letters NO for normally open contacts and
NC for normally closed contacts.
2.3-Identification of contacts in contactor codes
Example : A9 3 0 - 1 0
Contactor
Number of main N.O. poles Number of N.C. auxiliary contacts
Number of main N.C. poles Number of N.O. auxiliary contacts
Depending on device ratings, we deliver the following auxiliary contact arrangements (defined in standard EN50012): 00, 10, 01, 11, 22.
Other arrangements are possible by adding additional auxiliary contacts: 11, 12, 13, 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 41.

3-Contactor Relay Marking


The marking of contactor relays complies with EN50011 which outlines:
● The specific positioning of the contacts
● The adequate marking of the terminals of these contacts by 2 figure numbers as described in §2.2 above.
Furthermore, to meet the requirements of the American market these numbers are followed by the letters NO for normally open contacts and NC
for normally closed contacts.
According to EN50011, contactor relays are designated by characteristic numbers and letters:
Example: N 2 2 E
Contactor relay
Number of N.O. contacts Characteristic letter
Number of N.C. contacts
N, KC, TKC contactor relays include these characteristic numbers and letters in their code and include the following variants from the preferential
E series:
– 40E-31E-22E for devices with 4 flow channels,
– 44E-53E-62E-71E-80E for devices with 8 flow channels.
In addition, the following contact combinations are possible by adding auxiliary contact blocks:
23E-32E-33E-41E-42E-50E-51E-53E-60E-62E-71E-80E.

4-Add-on Auxiliary Contact Terminal Marking


CA5 4-pole auxiliary contacts and CAL16 and CCL16 2-pole auxiliary contacts have the complete 2-figure marking as defined in §2.2 followed by
the letters NO for normally open contacts and NC for normally closed contacts. E.g. 13 NO-14 NO, 21 NC-22 NC.
"A" contactor CAL 5 two-pole auxiliary contacts also bear the marking defined above, the letter X, to avoid confusion with the CA5 front-mounted
contact markers: e.g. 13X NO-14X NO, 21X NC-22X NC.
CA5 and CC5 1-pole auxiliary contacts bear only the unit figure (function according to §2.2) followed by the letters NO for normally open contacts
and NC for normally closed contacts. This marking is then combined with the order number figuring on the contactor, defining the positioning of the
auxiliary contact:
Example: ● Mounting of a CA5-01 N.C. auxiliary contact on position N°2
A1 A2 A1 A2
1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 ● The auxiliary contact terminals are marked 21-22.
NO NO CA5-01

21 2- -1
NC = + NC
22 2- -2

NO NO
E0648D

2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3 14


A2 A2

5-Thermal O/L Relay Terminal Marking


The main terminals of thermal O/L relays are marked on the motor side by numbers of a figure followed by an alphanumerical combination: 2T1, 4T2, 6T3.
● The auxiliary terminals are marked: – 95-96 for N.C. contact
– 97-98 for N.O. contact

8/2 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Terminal Marking and Positioning


CA, CC, CAL and CCL Auxiliary Contacts

1.1-One-pole auxiliary contacts


-1 -3

NC NO

E0046D1
E0041D1

-2 -4

CA5-01 CA5-10

-5 -7

NC NO
E0403D1
E0404D1

-6 -8

CC5-01 CC5-10

1.2-Two-pole auxiliary contacts


44X 32X 22X 14X
13X / 21X / 31X / 43X /

NO NC NC NO
E0467DG

E0468DG

43X 31X 21X 13X


14X / 22X / 32X / 44X /

CAL5-11 (L. h. s. mounted) CAL5-11 (R. h. s. mounted)

13 21 31 43 53 61 71 83

NO NC NC NO NO NC NC NO
E0472D

E0469D

E0471D
E0470D

14 22 32 44 54 62 72 84

CAL16-11 A CAL16-11 B CAL16-11 C CAL16-11 D

35 47

NC NO
E0473D

36 48

CCL16-11 E

1.3-Four-pole auxiliary contacts


11 21 31 41 21 31 41 51 51 61 71 81

NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
E0396D1

E0399D1

E0402D1

12 22 32 42 22 32 42 52 52 62 72 82

CA5-04 E CA5-04 M CA5-04 N

13 21 31 43 21 31 43 53 53 61 71 83

NO NC NC NO NC NC NO NO NO NC NC NO
E0043D1

E0398D1

E0401D1

14 22 32 44 22 32 44 54 54 62 72 84

CA5-22 E CA5-22 M CA5-22 N

13 21 33 43 21 33 43 53

NO NC NO NO NC NO NO NO
E0395D1

E0397D1

14 22 34 44 22 34 44 54

CA5-31 E

13 23 33 43
CA5-31 M

53 63 73 83
8
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0042D1

E0400D1

14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84

CA5-40 E CA5-40 N

13 21 35 47 21 33 45 57

NO NC NC NO NC NO NC NO
E0993D1

E0992D1

14 22 36 48 22 34 46 58

CA5-11/11 E CA5-11/11 M

Low Voltage Products 8/3


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Terminal Marking and Positioning


N Contactor Relays

2.1-N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated


2.1.1 - Standard devices without addition of auxiliary contacts
A1 13 21 31 43 A1 13 21 33 43
NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2

E0308D1

E0037D1
13 21 31 43 13 21 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43
NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO
NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO A2 14 22 32 44 A2 14 22 34 44
51 61 71 81
N 22 E N 31 E
NC NC NC NC

A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81
52 62 72 82 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NC
NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0334D1
E0332D1

E0333D1

E0309D1

E0329D1
E0335D1
14 22 32 44 14 22 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NC
A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82

N 22 E N 31 E N 40 E N 44 E N 40 E N 44 E

A1 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 81 A1 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83
NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NO
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2

E0328D1

E0327D1
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO A2 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 82 A2 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84
53 61 71 81 53 61 71 83 53 61 73 83 53 63 73 83
N 53 E N 62 E
NO NC NC NC NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO

A1 13 23 33 43 53 61 73 83 A1 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83
54 62 72 82 54 62 72 84 54 62 74 84 54 64 74 84 NO NO NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0336D1

E0337D1

E0338D1

E0339D1

E0326D1

E0330D1
14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
A2 14 24 34 44 54 62 74 84 A2 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84

N 53 E N 62 E N 71 E N 80 E N 71 E N 80 E

A1 A2 A1 A2
13 23 33 41 13 23 33 43

NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO
51 61 75 87 53 61 75 87

NC NC NC NO NO NC NC NO

A1 13 23 33 41 51 61 75 87 A1 13 23 33 43 53 61 75 87
52 62 76 88 54 62 76 88 NO NO NO NC NC NC NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NO
NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO

E0991D
E0990D
E0989D
E0988D

14 24 34 42 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 NO NO NO NC NC NC NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NO
A2 14 24 34 42 52 62 76 88 A2 14 24 34 44 54 62 76 88

N 33/11 N 51/11 N 33/11 N 51/11

2.1.2 - Other possible contact combinations with auxiliary contacts added by the user
A1 13 21 33 43 53
NO NC NO NO NO
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
E0475DG

13 21 33 43 13 21 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43

NO NC NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NC NO NO NO
A2 14 22 34 44 54

53 5- -3 51 61 5- 6- -1 -1 Combination 41 E
NO = + NO NC NC = + NC + NC
54 5- -4 52 62 5- 6- -2 -2
A1 13 23 33 43 51 61
NO NO NO NO NC NC
NO NC NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0477DG
E0474DG

E0476DG

14 22 34 44 14 22 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NC NC
A2 14 24 34 44 52 62

Combination = N 31 E + CA5-10 Combination = N 40 E + CA5-01 + CA5-01 Combination 42 E


41 E 42 E

A1 13 23 33 43 53
NO NO NO NO NO
E0480DG

A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO A2 14 24 34 44 54

Combination 50 E
53 5- -3 53 63 5- 6- -3 -3
NO = + NO NO NO = + NO + NO
54 5- -4 54 64 5- 6- -4 -4
A1 13 23 33 43 53 63
NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0478DG

E0481DG

E0479DG

14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NO NO
A2 14 24 34 44 54 64

Combination = N 40 E + CA5-10 Combination = N 40 E + CA5-10 + CA5-10 Combination 60 E


50 E 60 E

8/4 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Terminal Marking and Positioning


KC and TKC Contactor Relays

2.2-KC and TKC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated


2.2.1 - Standard devices without addition of auxiliary contacts

A1 A1 A1
13 21 31 43 13 21 33 43 13 23 33 43

NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO

A1 13 21 31 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 23 33 43
NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0482D

E0483D

E0484D

E0487D

E0488D
E0489D
14 22 32 44 14 22 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 A2 NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO
A2 14 22 32 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 24 34 44

KC 22 E KC 31 E KC 40 E KC 22 E KC 31 E KC 40 E
TKC 22 E TKC 31 E TKC 40 E TKC 22 E TKC 31 E TKC 40 E

A1 A1
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
51 61 71 81 53 61 71 83

NC NC NC NC NO NC NC NO

A1 13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81 A1 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83
52 62 72 82 54 62 72 84 NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NC NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0485D

E0486D

E0491D
E0490D
14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NC NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NO
A2 14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82 A2 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84

KC 44 E KC 62 E KC 44 E KC 62 E
TKC 44 E TKC 62 E TKC 44 E TKC 62 E

2.2.2 - Other possible contact combinations with auxiliary contacts added by the user
A1 13 21 33 43 53
NO NC NO NO NO

E0494DG
A1 A1 A1 A1
13 21 33 43 13 21 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 NO NC NO NO NC
A2 14 22 34 44 54
NO NC NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
Combination 41 E
53 5- -3 51 61 5- 6- -1 -1
NO = + NO NC NC = + NC + NC
54 5- -4 52 62 5- 6- -2 -2
A1 13 23 33 43 51 61
NO NO NO NO NC NC
NO NC NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO

E0495DG
E0492DG

E0493DG

14 22 34 44 14 22 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NC NC
A2 14 24 34 44 52 62

Combination = KC 31 E + CA5-10 Combination = KC 40 E + CA5-01 + CA5-01 Combination 42 E


41 E TKC 31 E + CA5-10 42 E TKC 40 E + CA5-01 + CA5-01

A1 13 23 33 43 53
NO NO NO NO NO E0498DG

A1 A1 A1 A1
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 NO NO NO NO NO
A2 14 24 34 44 54
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
Combination 50 E
53 5- -3 53 63 5- 6- -3 -3
NO = + NO NO NO = + NO + NO
54 5- -4 54 64 5- 6- -4 -4
A1 13 23 33 43 53 63
NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0496DG

E0499DG
E0497DG

14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44

8
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NO NO
A2 14 24 34 44 54 64

Combination = KC 40 E + CA5-10 Combination = KC 40 E + CA5-10 + CA5-10 Combination 60 E


50 E TKC 40 E + CA5-10 60 E TKC 40 E + CA5-10 + CA5-10

A1 A1
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43

NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
53 63 73 83 5- 6- 7- 8- 53 63 73 83

NO NO NO NO = + NO NO NO NO

A1 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83
54 64 74 84 5- 6- 7- 8- 54 64 74 84 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0500DG

E0601DG

14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
A2 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84

Combination = KC 40 E + CA5-40E Combination 80 E


80 E TKC 40 E + CA5-40E

Low Voltage Products 8/5


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Terminal Marking and Positioning


A Contactors

3.1-A Contactors - A.C. Operated


3.1.1 - Standard devices without addition of auxiliary contacts

A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
1L1 3L2 5L3 21 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3
NC NO

A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 21 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3


NC NO
NC NO

E0009D2

E0011D1
E0341D1

E0305D1
E0340D1

E0306D1
2T1 4T2 6T3 22 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3
A2 A2 A2 NC NO
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 22 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3

A9 ... A40-30-01 A9 ... A40-30-10 A50 ... A110-30-00 A9 ... A40-30-01 A9 ... A40-30-10 A50 ... A110-30-00

A1 A2 A1 A2
1 R3 R5 7 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4

A1 1 R3 R5 7 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4


E0038D1

E0394D1

A0430D1

E0036D1
2 R4 R6 8 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4
A2 A2
A2 2 R4 R6 8 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4

A9 ... A26-22-00 A9 ... A26-40-00 A9 ... A26-22-00 A9 ... A26-40-00


A45 ... A75-22-00 A45 ... A75-40-00 A45 ... A75-22-00 A45 ... A75-40-00

3.1.2 - Standard 3-pole devices with factory mounted auxiliary contacts

A1 A2 A1 A2
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3

13 21 31 43
6- 13 21 31 43
5-

NO NC NC NO NO NC NC NO

6- A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 21 31 43


14 22 32 44
14 22 32 44 5- NO NC NC NO
E0325D1
E0619D1

E0010D1

2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3


A2 NO NC NC NO
A2 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 22 32 44

A9 ... A16-30-22 A50 ... A110-30-22 A9 ... A16-30-22


A50 ... A110-30-22
2
A1 A2 A1 A2
1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3
NO
21 31 43 53 NO 13X

NC 21X
NC NC NO NO
NC 22X
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 21 31 43 53 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13X 21X
22 32 44 54 NO NC NC NO NO NO NC
NO NO 14X
E0342D1

E0012D1
E0008D2

E0324D1

2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3


A2 NO NC NC NO NO NO NC
A2 14X
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 22 32 44 54 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 22X

A9 ... A40-30-32 A50 ... A110-30-11 A9 ... A40-30-32 A50 ... A110-30-11

3.1.3 - Other possible contact combinations with auxiliary contacts added by the user
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 21
NO NC
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
E0622DG

1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3 13
NO NO NO NO NO NC
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 22

21 2- -1 21 33 2- 3- -1 -3 Combination 11
NC = + NC NC NO = + NC + NO
22 2- -2 22 34 2- 3- -2 -4
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 21 33
NO NC NO
NO NO NO NO
E0627DG
E0620DG

E0625DG

2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3 14
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NC NO
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 22 34

Combination = A9 ... A40-30-10 + CA5-01 Combination = A9 ... A40-30-10 + CA5-01 + CA5-10 Combination 21
11 21
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13X 21X 31X 43X
NO NC NC NO
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
E0623DG

1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4
NO NC NC NO
13X 43X NO 13X 43X NO A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14X 22X 32X 44X
21X 31X NC 21X 31X NC
6- 13 2- 3- 4- 5- 6- 1- 2- 3- 4- 5- -3 Combination 22
= + NO = + NO
22X 32X NC 22X 32X NC 6- 14 2- 3- 4- 5- 6- 1- 2- 3- 4- 5- -4
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4 13
14X 44X NO 14X 44X NO NO
E0621DG

E0624DG

E0626DG

2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4 14

Combination = A50 ... A75-30-11 + CAL5-11 Combination = A45 ... A75-40-00 + CA5-10 Combination 10
22 10

8/6 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Terminal Marking and Positioning


AE, TAE, BC and TBC Contactors

3.2-AE and TAE Contactors - D.C. Operated A1 1L1 3L2 5L3

E0630D
A1

1L1
A1
3L2
A2
5L3 1L1
A1
3L2
A2
5L3 1L1
A1
3L2
A2
5L3 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3
V d.c.
{ A2 A3

U
NO 13X AE50 ... AE110-30-00
C C C TAE50/75-30-00
NC 21X 35 X 36 X
D D C
L L L
5 NC 22X 5 5 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13X 21X
NO 14X NO NC 1 L1 2 T1
E0376D1

E0375D1

E0631D
2T1 4T2 6T3

E0628D
2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3

A0498D1G
A3 A3 A3 NO NC
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14X 22X

AE50 ... AE75-30-00 AE50 ... AE75-30-11 AE95/110-30-00 AE50 ... AE110-30-11
TAE50/75-30-00 TAE50/75-30-11 - TAE50/75-30-11 Coil wiring

A1 1 R3 R5 7

A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2

E0633D
1L1 3L2 5L3 1 R3 R5 7 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4

NO 13X A2 2 R4 R6 8

NC 21X
C C C AE45/75-22-00
C D D
L L
-
L
NC 22X 5 5
5 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4
NO 14X
E0385D1
E0386D1

E0632D
E0629D

2T1 4T2 6T3 2 R4 R6 8 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4


A3 A3 A3
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4

AE95/110-30-11 AE45/75-22-00 AE45/75-40-00 AE45/75-40-00


- - TAE45/75-40-00 TAE45/75-40-00

3.3-BC and TBC Contactors - D.C. Operated


3.3.1 - Standard devices without addition of auxiliary contacts

A1 A1 A1
1L1 3L2 5L3 21 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3
NC NO
13 21 31 43

NO NC NC NO

A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 21 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 21 31 43


14 22 32 44 NC NO NO NC NC NO
NC NO
A0451D1

A0442D1
A0452D1

E0635D

E0634D

E0637D
2T1 4T2 6T3 22 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3
A2 A2 A2 NC NO NO NC NC NO
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 22 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 22 32 44

BC9 ... BC25-30-01 BC9 ... BC25-30-10 BC18-30-22 BC9 ... BC25-30-01 BC9 ... BC25-30-10 BC18-30-22
TBC9 ... TBC25-30-01 TBC9 ... TBC25-30-10 BC30-30-22 TBC9 ...TBC25-30-01 TBC9 ... TBC25-30-10 BC30-30-22
TBC30-30-22 TBC30-30-22

A1 A1 A1
1L1 3L2 5L3 1 R3 R5 7 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4

A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 A1 1 R3 R5 7 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4


A0455D1

A0453D1

E0354D1
A0454D1

E0638D
E0636D

2T1 4T2 6T3 2 R4 R6 8 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4


A2 A2 A2
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 A2 2 R4 R6 8 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4

BC30-30-00 BC9 ... BC25-22-00 BC9 ... BC25-40-00 BC30-30-00 BC9 ... BC25-22-00 BC9 ... BC25-40-00
TBC30-30-00 TBC9 ... TBC25-22-00 TBC9 ... TBC25-40-00 TBC30-30-00 TBC9 ... TBC25-22-00 TBC9 ... TBC25-40-00

8
3.3.2 - Other possible contact combinations with auxiliary contacts added by the user
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 21 33
NO NC NO
A1 A1 A1 A1
E0640DG

1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
NO NC NO
NO NO A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 22 34

21 33 2- 3- 4- 5- -1 -3 13 21 1- 2- 3- 4- -3 -1 Combination 21
NC NO = + NC + NO NO NC = + NO + NC
22 34 2- 3- 4- 5- -2 -4 14 22 1- 2- 3- 4- -4 -2
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 21
NO NC
NO NO
A0437D1G
A0439D1G

E0639DG

2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NC
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 22

Combination = BC9 ... BC25-30-10 + CA5-01 + CA5-10 Combination = BC30-30-00 + CA5-10 + CA5-01 Combination 11
21 11

Low Voltage Products 8/7


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Terminal Marking and Positioning


EH Contactors

EH Contactors - A.C. Operated and D.C. Operated - Standard devices


EH 145 ........................................................... EH 800 - A.C. Operated EH 145 ............................. EH 800 - D.C. Operated

1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3


13 13 43 13

21 21 31 21

22 22 32 22

14 14 44 14
2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
A0456D1

A0458D1
A0457D1
EH ... -30-11 EH ... -30-22 EH ... -30-11

A1 1 3 5 13 21 A1 1 3 5 13 21 31 43 A1 1 3 5 13 21
A0432D1

A0433D1

A0432D1
A2 2 4 6 14 22 A2 2 4 6 14 22 32 44 A2 2 4 6 14 22

EH ... -30-11 EH ... -30-22 EH ... -30-11

Other possible contact combinations with auxiliary contacts added by the user
EH 145 ........................................................... EH 800 - A.C. Operated EH 145 ................................. EH 800 - D.C. Operated

1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
53 13 43 13 43 53 53 13 13 53

61 21 31 21 31 61 61 21 21 61
= + = +
62 22 32 22 32 62 62 22 22 62

54 14 44 14 44 54 54 14 14 54

2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3

E0642DG
E0641DG

Combination = EH ... -30-22 + CAL16-11 C Combination = EH ... -30-21 + CAL16-11 C


33 22

A1 1 3 5 13 21 31 43 53 61 A1 1 3 5 13 21 31 43 53 61 A1 1 3 5 13 21 47 53 61 A1 1 3 5 13 21 47 53 61

E0644DG
= +
E0643DG

= +

A2 2 4 6 14 22 32 44 54 62 A2 2 4 6 14 22 32 44 54 62 A2 2 4 6 14 22 48 54 62 A2 2 4 6 14 22 48 54 62

Combination 33 = EH ... -30-22 + CAL16-11 C Combination 22 = EH ... -30-21 + CAL16-11 C

Wiring details for 40–400 Hz coil D.C. contactor coil wiring details
with built-in rectifier

A1 A2

A2

A1

35 36 35 36
Right Right
-E
47 48 hand side
V d.c.
{ R1
A1 A2
-E
47 48 hand side

13 14 13 14
35 36 13 14
-A Left -A Left
21 22 hand side 21 22 21 22 hand side

47 48
1/L1 2/T1 1/L1 2/T1
1 L1 2 T1
3/L2 4/T2 3/L2 4/T2
A1156D1G
A1154D1G

A0472D3G

3 L2 4 T2
5/L3 6/T3 5/L3 6/T3
5 L3 6 T3

3-pole EH 175 ... EH 300 3-pole EH 145, EH 370 ... EH 800 3-pole EH 175 ... EH 300

CAL 16-11 and CCL 16-11 E Auxiliary Contacts: see page 8/3

8/8 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Terminal Marking and Positioning


EK Contactors
TA and T Thermal O/L Relays

EK Contactors - A.C. Operated and D.C. Operated - Standard devices


EK 110 ........................................................... EK 550 - A.C. Operated EK 110 .......................................................... EK 550 - D.C. Operated

1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4


13 13

21 21

22 22
A1 1 3 5 7 13 21 A1 1 3 5 7 13 21
14 14
2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4

A0432D3
A0432D3

A0691D5
A0691D4

A2 2 4 6 8 14 22 A2 2 4 6 8 14 22

EK ... -40-11 EK ... -40-11 EK ... -40-11 EK ... -40-11

EK contactors equipped with additionnal auxiliary contacts: see examples for EH contactors page 8/8.

Wiring details for 40–400 Hz coil D.C. contactor coil wiring details
with built-in rectifier
A1 A2

A2

A1

35 36 35 36
Right Right
-E -E
47 48 hand side 47 48 hand side

13 14 13 14
-A Left -A Left
21 22 hand side hand side
21 22

1/L1 2/T1 1/L1 2/T1

3/L2 4/T2 3/L2 4/T2

5/L3 6/T3
A1159D1G

5/L3 6/T3
A1160D1G

7/L4 8/T4 7/L4 8/T4

4-pole EK 110 ... EK 210 4-pole EK 110 ... EK 210

CAL 16-11 and CCL 16-11 E Auxiliary Contacts: see page 8/3

TA and T
Thermal O/L Relays

R
OR
Man/Aut

98 97 96 95

TEST

Man/Aut
R
O R 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 Man/Aut

98 97 96 95
R
OR
8
98 97 96 95
A0471D1

A0467D1

2 4 6
A0468D1

2 4 6

TA 25 DU, TA 42 DU,
TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU TA 110 DU, T 200 DU T 450 DU/SU, T 900 DU/SU

L1 L2 L3 95 97
R
1 / L1 3 / L2 5 / L3 1 / L1 3 / L2 5 / L3
T
R 95 97 R 95 97 1 3 5
T T

2 4 6 96 98
A0470D1

E0649D

96 98 96 98
T1 T2 T3
A0469D1

2 / T1 4 / T2 6 / T3 2 / T1 4 / T2 6 / T3

TA 25 DU, TA 42 DU, TA 110 DU, T 200 DU


TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU T 450 DU/SU, T 900 DU/SU

Low Voltage Products 8/9


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Star-Delta Starters
Diagrams

Power circuit diagram


A 9 to EH 300 Contactors EH 370 to EH 800 Contactors

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3

1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
1 3 5 1 3 5
KM2 / (Y) KM3 / ( ) KM1 / (L) KM1 / (L) KM3 / ( ) KM2 / (Y)
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6

1 3 5 1 3 5

2 4 6 2 4 6

W2 W1 W1 W2
V2 V1 V1 V2
U2 U1 U1 U2

W2 W1 W1 W2
V2 V1 V1 V2
E0514D1

U2 U1 U1 U2

E0898D
Control circuit diagrams
A 9 to EH 550 Contactors EH 700 and EH 800 Contactors
remote control remote control

KM3 : 5/L3 Us
Us O
95

O R
R
95

R R
FR1
FR1
96
96

96
96

O
O
13
13

13

13

O
1

O
I
23

I
KM2 KM1 KA9
I KM1 I
14

14

14
24

A1

KT
15

24
t1 t1+t2
A1
15

KT
A2
16

18

t1 t1+t2 21
A2
21 16

21 18

21

21

KM3 KM2
13

13

A1 22

A1 22

KM3 KM2 KM2 KM1


A1

A1
A1 22

A1 22

14

A1 14

KM2 KA9 KM1 KM3


E0513D
A2

A2

A2

A2

Us KM2 KM3 KM1


Us
A2

A2

N
A2

E1128D

KM3 : 3/L2
Y L

Controlgear Selection Guide: see page 2 / 31


Ordering Details ●


Contactors ................................................................ Section 2
Contactor Relays ..................................................... Section 3


Accessories ............................................................ Section 4
Thermal O/L Relays ................................................ Section 5

8/10 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Main Summary Index

Dimensions
● Contactors
● Contactor Relays
● Thermal O/L Relays

● Accessories

Contents
Dimensions for Contactors with Thermal O/L Relays and with Accessories
– A 9, A 12, A 16 + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay .......................................................... 9/ 2
– A 26, + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay .......................................................................... 9/ 4
– A 30, A 40, + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ................................................................ 9/ 6
– A 50 (3P), A 63, A 75 (3P), + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ....................................... 9/ 8
– A 45, A 50 (4P), A 75 (4P), + Accessories ........................................................................ 9/ 10
– A 95, A 110 + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ............................................................. 9/ 12
– AE 50 (3P), AE 63, AE 75 (3P), TAE 50 (3P), TAE 75 (3P) + Accessories + O/L Relay .. 9/ 16
– AE 45, AE 50 (4P), AE 75 (4P), TAE 45, TAE 50 (4P), TAE 75 (4P) + Accessories ........ 9/ 18
– A E 95, A E 110, TA E 95, TA E 110 + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ......................... 9/ 20
– AF ..................................................................................................................................... 9/ 22
– GA 75, GAE 75 ................................................................................................................. 9/ 23
– UA, UA..-R ............................................................................................................... 9/ 24, 9/ 25

– EH 145, EH 175, EH (L) 210, EH 260, EH (L) 300,


EH 370, EH 550, EH 700, EH 800 ........................................................................ 9/ 28 ... 9/ 34
– EK 110, EK (L) 150, EK 175, EK (L) 210, EK 370, EK 550 .................................. 9/ 28 ... 9/ 34
– EH 145, EH 175, EH 210, EH 260, EH 300
EH 370, EH 550, EH 700, EH 800 + Thermal O/L Relay ...................................... 9/ 38 ... 9/ 40

Dimensions for Contactor Relays and Mini Contactors with Thermal O/L Relays
and with Accessories.
– N ......................................................................................................................................... 9/ 2
– BC …, TBC …, KC …, TKC … + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ............................... 9/ 14
– B 6, BC 6, B 7, BC 7, K 6, KC 6 + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ....................... Section 6

Dimensions for Thermal O/L Relays


– T 7 DU ...................................................................................................................... Section 6
– TA 25 DU, TA 42 DU ........................................................................................................ 9/ 41
– TA 42 DU + DB 80, TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU + DB 80, TA 450 DU/SU, T 900 DU/SU ....... 9/ 42

Dimensions for Accessories


– RA 30 Interface Relay ........................................................................................................ 9/26
– CB 5 Impulse Contact Block .............................................................................................. 9/26
– RC, RT and RV Surge Suppressors .................................................................................. 9/26
– BL 5-L Lamp Holder ........................................................................................................... 9/26
– BL 5-F Fuse Holder ........................................................................................................... 9/26
– LC Flat Pin Terminal Blocks ............................................................................................... 9/27 9
– TE5S Electronic Timer ....................................................................................................... 9/27
– LK 75 Terminals for Control Lead Connections ................................................................. 9/27
– LW 110 Enlargement Pieces ............................................................................................. 9/27
– BSH and BSD Connections for EH Contactors (Reversing ; Star-delta) ................. 9/ 35, 9/ 36
– LT Shrouds for EH and EK Contactors ............................................................................. 9/ 37

Only major dimensions are quoted on the drawings contained in this section.
Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.
Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/1


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


A 9, A 12 and A 16 Contactors
N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated

A 9, A 12, A 16, N A 9, A 12, A 16, N


+ CA 5 Front-Mounted 1-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block

74 100.5
(1)
68 68 10
5.5 5.5
35 mm EN 50022

35 mm EN 50022
74

47
74

E0106D

E0107D
E0102D

E0103D

44 (1) 44 4
4 10

A 9, A 12, A 16, N A 9, A 12, A 16, N


+ CAL 5 Side-Mounted 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block + CA 5 Front-Mounted 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block

74
107
68 (1)
68 10
5.5
5.5
35 mm EN 50022

35 mm EN 50022
74

74

47
E0105D
E0109D
E0108D

E0104D

(1)
12 44 4 10 44 4

A 9, A 12, A 16, N A 9, A 12, A 16, N


+ RA 5 Interface Relay + TP Pneumatic Timer

74

68
127
41.5 5.5
(1)
68 10
21

5.5
35 mm EN 50022

35 mm EN 50022
74

74

47
E0755D

E0114D
E0113D
E0756D

44 4
(1)
44 4
10

Drilling Plan A 9, A 12, A 16, N


+ WB 75-A On-Position Latch

145
(1)
68 10
35
5.5
ø 4.5
(M4) 4
35 mm EN 50022
50

74
60

34
E0757D
E0101D

E0758D

4.5 4.5 44 4

(1) Note : no recommended distance to earth applicable to "N" contactor relays.

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/2 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


A 9, A 12 and A 16 Contactors
N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated

A 9, A 12, A 16, N Drilling Plan


+ VE 5-1 Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Unit

74

68

5.5 ø 4.5
(M4)

35 mm EN 50022
74

50

60
E0110D1
E0112D
E0111D

(1)
103 4 10 4.5 35 59 4.5

A 9, A 12, A 16, N Drilling Plan


+ VM 5-1 Mechanical Interlock Unit

74.5

68
5.5 ø 4.5
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
74

50

60
E0110D1
E0116D
E0115D

(1)
103 4 10 4.5 35 59 4.5

A 9, A 12, A 16 Drilling Plan


+ TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay

44 74 35
ø 4.5
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022

50
74

60

4
133

10
E0101D

4.5 4.5
E0759D

1
14*

6
E0760D

95

* For TA 25 DU 32 only
(1) Note : no recommended distance to earth applicable to "N" contactor relays.

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/3


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


A 26 Contactor - A.C. Operated

A 26 A 26
+ CA 5 Front-Mounted 1-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block

93.6 119.8

9 6.3 9 10

35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022

47
90

90

E0123D
E0122D
E0118D

E0119D

54 4 10 54 4

A 26 A 26
+ CAL 5 Side-Mounted 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block + CA 5 Front-Mounted 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block

93.6 126.3

9 6.3 9 10

35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
74

90

90

47
E0124D

E0120D
E0125D

E0121D
12 54 4 10 54 4

A 26 A 26
+ RA 5 Interface Relay + TP Pneumatic Timer

93.6
41.5
9
146.3
21

6.3 9 10
35 mm EN 50022

35 mm EN 50022
90

47
90
E0761D

E0762D

E0131D

E0132D

54 4 10 54 4

Drilling Plan A 26
+ WB 75-A Mechanical Latching Unit

164.3
45
ø 4.2 9
(M4)
4
35 mm EN 50022
90
70

80

34
E0763D

E0764D
E0117D

4.5 4.5 54 4 10

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/4 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


A 26 Contactor - A.C. Operated

A 26 Drilling Plan
+ VE 5-1 Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Unit

93.6

9 6.3 ø 4.2
(M4)

35 mm EN 50022
90

70

80
E0128D
E0127D

E0126D
123 4 10
4.5 45 69 4.5

A 26 Drilling Plan
+ VM 5-1 Mechanical Interlock Unit
93.6

9 6.3 ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
90

70

80
E0129D

E0130D

E0126D
123 4 10
4.5 45 69 4.5

A 26 Drilling Plan
+ TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay
93.6
54 45
9 ø 4.2
(M4)
90

4
70

80
35 mm EN 50022
147

10
E0117D

4.5 4.5
E0765D

15.4
14*

6
E0766D

109.4
For TA 25 DU 32 only
*

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/5


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


A 30 and A 40 Contactors - A.C. Operated

A 30, A 40 A 30, A 40
+ CA 5 Front-Mounted 1-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
108.3 134.5

9 6.3 9 10

35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022

90

47
90

E0137D
E0134D

E0138D
E0133D

54 4 10 54 4

A 30, A 40 A 30, A 40
+ CAL 5 Side-Mounted 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block + CA 5 Front-Mounted 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
108.3 141

9 6.3 9 10
35 mm EN 50022

35 mm EN 50022

47
74

90

90
E0140D

E0136D
E0139D

E0135D

12 54 4 10 54 4

A 30, A 40 A 30, A 40
+ RA 5 Interface Relay + TP Pneumatic Timer

108.3
41.5 9
161
21

6.3 9 10
35 mm EN 50022

35 mm EN 50022
90

90

47
E0768D
E0767D

E0144D

E0145D

54 4 10 54 4

Drilling Plan A 30, A 40


+ WB 75-A Mechanical Latching Unit

179
45
ø 4.2 9
(M4)
4
35 mm EN 50022
90
70

80

34
E0769D

E0770D
E0117D

54 4 10
4.5 4.5

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/6 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


A 30 and A 40 Contactors - A.C. Operated

A 30, A 40 Drilling Plan


+ VE 5-1 Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Unit

108.3

9 6.3 ø 4.2
(M4)

35 mm EN 50022
90

70

80
E0143D
E0142D

E0126D
123 4 10 4.5 45 69 4.5

A 30, A 40 Drilling Plan


+ VM 5-1 Mechanical Interlock Unit
108.3

9 6.3 ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
90

70

80
E0146D

E0147D

E0126D
123 4 10
4.5 45 69 4.5

A 30 Drilling Plan
+ TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay
108.3
54 45
9 ø 4.2
(M4)

4
90

35 mm EN 50022

70

80
149.5

10
E0117D

4.5 4.5
E0771D

14*

9.7 6
E0772D

103.7

* For TA 25 DU 32 only

A 40 Drilling Plan
+ TA 42 DU Thermal O/L Relay

108.3
54 45
9 ø 4.2
(M4)

9
90

4
35 mm EN 50022

70

80
155.5

10
E0117D

4.5 4.5
E0773D

1.8 6
E0774D

112.8

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/7


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


A 50, A 63 and A 75 3-Pole Contactors - A.C. Operated

A 50, A 63, A 75 A 50, A 63, A 75


+ CA 5 Front-Mounted 1-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
133.9
108 108

35 mm x 15 EN 50022
35 mm x15 EN 50022

6 6.5 6 6.5
110

110
4

47
4
75 mm EN 50023

75 mm EN 50023
E0151D
E0165D
E0163D

E0152D
70 10 10 70 10 10

A 50, A 63, A 75 A 50, A 63, A 75


+ CAL 5 Side-Mounted 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block + CA 5 Front-Mounted 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
140.3

35 mm x 15 EN 50022
108 108
35 mm x15 EN 50022

6 6.5 6 6.5
110

110
74

4 4

47
75 mm EN 50023

75 mm EN 50023
E0150D

E0154D
E0141D

E0153D

12 70 10 10 70 10 10

A 50, A 63, A 75 A 50, A 63, A 75


+ RA 5 Interface Relay + TP Pneumatic Timer
41.5 160.4
35 mm x 15 EN 50022

108
108
35 mm x15 EN 50022
21

6 6.5 6 6.5
110

110

4
47

4
75 mm EN 50023

75 mm EN 50023
E0775D

E0776D

E0158D

E0159D

70 10 10 70 10 10

Drilling Plan A 50, A 63, A 75


+ WB 75-A Mechanical Latching Unit

178.5
35 mm x15 EN 50022

ø 6.2
6 6.5
(M6)
5

4
110
90

4
75 mm EN 50023

34
E0148D

E0778D
E0777D
5

5 60 5 70 10 10

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/8 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


A 50, A 63 and A 75 3-Pole Contactors - A.C. Operated

A 50, A 63, A 75 Drilling Plan


+ VE 5-2 Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Unit

108

35 mm x 15 EN 50022
6 6.5 ø 6.2
(M6)

5
110

100
4

90
75 mm EN 50023

E0157D
E0156D

E0155D
5
155 10 10 5 60 85 5

A 50, A 63, A 75 Drilling Plan


+ TA 75 DU Thermal O/L Relay

70 108
35 mm x15 EN 50022

ø 6.2
6 6.5
(M6)

5
110

90
4
75 mm EN 50023
175.5

10

E0148D
5

5 60 5
E0170D

3 6
E0186D

114

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/9


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


A 45, A 50 and A 75 4-Pole Contactors - A.C. Operated

A 45, A 50, A 75 A 45, A 50, A 75


+ CA 5 Front-Mounted 1-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
145.5

35 mm x 15 EN 50022
119.5 119.5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022

6 6.5 6 6.5

110
110

47
4

75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023

E0174D
E0172D

E0173D

E0175D
92 10 10 92 10 10

A 45, A 50, A 75 A 45, A 50, A 75


+ CAL 5 Side-Mounted 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block + CA 5 Front-Mounted 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
152

35 mm x 15 EN 50022
119.5 119.5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022

6 6.5 6 6.5
110

110

47
74

4 4
75 mm EN 50023

75 mm EN 50023
E0179D
E0178D

E0177D
E0176D

12 92 10 10 92 10 10

A 45, A 50, A 75 A 45, A 50, A 75


+ RA 5 Interface Relay + TP Pneumatic Timer
172
35 mm x 15 EN 50022

41.5 119.5
119.5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022

6 6.5
21

6 6.5
110
110

47

4 4
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023

E0184D
E0183D
E0780D
E0779D

92 10 10 92 10 10

Drilling Plan A 45, A 50, A 75


+ WB 75-A Mechanical Latching Unit
190
35 mm x 15 EN 50022

ø 6.2
(M6) 6 6.5

4
100

110
90

4
75 mm EN 50023

34
E0171D

E0781D

E0782D

5 82 5 92 10 10

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/10 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


A 45, A 50 and A 75 4-Pole Contactors - A.C. Operated

A 45, A 50, A 75 Drilling Plan


+ VE 5-2 Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Unit

119.5

35 mm x 15 EN 50022
ø 6.2
6 6.5
(M6)
110

100
90
4

75 mm EN 50023

E0182D
E0181D

E0180D
199 10 10
5 82 107 5

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/11


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


A 95 and A 110 Contactors - A.C. Operated

A 95, A 110 A 95, A 110


+ CA 5 Front-Mounted 1-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
150
123.5 123.5
6.5 6.5

6 6

148

75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
148

47
E0786D
E0784D

E0785D
E0783D

90 10 20 90 10 20

A 95, A 110 A 95, A 110


+ CAL 5 Side-Mounted 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block + CA 5 Front-Mounted 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block

156,5
123.5 123.5
6.5 6.5

6 6
75 mm EN 50023
148

148

75 mm EN 50023
74

47
E0788D

E0790D
E0789D
E0787D

12 90 10 20 90 10 20

A 95, A 110
+ RA 5 Interface Relay

41.5 123.5
21

6.5

6
75 mm EN 50023
148

E0792D
E0791D

90 10 20

Drilling Plan
ø 6.2
(M6)
126

136

E0215D9

78

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/12 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


A 95 and A 110 Contactors - A.C. Operated

A 95, A 110 Drilling Plan


+ VE 5-2 Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Unit
123.5 ø 6.2 ø 6.2
6.5 (M6) (M6)

75 mm EN 50023
148

126

136
E0794D
E0793D

78 78

E0795D
195 10 20
183

A 95, A 110 Drilling Plan


+ TA 80 DU Thermal O/L Relay

90 123.5 ø 6.2
(M6)
6.5

6
75 mm EN 50023

126

136
148

214

E0215D9
20
78
E0826D

4
E0827D

114

A 95, A 110 Drilling Plan


+ TA 110 DU Thermal O/L Relay

90 ø 6.2
123.5
(M6)
6.5

6
75 mm EN 50023

126

136
148

258

E0215D9

20
78

9
6
E0828D

E0829D

5
131

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/13


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


BC and TBC Contactors - D.C. Operated
KC and TKC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated

1-Stack (T)KC, (T)BC 9 … (T)BC 30 2-Stack (T)KC, BC 18 … (T)BC 30


P
P2 P
5 5
35 mm EN 50022

35 mm EN 50022
H
H

47
E0800D
E0798D

9,5 P3 9,5
B E0799D B
P1 P1

E0801D
P2

Types B H P P1 P2 P3
KC, TKC 4-pole
Types B H P P1 P2 P3
BC 9, TBC 9 44 81 114 94.5 108 15
BC 16, TBC 16 KC, TKC 8-pole 44 81 147 94.5 129.7 15
BC 25, TBC 25 54 81 120 96.5 114 20 BC 18* 44 81 153 96 135.7 20
BC 30*, TBC 30* 54 90 126 98 120 20 BC 30*, TBC 30* 54 90 159 98 141.7 20
* 3-Pole Contactors * 3-Pole Contactors

(T) KC,(T) BC 9 … (T) BC 30 (T)KC, BC 9 … (T)BC 30


+ CA 5 Front-Mounted 1-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block + CA 5 Front-Mounted 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
P
P2 P

5 5
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022

47

47
H
H

E0804D
E0802D

9,5 9,5
E0803D

B B
P1 P1

E0805D
P2

Types B H P P1 P2
KC, TKC, BC 9, TBC 9 Types B H P P1 P2
BC 16, TBC 16 44 81 140.5 94.5 128.5 KC, BC 9, BC 16 44 81 147 94.5 129.7
BC 25, TBC 25 54 81 146.5 96.5 134.5 BC 25 54 81 153 96.5 136
BC 30*, TBC 30* 54 90 152.5 98 140.5 BC 30* 54 90 159 98 141.7
* 3-Pole Contactors * 3-Pole Contactors

KC, BC 9 … BC 30 KC, BC 9 … BC 30
+ TP Pneumatic Timer + WB 75-A Mechanical Latching Unit
P P
26 5
5
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022

4
47
H

34
E0808D
E0806D

9,5 B 9,5
B
P1 P1
E0809D
E0807D

P2 P2

Types B H P P1 P2 Types B H P P1 P2
KC, BC 9, BC 16 44 81 167 94.5 133.5 KC, BC 9, BC 16 44 81 185 94.5 157
BC 25 54 81 173 96.5 139.5 BC 25 54 81 191 96.5 163
BC 30* 54 90 179 98 145.5 BC 30* 54 90 197 98 169
* 3-Pole Contactors * 3-Pole Contactors
Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/14 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Sommaire Chapitre
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


BC and TBC Contactors - D.C. Operated
KC and TKC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated

(T)KC, (T)BC 9 … (T)BC 30 Drilling Plan


+ VBC 30 Mechanical Interlock Unit For contactors with VBC 30 mechanical interlock unit
P
5 4.5
4.5

35 mm EN 50022

H2
H1
H

60
70
E0812D

E0813D
35 20 35

5
E0810D

5
45 10 45

E0811D
B 9,5
P1
KC, TKC, BC 9, BC 16, TBC 9, TBC 16 BC 25, TBC 25, BC 30, TBC 30

Types B H P P1 Types H1 H2
KC, TKC, BC 9, TBC 9, BC 25, TBC 25 60 70
BC 16, TBC 16 99 81 128 94.5 BC 30*, TBC 30* 70 80
BC 25, TBC 25 109 81 134 96.5 * 3-Pole Contactors

BC 30*, TBC 30* 109 90 140 98


* 3-Pole Contactors

1-Stack Contactor 2-Stack Contactor


+ Thermal O/L Relay + Thermal O/L Relay

P1

B P P2

B1 F1 F1
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
H2

47
H1

H3

F F

P4 P4
E0814D

14*
14*

B2
E0816D
E0815D

P3 6 P3 6
* For TA 25 DU 32 only

Contactors + O/L Relays B B1 B2 F F1 H1 H2 H3 P P1 1-St P2 2-St P3 P4


BC 9 /BC 16 + TA 25 DU 44 8 44 9.5 5 138 81 59.7 108 114 147 130 42
BC 18* + TA 25 DU 44 8 44 9.5 5 138 81 59.7 114 120 153 131.4 43.4
BC 25 + TA 25 DU 54 18 44 9.5 5 139.2 81 60.8 114 120 153 132 44
BC 30* + TA 25 DU 54 8 44 9.5 5 148.1 90 65.6 120 126 159 133.5 45.5
* 3-Pole Contactors

Drilling Plans (for side by side mounting - see recommendations for BC .. types pages 2/14, 2/17 ; TBC .. page 2/24 ; KC .. page 3/5 ; TKC .. page 3/8).
4.5
4.5 4.5

9
60
70

70

80
60

70
E0817D

E0819D
E0818D

4.5 35 4.5 4.5 45 4.5 4.5 45 4.5

BC 9, BC 16, BC 18, KC 4 or 8-pole BC 25, TBC 25 BC 30, TBC 30


TBC 9, TBC 16, TKC 4 or 8-pole

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/15


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


AE 50, AE 63, AE 75,
TAE 50 and TAE 75 3-Pole Contactors - D.C. Operated

(T)AE 50, AE 63, (T)AE 75 (T)AE 50, AE 63, (T)AE 75


+ CA 5 Front-Mounted 1-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
133.9
108 108

35 mm x 15 EN 50022
35 mm x15 EN 50022

6 6.5 6 6.5
110

110
4

47
4
75 mm EN 50023

75 mm EN 50023
E0165D

E0152D
E0166D

E0162D
10 10 10 10
82 82

(T)AE 50, AE 63, (T)AE 75 (T)AE 50, AE 63, (T)AE 75


+ CAL 5 Side-Mounted 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block + CA 5 Front-Mounted 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
140.3

35 mm x 15 EN 50022
108 108
35 mm x15 EN 50022

6 6.5 6 6.5
110

110
74

4 4

47
75 mm EN 50023

75 mm EN 50023
E0150D

E0154D
E0161D

E0164D

10 10 10 10
12 82 82

(T)AE 50, AE 63, (T)AE 75 (T)AE 50, AE 63, (T)AE 75


+ TP Pneumatic Timer + WB 75-A Mechanical Latching Unit
160.4
35 mm x 15 EN 50022

108 178.5
35 mm x15 EN 50022

6 6.5 6

4
110

110

4
47

4
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023

34
E0797D
E0159D

E0796D
E0169D

10 10 10 10
82 82

Drilling Plan
ø 6.2
(M6)
5
90

E0148D
5

5 60 5

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/16 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


AE 50, AE 63, AE 75,
TAE 50 and TAE 75 3-Pole Contactors - D.C. Operated

(T)AE 50, AE 63, (T)AE 75 Drilling PLan


+ VE 5-2 Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Unit
108

35 mm x 15 EN 50022
ø 6.2
6 6.5 (M6)

100
90
110
4

75 mm EN 50023

E0155D
E0168D

5
E0167D

5 60 85 5
10 10
179

(T)AE 50, AE 63, (T)AE 75 Drilling Plan


+ TA 75 DU Thermal O/L Relay

82 108
35 mm x15 EN 50022

6 6.5 ø 6.2
(M6)

5
110

90
4
75 mm EN 50023
175.5

10

E0148D
5

5 60 5
E0820D

3 6
E0186D

114

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/17


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


AE 45, AE 50, AE 75
TAE 45, TAE 50 and TAE 75 4-Pole Contactors - D.C. Operated

(T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75 (T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75


+ CA 5 Front-Mounted 1-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
145.5

35 mm x 15 EN 50022
119.5 119.5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
6 6.5 6 6.5
110

110

47
4 4

75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023

E0175D
E0173D

E0187D
E0185D

10 10 10 10
104 104

(T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75 (T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75


+ CAL 5 Side-Mounted 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block + CA 5 Front-Mounted 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
152

35 mm x 15 EN 50022
119.5 119.5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022

6 6.5 6 6.5
110

47
74

4
110
75 mm EN 50023

75 mm EN 50023
E0179D

E0177D
10 10
E0189D

10 10
E0191D

12 104 104

(T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75 (T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75


+ TP Pneumatic Timer + WB 75-A Mechanical Latching Unit

172
35 mm x 15 EN 50022

119.5 190
35 mm x 15 EN 50022

6 6.5 6

4
110
110

47

4 4
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023

34
E0822D
E0184D

E0821D

10 10 10 10
E0196D

104 104

Drilling Plan
ø 6.2
(M6)
100
90

E0171D

5 82 5

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/18 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


AE 45, AE 50, AE 75
TAE 45, TAE 50, and TAE 75 4-Pole Contactors - D.C. Operated

(T)AE 45, AE 50, AE 75 Drilling Plan


+ VE 5-2 Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Unit

119.5

35 mm x 15 EN 50022
ø 6.2
6 6.5
(M6)

100
110

90
4

75 mm EN 50023

E0195D

E0180D
10 10
E0194D

5 82 107 5
223

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/19


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


AE 95, AE 110, TAE 95, TAE 110 Contactors - D.C. Operated

(T)AE 95, (T)AE 110 (T)AE 95, (T)AE 110


+ CA 5 Front-Mounted 1-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block

150
123.5 123.5
6.5 6.5

6 6
148

75 mm EN 50023
148
75 mm EN 50023

47
E0784D

E0786D
E0823D

E0824D
102 10 20 102 10 20

(T)AE 95, (T)AE 110 (T)AE 95, (T)AE 110


+ CAL 5 Side-Mounted 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block + CA 5 Front-Mounted 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
156,5
123.5 123.5
6.5 6.5

6 6
148
75 mm EN 50023

75 mm EN 50023
148
74

47
E0788D

E0790D
E0825D
E0833D

12 102 10 20 102 10 20

Drilling Plan
ø 6.2
(M6)
126

136

E0215D9

78

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/20 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


AE 95, AE 110, TAE 95, TAE 110 Contactors - D.C. Operated

(T)AE 95, (T)AE 110 Drilling Plan


+ VE 5-2 Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Unit

12 195 12
90 123.5 ø 6.2 ø 6.2
6.5 (M6) (M6)

75 mm EN 50023
148

126

136
E0832D

E0788D
78 78

E0795D
10 20
183

(T)AE 95, (T)AE 110 Drilling Plan


+ TA 80 DU Thermal O/L Relay

90 12 123.5 ø 6.2
(M6)
6.5

6
75 mm EN 50023

126

136
148

214

E0215D9
20
78
E0830D

4
E0827D

114

(T)AE 95, (T)AE 110 Drilling Plan


+ TA 110 DU Thermal O/L Relay

ø 6.2
90 12 123.5
(M6)
6.5

6
75 mm EN 50023

126

136
148

9
258

E0215D9

20
78

6
E0831D

E0829D

5
131

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/21


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


AF Contactors - a.c. / d.c. Operated
with controlled supply

AF 50 … AF 75, 3-pole Drilling plan


108

35 mm x15 EN 50022
82 (2) ø 6.2
6 6.5 (M6)

5
90
110

4
74

75 mm EN 50023

E0148D
E0150D
E0149D

5
70 (1) 10 10 5 60 5

(1) AF 50-30-00 … AF 75-30-00


(2) AF 50-30-11 … AF 75-30-11

AF 45 and AF 75, 4-pole Drilling plan


119.5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022

ø 6.2
6 6.5
(M6)

100
110

90
75 mm EN 50023

E0173D

E0171D
E0172D

92 10 10 5 82 5

AF 95 and AF 110, 3-pole Drilling Plan


123.5
102 (2) 117 20 ø 6.2
(M6)
5

6
126
148

75 mm EN 50023

E0281D

E0215D
E0280D

90 (1) 10 78

(1) AF 95-30-00 - AF 110-30-00


(2) AF 95-30-11 - AF 110-30-11

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/22 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


GA 75 and GAE 75 Contactors

GA 75 - A.C. Operated Drilling Plan


108
72

35 mm x15 EN 50022
ø 6.2
6 6.5
11

(M6)

5
110

90
4
75 mm EN 50023

E0148D
11

5
E0834D

E0835D
10 10 5 60 5
70 72

GAE 75 - D.C. Operated Drilling Plan


108
72
35 mm x15 EN 50022

ø 6.2
6 6.5
11

(M6)

5
110

90
4
75 mm EN 50023

E0148D
11

5
E0836D

E0835D

10 10 5 60 5
82 72

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/23


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


UA Contactors

UA 26 Drilling Plan
93.6
45
9 6.3 ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
90

70

80
E0118D

E0119D

E0117D
54 4 10 4.5 4.5

UA 30 Drilling Plan
108.3
45
9 6.3 ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
90

70

80
E0134D
E0133D

E0117D
54 4 10 4.5 4.5

UA 50, UA 63, UA 75 Drilling Plan


108
35 mm x15 EN 50022

6 6.5 ø 6.2
(M6)
5
110

110
74

4
90
75 mm EN 50023

E0150D
E0163D

E0148D
E0141D

70 12 70 10 10 5 60 5

UA 50, UA 63, UA 75-30-00 UA 50, UA 63, UA 75-30-11

UA 95, UA 110 Drilling Plan


123.5 ø 6.2
6.5 (M6)

6
148

148

75 mm EN 50023
74

126

136

E0215D9
E0788D
E0787D
E0783D

90 12 90 10 20 78

UA 95, UA 110-30-00 UA 95, UA 110-30-11

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/24 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


UA .. -R Contactors

UA 16 .. -R Drilling plan
105.5
68

35
5.5 ø 4.5
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022

+10

50

60
74
47
140

E0101D
4 4.5 4.5
E0890D

E0891D
44

UA 26 .. -R Drilling plan
125
87,3

9 45
ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022

+10

90
47
140

70

80
E0117D
E0893D

4 4.5 4.5
E0892D

54

UA 30 .. -R Drilling plan
139.5
102

9 45
ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022

140 ±5

90
47

70

80
E0117D
E0895D

4 4.5 4.5
E0894D

54

UA 50 .. -R ... UA 75 .. -R Drilling plan


139
101.4
35 mm x 15 EN 50022

10 ø 6.2
(M6)
5

9
110

114
160 ±5

90

4
47
75 mm EN 50023

E0148D
5
E0897D

6 5 60 5
E0896D

70

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/25


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


RA 30 Interface Relay, Lamp Holder, Fuse Holder,
Impulse Contact Blocks and Surge Suppressor Blocks

BC Contactors, KC Contactor Relays 1-Stack - D.C. Operated


+ RA 30 Interface Relay
P
P2
P4
30

5
20

35 mm EN 50022

Types B B1 H H1 P P1 P2 P3 P4
KC
H1

BC 9 44 3 81 110 114 94.5 108 15 64


H

BC 16
BC 25 54 3 81 110 120 96.5 114 20 62
BC 30* 54 3 90 120 126 98 120 20 60
E0839D

9,5 P3
B E0840D
B1 B1
P1 * 3-Pole Contactors.

BL 5-F, BL 5-L CB 5
Fuse Holder, Lamp Holder Blocks Impulse Contact Block
9.8 27.8 9.8 23.2

36
36

E0841D

E0842D
E0855D

E0856D

Surge Suppressor Blocks

L
10

block

30
15

The add-on block does not increase the


E0844D

L1 contactor overall dimensions


E0843D

175
20.5 57.5
E0845D
Types L L1
15
RT 7 85 200
RV-BC6 135 235
RT 7, RV-BC 6 RT 5, RV 5, RC 5 RC-EH

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/26 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


Other Contactor Accessories

A 95 and A 110 Contactors LK 75 A


+ LW 110 Enlargement Pieces Terminals for Control Lead Connections
98 13 19
41

13
189

174

E0837D
E0857D
LK 75 A1
Terminals for Control Lead Connections
E0838D

ø 6.5 15
13 19

Flat Pin Terminal Blocks

11
10.1 10.1 10.1 1.6
27.2

18.2

E0900D
E1101D
13.2

Being Prepared
A 277D

43.1 14.8

Fig. 1 Fig. 4
13.5 13.5 1.6
1 1 Designation Kit

LC 16-B 2 pieces fig. 1


Faston 6.4/2.8 + 2 pieces fig. 5
29.6

2 pieces fig. 1
18.6
13.2

E0851D

LC 26-B2 + 2 pieces fig. 2


4.8
+ 2 pieces fig. 5
A 278D

40 14.8
Fig. 2 Fig. 5
LC 25-B1 2 pieces fig. 3
+ 2 pieces fig. 5
12.5 12.5 12.5 1.6
LC 16-A 2 pieces fig. 4
+ 2 pieces fig. 6
Faston 6.4/2.8 LC 26-A1 2 pieces fig. 3
27.2

+ 2 pieces fig. 6
18.2
13.2

E0850D

4.8
LC 26-A2 2 pieces fig. 3
+ 2 pieces fig. 4
A 279D

50.3 14.8
+ 2 pieces fig. 6
Fig. 3 Fig. 6

TE5S Electronic Timer


for Star-Delta Starters
75

23 65

9
35 mm EN 50022
85

45
E0849D
E0848D

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/27


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


EH (L), EK (L) Contactors

EH 145 Contactors Drilling Plan


* * for d.c. coil only

P1
91 A 119

91 A 121

91 A 123
ø 4.2 ø 5.2 E ø 5.2
(M4) (M5) (M5)

EH 175 to EH 300, EHL 210 and EHL 300 Contactors Drilling Plan
A A P
B
C K2 P1 T1
D
G T
ø 6.2M6
pour
(M6)

C1 H1 H

A_115
E
K1 ø 6.2
F M6

EH 370 to EH 800 Contactors Drilling Plan


* * for d.c. coil only

91 A 115
A_120

A_122

ø 6.2
ø 4.2 ø 6.2 E
(M4) (M6)
(M6)
PE = M10 earthing screw
34.5
A_662D

EH 800 - Main pole terminals


G K1

EK 110 to EK 210, EKL 150 and EKL 210 Contactors Drilling Plan
A B A
B1 P
C K2 T1
P1
G D
T

H
91 A 115

C1
H1

ø 6.2
(M6)
E
K1
ø 6.2
For(M6)
M6 F
Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/28 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


EH (L) and EK (L) Contactors

EK 370 and EK 550 Contactors Drilling Plan


B2 *
* for d.c. coil only
B
P
B1
P1 T1
C
T F1
M4 D
PE
H1
C1

C1
ø 6.2
(M6)
A_691D1G

A_691D3F
A_691D2F
C
ø 6.2
F G
K1

E C2 (M6)
PE = M10 earthing screw

Dimensions
Type A B B1 B2 C C1 C2 D E F G H H1 K1 K2 P P1 T T1
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) min. 8)
➞ F1 F1 =F
EH 145 11 124 – 151 110 120 125 42 127 136 147 11 40 42 20 140 171 10 – 143 91 19 4
EH 175 12 136 – – 120 140 137 47 – 149 161 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 169 103.5 10 5
EH 210 12 136 – – 120 140 137 47 – 149 161 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 169 103.5 10 5
EH 260 10 176 – – 160 140 177 53 186 187 197 11 30 62 25 156 207 12.5 134 175 103.7 10 5
EH 300 10 176 – – 160 140 177 53 186 187 197 11 30 62 25 156 207 12.5 134 175 103.7 10 5
EH 370 11 198 – 226 170 200 199 65 201 210 221 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 – 226 140 23 7) 6
EH 550 11 198 – 226 170 200 199 65 201 210 221 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 – 226 140 23 7) 6
EH 700 9 244 – 270 220 200 246 82 246 254 263 11 40 82 40 223 294 20 – 226 140 23 7) 6
EH 800 9 244 – 270 220 200 246 82 276 254 263 11 40 92 50 223 344 20 – 226 140 23 7) 6
EK 110 10.5 165 136 – 120 140 166 43 – 177 187 6.6 40 41 15 156 156 7.5 134 154.5 102.3 10 4
EK 150 10.5 165 136 – 120 140 168 42 168 177 187 11 40 42 20 156 172 10 134 154.5 102.3 10 4
EK 175 12 201 176 – 160 140 202 67 – 214 226 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 172 106.7 10 5
EK 210 12 201 176 – 160 140 202 67 – 214 226 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 172 106.7 10 5
EK 370 11 270 244 296 220 200 271 70 – 282 293 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 – 225.5 139.5 23 7) 6
EK 550 11 270 244 296 220 200 271 70 – 282 293 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 – 225.5 139.5 23 7) 6
1) Dimension for extra auxiliary contact block.
2) Minimum distance for contactors mounted side by side. Makes space for two auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
3) C2 distance makes F1 = F.
4) Includes space for three auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
5) Includes space for four auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
6) Screw, nut and washer included.
7) Damping elements are included.
8) Minimum distance to remove coil.

Notes :
Values quoted for C2 and F1 are not applicable for D.C. operated contactors EH 145 - EH 370 - EH 550 - EH 700 - EH 800 - EK 370 - EK 550.
For a same rating EH and EHL contactors dimensions are the same.
For a same rating EK and EKL contactors dimensions are the same.

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/29


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


3-Pole Contactors with Mechanical Interlock

EH 145 to EH 300 Contactors, on Plate - Horizontal Mounting

Plate Interlocked Contactors Dimensions


B C C1 D F H P P1

PN 145-21 EH 145 – – EH 145 280 260 160 6.8 145.0 180 148 96

PN 210-22 EH 175/210 – – EH 175/210 340 320 180 6.8 156.0 200 173 108
EH 175/210 – – EH 145 340 320 180 6.8 150.5 200 173/150 108/98

PN 300-22 EH 260/300 – – EH 260/300 430 400 200 8.0 194.5 230 185 114
EH 260 – – EH 175/210 430 400 200 8.0 175.5 230 185/178 114/113

Drilling Plans for mounting without plate


Contactor Types Dimensions
C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

EH 145 – – EH 145 110 120 35 110 120

Contactor Types Dimensions


C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

EH 175/210 – – EH 145 120 140 35.5 110 120


EH 260/300 – – EH 175/210 160 140 35.5 120 140

Contactor Types Dimensions


C2 C3 C4 C5 -

EH 175/210 – – EH 175/210 120 140 36 120


EH 260/300 – – EH 260/300 160 140 34.5 160

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/30 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


3-Pole Contactors with Mechanical Interlock
3-Pole Contactors with Mechanical Latch

EH 370 to EH 800 Contactors, with Mechanical Interlock, on Plate - Horizontal Mounting


B P
C P1 T1
K1 3

EH 800 Main pole

C1

H1
Terminals

H
34.5

A661D
A660D

A662D
D1 F F1 G D=7 E G K1
(M6)

Dimensions
Type B C C1 C3 D1 E F F1 G H H1 K1 P P1 T1
EH 370 ...550 480 450 265 – 11 40 67 240 25 295 272 12.5 275.5 189.5 6
EH 700 580 550 265 – 11 40 82 290 40 295 294 20 275.3 189.5 6
EH 800 580 550 265 34.5 11 40 92 290 50 295 344 20 275.5 189.5 6

EH 145 to EH 800 Contactors with Mechanical Latch

EH 800 Main pole


Terminals

34.5

A662D
G K1

(M6)

Dimensions
Type B B1 C C1 C3 D1 F G H H1 K1 P P1 T1
EH 145 160 167 140 120 – 6.6 41 15 140 156 10 202 97 4
EH 175, EH 210 180 178 162 142 – 11 45 20 160 198 10 225 109 5
EH 260, EH 300 244 232 218 135 – 11 62 25 165 207 12.5 241 119 5
EH 370, EH 550 240 240 210 255 – 11 67 25 285 272 12.5 296 146.5 6
EH 700 290 290 260 255 – 11 82 40 285 294 20 296 146.5 6
EH 800 290 290 260 255 34.5 11 92 50 285 344 20 296 146.5 6

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/31


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


3-Pole Contactors with Mechanical Interlock

EH 145 to EH 210 Contactors - Vertical Mounting

Dimensions
Mechanical For Contactors B C C1 C2 H P P1
Interlock up down min max min max
VHV 145 EH 145 ▼–
–▼ EH 145 135.5 66 395 120 120 357 686 143 91
VHV 210 EH 175/210 ▼–
–▼ EH 175/210 147 73 375 140 140 411 713 168 103
VHV 300 EH 260/300 ▼–
–▼ EH 260/300 190 82 375 140 140 429 722 178 107 1)
VHV 210A EH 175/210 ▼–
–▼ EH 145 147/135.5 69.5 385 140 120 384 699.5 168/145 2) 103/93 2)
1) Damping elements are included.
2) Spacers are included for EH 145 contactors.

Drilling Plan fig. A


C3 C3
Dimensions
Contactors Cmin Cmax C1 C2 C3

EH 145 – – EH 145 66 395 120 120 110


C1

C1

M5
EH 175/210 – – EH 175/210 73 375 140 140 120 EH 145
M6
C

M6
EH 175,
M6
C2

EH 210
C2
E0852D

E0853D

Drilling Plan fig. B Fig. A

Dimensions Fig. B
C3
Contactors Cmin Cmax C1 C2 C3

EH 260/300 – – EH 260/300 82 375 140 140 160


C1

M6
C

Drilling Plan fig. C M5


C2

Dimensions
Contactors Cmin Cmax C1 C2 C3
E0854D

EH 175/210 – – EH 145 69.5 385 140 120 120/110 C2

Fig. C

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/32 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


4-Pole Contactors with Mechanical Interlock

EK 110 to EK 550 Contactors, on Plate - Horizontal Mounting

Dimensions
Mechanical Interlock For Contactors B C C1 D F H P P1

PN 210-22 EK 110 – – EK 110 340 320 180 6.8 185 200 159 107
EK 150 – – EK 150 340 320 180 6.8 185 200 159 107
EK 150 – – EK 110 340 320 180 6.8 186.5 200 159 107
PN 300-22 EK 175/210 – – EK 175/210 430 400 200 6.8 223.5 230 182 117
VK 210 A EK 175/210 – – EK 110 390 360 200 6.8 210.5 230 182.5 117.5
EK 175/210 – – EK 150 390 360 200 6.8 209 230 182.5 117.5
VH 800 EK 370/500 – – EK 370/500 580 550 265 7.0 240 295 275.5 189.5

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/33


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


4-Pole Contactors with Mechanical Interlock

EK 110 to EK 550 Contactors - Vertical Mounting

A_872

Dimensions
Mechanical For Contactors B C C C1 C2 H H P P1
Interlock min. max. min. max.
VKV 150 EK 110 – – EK 110 178 31 375 140 140 327 671 154 102
EK 150 – – EK 150 178 47 375 140 140 359 687 154 102
EK 150 – – EK 110 178 39 375 140 140 343 679 154 102
VHV 300 EK 175 – – EK 175 217 73 375 140 140 411 713 175 1) 110 1)
EK 210 – – EK 210 217 73 375 140 140 411 713 175 1) 110 1)
1) Damping elements are included.

Drilling Plan
C3

Dimensions
C C C1 C2 C3
min. max.
C1

EK 110 – – EK 110 31 375 140 140 120


M6
EK 150 – – EK 150 47 375 140 140 120
EK 150 – – EK 110 39 375 140 140 120
C

M6
EK 175 – – EK 175 73 375 140 140 160
C2

EK 210 – – EK 210 73 375 140 140 160


E0853D

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/34 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


Connections for Reversing Contactors

EH 145 to EH 800, 3 Pole Contactors on Plate - Horizontal Mounting

Connections Contactors Dimensions


KM1 KM2 B H P B1 H1 P1

BSH 145 EH 145 – – EH 145 269 171 143 – – –


BSH 210 EH 175/210 – – EH 175/210 292 198 168 – – –
BSH 300 EH 260/300 – – EH 260/300 376.5 207 178 1) – – –
BSH 550 EH 370/550 EH 370/550 438 287 226 1) – – –
BSH 700 EH 700 EH 700 534 294 226 1) – – –
BSH 800 EH 800 EH 800 534 344 226 1) – – –
BSH 550 EH 370/550 – – EH 370/550 – – – 480 295 275.5
BSH 700 EH 700 – – EH 700 – – – 580 295 275.5
BSH 800 EH 800 – – EH 800 – – – 580 295 275.5
1) Damping elements are included.

KM1 KM2

Drilling Plan for mounting without plate

Contactors Dimensions
KM1 KM2 C1 C2 C3 2) C4
KM1 KM2
EH 145 – – EH 145 120 110 35 110
2) Includes space for mechanical interlock.

Contactors Dimensions
KM1 KM2 C1 C2 C3 2) C4

KM1 KM2 EH 175/210 – – EH 175/210 140 120 36 120


EH 260/300 – – EH 260/300 140 160 34.5 160
EH 370/550 EH 370/550 200 170 70 170
EH 700 EH 700 200 220 70 220
EH 800 EH 800 200 220 70 220
2) Includes space for mechanical interlock.

KM1 KM2
Contactors
KM1 KM2
Dimensions
C1 C2 9
EH 370/550 – – EH 370/550 265 450
EH 700 – – EH 700 265 550
EH 800 – – EH 800 265 550

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/35


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


Connections for Star-Delta Starters

EH 145 to EH 800 3-Pole Contactors

Dimensions
KM1 Main KM3 KM2 B H P
BED 145 EH 145 EH 145 A 110 343 171 143
BSD 210 EH 175 EH 175 EH 145 417.5–441.5 198 168
BSD 210 EH 210 EH 210 EH 175 429–453 198 168
BSD 300 EH 300 EH 300 EH 210 517.5–531.5 207 178 1)
BSD 550 EH 370 EH 370 EH 260 665 287 226 1)
BSD 550 EH 550 EH 550 EH 260 665 287 226 1)
BSD 700 EH 700 EH 700 EH 550 776 294 226 1)
BSD 800 EH 800 EH 800 EH 550 776 344 226 1)
1) Damping elements are included.

KM1 KM3 KM2

Drilling Plans

Contactors Dimensions
KM1 KM3 KM2
KM1 Main KM3 KM2 C1 C2 C3 1) C4 C5 2) C6 C7
EH 145 EH 145 A 110 120 110 17–37 110 15-37 78 128
1) Includes space for 2 to 4 auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
2) Includes space for 1 to 3 auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
6

KM1 KM3 KM2 Contactors Dimensions


KM1 Main KM3 KM2 C1 C2 C3 3) C4 C5 4) C6 C7
EH 175 EH 175 EH 145 140 120 17–41 120 35.5 110 120

Contactors Dimensions
KM1 Main KM3 KM2 C1 C2 C3 3) C4 C5 4) C6 C7
KM1 KM3 KM2
EH 210 EH 210 EH 175 140 120 17–41 120 36 120 140
EH 300 EH 300 EH 210 140 160 23–37 160 35.5 120 140
EH 370/550 EH 370/550 EH 260 200 170 70 170 70 160 140
EH 700 EH 700 EH 550 200 220 70 220 70 170 200
EH 800 EH 800 EH 550 200 220 70 220 70 170 200
3) Includes space for 1 to 4 auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
4) Includes space for mechanical interlock.

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/36 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


Shrouds for Main Terminals

EH 145 to EH 800 3-Pole Contactors and EK 110 to EK 550 4-Pole Contactors

LT 210-EL, LT 210-EC LT 300-E ...LT 800-E, LT 150-EK ...LT 550-EK

Shrouds For contactors Dimensions


Type H2 H3 P2 K2 K3 B4
LT 210-EL EH 145 293 193 143 48 13 124
LT 210-EL EH 175, EH 210 320 220 156 48 13 124
LT 210-EC EH 145 193 170 75 127
LT 210-EC EH 175, EH 210 220 183 75 127

A* B* C* A* B* C*
LT 300-E EH 260, EH 300 399 159 184 209 47 72 97 178
LT 550-E EH 370, EH 550 464 193 218 243 47 72 97 201
LT 700-E EH 700 465 193 218 243 47 72 97 246
LT 800-E EH 800 465 193 218 243 47 72 97 266
LT 150-EK EK 110, EK 150 280 153 178 203 47 72 97 168
LT 210-EK EK 175, EK 210 340 158 183 208 47 72 97 202
LT 550-EK EK 370, EK 550 464 193 218 243 47 72 97 268
* Positions of shroud

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/37


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


EH 145 to EH 210 Contactors
with T - DU Thermal O/L Relays

EH 145 Drilling Plan


+ T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relay

11 1) 124 111)
143
42 42
91 4
20 D = 11
10

19 110

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 (M5)

120
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
111
288

A1 A2

35.5
40

67.3
14 6
D = 11
(M5)
37

E0220D5
E0222D5

62 4 50
E0221D5

20
11

42 42 126

EH 175, EH 210 Drilling Plan


+ T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relay

12 1) 136 12 1)
45 45 168.5
D = 11 103.5 5
134 2)

20
10

10 (M6)

A1 A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

140
315

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3


124

15 E0223D5

120

14 6
D = 11
E0225D5

74 4
E0224D5

20
11

42 42 138

EH 175, EH 210 Drilling Plan


+ T 450 DU Thermal O/L Relay

12 1) 136 12 1)
45 45 168.5
20 D = 11 103.5 5
134 2)
10

(M6)
10

A1 A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
140

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3


336
166.5

15
120
66
55
E0226D5

2 4 6
11

6 22 76 (M5)
E0228D5
E0227D5

20 46 5
58 58 D = 11 173

1) Dimensions for additional CAL 16-11 auxiliary contact blocks.


2) Minimum distance to remove coil.

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/38 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


EH 260 to EH 550 Contactors
with T - DU Thermal O/L Relays

EH 260, EH 300 + T450 DU Drilling Plan


10 1) 176 10 1)
62 62
174.7
12.5

25 D = 11
103.7 5

134 2)
10 (M6)

A1 A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

140
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
345
166.5

30
160

66
55
E0229D5
12

42 76 (M5)
6
E0230D5

E0231D5
25 46 5
D = 11
58 58 173

EH 370 + T 450 DU Drilling Plan


111) 198 111)
67 67 226
12.5

25 D = 11 140 6
23 M10 (M6)

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

200
417

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3


206.5

A1 A2 40
170

76
55
E0234D5
6
47 76 (M5)
E0233D5
E0232D5

D = 11 25 46 5
12

58 58 173

EH 370, EH 550 + T 900 DU Drilling Plan


111) 198 111)
67 67 226
12.5

25 D = 11 140 6
23
M10

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3


200
427

(M6)
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
214

A1 A2 40

Pour M6
170
9
80

2 46
E0238D5
12

6
44 82 (M6)
E0235D5

30
E0236D5

61 5
83 83 D=11 209

1) Dimensions for additional CAL 16-11 auxiliary contact blocks.


2) Minimum distance to remove coil.

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/39


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


EH 700 and EH 800 Contactors
with T 900 DU Thermal O/L Relay

EH 700 + T 900 DU Drilling Plan


9 1) 244 9 1)
82 82 226
40 D = 11 140 6

M10 (M6)
20

23

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3


200

200
447.5

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3


218

A1 A2 40
220

78
80
17.5

E0241D5
6
69 82 (M6)
E0240D5
E0239D5

40 60 6
83 83 D = 11 209

EH 800 + T 900 DU Drilling Plan


91) 244 91)
92 92 226
20

50 D = 11 140 6

23 M10
(M6)
34.5

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

200
531.5

2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

A1 A2
40
248

220
108
80
34.5

2 46
E0865D

6
69 82 (M6)
E0243D5

E0244D5

40 58 8
20

D = 11 83 83 209

1) Dimensions for additional CAL 16-11 auxiliary contact blocks.

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/40 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


Thermal O/L Relays and Accessories

TA 25 DU

ABB97001

*Refers to TA 25 DU 32 type

TA 25 DU + DB 25 Drilling Plan
(TA 25 DU + DB 25/25 A or DB 25/32 A
for independent mounting)

ABB 84 7563/1
ABB97002

*Refers to TA 25 DU 32 type
**Refers to DB 25/32 A mounting kit

TA 25 DU + DS 25-A TA 25 DU + DR 25-A

ABB97004
ABB97003

*Refers to TA 25 DU 32 type *Refers to TA 25 DU 32 type

TA 42 DU

9
ABB97006
ABB97005

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

Low Voltage Products 9/41


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section Index

Dimensions (in mm)


Thermal O/L Relays and Accessories

TA 75 DU TA 80 DU

ABB97008

ABB97010
ABB97007

ABB97009
*Refers to TA 75 DU 80 type

TA 42 DU, TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU + DB 80 Drilling Plan


(TA 42 DU, TA 75 DU and TA 80 DU + DB 80
for independent mounting)
SST 079 91 M/1

SST 037 90 M
SST 071 91 M/2

TA 110 DU - see page 9/21 T 200 DU - see page 9/38

T 450 DU/SU T 900 DU/SU


SST 037 90 M

SST 036 90 M

Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.

9/42 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Main Summary

Reference Index
List of Addresses

Contents
Alphabetic Order acc. to Type .......................................................................................... 10/2
Alphabetic Order acc. to Designation ............................................................................... 10/4
ABB Agencies and Representatives throughout the World .............................................. 10/8

10
Low Voltage Products 10/1
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary
Section

Index : Alphabetic Order acc. to Type

Types Product Section/ page Types Product Section/ page

A E
A 9 to A 110 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/12 E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay 5/19
4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/16
EH 145 to EH 800 3-pole Contactors - A.C. and D.C. Operated 2/13, 2/15
A 9-22 to A 75-22 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles
A.C. Operated 2/18 EK 110 to EK 550 4-pole Contactors - A.C. and D.C. Operated 2/16, 2/17

AE 45 22 to AE 75-22 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles EHL 3-pole Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29
D.C. Operated 2/19 EKL 4-pole Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29
AE 50 to AE 110 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/15
AF 45 to AF 110 Contactors with Controlled Supply 2/26 G
AT 450 and AT 900 Kits for Mounting
GA 75 and GAE 75 Contactors for D.C. Circuit Switching 2/28
T 450 DU/SU, TA 900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays
on EH 175 to EH 800 Contactors 5/7

K
B K6 Mini Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated 6/6
B 6 and B 7 Mini Contactors - A.C. Operated 6/2 K6 S Mini Contactor Relays for PLC Outputs 6/6
B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors for PLC Outputs 6/5 KC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated 3/6
BA 5-50 Function Markers 4/19, 5/9 KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
BC 6 and BC 7 Mini Contactors - D.C. Operated 6/2 Mini Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated 6/6
Interface Mini Contactors 6/5 KBC 30G D.C. Coil for KC Contactor Relays
BC 9-22 to BC 25-22 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles and BC 9 to BC 30 Contactors 4/29
D.C. Operated 2/19 KH A.C. or D.C. Coil for EH and EK Contactors 4/30
BC 9-30 to BC 30-30 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/14 KL and KZ Main Contact Sets
BC 9-40 to BC 25-40 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/17 for BC, TBC and EH 3-pole Contactors 4/28

BED and BSD Connections for Star-Delta Starters 4/25 KP Set including : 4/30
- 1 D.C. Coil + 1 Economy Resistor
BEM, BSH and BSM Connections for Reversing Contactors 4/24
+ 1 Insertion Contact for EH and EK Contactors
BES Connections (downstream) for 3-pole contactors 4/24 or
BES and BSS Connections for 4-pole Reversing Contactors 4/24 - 1 Multi-frequency coil + 1 Insertion Contact
for EH and EK Contactors with built-in rectifier
BL5-F Fuse Holder Block 4/19
KW Arc Chutes for EH and EK Contactors 4/28
BL5-L Lamp Holder Block 4/19
KX 800 A.C. or D.C. Coil
BN 6 Plunger for Manual Operation on Mini Contactors 6/7 for Mechanical Latching Units
BSM 6-30 Connecting Strip for VB and VBC on EH 145 to EH 800 Contactors 4/30
Compact Reversing Contactors 6/7 KZK Main Contact sets
BX-TP Sealing Cover for TP Pneumatic Timer 4/8 for EK 110 to EK 550 4-pole Contactors 4/28

C L
CA 5-01, CA 5-10 1-pole Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4 LB 6, LB 6-CA Base with Soldering Pins
for Mini Contactors and Auxiliary Contacts 6/7
CA 5...E, CA 5...M and CA 5...N
4-pole Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4 LC 16, LC 25 and LC 26
Flat Pin Terminal Blocks
CA 6 and CAF 6 Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7 for N and KC Contactor Relays
CA 16 Additionnal Contact Blocks and A9 to A 26, BC 9 to BC 25 Contactors 4/21
for VH and VHV Interlock Units 4/11 LC 30-T, LC 26-B1 Flat Pin Terminal Blocks
CAL 5-11 2-pole Auxiliary Contact Block 4/4 for TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relays and DB 25 Kit 5/7

CAL 16 and CCL 16 2-pole Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4 LD 110 Additional Terminal Block 4/22

CB 5 Impulse Contact Blocks 4/18 LF, LG, LH, LP and LY


Terminal Connection Strips for Contactors 4/20
CC 5 1-pole Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4
LK Control Lead Terminals 4/18
CCL 5-01 Insertion Contact + Varistor
for AE 95 and AE 110 Contactors 4/29 LP 6 Connecting Strip for Mini Contactors 6/7

CDL 5-01 Insertion Contact + Varistor LT Main Terminal Shrouds for


for AE 45 to AE 75 Contactors 4/29 EH 145 to EH 800, EK 110 to EK 550 Contactors 4/23
Main Terminal Shrouds
for T 200 DU to T 900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays 5/9
D LT 6-B Protective Cover for Mini Contactors 6/7
DB Separate Mounting Kit for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7 LW Enlargement Terminal Parts 4/22
DR 25 Remote Resetting Coil LX Extension Terminal Parts 4/22
for TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay 5/8
DS 25 Remote Tripping Coil
for TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay 5/8
DX 25 Terminal Block for 10 mm2
Cross-sectional Widening
for TA 25 DU ≤ 25 or DB 25/25 A 5/7

10/2 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section

Index : Alphabetic Order acc. to Type

Types Product Section/ page Types Product Section/ page

N U
N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated 3/6 UA 26 to UA 110 3-pole Contactors
for 3-phase Capacitor Switching 2/21
UA 16.. -R to UA 75.. -R
O 3-pole Contactors c/w resistors
OXFB Single Connectors for Cu Cables for 3-phase Capacitor Switching 2/22

- for EH 145 to EH 550 and EK 110 to EK 550


Contactors 4/21
V
- for T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/9
VB 6 and VB 7 Compact Reversing Mini Contactors
A.C. Operated 6/3, 6/4
P VBC 6 and VBC 7 Compact Reversing Mini Contactors
D.C. Operated 6/3, 6/4
PN and PR Mounting Plates 4/26
VBC 30 Mechanical Interlock Unit 4/11
VE 5-1, VE 5-2 Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
R VH 145 to VH 300 Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
RA 5, RA 30 Interface Relays for PLC Outputs 4/16 VH 145 W to VH 300 W Mechanical Interlock Units 4/11
RC, RT and RV Surge Suppressor Blocks : VH 550, VH 800 Mechanical Interlock Units 4/11
- for Contactor Coils 4/15
VHV and VKW Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
- for Mini Contactor Coils 4/15, 6/7
VM5-1 Mechanical Interlock Unit 4/11

S W
SK 824 to SK 828 EH 145 to EH 800 Mechanically
Interlocked Contactors - Side by Side Mounting 2/30 WB 75-A and WH Mechanical Latching Units 4/12

EH 145 to EH 800
Mechanically Latched Contactors 2/30 Z
ZA A.C. Coils for N Contactor Relays
T and A, UA, UA..-R Contactors 4/29

T-V_1000 and TA-V_1000 ZAE D.C. Coils for AE Contactors 4/29


Thermal O/L Relays for EEx e Motor Protection 5/18 ZAF A.C./D.C. Coils for AF Contactors
with Controlled Supply 4/29
T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relays for Mini Contactors 6/17
ZL and ZLU Main Contact Sets
T 200 DU to T 900 DU/SU for A, AE, AF, TAE and UA, UA..-R
Thermal O/L Relays 5/5, 5/6 3-pole Contactors 4/28
TA 25 DU to TA 110 DU ZLT Main Contact Sets
Thermal O/L Relays 5/4, 5/5 for A, AE and AF 4-pole Contactors 4/28
TAE 45-40 to TAE 75-40
4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated
with Large Coil Voltage Range 2/24

TAE 50-30 to TAE 110-30


3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated
with Large Coil Voltage Range 2/24

TBC 7 Mini Contactors - D.C. Operated


with Large Coil Voltage Range 6/8

TBC 9-22 to TBC 25-22


4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated
with Large Coil Voltage Range 2/24

TBC 9-30 to TBC 30-30


3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated
with Large Coil Voltage Range 2/24

TBC 9-40 to TBC 25-40


4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated
with Large Coil Voltage Range 2/24
TC Single Connectors for Al or Cu Cables 4/21
TCD Double Connectors for Al or Cu Cables 4/21
TE 5S Electronic Timer for Star-Delta Starters 4/6
TKC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated
with Large Coil Voltage Range 3/7
TKC6 Mini Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated
with Large Coil Voltage Range 6/8
TP ... DA Pneumatic Timer Block 4/8, 4/9

TP ... IA
(Timing on Energization)
Pneumatic Timer Block
(Timing on De-energization)
4/8, 4/9 10
Low Voltage Products 10/3
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section

Index : Alphabetic Order acc. to Designation

Designation Section /page Designation Section / page

A C (cont.)
Accessoriability: Connection (Mode and Capacity) 7/14, 7/15
- A, AE Contactors 2/7, 4/2 Connection of Main Poles (Parallel Connection) 2/54
- BC Contactors 2/11 Connection for 3-pole Contactors (downstream connections) 4/24
- EH, EK Contactors 2/9, 4/2 Connections for 4-pole Reversing Contactors 4/25
- KC, TKC Contactor Relays 3/5 Connections for Control Leads 4/18
- N Contactor Relays 3/3, 4/2 Connections for Reversing Contactors 4/24
- TAE, TBC Contactors 2/24 Connections for Star-Delta Starters 4/25
Accessories for A, AE, EH and EK Contactors Connection - Terminal Marking and Positioning:
and N Contactor Relays - Compatibility 4/3 - Contactors - Thermal O/L Relays 8/1...8/9
Accessories for Contactors and N Contactor Relays 4/1 Connection - Terminal Marking and Positioning:
Accessories for Contactor Connection Terminals 4/22 - Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/14
Accessories for Mini Contactors 6/7 Connectors for EH and EK Contactors 4/21
Accessories for Mounting of the TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/7...5/9 Connectors for T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/9
Accessories for TKC Contactor Relays 3/7 Contacts:
Amp-rating acc. to CSA and UL 7/7 - Additional Contacts for Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
Approvals and Certifications 7/4...7/7 - Auxiliary Contacts 4/4, 4/5
Approvals: Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays - O/L Relays 6/13, 6/19 - Auxiliary Contacts for Mini Contactors 6/7
Arc Chutes for Contactors 4/28 - CB 5 Impulse Contacts 4/18
- Main Contact Sets for Contactors 4/28
Contactors:
● A and AE Contactors: Description 2/6
B ● AF Contactors 2/26
● BC Contactors: Description 2/10
Base with Soldering Pins for Mini Contactors 6/7 ● EH and EK Contactors: Description 2/8
Blocks (Accessory Blocks): ● EH Mechanically Interlocked Contactors 2/30
- Additional Contact Blocks for Mechanical ● EH Mechanically Latched Contactors 2/30
and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11 ● EHL and EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4, 4/5 ● GA75 and GAE75 Contactors 2/28
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7 ● UA Contactors 2/21
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks with Varistor for AE Contactors 4/29
● UA..-R Contactors 2/22
- BL5-F Fuse Holder Block 4/19
● A 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated:
- BL5-L Lamp Holder Block 4/19
- Ordering Details 2/12
- Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Contactors 4/21 - Selection Table 2/2, 2/3
- Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7 - Technical Data 2/32-34-36
- Impulse Contact Block - CB 5 Type 4/18 ● AE 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated:
- Surge Suppressor Blocks 4/14, 4/15
- Ordering Details 2/15
- Surge Suppressors Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7
- Technical Data 2/38-40-42
- TP Pneumatic Timer Block 4/8, 4/9 ● AF Contactors 3 and 4-pole
BV Bureau Veritas: see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2 with Controlled Supply A.C./D.C.Operated:
- Description 2/26
- Technical Data 2/26
- Ordering Details 2/27
C ● BC 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated:

- Ordering Details 2/14


Capacitor Switching 2/20…2/23
- Technical Data 2/38-40-42
Categories: Utilization Categories - General Technical Data 7/10, 7/11
● EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated:
Categories: Utilization Categories
- Ordering Details 2/13
and Electrical Durability of the Contactors 2/55…2/60
CENELEC: see “European and National Specifications” 7/2 - Selection Table 2/3
Certifications and Approvals 7/4, 7/5 - Technical Data 2/33-35-37
● EH 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated:
Climate (Climatic Withstand of Devices) 7/13
Co-ordination with the Short-Circuit Protection Devices 7/17...7/21 - Ordering Details 2/15
Code for Coil Voltage: AF Contactors 2/26 - Technical Data 2/39-41-43
● A 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated:
Code for Coil Voltage: Contactors - N and KC Contactor Relays 0/1
Code for Coil Voltage: Mechanical Latching Units 4/12 - Ordering Details 2/16
Code for Coil Voltage: Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/1 - Selection Table 2/4
Code for Coil Voltage: TKC Contactor Relays 3/7 - Technical Data 2/32-34-36
● A 4-pole Contactors
Coil for AE Contactor: Principle Diagrams 2/15, 2/17 with N.O and N.C. Main Poles - A.C. Operated:
Coils for Contactors 4/29, 4/30 - Ordering Details 2/18
Coil for D.C. Operated Contactors, Large Voltage Range: - Technical Data 2/32-34-36
- see TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24, 2/25 ● AE 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated:
- see TBC 7 Mini Contactors and TKC 6 Contactor Relays 6/8 - Ordering Details 2/17
- see TKC Contactor Relays 3/7 - Technical Data 2/38-40-42
Coil for Mechanical Latching Units 4/30 ● AE 4-pole Contactors
Coil for Remote Resetting of the TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay 5/8 with N.O and N.C. Main Poles - D.C. Operated:
Coil for Remote Tripping of the TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay 5/8 - Ordering Details 2/19
Coil: Voltage Code for Contactors - N and KC Contactor Relays 0/1 - Technical Data 2/38-40-42
Coil: Voltage Code for Mechanical Latching Units 4/12 ● BC 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated:

Coil: Voltage Code for Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/1 - Ordering Details 2/17
Coil: Voltage Code for TKC Contactor Relays 3/7 - Technical Data 2/38-40-42
Coil with Controlled Supply, A.C./D.C.: AF Contactors 2/26 ● BC 4-pole Contactors

Conformity (Standards - Approvals - Certification) 7/3...7/7 with N.O and N.C. Main Poles - D.C. Operated:
Connecting Auxiliaries for Control Leads 4/18 - Ordering Details 2/19
- Technical Data 2/38-40-42

10/4 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section

Index : Alphabetic Order acc. to Designation

Designation Section /page Designation Section / page

C (cont.) F
● EK 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated: Faston:
- Ordering Details 2/16 - see Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Contactors 4/21
- Selection Table 2/4, 2/5 - see Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
- Technical Data 2/33-35-37 Fitting of Accessories - A and AE Contactors 2/7, 4/2
● EK 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated: Fitting of Accessories - BC Contactors 2/11
- Ordering Details 2/17 Fitting of Accessories - EH and EK Contactors 2/9, 4/2
- Technical Data 2/39-41-43 Fitting of Accessories - KC and TKC Contactor Relays 3/5
● TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24 Fitting of Accessories - N Contactor Relays 3/3, 4/2
● UA 3-pole Contactors 2/21 Fixing - Drilling plans - Screw Diameter: see “Dimensions” 9/1
● UA..-R 3-pole Contactors 2/22, 2/23 Fuses 5/14
Contactor Relays - N Type:
- Description 3/2
- Ordering Details 3/6
- Technical Data 3/8, 3/9 G
Contactor Relays - KC Type:
General Technical Data 7/2...7/16
- Description 3/4
- Ordering Details 3/6
- Technical Data 3/8, 3/9
H
Contactor Relays - TKC Type:
- Description 3/4 Holder for Fuse - BL 5-F Type 4/19
- Ordering Details 3/7 Holder for Lamp - BL 5-L Type 4/19
- Technical Data 3/7
Control of 3-phase Slip-ring Motors 2/50
Control Circuit: Influence of the Length
of the Contactor Control Circuit 2/52, 2/53 I
Controlled Supply - A.C./D.C. Operated 2/26
Cover for Mini Contactors (Protective Cover) 6/7 Identification Marker - BA 5-50 Type 4/19, 5/9
Cover for TP Pneumatic Timers (Sealing Cover) 4/8 Identification Marker for Mini Contactors 6/7
CSA: see “Specifications in Canada and the USA” 7/2 IEC: see “International Specifications” 7/2
Current: Motor Nominal Currents - Table of Values 0/0 IEC 947-4-1 - Co-ordination Table,
with the Short-Circuit Protection Devices 7/17...7/21
Current (Direct current): see “D.C. Circuit Switching” 2/46, 6/12
Influence of the Conductor Length for the Contactor Control Circuit 2/52, 2/53
Interface Relays for PLC Outputs - RA 5 and RA 30 Types 4/16, 4/17
Interlock Units (Mechanical and Electrical) 4/10, 4/11
IP Degrees of Protection 7/12
D ISO: see “International Specifications” 7/2
D.C. Circuit Switching: ISO 9000 see “Quality” - (on the back of General Content) Ch. 0
- Contactors 2/46…2/48
- Mini Contactors and Compact Reversing Contactors 6/11
Description of A and AE Contactors 2/6
Description of BC Contactors 2/10 J
Description of EH and EK Contactors 2/8 Joule Losses per Phase and Resistance
Description of EHL and EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29 (E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relays) 5/22
Description of EHL and EKL Mechanically Latched Contactors 2/30 Joule Losses per Phase and Resistance
Description of GA75 and GAE75 Contactors 2/28 (TA and T Thermal O/L Relays) 5/15, 5/16
Description of KC and TKC Contactor Relays 3/4 Joule Losses per Phase and Resistance
Description of N Contactor Relays 3/2 (T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relays) 6/19
Description of TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24
Diagrams for Star-Delta Starters 8/10
Diagrams: see "Terminal Marking and Positioning" 8/1...8/9
Dimensions: K
- Contactors - Contactor Relays - Thermal O/L Relays - Accessories 9/1
- Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/15, 6/16 Kits for mounting T 450 DU/SU
- Plates for EH and EK Contactors 4/27 and T900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays on EH 175 to EH 800 Contactors 5/7
Directives: Kits for Separate mounting TA 25 DU to T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
- 73/23/CEE Low Voltage Directive: see “European Directives” 7/2
- 89/336/CEE Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive:
see “European Directives” 7/2
- 89/392/CEE Machine Directive: see “European Directives” 7/2 L
DNV Det Norske Veritas: see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2
Drilling plans: see “Dimensions” 9/1 Latching Units 4/12, 4/13
Durability: Liability (on the back of General Content) Ch. 0
- Electrical Durability and Utilization Categories of Contactors 2/55...2/60 Lighting Circuit Switching:
Duty (Intermittent Duty and Temporary Duty): Suitable Coefficient 2/54 - Contactors Selection 2/44, 2/45
- Mini Contactors and Compact Reversing Contactors Selection 6/11
LRS Lloyd’s Register of Shipping:
see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2
E
Electrical Durability, Utilization Categories of Contactors 2/55…2/60
Electronic O/L Relay - E 16 DU
Enlargement Terminal Parts - LW Type
5/19
4/22 10
European Directives 7/2
Extension Terminal Parts - LX Type 4/22

Low Voltage Products 10/5


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section

Index : Alphabetic Order acc. to Designation

Designation Section /page Designation Section / page

M O (cont.)
Marking: - EH Mechanically Interlocked Contactors 2/30
- CE Marking: see “European Directives” 7/2 - EH Mechanically Latched Contactors 2/30
- Marking of Contactors and Contactor Relays 8/2 - EHL and EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29
- Terminal Marking and Positioning: - EK 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/16
Contactors - Thermal O/L Relays 8/3...8/9 - EK 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/17
- Terminal Marking and Positioning: - Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Contactors 4/21
Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/14
- Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
- Terminal Marking: General - Standards 8/2
- Function Marker for Mini Contactors 6/7
Mini Contactors - Mini Contactors Relays - Mini Thermal O/L Relays:
- GA75 and GAE75 Contactors 2/28
- B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 Mini Contactors 6/2
- K6 S Mini Contactor Relays for PLC Outputs 6/6
- B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors for PLC Outputs 6/5
- K(C) 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
- BC 6 and BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors 6/5
- KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
- K6 S Mini Contactor Relays for PLC Outputs 6/6
- LD 110 Additional Terminal Block 4/22
- K(C) 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
- LK Control Lead Terminals 4/18
- KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
- LW Enlargement Terminal Parts 4/22
- T 7 DU Mini Thermal O/L Relays 6/17
- LX Extension Terminal Parts 4/22
- TBC 7 Mini Contactors - TKC 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/8
- Main Contact Sets for Contactors 4/28
- VB(C) 6, VB(C) 7, VB(C) 6A and VB(C) 7A Compact Reversing Contactors 6/3
- Main Terminal Shrouds for T 200 DU
Motor Nominal Powers - Table of values 0/0 to T900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays 5/9
Motor Protection - Choice of Protection Device 5/14 - Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
Motor-rating acc. to CSA, UL 7/6 - Mechanical Latching Units 4/12
Motors: EEx e Protection Motor (Choice of Thermal O/L Relays) 5/18 - Mounting Kits for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
Motors: Nominal Powers and Currents 0/0 - N and KC Contactor Relays 3/6
Mounting Distance between BC Contactors 2/14, 2/17 - O/L Relays 5/1
Mounting Distance between BC 4-pole Contactors - Plates for Contactors 4/26
with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles 2/19
- Plunger for Manual Operation on Mini Contactors 6/7
Mounting Distance between KC and TKC Contactor Relays 3/6,3/7
- Protective Cover for Mini Contactor 6/7
Mounting Positions - AE and BC 4-pole Contactors
with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles 2/19 - RA 5 and RA 30 Interface Relays 4/16
Mounting Positions - BC Contactors 2/14, 2/17 - Remote Resetting Coil for TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/8
Mounting Positions - KC Contactor Relays 3/6 - Remote Tripping Coil for TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/8
- Sealing Cover for TP Pneumatic Timers 4/8
- Surge Suppressor Blocks 4/15
- Surge Suppressor Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7
O - T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay for Mini Contactors 6/17
- TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/4...5/6
Ordering Details - General Informations 0/2 - TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24
Ordering Details: - TBC 7 Mini Contactors - TKC 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/8
- A 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/12 - TE 5S Electronic Timer 4/6
- A 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/16 - Terminal Connecting Strips 4/20
- A 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles 2/18 - TKC Contactor Relays 3/7
- AE 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/15 - TP Pneumatic Timer Blocks 4/8
- AE 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/17 - UA 3-pole Contactors 2/21
- AF 3 and 4-pole Contactors with Controlled Supply 2/26 - UA..-R 3-pole Contactors 2/22, 2/23
- Arc Chutes for Contactors 4/28
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7
- B(C) 6, B(C) 7 Mini Contactors 6/2 P
- B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors for PLC Outputs 6/5
- BA 5-50 Identification Marker 4/19, 5/9 Packaging - General Informations 0/2
- Base for Mini Contactors 6/7 Packaging of the Equipment and Accessories:
see “Ordering Details” Pages -
- BC 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/14
Plates for Contactors 4/26, 4/27
- BC 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/17
Plunger for Manual Operation on Mini Contactors 6/7
- BC 6, BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors 6/5
Product Range Présentation 1/2...1/6
- BC and AE 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles 2/19
Protection - IP Protection Degrees 7/12
- BL 5-F Fuse Holder Blocks 4/19
Protection Devices - Co-ordination 7/17...7/21
- BL 5-L Lamp Holder Blocks 4/19
Protection: Choice of Motor Protection Device 5/14
- CB 5 Impulse Contact Block 4/18
PRS Polski Rejestr Statkow: see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2
- Coil for Mechanical Latching Units 4/30
- Compact Reversing Contactors 6/3, 6/4
- Connecting Strip for Compact Reversing Contactors 6/7
- Connecting Strips for Mini Contactors 6/7
- Connections for 3-pole Contactors (downstream connections) 4/24
Q
- Connections for 4-pole Reversing Contactors 4/25 Quality Assurance: see “Quality” (on the back of General Content) Section 0
- Connections for Reversing Contactors 4/24
- Connections for Star-Delta Starters 4/25
- Connectors for EH and EK Contactors
and T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relay 4/21, 5/9
- Contactor Coils 4/29
- DX 25 Widening Terminal Block 5/7
- EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/13
- EH 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/15

10/6 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section

Index : Alphabetic Order acc. to Designation

Designation Section /page Designation Section / page

R T (cont.)
Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase - VB 6, VBC 6, VB 6A and VBC 6A Compact Reversing Contactors 6/9
(E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay) 5/22 - VB 7, VBC 7, VB 7A and VBC 7A Compact Reversing Contactors 6/10
Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase - RA 5 and RA 30 Interface Relays 4/17
(T7 DU Thermal O/L Relay) 6/19 - TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/11...5/13
Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase - T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay 6/17
(TA and T Thermal O/L Relays) 5/15, 5/16 - TE5S Electronic Timer 4/7
R.I.Na Registro Italiano Navale: - Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2 - Mechanical Latching Units 4/13
- Surge Suppressor Blocks 4/15
- TP Pneumatic Timer Blocks 4/9
Terminal Block for A 95, A 110, AE 95 and AE 110:
S - LD 110 Additional Block 4/22
Terminal Block for TA 25 DU ≤ 25 or DB 22/25 A:
Screw: Screw for Control Lead Connection - Widening Terminal Block 5/7
to the Main Poles of EH and EK Contactors 4/18 Terminals for Auxiliary Control Lead - LK Type 4/18
Selection Guide - Star-Delta Starting 2/31 Terminals: Contactors - Thermal O/L Relays:
Sets: see "Terminal Marking and Positioning" 8/1...8/9
- Coil Sets for EH and EK Contactors 4/29 Terminals: Mini Contactors - Contactor Relays:
- Main Contact Sets for Contactors 4/28 see “Terminal Marking and Positioning” 6/14
- Power Connection Sets 4/24, 4/25 Terms and Technical Definitions 7/8, 7/9
Short Circuit Protection - Co-ordination with Protection Devices 7/17...7/21 Test Certifying Organizations 7/3
Shrouds for Main Terminals (EH and EK Contactors) 4/23 Thermal O/L Relays:
Shrouds for Main Terminal TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Description 5/10
(T 200 DU and T 900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays) 5/9 TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Ordering Details 5/4...5/6
Standards: TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Panorama 5/2, 5/3
- IEC 947-4-1 Standard 7/17...7/21 TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Selection Table 2/2, 2/3
- National, European and International Standards 7/3 TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Technical Data 5/11...5/13
- Standards, Specifications and Certifying Organizations 7/2 TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Tripping Curves 5/17
- Terminal Marking Standards 8/2 Thermal O/L Relays T 7 DU for Mini Contactors 6/18
Slip-ring Motor Switching 2/50 Thermal O/L Relays for Protection of the EEx e Motors
Star-Delta Starters - Diagrams 8/10 - Choice of Thermal O/L Relays 5/18
Star-Delta Starting - Control Gear Selecting Guide 2/31 Tightening Torques 7/16
Strips : Timer for Star-Delta Starters: TE 5S Electronic Timer 4/6, 4/7
- Connecting Strip for Compact Reversing Contactors 6/7 TP Pneumatic Timer Block 4/8, 4/9
- Connecting Strip for Mini Contactors 6/7 Transformer Switching - Selection of Contactors 2/49
- Terminal Connecting Strips for Contactors 4/20 Tripping Curves for TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/17
Surge Suppressors for Contactor Coils 4/14, 4/15 Tripping Curves for T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay 6/17
Switching:
- Capacitor Switching:
see “Contactors for 3-phase Capacitor Switching” 2/20…2/23 U
- D.C. Circuit Switching - Contactors 2/46…2/48
- D.C. Circuit Switching - Mini Contactors - UL: see “Specifications in Canada and the USA” 7/2
Compact Reversing Contactors 6/11 Utilization Categories and Electrical Durability 2/55…2/60
- Selection of Contactors for Lighting Circuits 2/44
- Selection of Mini Contactors
and Compact Reversing Contactors for Lighting Circuits 6/12
- Transformer Switching (LV/LV 3-phase Transformer) 2/49 V
Varistor:
- see “CDL5-01 and CCL5-01 Auxiliary Devices”. 4/29
T - see “Surge Suppressor Blocks” for Contactors Coils. 4/14, 4/15
- see “Surge Suppressor Blocks” for Mini Contactors. 6/7
Tables for Co-ordination with the Short-Circuit Protection Devices 7/17...7/21 Voltage for Coil Supply:
Table for Selection of A and EH 3-pole Contactors (A.C. Operated) - Order Code Supplement: Contactors - N and KC Contactor Relays 0/1
and Thermal O/L Relays 2/2, 2/3 - Order Code Supplement: Mechanical Latching Units 4/12
Table for Selection of A and EK 4-pole Contactors (A.C. Operated) 2/4, 2/5 - Order Code Supplement: Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/1
Table for Selection of TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/2, 5/3 - Order Code Supplement: TKC Contactor Relays 3/7
Table of Motor Nominal Powers and Currents 0/0
Technical data:
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/5
- A Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/32-34-36 W
- BC and AE Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/38-40-42
- EH and EK Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/33-35-37 Weight of the Equipment and Accessories: see pages “Ordering Details” -
- EH and EK Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/39-41-43 Withstand of Devices (Climatic Conditions) 7/13
- TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24
- N and KC Contactor Relays 3/8, 3/9
- TKC Contactor Relays 3/7
- B 6, BC 6 and B 6S Mini Contactors 6/9
- B 7, BC 7 and B 7S Mini Contactors 6/10
- K 6 and KC 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/9

10
Low Voltage Products 10/7
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Main Summary Section

Low Voltage Products


ABB Agencies and Representatives throughout the World
Europe Europe (cont.)
AUSTRIA ABB Komponenten Ges.m.b.H. Phone : (43) 1601090 NORWAY ABB Control AS Phone : (47) 31297000
Wiernerbergstrasse 11B Fax : (43) 1601098910 Industriveien Fax : (47) 31286657
Business Park Vienna NO - 3430 SPIKKESTAD
AT - 1810 WIEN POLAND ABB Industrial Components Ltd Phone : (48) 22118266
BELGIUM ABB S.A. NV Phone : (32) 27186311 ul. Marywilska 22 Fax : (48) 22117582
Hoge Wei, 27 Fax : (32) 27186666 PL - 03 228 VARSOVIE
BE - 1930 ZAVENTEM PORTUGAL ABB Componentes Eléctricos S.A. Phone : (351) 14169200
BULGARIA ABB Ltd Phone : (359) 29800450 Estrada do Casal de Canas Fax : (351) 14169250
5, Triaditsa street Fax : (359) 29800846 P.O. Box 7573 Alfragide
BG - 1040 SOFIA PT - 2700 AMADORA
CROATIA ABB Phone : (385) 12335355 ROMANIA ABB Ltd Phone : (40) 13300495
Trg. J.F. Kennedya 7 Fax : (385) 1228836 Street I. Cimpineanu 16 Fax : (40) 13300630
HR - 41000 ZAGREB P.O. Box 1-871 - 5th Floor
RO - 70100 BUCHAREST
CZECH REPUBLIC ABB EJF, a.s. Phone : (42) 543216742
Hybesova 30 Fax : (42) 5331489 RUSSIA ABB Industrial & Building Systems Phone : (7) 0951209004
CZ - 60200 BRNO 23, Profsoyuznaya street Fax : (7) 0951204490
RU - 117 859 MOSCOW
DENMARK ABB Komponents A/S Phone : (45) 43999111
Helgeshoj Allé 8-10 Fax : (45) 43991950 SLOVAKIA ABB Komponenty s.r.o. Phone : (421) 956253206
P.O. Box 230 Magnezitarska 11 Fax : (421) 956253209
DK - 2630 TAASTRUP SK - 04305 KOSICE
ESTONIA ABB Eesti Phone : (372) 6711800 SPAIN ABB Electrocomponentes S.A. Phone : (34) 34842121
Pärnu mnt 148 Fax : (372) 6711814 Torrent de l'Olla, 220 Fax : (34) 34842190
EE - 0013 TALLINN ES - 08012 BARCELONA
FINLAND ABB Control Oy Phone : (358) 10224000 SWEDEN ABB Control AB Phone : (46) 21320700
Strömberg Park Fax : (358) 102245708 Saltängsvägen, 26 Fax : (46) 21126001
Muottitie 2A SE - 721 61 VASTERAS
P.O. Box 622 SWITZERLAND ABB CMC Components Phone : (41) 14356666
FI - 65101 VAASA Badenerstrasse 790 Fax : (41) 14356699
FRANCE ABB Diffusion Phone : (33) 472221992 CH - 8048 ZURICH
10, rue Ampère - Z.I., B.P. 114 Fax : (33) 478902758 TURKEY ABB Elektrik Sanayi A.S. Phone : (90) 2163652900
FR - 69685 CHASSIEU Cedex Yukari Dudullu Imes Fax : (90) 2163652940
GERMANY ABB SST GmbH Phone : (49) 62217770 P.O. Box 3
Eppelheimerstrasse 82 Fax : (49) 6221777111 TR - 81260 UMRANIYE-ISTANBUL
DE - 69123 HEIDELBERG 1 UNITED KINGDOM ABB Control Ltd Phone : (44) 1203368500
GREECE ABB Trade S.A. Phone : (30) 12891900 Grovelands House Fax : (44) 1203364499
13th KM National Road Fax : (30) 12891999 Longford Road - Exhall
Athens-Lamia GB - CV7 9ND COVENTRY
GR - 144 52 METAMORPHOSSI ATTICA YUGOSLAVIA ABB Phone : (381) 11344341
HUNGARY ABB Ltd Phone : (36) 12701555 Emilijana Josimovica 4 Fax : (381) 11341623
Vaci ut 152-156 Fax : (36) 12698723 YU - 11000 BELGRAD
P.O. Box 95
HU - 1138 BUDAPEST
ICELAND Johan Rönning HF Phone : (354) 5684000
Sundaborg 15 Fax : (354) 5688221
IS - 104 REYKJAVIK
IRELAND ABB Components Phone : (353) 14057300
Belgard Road Fax : (353) 14057315
IE - TALLAGHT - DUBLIN 24
ITALIA ABB Elettrocondutture S.p.A. Phone : (39) 290341
Viale dell'industria, 18 Fax : (39) 290347609
IT - 20010 VITTUONE (MI)
LATVIA ABB Latvia SIA Phone : (371) 2249087
15 Krustpils street Fax : (371) 9341877
LV - 1073 RIGA
LITHUANIA ABB UAB Phone : (37) 02738300
Saltoniskiu, 14 Fax : (37) 02738394
LT - 2034 VILNIUS
LUXEMBOURG LU ABB Phone : (352) 493116
Zone Industrielle Grasbusch Fax : (352) 492859
LU - 3370 LEUDELANGE
NETHERLANDS ABB Componenten BV Phone : (31) 102582250
Lylantse Baan 9 Fax : (31) 104586559
P.O. Box 532
NL - 2908 LG CAPELLE A/D IJSSEL

Further information about non listed countries, product availability, technical back-up and service, please consult-us.
Phone and fax numbers do not include the code (0) for local calls in the country - The code between ( ) is the international one.

10/8 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary Section
Main Summary Section

Low Voltage Products


ABB Agencies and Representatives throughout the World
Africa North America
ALGERIA ABB S.A. Phone : (213) 2607662 U.S.A. ABB Control Inc. Phone : 1 (940) 3977000
Cité des PTT - 14, rue A Fax : (213) 2691106 1206 Hatton road Fax : 1 (940) 3977001
P.O. Box 156 P.O. Box 156
DZ - 16035 HYDRA ALGER US - WICHITA FALLS TX 76302
EGYPT ABB ARAB SAE Phone : (20) 22968001 CANADA ABB Control Phone : (514) 3325350
7, Dr. Mohamed Kamel Hussein Fax : (20) 22966776 10,300 bd Henri-Bourassa Ouest Fax : (514) 8326522
ABB Bldg - El Nozha - El Gedieda ST LAURENT
EG - Heliopolis / CAIRO CA - QUEBEC H4S 1N6
GHANA ABB Ltd Phone : (233) 21231952
1 Dr. Insert Road Fax : (233) 21231954
North Ridge
P.O. Box 3758
GH - ACCRA
IVORY COST ABB S.A. Phone : (225) 354265
Rue du Canal - Zone 4 Fax : (225) 350414
P.O. Box 01 BP 1048
CI - ABIDJAN 01
South America
ABB Sub-Sahara Africa Ltd Phone : (225) 329975/76
Immeuble Sidam Fax : (225) 329978 ARGENTINA ABB S.A. Phone : (54) 12085471
34, avenue Houdaille José I. Rucci 1051 Fax : (54) 12085470
01 BP V 215 1822 Valentin Alsina
CI - ABIDJAN 01 AR - BUENOS AIRES
KENYA ABB Ltd Phone : (254) 2861570/1 TUBIO TUCUMAN S.A. Phone : (54) 17776116
Baba Dogo road, Ruaraka Fax : (254) 2861574 Avenida Cordoba, 6063/6065 Fax : (54) 17725907
P.O. Box 39120 CP 1427
KE - NAIROBI AR - BUENOS AIRES
MOROCCO ABB S.A. Phone : (212) 2310899 BOLIVIA ABB Ltda Phone : (591) 2332710
119, boulevard Emile Zola Fax : (212) 2311121 Av. 20 de Octubre, 2315 Fax : (591) 2315623
9ème étage Edificio Mechita, Piso 1
MA - 20300 CASABLANCA BO - LA PAZ
NIGERIA ABB Ltd Phone : (234) 14528661 BRAZIL ABB Ltda Phone : (55) 117049111
Industrial avenue, Plot C, Block 1 Fax : (234) 14528660 Avenida Dos Autonomistas, 1496 Fax : (55) 117049993
P.O. Box 21055 CP 975
NG - (LAGOS) IKEJA BR - 06020-902 OSASCO - SP
SENEGAL ABB Herlicq Phone : (221) 8322017 CHILE ABB S.A. Phone : (56) 25550051
Co Herlicq & Frères Fax : (221) 8322057 Vicuna Mackenna 1602 Fax : (56) 25569345
Bd du Centenaire, Km 3,5 P.O. Box 581-3
P.O. Box 3158 CL - SANTIAGO
SN - DAKAR
COLOMBIA ABB Ltda Phone : (57) 14156566
SOUTH AFRICA ABB Installation Materials Phone : (27) 116533526 Av. El Eldorado Fax : (57) 14155153
86, Tsessebe Crescent, Unit 4 Fax : (27) 116533506 Carrera 100 n° 45-A-11
Sage Corporate Park P.O. Box 6195 / 3984
Old Pretoria Road, Midrand CO - BOGOTA D.E
ZA - JOHANNESBURG
ECUADOR ABB S.A. Phone : (593) 2500645
TANZANIA ABB Ltd Phone : (255) 51112432 Sucur. n° 8 Fax : (593) 2500650
Nkrumah/Gerezani street Fax : (255) 51116738 Calle Ulloa 1194 y Mariana de Jesus
D.T. Dodie Building P.O. Box 17-08-8431
P.O. Box 4882 EC - QUITO
TZ - DAR ES SALAAM
MEXICO ABB Sistemas, SA de CV Phone : (52) 53281618
ABB Tanelec Ltd Phone : (255) 578027 P.O. Box M - 2434 Fax : (52) 53281690
Themi Industrial Area Fax : (255) 578212 Henry Ford n° 4 Esq. Via Gustavo Baz
P.O. Box 7156 MX - 06000 MEXICO, D.F.
TZ - ARUSHA
PERU ABB S.A. Phone : (51) 15610404
TUNISIA Tunisian Telecom Electric Phone : (216) 1781104 Avenida Argentina, 3120 Fax : (51) 15613040
Rue n° 8600, Z.I. 2035 CHARGUIA Fax : (216) 1780464 P.O. Box 2493
P.O. Box 300 PE - LIMA 100
TN - 1002 TUNIS BELVEDERE
URUGUAY ABB Industria UY Phone : (598) 2777300
ABB Electric S.A Phone : (216) 1860366 Av. Luis P. Ponce, 1485 Fax : (598) 2777466
Les Berges du Lac Fax : (216) 1860255 UY - MONTEVIDEO
Immeuble BADR 2
P.O. Box 381 VENEZUELA ABB S.A. Phone : (58) 22382411/22
TN - 1080 TUNIS Cedex Los Ruices, Edificio ABB Fax : (58) 22395834
Avda. Diego Cisneros
ZIMBABWE ABB (PVT) Ltd Phone : (263) 4773594 P.O. Box 6649 - Carmelitas
ABB House Fax : (263) 4753537 VE - CARACAS 1070 A
88 Rezende street
P.O. Box 2107
ZW - HARARE

Further information about non listed countries, product availability, technical back-up and service, please consult-us.
10
Phone and fax numbers do not include the code (0) for local calls in the country - The code between ( ) is the international one.

Low Voltage Products 10/9


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary Section
Main Summary Section

Low Voltage Products


ABB Agencies and Representatives throughout the World
Asia Oceania
HONG KONG ABB Industrial & Building System Ltd Phone : (852) 29293838 AUSTRALIA ABB Transmission & Distribution Ltd Phone : (61) 296028222
3 Dai Hei street Fax : (852) 29293501 376/386 Newbridge Road Fax : (61) 296022454
TAI PO Industrial Estate AU - LIVERPOOL NSW 2170
HK - HONG KONG
NEW ZEALAND ABB Switchgear Division Phone : (64) 98371234
INDIA ABB Ltd Phone : (91) 808399349 133 Central Park Drive Fax : (64) 98372950
ILA Division Fax : (91) 808399349 Edmonton
N° A18A2, 3 Road Stage NZ - AUCKLAND
Peenya Industrial Estate
IN - BANGALORE 560 052
INDONESIA PT Abdibangun Buana Phone : (62) 213149115
Jln. Cikini Raya 69, Building B Fax : (62) 213153964
Tromol Pos. 3781
ID - JAKARTA 10002
ISRAEL S. Kahane Agencies Ltd Phone : (972) 9851299
1 Ha'Omanuyot street Fax : (972) 9851240
P.O. Box 62.62
South Industrial Zone
IL - NETANYA 42160
JORDAN Billeh Electrical Materials Co. Phone : (962) 6656987
Jabal Al Hussein - Salah Aldeen Street Fax : (962) 6649216
P.O. Box 4343
JO - AMMAN
KOREA ABB Ltd Phone : (82) 25283131
157-33, Samsung-Dong Fax : (82) 25283100
Oksan Building 5-9 floor
Kangnam-Ku
KR - 135-090 SEOUL
KUWAIT ABB Electrical Co. Phone : (965) 2428626
Commercial Area N° 1, Gulf road Fax : (965) 2403139
Khalid Saleh Al-Ghunaim Building
P.O. Box 4275
KW - 13043 SAFAT
LEBANON AL-BONIAN Group Phone : (961) 1866694
Verdun - Ain El Tineh Fax : (961) 1869564
P.O. Box 13 5470
LB - BEYROUTH
HARB Electric Phone : (961) 821625
Airport road - Fakhry Bldg Fax : (961) 821626
P.O. Box 15-5101
LB - BEIRUT
MALAYSIA ABB Components Sdn Bhd Phone : (60) 39733188
N° 18, Persiaran 118C Fax : (60) 39738188
Desa Tun Razak
CHERAS
MY - 56000 KUALA LUMPUR
PAKISTAN Ameejee Valleejee & Sons Phone : (92) 212625492
Campbell street Fax : (92) 212627817
P.O. Box 51
PK - 74200 KARACHI
PHILIPPINES ABB Industry Inc. Phone : (63) 28244581
KM 20, South Superhighway Fax : (63) 28246616
Paranaque, Metro Manila
P.O. Box 1897
PH - METRO MANILLES
SAUDI ARABIA ABB Electrical Industries Co. Ltd Phone : (966) 14980088
P.O. Box 8796 Fax : (966) 14985487
SA - RIYADH 11492
SINGAPORE ABB Industry Pte Ltd Phone : (65) 7765711
2 Ayer Rajah Crescent Fax : (65) 7780222
SG - SINGAPOUR 139 935
TAIWAN ABB Ltd Phone : (886) 25799322
126, Nanking East Road Fax : (886) 25775826
6F World Building, Section 4
P.O. Box 81-54
TW - TAIPEI
THAILAND ABB Ltd Phone : (66) 23240505
322 Moo, 4 Bangpoo Industrial Estate Fax : (66) 23240502
Sukuhmvit Road
TH - SAMUTPRAKARN 10280
U.A.E. ABB Ltd Phone : (971) 4347788
Office Building 250 B Fax : (971) 4347557
P.O. Box 11070
DUBAI

Further information about non listed countries, product availability, technical back-up and service, please consult-us.
Phone and fax numbers do not include the code (0) for local calls in the country - The code between ( ) is the international one.

10/ 10 Low Voltage Products


1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary Section

Potrebbero piacerti anche